Original instructions

Electric truck

RX60 35-50
For use in areas at risk of explosion (Cat. 2GD/3GD) or
for transporting explosive agents

6331 6332 6333 6334 6335 6336

6337

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Preface

Address of manufacturer and 

contact details
STILL GmbH
Berzeliusstraße 10
22113 Hamburg, Germany
Telephone: +49 (0) 40 7339-0
Fax: +49 (0) 40 7339-1622
Email: info@still.de
Website: www.still.de

Rules for the operating com-

pany of industrial trucks
In addition to these operating instructions, a
code of practice containing additional informa-
tion for the operating companies of industrial
trucks is also available.
This guide provides information for handling
industrial trucks:
● Information on how to select suitable indus-

trial trucks for a particular area of applica-

tion
● Prerequisites for the safe operation of in-

dustrial trucks
● Information on the use of industrial trucks

● Information on transport, initial commission-

ing and storage of industrial trucks

Internet address and QR code 

The information can be accessed at any time
by pasting the address https://m.still.de/vdma
in a web browser or by scanning the QR code.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 I
 Preface

Spare parts list 

You can request to download the spare parts

list by copying and pasting the address https://
sparepartlist.still.eu into a web browser or by
scanning the QR code shown to the side.
On the web page, enter the following pass-
word: Spareparts24!
On the next screen, enter your email address
and truck serial number to receive an email
with the link and download the spare parts list.

2511

II 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Table of contents

1 Foreword
Your truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Description of the truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Conformity marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Explosion protection notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Declaration that reflects the content of the declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Labelling points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Marking of trucks in accordance with "DGUV Rule 113-006" in Germany . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
StVZO (Road Traffic Licensing Regulations) information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Nameplate of the pressure-tight housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Nameplate of the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Diagnostic interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Using the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Basic principles for use in potentially explosive areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Basic principles for use in areas where a risk is posed by explosive materials. . . . . . . . 23
Transporting explosive materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Proper use during towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Improper use: use in potentially explosive areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Improper use: use in areas where a risk is posed by explosive materials. . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Place of use: use in potentially explosive areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Place of use: use in areas at risk from explosive substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Parking in temperatures below -10 °C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using working platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Information about the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Scope of the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Issue date and topicality of the operating instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Copyright and trademark rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Explanation of signal terms used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
List of abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Definition of directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Schematic views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Environmental considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Disposal of components and batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 III

 Table of contents

2 Safety
Definition of responsible persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Operating company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Competent person for explosion protection checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Basic principles for safe operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Insurance cover on company premises. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Modifying and retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Changes to the overhead guard and roof loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Warning regarding non-original parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Damage, defects and misuse of safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Medical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Exercise caution when handling gas springs and accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Length of the fork arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Residual risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Residual dangers, residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Special risks associated with using the truck and attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Overview of hazards and countermeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Danger to employees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Safety tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Carrying out regular inspections on the truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Explosion-protection checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Testing the electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Insulation testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Safety regulations for handling consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Permissible consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Hydraulic fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Battery acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Disposal of consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

3 Overviews
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Driver's compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

IV 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Table of contents

Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Operating devices and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Display-operating unit "STILL Easy Control" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Explosion-protection warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Battery isolating switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Emergency off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Multi-lever operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Double mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Triple mini-lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Quadruple mini-lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fingertip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Joystick 4Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Travel direction selector and indicator module (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Visual inspections and function checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Climbing into and out of the truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Climbing in and out of trucks when the driver's compartment is raised (variant) . . . . . . 107
Safety information regarding electrostatic charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adjusting the driver's seat and armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adjusting the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Switching on the battery isolating switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Adjusting the swivelling display-operating unit (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Function checking of the assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Unlock the emergency off switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Checking the emergency off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Operating the signal horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Operating the pneumatic signal horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Using the driver's cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Checking the brake oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Checking the brake system for correct function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Warming up the hydraulic oil at cold ambient temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Checking the steering system for correct function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Adjusting the MSG 65/MSG 75 driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Adjusting the MSG 95 driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Adjusting the armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 V
 Table of contents

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Switching on using the key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Switching on via push button (variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Display-operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Operating the display-operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Alternative position of the display-operating unit (variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Access authorisation with PIN code (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Access authorisation for the fleet manager (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Pre-Shift Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Description of the Pre-Shift Check (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
All questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Defining the question sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Displaying the history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Defining the shift start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Resetting the truck restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Driver profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Driver profiles (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Selecting driver profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Creating driver profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Renaming driver profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Deleting driver profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Retrofitting lighting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Meaning of the symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Working spotlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Working spotlight for reverse travel (variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Turn indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Hazard warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
StVZO equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Rotating beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
STILL SafetyLight® and STILL SafetyLight 4Plus® (variants) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Warning zone light and warning zone light plus (variants) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Efficiency and drive modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Blue-Q (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Switching Blue-Q on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Configuring Blue-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
STILL Classic and sprint mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

VI 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Table of contents

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Safety regulations when driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Roadways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Selecting drive programmes 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Selecting drive programme A or B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Configuring drive programmes A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Selecting the drive direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Actuating the drive direction switch with the multiple-lever version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Actuating the drive direction switch with the mini-lever version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Actuating the drive direction switch with the Fingertip version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Actuating the vertical rocker button for the "drive direction" with the
Joystick 4Plus version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Actuating the drive direction selection lever with the travel direction selector and
indicator module version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Starting drive mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Starting drive mode, dual pedal version (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Operating the service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Actuating the electric parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Malfunctions in the electric parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Reducing speed when turning (Curve Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Speed reduction when the cab door is open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Speed restriction (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Cruise control (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Parking the truck securely and switching it off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Wheel chock (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Lifting system variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Lift mast versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Operating devices for the lifting system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Controlling the lifting system using multi-lever operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Controlling the lifting system using a double mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Controlling the lifting system using a triple mini-lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Controlling the lifting system using a quadruple mini-lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Controlling the lifting system using the Fingertip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Controlling the lifting system using the Joystick 4Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Dynamics of the hydraulic movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Selecting load programs 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Fork wear protection (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Changing the fork arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fork extension (variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 VII

 Table of contents

Operation with reversible fork arms (variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Malfunctions during lifting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Hydraulic blocking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Handling loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Safety regulations for handling loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Capacity rating plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Picking up loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Danger area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Transporting pallets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Transporting suspended loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Transporting swinging loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Picking up a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Determining visibility conditions when driving with a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Transporting loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Shake function (variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Setting down a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Driving on ascending and descending gradients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Driving onto lifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Driving on loading bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Lift height-dependent assistance systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Optical lift height measuring system (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Lift height display (variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Easy Target (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Configuring Easy Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Operating Easy Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Intermediate lift cut-out (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Lift transition damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Lift mast end-stop damping (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
End lift cut-out (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Speed reduction when the fork carriage is raised (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Electrical fork wear protection (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Tilt angle-dependent assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Mast tilt angle display (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Tilt end stop damping (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Automatic mast vertical positioning (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Function checking of the automatic mast vertical positioning function (variant) . . . . . . . 311
Calibrating the automatic mast vertical positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Load-dependant assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Overload detection (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Dynamic Load Control 1 (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Dynamic Load Control 2 (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

VIII 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Table of contents

Load measurement (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Calibrating the load measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Precision load measurement (variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Tare function (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Total load (variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Zeroing the assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Zeroing process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Depressurising the hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Need to depressurise the hydraulic system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Wizard for depressurising the hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Depressurising the hydraulic system using multi-lever operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Depressurising the hydraulic system using multi-lever operation and the 5th and
6th function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Depressurising the hydraulic system using a double mini-lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Depressurising the hydraulic system using the double mini-lever and the 5th function . 339
Depressurising the hydraulic system using a triple mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Depressurising the hydraulic system using the triple mini-lever and the 5th function . . . 341
Depressurising the hydraulic system using a quadruple mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Depressurising the hydraulic system using the quadruple mini-lever and the
5th function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Depressurising the hydraulic system using the Fingertip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Depressurising the hydraulic system using the Fingertip and the 5th function . . . . . . . . 345
Depressurising the hydraulic system using the Joystick 4Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Depressurising the hydraulic system using the Joystick 4Plus and the 5th function. . . . 347
Special feature for clamping attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Exiting the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Fitting attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
General instructions for controlling attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Attachment example for the connection of the auxiliary hydraulics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Adjusting the hydraulic speed for attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Clamp locking mechanism (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Controlling attachments using multi-lever operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Controlling attachments using multi-lever operation and the 5th and 6th function . . . . . 363
Controlling attachments using a double mini-lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Controlling attachments using the double mini-lever and the 5th function . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Controlling attachments using a triple mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Controlling attachments using the triple mini-lever and the 5th function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Controlling attachments using a quadruple mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Controlling attachments using the quadruple mini-lever and the 5th function . . . . . . . . . 375
Controlling attachments using the Fingertip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Controlling attachments using the Fingertip and the 5th function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 IX
 Table of contents

Controlling attachments using the Joystick 4Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Controlling attachments using the Joystick 4Plus and the 5th function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Picking up a load using attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Auxiliary equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
General note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
FleetManager (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Shock recognition (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Driver restraint systems (variants). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Actuating the windscreen wipers and windscreen washers (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Actuating the windscreen washer (variant) in the category-2 version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Filling the washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Operating the rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Ceiling sensor (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Fire extinguisher (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Run-on time for additional devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
SVI STILL Vehicle Interface (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Opening and closing the cab door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Opening and closing the 180° cab door (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Opening and closing the side window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Turning the interior lighting on or off (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Radio (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Heating system (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Clipboard (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Push-up roof window (variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Sun visor and sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Trailer operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Safety information for trailer operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Towed load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Coupling pin in the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Automatic tow coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Towing trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Cold store application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Behaviour when the explosion-protection warning lights are illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Messages about operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Messages about the truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Procedure in emergencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Emergency shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Actuating the reset button after automatic emergency shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

X 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Table of contents

Procedure if truck tips over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Emergency hammer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Emergency driving via the drive direction switch/drive direction selection lever . . . . . . . 455
Emergency lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Emergency actuation of the electric parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Connecting and disconnecting the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Safety instructions for connecting and disconnecting the battery male connectors . . . . 464
Connecting the battery male connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Disconnecting the battery male connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Handling the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Safety regulations for handling the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Maintaining the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Checking the battery condition, acid level and acid density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Checking the battery charging state and calibrating the battery charge indicator . . . . . . 477
Charging the lead-acid battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Equalising charging to preserve the battery capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Battery maintenance indicator for lead-acid batteries (variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Handling the gel battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Replacing and transporting the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
General information on replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Changing to a different battery type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Wire cross-section of the battery cable on the "High Performance" variant . . . . . . . . . . 494
Opening and closing the battery door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Replacing the battery using a truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Replacing the battery using a change frame (variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Transporting the lead-acid battery by crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Cleaning the truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Note on flame proof enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Cleaning the truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Cleaning the electrical system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Cleaning load chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Cleaning the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
After cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Transporting the truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Crane loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Safety information for shutting down and restarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Decommissioning and storing the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Using after storage or decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 XI
 Table of contents

5 Maintenance
Safety regulations for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Working on the hydraulic equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Working on the electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Lifting and jacking up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Working at the front of the truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
General maintenance information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Personnel qualifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Maintenance of the explosion protection components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Information for carrying out maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Setting up and adjusting the due date counter for maintenance and safety checks . . . . 533
Maintenance by the operating company: Explosion-protection components - 150 hours/
monthly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Maintenance by the authorised service centre: Explosion-protection components - 1000
hours/yearly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Maintenance - 1000 hours/yearly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Maintenance - 3000 hours/every two years. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Ordering spare parts and wearing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Quality and quantity of the required operating materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Lubrication plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Maintenance data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Preserving operational readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Changing the light bulbs and warning units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Lubricating the joints and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Checking the battery interlock and the battery door interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Maintaining the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Checking the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Checking the antistatic paint layer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Servicing the heating system or air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Servicing wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Servicing the steering axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Adjusting the warning zone light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Replacing the fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Checking the hydraulic system for leak tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Checking the hydraulic oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

XII 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Table of contents

Lubricating the lift mast and roller track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

Preserving operational readiness for cold store application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
1000-hour maintenance/annual maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Other work that must be carried out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Checking the lift cylinders and connections for leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Checking the fork arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Checking the reversible fork arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Checking the double pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Checking the battery changeover frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

6 Technical data
Ergonomic dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
VDI datasheet for RX60-35 (Plus)/600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
VDI datasheet for RX60-40 (Plus) and RX60-40 (Plus)/600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
VDI datasheet for RX60-45 (Plus) and RX60-45 (Plus)/600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
VDI datasheet for RX60-50 (Plus) Li-Ion and RX60-50 (Plus)/600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Eco-design requirements for electric motors and variable speed drives . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Battery specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Information on the auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 XIII

 1

Foreword
1 Foreword
Your truck

Your truck
Description of the truck
General
The STILL RX60 35-50 is an electrically driv-
en counterbalanced truck with a rear swing
axle. The truck has a load capacity of up to
5.0 tonnes and can also have a load centre of
gravity of 600 mm. In this case, the truck can
reach driving speeds of up to 20 km/h.
The truck is suitable for indoor and outdoor
use and, depending on the equipment, for the
following applications:
● Use in potentially explosive areas

or
● Transport of explosive agents in areas at
risk from explosive agents
The driver's compartment has an ergonomic
design with the steering column and driver's
seat offset to one side.
The "STILL Easy Control" display-operating
unit manages all functions that are not called
up by the operating devices for drive functions
and hydraulic functions. The driving condition
information and all messages are issued via
a large colour display. The display-operating
unit uses the current battery charge state and
the selected drive programme to calculate
the remaining available time until the battery
has to be recharged and displays this infor-
mation. It also supports all FleetManager 4.x
functions.

Assistance systems
The STILL RX60 35-50 can be equipped with
assistance systems that make it easier to work
with loads.
Lift height-dependent assistance systems
● Lift height display

● Easy Target

● Intermediate lift cut-out

● Lift transition damping

● Lift mast end-stop damping

● End lift cut-out

2 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Your truck

● Speed reduction when the fork carriage is

raised
● Electrical fork wear protection
Tilt angle-dependent assistance systems
● Mast tilt angle display
● Automatic mast vertical positioning

Load-dependant assistance systems

● Overload detection
● Dynamic Load Control 1 or Dynamic Load

Control 2
● Lift mast tilt angle display

● Automatic mast vertical positioning

● Fork wear protection

● Load measurement, precise load measure-

ment, total load and tare function

Brake system
The brake system of the truck comprises three
different brakes:
● Service brake

● Regenerative brake

● Electric parking brake

The service brake is based on a wear-free,

oil-immersed multi-disc brake. This multi-disc
brake is used as the service brake for heavy
braking or emergency braking with the brake
pedal. In the normal working mode, the regen-
erative brake of the electric traction motors
takes effect. The regenerative brake converts
the acceleration energy of the truck into elec-
trical energy. This causes the truck to decel-
erate as soon as the accelerator pedal is re-
leased. If the foot is completely removed from
the accelerator pedal, the truck brakes until it
comes to a standstill. A parking brake ensures
that the truck remains securely in place when
parked.

Hydraulic system
The steering system, the lift cylinders and the
tilt cylinders in the lift mast are supplied with
power via a hydraulic pump operated by an
electric motor.
The proportional valve technology (variant)
provides highly sensitive movements and en-
sures safe handling of the load. The hydraulic

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 3
1 Foreword
Your truck

functions can be parameterised individually by

the authorised service centre.
Up to three hydraulic circuits can be used to
activate attachments (variant). Depending on
the equipment, a hydraulic accumulator is also
available in the lifting circuit for the purpose
of damping pressure peaks in the hydraulic
system.

Drive
The STILL RX60 35-50 is driven via both
front wheels by maintenance-free three-phase
drives in the front axle with 80 volt technology.
Power is supplied by a lead-acid battery that
can be replaced from the side.
The driver can help to influence the energy
consumption and performance of the truck us-
ing the "Blue-Q" efficiency mode. The required
setting for the current application can be se-
lected via the display-operating unit.
The "High Performance" variant performs at a
higher level and has a modified drive axle and
stronger pump motor.

Steering
The kickback-free, hydraulic rear-wheel steer-
ing with "Curve Speed Control" (CSC) ensures
driving stability when cornering, allowing the
truck to achieve a small turning circle and ne-
gotiate narrow aisle widths.

Operation
The multi-lever, the Fingertip mini-lever and
the Joystick 4Plus are available as operating
devices for the hydraulic functions. These op-
erating devices enable precise operation and
smooth control of the lifting speed thanks
to directly controlled valves and proportional
valve technology.
The acceleration behaviour and braking be-
haviour can be selected individually using dif-
ferent drive programmes.
The truck can be driven via either single-pedal
or dual-pedal operation. The truck is acceler-
ated and braked (regenerative brake) via the
accelerator pedal or via dual-pedal operation:

4 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Your truck

One pedal is for the "forwards" drive direction

and one pedal is for the "backwards" drive
direction. Acceleration and braking behaviour
can be individually selected from three differ-
ent driving programmes.
The "STILL Easy Control" display-operating
unit simplifies daily use of the truck by pro-
viding personally configurable favourites. The
display-operating unit also monitors the func-
tions of the truck.

General
The truck described in these operating instruc-
tions corresponds to the applicable standards
and safety regulations.
If the truck is to be operated on public roads,
the truck must conform to the national regula-
tions for the country in which it is being used.
The vehicle permit must be obtained from the
relevant authorities.
The truck has been fitted with state-of-the-art
technology. Following these operating instruc-
tions will allow the truck to be handled safely.
By complying with the specifications in these
operating instructions, the functionality and the
approved features of the truck will be retained.
Familiarising yourself with the technology, un-
derstanding it and using it safely:
These operating instructions provide the infor-
mation required to do this. The operating in-
structions help to prevent accidents and to
preserve operational readiness, even beyond
the warranty period.
Therefore:
– Before commissioning the truck, read the
operating instructions and follow the instruc-
tions.
– Always follow all of the safety information
contained in the operating instructions and
on the truck.
This operating material could cause hazards if
the truck is not operated in accordance with
the information provided in these operating in-
structions.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 5
1 Foreword
Your truck

Conformity marking 

The manufacturer uses the conformity mark-

ing to document the conformity of the industri-
al truck with the relevant directives at the time
of placing on the market:
● CE: in the European Union (EU)

● UKCA: in the United Kingdom (UK)

● EAC: in the Eurasian Economic Union

The conformity marking is applied to the

nameplate. A declaration of conformity is is-
sued for the EU and UK markets.
An unauthorised structural change or addition
to the industrial truck can compromise safety,
thus invalidating the declaration of conformity.

conformity symbols

Explosion protection notice 

The explosion protection notice indicates that

the manufacturer complies with the explosion
protection licensing regulations.

6036_001-001

6 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Your truck

Declaration that reflects the content of the declaration of conformity

Declaration

STILL GmbH
Berzeliusstraße 10
22113 Hamburg Germany

We declare that the specified machine conforms to the most recent valid version of the
directives specified below:

Industrial truck type corresponding to these operating instructions

Model corresponding to these operating instructions

− "Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC" 1)

− "Supply of Machinery Safety Regulations 2008, 2008 No. 1597" 2)

Personnel authorised to compile the technical documents:

See declaration of conformity

STILL GmbH

1) For the markets of the European Union, the EU candidate countries, the EFTA States and
Switzerland.
2) For the United Kingdom market.

The declaration of conformity document is The declaration of conformity must be careful-

supplied with the industrial truck. The declara- ly stored and made available to the responsi-
tion shown explains the conformity with the ble authorities if necessary. It must also be
provisions of the EC Machinery Directive and handed over to the new owner if the industrial
the Supply of Machinery Safety Regulation truck is sold on.
2008, 2008 No. 1597.
An unauthorised structural change or addition
to the industrial truck can compromise safety,
thus invalidating the declaration of conformity.
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 7
1 Foreword
Your truck

Accessories
● Two keys for the key switch (not for trucks
with the "Switch on via push button" variant)
● Two keys for the cab (variant)
● A hexagon socket wrench for emergency
lowering (in the compartment)
● A special screwdriver for the battery con-
nection assembly (depending on the ver-
sion)
● A battery change frame

8 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Your truck

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 9
1 Foreword
Your truck

Labelling points

12

13

15
16

15
14

11 10 15

16
B
15 AN U
S
C

14 IRP-0017-01 12 11

II
13

CAT. 2G

6301_901-001

10 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Your truck

1 Decal information: Caution / Read the oper- 8 Warning sign: Dangerous electrical voltage
ating instructions / Fasten seat belt / Apply 9 Decal information: Load measurement
parking brake when leaving the truck / Pas- 10 Warning sign: Cable cross-section
sengers are not allowed / Do not jump off if 11 Decal information: Explosion protection no-
the truck is tipping over / Lean in the oppo- tice and equipment category
site direction to which the truck is tilting 12 Decal information: ELECTRICALLY CON-
2 Decal information: Caution / Read the oper- DUCTIVE (antistatic paint)
ating instructions 13 Decal information: ANTISTATIC CHECKED
3 Warning sign: Risk of short circuit due to (on the backrest of the driver's seat)
shearing 14 Decal information: Nameplate for conversion
4 Warning sign: Electrical system parts must to explosion-protected battery
not be cleaned with water 15 Decal information: Potential equalisation
5 Warning sign: Danger due to shearing point (on all discharge points such as tyres,
6 Decal information: Lifting gear fixing point antistatic belts and corona electrodes)
7 Decal information: Tyre filling pressure 16 Decal information: Diagnostic interface

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 11
1 Foreword
Your truck

20
17 19 20
28
27 25
36
38
39
37
18
19 34
22
24
21 18
23
22
21
35
24
38
31
26
23 17 29
30
35 32 33 26
25 26
27

29
39

NE PAS OUVRIR EN ZONE DANGEREUSE

DON'T OPEN IN HAZARDOUS AREA

34 38 30 28

S.r.l. 0044
(I) 20812 LIMBIATE (MB) ‒ Via Marconi, 31
CBH ‒ 5 II 573714 3 s/n Year 20

Ex d [ ia [ IIC T 6 Gb
II 2 (1) GD
Ex tb [ [ IIIC T °C Db IP66
CEC 14 ATEX 043X T.amb. = ‒20°C to + 60°C
35 CABLE ENTRIES : SEE INSTRUCTIONS
USE SCREWS QUALITY 8.8 OR BETTER T cable / °C
DO NOT OPEN WHEN ENERGIZED
DO NOT OPEN WHEN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE MAY BE PRESENT

33 32
31 36
-Prüfung
wurde durchgeführt
letzte Prüfung

Nächste Prüfung

12 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Your truck

17 Decal information: Hydraulic oil tank 30 Decal information: StVZO (German Road
18 Warning sign: Do not stand underneath the Traffic Licensing Regulations) information
fork/Do not stand on the fork 31 Nameplate with CE labelling
19 Warning sign: Danger due to shearing/Dan- 32 Decal information: Battery service
ger due to high fluid pressure 33 Decal information: Regular testing
20 Decal information: Lifting gear fixing point 34 Warning sign: Ventilator
21 Decal information: Cold store application 35 Decal information: Potential equalisation
(variant) point (on all discharge points such as tyres,
22 Decal information: Observe head clearance antistatic belts and corona electrodes)
23 Decal information: Caution / Read the oper- 36 Decal information: Explosion-protection
ating instructions check
24 Decal information: Speed reduction 37 Decal information on non-conductive com-
25 Decal information: Emergency operation of ponents:
the parking brake "Non-conductive parts - risk of electrostatic
26 Decal information: Tyre filling pressure charge - only clean using a damp cloth"
27 Decal information: Load capacity: Attach- 38 Decal information: Identification of the flame
ment proof enclosure (depending on the truck cat-
28 Decal information: Load capacity: Basic ta- egory)
ble 39 Warning sign: Open only in a non-potentially
29 Nameplate without CE labelling explosive area

Marking of trucks in accordance 

with "DGUV Rule 113-006" in
Germany
Trucks protected against explosive material
that are used in accordance with "DGUV Rule
113-006" are marked by a yellow and red tape
that runs around the truck. This marking must
be present in its entirety.
– To repair or replace the marking, contact
the authorised service centre.

6301_901-016

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 13
1 Foreword
Your truck

Nameplate 
1 2 3
The truck can be identified from the informa-
tion on the nameplate.
4
1 Model
2 Serial number 18 5
3 Address of manufacturer 17 6
4 Year of manufacture 7
5 Empty weight in kg
16
8
6 Maximum permissible battery weight [kg] 15 9
7 Minimum permissible battery weight [kg] 14
8 Ballast weight [kg]
10
9 ATEX number or approval number
10 Miretti job number
11 Data matrix code 13 12 11 6219_901-017

12 "see operating instructions"

13 CE labelling
14 Explosion protection notice
(Only for trucks being used in potentially
explosive areas.)
15 Permissible area of application
16 Rated drive power [kw]
17 Battery voltage [V]
18 Rated capacity [kg]

Serial number 

The serial number is used to identify the truck.

The serial number is shown on the nameplate.
xx xxxx x xxxxx
Quote the serial number for all technical ques-
tions.
1
The serial number contains the following co-
ded information:
1 Production location 2
2 Model
3 Year of manufacture 3
4 Sequential number

4
7090_921-004

14 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Your truck

StVZO (Road Traffic Licensing 

Regulations) information
This label includes information on the weight
and load distribution of the truck in kg.
1 Tare weight
2 Total permissible weight
3 Permitted front axle load
4 Permitted rear axle load
5 Payload

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 15
1 Foreword
Your truck

Nameplate of the pressure-tight 

housing
The flame proof enclosures are marked with a 1 2
nameplate. The data on the plate corresponds
to the approved area of application for the 6
flame proof enclosure. The plate must be posi- S.r.l. 0044
(I) 20812 LIMBIATE (MB) ‒ Via Marconi, 31 3
tioned so that it is always easy to read. On-
5
CBH ‒ 5 II 573714 3 s/n Year 20

ly the manufacturer is allowed to re-label the II 2 (1) GD

Ex d [ ia [ IIC T 6 Gb

flame proof enclosures. Ex tb [ [ IIIC T °C Db IP66

CEC 14 ATEX 043X T.amb. = ‒20°C to + 60°C

Various notes are printed on the plate:

CABLE ENTRIES : SEE INSTRUCTIONS
T cable / °C
4
USE SCREWS QUALITY 8.8 OR BETTER
DO NOT OPEN WHEN ENERGIZED

● "Cable entries: see instructions"

DO NOT OPEN WHEN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE MAY BE PRESENT

● "Use screws quality 8.8 or better"

● "Do not open when energised"

● "Do not open when an explosive atmos-

5060_901-020_V2

phere may be present"

1 Serial number
A warning sign is located in the immediate 2 CE labelling
vicinity of the nameplate: 3 Year of manufacture
4 Approved area of use
● "Open only in a non-potentially explosive
5 Inspection number
atmosphere" 6 Manufacturer

16 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Your truck

Nameplate of the battery

The nameplate of the battery is mounted on
the battery tray. The information on this name-
plate describes the permitted area of use of
the battery.
– For use in potentially explosive areas,
only use explosion-protected batteries that
are approved for the area in which the truck
is to be used.
– For use in areas where a risk is posed by
explosive materials, only use batteries that
are approved for the area in which the truck
is to be used.
– Observe the national regulations for the
country in which the truck is being used.
– If in doubt, contact the authorised service
centre.

Battery conversion by Miretti 

1 Serial number 1 2 3 4 5
2 Explosion protection notice (for trucks for
use in potentially explosive areas), ap-
proved area of use, protection type 20812 LIMBIATE (MB) COSTRUTTORE ELEMENTI / CELLS
MANUFACTURER / CONSTRUCTEUR
ELEMENTS / HERSTELLER ZELLEN
CONSTRUCTOR ELEMENTOS

3 Model N° DI SERIE / SERIAL N°

N° DI SERIE / SERIEN N°
ACCUMULATORE TIPO / BATTERY TYPE
ACCUMULATEUR TYPE / BATTERIETYP
N° DEL FABRICANTE BATERIA TIPO

4 Cell manufacturer CAPACITÀ / CAPACITY

CAPACITÉ / KAPAZITÄT Ah / 5H
TENSIONE NOMINALE / NOMINAL VOLTAGE
TENSION NOMINAL / NENNSPANNUNG
TENSION NOMINAL
v
DISEGNO / DRAWING
PLAN / ZEICHNUNG
PROYECTO
N°
CAPACIDAD

5 Drawing number N° ELEMENTI / N° CELLS

N° ELEMENTS / N° ZELLEN
TIPO ELEMENTI / TYPE OF CELLS
TYPE ELEMENTS / ZELLENTY Ex nA
ELEMENTI AL PIOMBO / LEAD CELLS
ELEMENTS EN PLOMB / ZELLENBLEI YEAR
N° ELEMENTOS ELEMENTOS TIPO ELEMENTOS AL PLOMO

6 Year of manufacture PESO IN ORDNE DI MARCIA / RUNNING WEIGHT

POIDS EN ORDRE DE MARCHE / BETRIEBSGEWICHT Kg
CONTROLLO DI QUALITÀ / QUALITY CONTROL
CONTROLE DE QUALITE / QUALITÄTSKONTROLLE N°

7 Quality assurance
PESO EN ORDEN DE MARCHA CONTROL DE CUALIDAD

ATTENZIONE - ATTENTION - ACHTUNG - ATENCION

NON ESEGUIRE LA RICARICA IN ZONA PERICOLOSA / DO NOT CHARGE IN HAZARDOUS AREAS / NE CHARGER PAS DANS
8 Nominal voltage LA ZONE DANGEREUSE / NICHT IN GEFAHRENZONE AUFLADEN / NO CARGAR IN LUGAR PELIGROSO

9 Cell type
10 Service weight
11 Number of cells
12 11 10 9 8 7 6
12 Capacity 6219_901-013_V2

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 17
1 Foreword
Your truck

Explosion-protected battery from suppli- 

er 1 2 3 4
1 Model
2 Capacity
3 Nominal voltage
4 Number of cells
5 Serial number
6 HAWKER® ATEX test number
7 Service weight
8 Tray number
9 Approved area of use
10 Address of manufacturer
11 Explosion protection notice
11 10 9 8 7 6 5
NOTE
In this example, the company HAWKER® is
quoted as the battery supplier. If the truck
is equipped with an explosion-protected bat-
tery from another manufacturer, the author-
ised service centre will provide assistance in
decoding the nameplate of the battery.

18 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Your truck

Diagnostic interface 

The truck is equipped with a diagnostic inter-

face for monitoring and reading out the truck
BU
AN
control unit. Only the authorised service cen-
tre may operate the diagnostic interface. The

S
C
diagnostic interface is identified by the decal
information (see illustration).

IRP-0017-01

6219_901-019

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 19
1 Foreword
Using the truck

Using the truck

Basic principles for use in poten-
tially explosive areas
DANGER
Risk of explosion due to use in unap-
proved areas!
The truck may be operated only in the
potentially explosive areas for which it is
approved.
– Check the area of use by comparing it
with the nameplate information.
– If the area of use is not clear, ask the
safety officer.

DANGER
Risk of explosion from working on the
truck within potentially explosive areas!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere. Work must
not be performed on the truck in poten-
tially explosive areas.
– Work on the truck must only be car-
ried out outside potentially explosive
areas.
– Where necessary, inform the safety
officer.

Examples of this work are:

● Battery replacement and battery charging

● Maintenance and repair

● Settings and safety checks

● Conversion and retrofitting

● Transportation and loading

Areas with explosive atmospheres are divided

into zones. Equipment is divided into equip-
ment groups and equipment categories. The
equipment category determines the zones in
which the explosion-protected truck may be
used.
Potentially explosive areas are divided into
six zones. The divisions are based on the
probable frequency and duration with which
a dangerous explosive atmosphere can occur.
A distinction is also made between flammable
gases, fumes, vapours and dusts.

20 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Using the truck

Gases and vapours are assigned to temper-

ature classes on the basis of their ignition
temperature. This enables ignition caused by
overheated equipment surfaces to be preven-
ted.

Division of potentially explosive areas

for gases, vapours and fumes
Potentially explosive areas for flammable
gases, vapours and fumes are divided into
zones 0, 1 and 2.

Division of potentially explosive areas for gases, vapours and fumes

Zone Description
0 Permanent, long-term or frequent dangerous explosive atmosphere
1 Occasional dangerous explosive atmosphere
2 Infrequent dangerous explosive atmosphere

Division of potentially explosive areas

for dusts
Potentially explosive areas for flammable
dusts are divided into zones 20, 21 and 22.

Division of potentially explosive areas for dusts

Zone Description
Permanent, long-term or frequent dangerous explosive atmosphere in the
20
form of a flammable dust cloud
Occasional dangerous explosive atmosphere in the form of a flammable dust
21
cloud
Infrequent dangerous explosive atmosphere in the form of a flammable dust
22
cloud

Division of equipment
Equipment is divided into groups I, II and III.

Division of equipment
Group Description
I Mining equipment (subterranean) endangered by exposure to pit gas/dust
Equipment in all other areas with gas explosion protection and dust explo-
II
sion protection outside of mining
III Equipment in all other areas with dust explosion protection outside of mining

Subdivision of equipment in group II

The following table refers only to equipment in
group II, which includes the explosion-protec-

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 21
1 Foreword
Using the truck

ted truck. Truck requirements depend on the

zone in which it is intended to be operated.

Equipment in group II
Zone Category Description
0 II 1G Permanent, long-term or frequent dangerous explosive
20 II 1D atmosphere in the form of a flammable dust cloud
1 II 2G Occasional dangerous explosive atmosphere in the form
21 II 2D of a flammable dust cloud
2 II 3G Infrequent dangerous explosive atmosphere in the form
22 II 3D of a flammable dust cloud

Trucks for use in zone 1 are automatically ap-

proved for use in zone 2. Depending on the
zone classification, the operating and display
elements on the trucks may be enclosed in a
special housing.

Subdivision of equipment in group II

(Gas)
Equipment in group II (gas) is divided in ac-
cordance with the characteristics of the explo-
sive atmosphere for which it is intended.

Equipment in group II (gas)

Group Description
IIA Propane
IIB Ethylene
IIC Hydrogen

Subdivision of equipment in group II

(dust)
Equipment in group III (dust) is divided in ac-
cordance with the characteristics of the explo-
sive atmosphere for which it is intended.

Equipment in group II (dust)

Group Description
IIIA Flammable lint
IIIB Non-conductive dust
IIIC Conductive dust

Division of temperature classes

Gases and vapours are divided into tempera-
ture classes T1 to T6 and permissible equip-
ment surface temperatures are defined.

22 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Using the truck

Temperature classes
Temperature class Ignition temperature range Maximum surface temperature
T1 > 450°C 450°C
T2 > 300°C to 450°C 300°C
T3 > 200°C to 300°C 200°C
T4 > 135°C to 200°C 135°C
T5 > 100°C to 135°C 100°C
T6 > 85°C to 100°C 85°C

Basic principles for use in areas

where a risk is posed by explo-
sive materials
DANGER
Risk of explosion due to use in unap-
proved areas!
The truck may be operated only in areas
for which it is approved.
– Check the area of use by comparing it
with the nameplate information.
– If the area of use is not clear, ask the
safety officer.

DANGER
Risk of explosion through working on a
truck within areas where a risk is posed
by explosive materials!
Working on a truck within areas where a
risk is posed by explosive materials can
lead to explosions in the surrounding at-
mosphere.
– Work must only be carried out on the
truck outside areas where a risk is
posed by explosive materials.
– Where necessary, inform the safety
officer.

Examples of this work are:

● Battery replacement and battery charging

● Maintenance and repair

● Settings and safety checks

● Conversion and retrofitting

● Transportation and loading

– Observe the national regulations for the

country in which the truck is being used.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 23
1 Foreword
Using the truck

Transporting explosive materials

– Transport explosive materials carefully and
cautiously, and in accordance with the com-
pany directives for handling explosive mate-
rials and for the area of use.
Avoid applying the following stresses to explo-
sive materials:
● Jerking

● Striking

● Rubbing

● Grinding

● Throwing

Only transport explosive materials in pack-

aging suitable for shipping or in thoroughly
sealed, closed containers. This does not apply
to objects containing explosive materials that
are authorised for transportation without pack-
aging in accordance with the national danger-
ous goods regulations.

Definition of terms
"Explosive materials" are:
● Explosive agents

● Fuel

● Inflammable materials

● Materials for ignition

● Objects containing these substances (this

also includes ammunition and parts of am-

munition as defined in the German Weap-
ons Act)
● Pyrotechnic objects including materials for

ignition
● Pyrotechnic compositions

Explosive substances used for the manufac-

ture of explosive materials are treated in the
same way as explosive materials. Explosive
substances also include potentially explosive
substances that do not pose an immediate risk
of explosion and that are used as explosive
agents, fuels or as pyrotechnic compositions.
Objects containing explosives are e.g. deto-
nating devices, pyrotechnic objects, ammuni-
tion. Fuels include propellant powders, propel-
ling charges and rocket fuels.
"Trucks protected against explosive materi-
al" are trucks fitted with protective devices

24 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Using the truck

to counteract dangerous interactions between

explosive material packaged in a manner suit-
able for shipping, or unpackaged explosive
material, detonating cords and the truck.
"Protected trucks" are trucks fitted with pro-
tective devices to counteract dangerous inter-
actions between explosive material packaged
in a manner suitable for shipping and the
truck.
"Non-protected trucks" have no special pro-
tective devices.

Temperature classes
The retrofitter has modified this truck similar
to a truck protected against explosive material.
Similar to the explosion-protection regulations,
the temperature classes are also applicable
here.

Temperature classes
Temperature
Ignition temperature range Maximum surface temperature
class
T1 > 450°C 450°C
T2 > 300°C to 450°C 300°C
T3 > 200°C to 300°C 200°C
T4 > 135°C to 200°C 135°C
T5 > 100°C to 135°C 100°C
T6 > 85°C to 100°C 85°C

– Before entering areas where a risk is posed

by explosive materials, compare the re-
quirements to enter these areas with the
information on the nameplate.

Transporting explosive materials

– Transport explosive materials carefully and
cautiously, and in accordance with the com-
pany directives for handling explosive mate-
rials and for the area of use.
Avoid applying the following stresses to explo-
sive materials:
● Jerking

● Striking

● Rubbing

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 25
1 Foreword
Using the truck

● Grinding
● Throwing
Only transport explosive materials in pack-
aging suitable for shipping or in thoroughly
sealed, closed containers. This does not apply
to objects containing explosive materials that
are authorised for transportation without pack-
aging in accordance with the national danger-
ous goods regulations.
– Observe the national regulations for the
country in which the truck is being used.

Commissioning
Commissioning is the initial intended use of
the truck.
The necessary steps for the commissioning
vary depending on the model and equipment
of the truck. These steps require preparatory
work and adjustment work that cannot be per-
formed by the operating company. See also
the chapter entitled "Definition of responsible
persons".
– To commission the truck, contact the au-
thorised service centre.

Intended use
The truck described in these operating instruc-
tions is suitable for lifting, transporting and
stacking loads.
The truck may only be used for its intended
purpose as set out and described in these
operating instructions.
Depending on the truck version:
● The industrial truck may only be used in

potentially explosive areas for which it is ap-

proved in accordance with the attached EC
declaration of conformity and type approval.
● The industrial truck may only be used in the

areas where a risk is posed by explosive

materials for which it is approved in accord-
ance with the attached EC declaration of
conformity and type approval.

26 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Using the truck

NOTE
For explanations of the individual areas, see
the sections "Basic principles for use in poten-
tially explosive areas" or "Basic principles for
use in areas where a risk is posed by explo-
sive materials".
If the truck is to be used for purposes other
than those specified in the operating instruc-
tions, the approval of the manufacturer and, if
applicable, the relevant regulatory authorities
must be obtained in advance in order to pre-
vent hazards.
The maximum load to be lifted is specified on
the capacity rating plate (load diagram) and
must not be exceeded; see the section entitled
"Capacity rating plate" in the chapter entitled
"Handling loads".

Proper use during towing

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Trailers and tow couplings that do not
fulfil explosion-protection regulations can
lead to explosions in the surrounding
atmosphere within potentially explosive
areas!
Do not use the truck for towing.

Improper use: use in potentially

explosive areas
The operating company or driver, and not the
manufacturer, is liable for any hazards caused
by improper use.
Use for purposes other than those described
in these operating instructions is prohibited.

NOTE
Please note the definition of the following re-
sponsible persons: "operating company" and
"driver".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 27
1 Foreword
Using the truck

DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury from falling
off the truck while it is moving!
It is prohibited to carry passengers on
the truck.

DANGER
Risk of tipping over if the truck tilts!
– Do not perform stacking or unstacking operations
when on inclined surfaces or HGV ramps.

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
The truck must not be operated in fire
hazard areas or potentially explosive
areas that do not conform to the truck's
classification.
The truck must not be operated in areas
where there is a risk of corrosion or in
areas with high levels of dust that do not
conform to the truck's classification.
The information on the nameplate is
binding!

In accordance with Directive 2014/34/EU it

is forbidden to use the truck in:
● Areas of equipment group I, i.e. in mining

(underground)
● Areas of equipment group III, i.e. for use in

potentially explosive dust atmospheres

● Areas of zone 0 and 20

● Areas of zones for which the truck is not

specifically approved for use as listed in the

data on the nameplate
● Areas with temperature classes in which the

truck is not specifically approved for use as

listed in the data on the nameplate
● Potentially explosive areas for the purpose

of towing trailers unless explosion-protec-

ted towing devices and explosion-protected
trailers are used

NOTE
For explanations of the various areas, see the
section entitled "Basic principles for use in po-
tentially explosive areas".

28 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Using the truck

Improper use: use in areas

where a risk is posed by explo-
sive materials
The operating company or driver, and not the
manufacturer, is liable for any hazards caused
by improper use.
Use for purposes other than those described
in these operating instructions is prohibited.

NOTE
Please note the definition of the following re-
sponsible persons: "operating company" and
"driver".

DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury from falling
off the truck while it is moving!
It is prohibited to carry passengers on
the truck.

DANGER
Risk of tipping over if the truck tilts!
– Do not perform stacking or unstacking operations
when on inclined surfaces or HGV ramps.

DANGER
Risk of explosion due to use in unap-
proved areas!
The truck may be operated only in areas
for which it is approved.
– Check the area of use by comparing it
with the nameplate information.
– If the area of use is not clear, ask the
safety officer.

The truck must not be used in:

● Areas of equipment group I, i.e. in mining

(underground)
● Areas of equipment group III, i.e. for use in

potentially explosive dust atmospheres

● Potentially explosive areas

● Areas for which the truck is not specifically

approved for use as listed in the data on the

nameplate

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 29
1 Foreword
Using the truck

● Areas with temperature classes in which the

truck is not specifically approved for use as
listed in the data on the nameplate
● Areas where a risk is posed by explosive
materials for the purpose of towing trailers,
if these trailers are not also converted to
carry explosive materials.

NOTE
For explanations of the various areas, see
the section entitled "Basic principles for use
in areas where a risk is posed by explosive
materials".

Place of use: use in potentially 

explosive areas

DANGER
There is a risk of explosion during use
in potentially explosive areas.
The truck may be operated only in the
potentially explosive areas for which it is
approved.
– Check the area of use by comparing it
with the nameplate information.
– If the area of use is not clear, ask the
safety officer.

DANGER
Risk of explosion when brushing against equip-
ment!
If conductive components of the truck come into con-
tact with flexible doors or strip curtains, dangerous
electrostatic charges can form.
– Avoid electrostatic charges.

DANGER
Risk of explosion when using without conductive
flooring!
In potentially explosive areas, the truck may be oper-
ated only where there is conductive flooring.
– Avoid electrostatic charges.

30 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Using the truck

NOTE
More information concerning the requirements
for conductive or dissipative flooring can be
found in the guidelines relating to electrostatic
hazards "CLC/TR 60079-32-1".

General
The truck is approved in accordance with Di-
rective 2014/34/EU for use in potentially ex-
plosive areas. These areas are specified on
the nameplate. In such areas, the safety offi-
cer must approve access by the truck.
– Compare the permissible temperature
classes for the potentially explosive areas
with the specification on the nameplate.
– See also the section "Basic principles for
use in potentially explosive areas".
Operation on public roads is only permitted if
the "StVZO" (German Road Traffic Licensing
Regulations) equipment variant is installed.
If the truck is to be operated on public roads,
the truck must conform to the national regula-
tions for the country in which it is being used.
The ground must have an adequate load ca-
pacity (concrete, asphalt) and a rough surface.
In addition, the ground in potentially explosive
areas must be conductive. Roadways, working
areas and aisle widths must conform to the
specifications in these operating instructions;
see the section entitled "Roadways" in the
"Driving" chapter.
Driving on upward and downward gradients
is permitted, provided the stipulated data and
specifications are observed.
The truck is suitable for indoor and outdoor
use in countries ranging from the Tropics to
Nordic regions (temperature range: -10°C to
+40°C).
This truck is not designed for continuous oper-
ation in cold stores. It may be driven in cold
stores only for a short period.
The operating company must ensure that suit-
able fire protection is provided in the truck's
surroundings for the relevant truck application.
Depending on the application, additional fire

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 31
1 Foreword
Using the truck

protection must be provided on the truck. If in

doubt, contact the relevant authorities.

NOTE
Please observe the definition of the following
responsible person: "operating company".

Relationship between zones and equip-

ment categories for industrial trucks
● Zone 1 – category 2G
Use is permitted in areas where hazard-
ous, potentially explosive atmospheres may
arise during normal operation due to gases,
vapours or mists.
● Zone 21 – category 2D
Use is permitted in areas where hazard-
ous, potentially explosive atmospheres may
arise during normal operation due to dusts.
● Zone 1 and zone 21 – category 2GD
Use is permitted in areas where hazard-
ous, potentially explosive atmospheres may
arise during normal operation due to gases,
vapours, mist or dust.
● Zone 2 – category 3G
Use is permitted in areas where hazardous,
potentially explosive atmospheres seldom
arise during normal operation due to gases,
vapours or mists.
● Zone 22 – category 3D
Use is permitted in areas where hazardous,
potentially explosive atmospheres seldom
arise during normal operation due to dusts.
● Zone 2 and zone 22 – category 3GD
Use is permitted in areas where hazardous,
potentially explosive atmospheres seldom
arise during normal operation due to gases,
vapours, mist or dusts.
Trucks approved for zone 1 are automatically
also approved for zone 2. Trucks approved for
zone 21 are automatically also approved for
zone 22.

32 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Using the truck

Place of use: use in areas at risk

from explosive substances
DANGER
Risk of explosion due to use in unap-
proved areas!
The truck may be operated only in areas
for which it is approved.
– Check the area of use by comparing it
with the nameplate information.
– If the area of use is not clear, ask the
safety officer.

DANGER
Risk of explosion when brushing against equip-
ment!
If conductive components of the truck come into con-
tact with flexible doors or strip curtains, dangerous
electrostatic charges can form.
– Avoid electrostatic charges.

General
Depending on the country of use, the truck
is converted for use in areas where a risk
is posed by explosive materials. These areas
are specified on the nameplate. In such areas,
the safety officer must approve access by the
truck.
– Compare the permissible temperature
classes for the areas where a risk is posed
by explosive materials with the specification
on the nameplate.
– See also the section "Basic principles for
use in areas where a risk is posed by explo-
sive materials".
Operation on public roads is only permitted if
the "StVZO" (German Road Traffic Licensing
Regulations) equipment variant is installed.
If the truck is to be operated on public roads,
the truck must conform to the national regula-
tions for the country in which it is being used.
The ground must have an adequate load ca-
pacity (concrete, asphalt) and a rough surface.
Roadways, working areas and aisle widths
must conform to the specifications in these

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 33
1 Foreword
Using the truck

operating instructions; see the section entitled

"Roadways" in the "Driving" chapter.
Driving on upward and downward gradients
is permitted, provided the stipulated data and
specifications are observed.
The truck is suitable for indoor and outdoor
use in countries ranging from the Tropics to
Nordic regions (temperature range: -10°C to
+40°C).
This truck is not designed for continuous oper-
ation in cold stores. It may be driven in cold
stores only for a short period.
The operating company must ensure that suit-
able fire protection is provided in the truck's
surroundings for the relevant truck application.
Depending on the application, additional fire
protection must be provided on the truck. If in
doubt, contact the relevant authorities.

NOTE
Please observe the definition of the following
responsible person: "operating company".
Areas where a risk is posed by explosive ma-
terials are classified according to the national
regulations, guidelines or rules.

Area classification in accordance with

"BGR 123" in Germany
The operating company must classify areas in
accordance with the standard "DIN VDE 0166
- Installation of electrical apparatus in areas
endangered by substances with explosive
characteristics".
E 1 areas in which explosive materials:
● Come into contact with apparatus and/or

operating materials, by design or as a result

of a procedure
● May be generated in significant volume in

the form of dust, vapour, condensate, subli-

mate or in other forms.

34 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Using the truck

E 2 areas in which explosive materials:

● Do not come into contact with apparatus

and/or operating materials, by design or as

a result of a procedure
● May only occasionally be generated in the

form of dust, vapour, condensate, sublimate

or in other forms.
E 3 areas in which explosive materials:
● Do not come into contact with apparatus

and/or operating materials, by design or as

a result of a procedure
● Cannot be generated in the form of dust,

vapour, condensate, sublimate or in other

forms, neither by design nor as a result of
a procedure — for example, because the
explosive material is contained in shipping
packaging or another form of sealed pack-
aging.

Zone classification of C0 areas in ac-

cordance with "CEI 64-2" in Italy
To be able to use the truck in areas with
a risk of explosion, the truck has been modi-
fied in accordance with the Italian legislation
"CEI 64-2".
– For more information on the areas and
boundary areas, see the Italian legislation
"CEI 64-2".
Zone C0Z0
● Areas designated as C0Z0 are factory

floors, storage tanks or pipe lines that are

suitable for processing explosive materials.
Zone C0Z1
● Areas designated as C0Z1 are areas where

powder residues or fumes containing explo-

sive materials may be found in the ambient
air as a result of normal operation. This in-
cludes:
○ Boundary areas of C0CP1 except where
circumstances covered under "2.4.03 a)"
are present.
○ In indoor areas, the areas with A0 open-
ings in environments that are classified as a
C0Z1, due to the presence of C0P1.
Zone C0Z2
● Areas designated as C0Z2 are areas where

powder residue or fumes containing ex-

plosive materials in the ambient air are

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 35
1 Foreword
Using the truck

foreseeable only for short periods of time

in exceptional cases and with good reasons
during normal operation of the plant. This
includes:
○ Boundary areas of C0CP1 where the
presence of powder residues or fumes
containing explosive materials in the ambi-
ent air can be entirely excluded under nor-
mal operating conditions and where safety
measures are complied with.
○ Boundary areas of C0CP2.
○ In outdoor areas, the boundary areas of
A0 openings in environments classified as
C0Z1.
Zone C0ZR
● Areas designated as C0ZR are the boun-

dary areas of A0 openings in environments

classified as C0Z2.

Sealed safety installation (AD-T) in ac-

cordance with "CEI 64-2" in Italy
An electrical system is defined as AD-T where
no ignition of any hazardous substances
present on site is triggered either in normal
operation or in the event of a fault in the cur-
rent circuits.
This applies as long as:
● The protective sleeves on any electrical

components prevent these components

from coming into contact with any of the
aforementioned substances
● The outer surfaces of the protective pack-

aging do not exceed the maximum permis-

sible temperatures in relation to the fore-
seeable hazardous substances
● The systems have been installed in accord-

ance with "CEI 64-2, chapter VI, X"

– See also the Italian legislation "CEI 64-2".

36 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Using the truck

Parking in temperatures below

-10 °C
CAUTION
Batteries may freeze or switch off!
If the truck is parked in an ambient temperature of
below -10°C for an extended period, the batteries will
cool down.
For lead-acid batteries, the electrolyte can freeze
and damage the batteries.
The truck is then not ready for operation.
– At ambient temperatures of below -10 °C, only
park the truck for short periods of time.
– Pay attention to the equipped battery and the cor-
responding operating instructions.

Using working platforms

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to the explosions
in the surrounding atmosphere. No work
may be carried out on trucks in potential-
ly explosive areas!
– Only assemble working platforms out-
side potentially explosive areas.

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working with working platforms that
do not meet explosion-protection regula-
tions can lead to explosions in the sur-
rounding atmosphere within potentially
explosive areas!
– Only use working platforms that com-
ply with the explosion-protection regu-
lations.
– Check the area of application by com-
paring with nameplate information on
the working platform.
– If the area of application is not clear,
ask a safety official.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 37
1 Foreword
Using the truck

WARNING
The use of working platforms is regulated by national
law. The use of working platforms is only permitted
by virtue of the jurisdiction in the country of use.
– Observe national legislation.
– Before using working platforms, consult the na-
tional regulatory authorities.

38 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Information about the documentation

Information about the documentation

Scope of the documentation
● Original operating instructions of the truck
● Original operating instructions of the dis-
play-operating unit
● Operating instructions of the installed var-
iants that are not mentioned in the afore-
mentioned original operating instructions
● "CO"operating instructions or inserts (de-
pending on the truck equipment)
These operating instructions describe all
measures necessary for the safe operation
and proper maintenance of the truck in all pos-
sible variants available at the time of printing.
Special versions to meet customer require-
ments (UPA) are documented in separate op-
erating instructions. If you have any questions,
contact your authorised service centre.

Below, enter the production number, year of manufacture and the Miretti job number from the
nameplate:
Production number
Year of manufacture
Miretti job number

Please quote the production number in all

technical enquiries. Specify the Miretti job
number for any spare parts orders.
Each truck comes with a set of operating in-
structions. These operating instructions must
be stored carefully and must be available to
the driver and operating company at all times.
If the operating instructions are lost, the op-
erating company must obtain a replacement
from the manufacturer immediately.
The operating instructions are included in the
spare parts list. They can be reordered as a
spare part.
The personnel responsible for operating and
maintaining the equipment must be familiar
with these operating instructions.
The operating company must ensure that all
users have received, read and understood
these operating instructions.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 39
1 Foreword
Information about the documentation

Store all documentation safely. Hand over the

documentation to the next operating company
if the truck is transferred or sold.

NOTE
Please note the definition of the following re-
sponsible persons: "operating company" and
"driver".
Thank you for reading and complying with
these operating instructions. If you have any
questions or suggestions for improvements, or
if you have found any errors, please contact
the authorised service centre.

Supplementary documentation
This industrial truck can be fitted with a Custo-
mer Option (CO) that deviates from the stand-
ard equipment and the variants.
This CO may consist of:
● Special sensors

● A special attachment

● A special towing device

● Customised attachments

When fitted with a CO, the industrial truck is

provided with additional documentation. This
may take the form of an insert or separate
operating instructions.
The original operating instructions for this in-
dustrial truck are valid for the operation of
standard equipment and variants without re-
striction. The operational and safety informa-
tion in the original operating instructions con-
tinues to be valid in its entirety unless it is
countermanded in this additional documenta-
tion.
The requirements for the qualification of per-
sonnel as well as the time for maintenance
may vary. This is defined in the additional doc-
umentation.
– If you have any questions, contact your au-
thorised service centre.

40 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Information about the documentation

Issue date and topicality of the

operating instructions
The issue date and the version of these op-
erating instructions can be found on the title
page.
STILL is constantly engaged in the further de-
velopment of trucks. These operating instruc-
tions are subject to change, and any claims
based on the information and/or illustrations
contained in them cannot be asserted.
Please contact your authorised service centre
for technical support relating to your truck.

Copyright and trademark rights

These instructions, including excerpts thereof,
must not be reproduced, translated or made
accessible to third parties, except with the ex-
press written approval of the manufacturer.

Explanation of signal terms used

The signal terms Danger, Warning, Caution,
Note and Environmental note and the
symbol are used in these instructions as haz-
ard warnings or for unusual information that
requires special identification.

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
There is a risk of explosion if instructions
are not followed in potentially explosive
areas

DANGER
Indicates procedures that must be strictly adhered
to in order to prevent the risk of fatalities.

WARNING
Indicates procedures that must be strictly adhered to
in order to prevent the risk of injuries.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 41
1 Foreword
Information about the documentation

CAUTION
Indicates procedures that must be strictly adhered to
in order to prevent material damage and/or destruc-
tion.

NOTE
For technical requirements that require special
attention.

ENVIRONMENT NOTE

To prevent environmental damage

-protection information
For components, points and procedures rele-
vant to explosion protection

List of abbreviations
This list of abbreviations applies to all types
of operating instructions. Not all of the abbre-
viations that are listed here will necessarily
appear in these operating instructions.

Abbrevi-
Meaning Explanation
ation
German implementation of EU occupation-
ArbSchG Arbeitsschutzgesetz
al health and safety directives
Betr- German implementation of the EU working
Betriebssicherheitsverordnung
SichV equipment directive
German insurance company for the com-
BG Berufsgenossenschaft
pany and employees
German principles and test specifications
BGG Berufsgenossenschaftlicher Grundsatz
for occupational health and safety
German rules and recommendations for
BGR Berufsgenossenschaftliche Regel
occupational health and safety
DGUV Berufsgenossenschaftliche Vorschrift German accident prevention regulations
Confirms conformity with product-specific
CE Communauté Européenne
European directives (CE labelling)
Commission on the Rules for the Approval International commission on the rules for
CEE
of the Electrical Equipment the approval of electrical equipment
DC Direct Current Direct current
DFÜ Datenfernübertragung Remote data transfer
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung German standardisation organisation

42 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Information about the documentation

Abbrevi-
Meaning Explanation
ation
EG European Community
EN European standard
European Federation of Materials Han-
FEM Fédération Européene de la Manutention
dling and Storage Equipment
Fmax maximum Force Maximum power
German authority for monitoring/issuing
regulations for worker protection, environ-
GAA Gewerbeaufsichtsamt
mental protection, and consumer protec-
tion
Transfer of data packets in wireless net-
GPRS General Packet Radio Service
works
ID no. Identification number
International Organization for Standardi-
ISO International standardisation organisation
zation
Uncertainty of measurement of sound
KpA
pressure levels
LAN Local Area Network Local area network
LED Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode

Lp Sound pressure level at the workplace

Average continuous sound pressure level

LpAZ
in the driver's compartment
Distance of the centre of gravity of the
LSP Load centre of gravity
load from the front face of the fork backs
Maximum permissible air concentrations
MAK Maximum workplace concentration
of a substance at the workplace
Max. Maximum Highest value of an amount
Min. Minimum Lowest value of an amount
PIN Personal Identification Number Personal identification number
PPE Personal protective equipment
SE Super-Elastic Superelastic tyres (solid rubber tyres)
Tyres for simplified assembly, without
SIT Snap-In Tyre
loose rim parts
German regulations for approval of vehi-
StVZO Straßenverkehrs-Zulassungs-Ordnung
cles on public roads
Ordinance on hazardous materials appli-
TRGS Technische Regel für Gefahrstoffe
cable in the Federal Republic of Germany

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 43
1 Foreword
Information about the documentation

Abbrevi-
Meaning Explanation
ation
Confirms conformity with the product-spe-
UKCA United Kingdom Conformity Assessed cific directives that apply in the United
Kingdom (UKCA labelling)
Verband der Elektrotechnik Elektronik In-
VDE German technical/scientific association
formationstechnik e. V.
VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure German technical/scientific association
Verband Deutscher Maschinen- und Anla- German Mechanical Engineering Industry
VDMA
genbau e. V. Association
WLAN Wireless LAN Wireless local area network

Definition of directions  1
The directions "forwards" (1), "backwards" (3),
"right" (2) and "left" (4) refer to the installation
position of the parts as seen from the driver's
compartment; the load is to the front.

4 2

3 6210_001-031

44 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Foreword 1
Information about the documentation

Schematic views
View of functions and operating proce- 
dures
At many points in this documentation, the
(mostly sequential) operation of certain func-
tions or operating procedures is explained.
Schematic diagrams of a counterbalance truck
are used to illustrate these procedures.

NOTE
These schematic views are not representative
of the structural state of the documented truck.
The views are used solely for the purpose of
clarifying procedures.

View of the display-operating unit 

NOTE 12,6 h 10:35

Views of operating statuses and values in the

display of the display and operating unit are
examples and partly dependent on the truck
equipment. As a result, the displays shown of
the actual operating statuses and values may
vary.

6219_003-021_V3

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 45
1 Foreword
Environmental considerations

Environmental considerations
Packaging
During delivery of the truck, certain parts are
packaged to provide protection during trans-
port. This packaging must be removed com-
pletely prior to initial start-up.

ENVIRONMENT NOTE

The packaging material must be disposed of

properly after delivery of the truck.

Disposal of components and

batteries
The truck is composed of different materials. If
components or batteries need to be replaced
and disposed of, they must be:
● disposed of,

● treated or

● recycled in accordance with regional and

national regulations.

NOTE
The documentation provided by the battery
manufacturer must be observed when dispos-
ing of batteries.

ENVIRONMENT NOTE

We recommend working with a waste man-

agement company for disposal purposes.

46 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
 2

Safety
2 Safety
Definition of responsible persons

Definition of responsible persons

Operating company
General
The operating company is the natural or legal
person who operates the truck or on whose
authority the truck is used.
The operating company must ensure that the
truck is used only for its proper purpose and in
compliance with the safety regulations set out
in these operating instructions.
The operating company must inform all users
of the operating instructions in the required
language. The operating instructions must be
accessible to the users at all times. See the
section entitled "Scope of the documentation".
The operating company must ensure that all
users read and understand the safety informa-
tion.
The operating company is responsible for the
scheduling and correct performance of regular
safety checks.
The operating company must grant all users
the necessary rights.
We recommend that the national specifica-
tions for the performance of safety checks are
observed.

Explosion protection
The operating company must provide training
to its personnel regarding the special features
of potentially explosive areas.
The operating company must provide training
to its personnel at regular intervals regarding
working with trucks in potentially explosive
areas.
The operating company must have the exper-
tise required by law to guarantee explosion
protection for equipment and operating materi-
als.
The operating company must instruct all users
regarding the explosion-protection regulations
and rules of behaviour in areas at risk of ex-
plosions.

48 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Definition of responsible persons

Working with explosive materials

The operating company must prepare a writ-
ten company directive, in an understandable
format and in the relevant language for the
employees operating the truck, containing in-
formation about:
1 The applicable safety regulations for
transporting explosive materials on com-
pany premises
2 The course of action to take if the truck
malfunctions and behaviour in the event
of accidents
A sample company directive can be found in
Annex 1 of "DGUV Rule 113-006". The com-
pany management must take the operating in-
structions issued by the manufacturer into ac-
count when preparing the company directive.

Instruction
The operating company must use the compa-
ny directive as a basis to instruct the truck
drivers about possible dangers during use of
the truck and measures to avoid these dan-
gers. This instruction must take place before
starting work and then at appropriate intervals,
but at least half-yearly. Record the content
and time of the instruction in writing and have
the instructed persons sign to confirm that
they have received the instruction.

Competent person for explosion

protection checks
Competent persons for explosion protection
checks (hereinafter referred to as "competent
person") are service technicians or persons
who fulfil the following requirements:
● A completed vocational qualification that

demonstrably proves their professional ex-

pertise
This proof must consist of a vocational qual-
ification or a similar document.
● Professional experience indicating that the

competent person has gained practical ex-

perience of industrial trucks over a proven
period during their career.
During this time, this person has experi-
enced a wide range of events that require

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 49
2 Safety
Definition of responsible persons

tests to be carried out, e.g. following a haz-

ard assessment or daily inspection.
● Recent professional involvement in the field
of the industrial truck test in question and
an appropriate further qualification are es-
sential.
The competent person must have experi-
ence of carrying out the test in question or
of carrying out similar tests. Moreover, this
person must be aware of the latest techno-
logical developments regarding the industri-
al truck being tested and the risks being
assessed.
● Sufficient knowledge in the field of industrial
trucks that have been converted for use in
potentially explosive areas
● A qualification certificate in accordance with
standard "DIN EN 60079-17:2014-10" and
must attend training regarding new features
no more than two years after first qualifying
● At least one year's experience in manufac-
turing, assembling or repairing the systems
or system components set out in §1 para. 2
no. 3 of the German Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health (BetrSichV)
● At least one year's experience in manufac-
turing or repairing the devices, protection
systems or safety, monitoring or control
equipment set out in Article 1 of Directive
2014/34/EU
● The necessary knowledge of explosion pro-
tection and be familiar with the relevant
technical regulations. They must also regu-
larly refresh their knowledge
The competent person is permitted to work on
industrial trucks manufactured by STILL that
have been converted by Miretti.

Drivers
This truck must only be driven by persons who
fulfil the following points:
The driver must:
● Be physically and mentally able to drive the

truck safely
● Be at least 18 years old

● Be trained in driving industrial trucks

● Have proven their ability to drive and handle

loads to the operating company or a repre-

sentative of the operating company

50 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Definition of responsible persons

● Have received instruction on explosion-pro-

tection regulations and rules of behaviour in
areas at risk of explosions
● Be assigned to drive this truck
If the driver has been trained in accordance
with the BGG (General Employers' Liability
Insurance Association Act) 925, their training
meets the training requirements under section
3 of the Health and Safety at Work Act and
section 9 of the German Ordinance on Indus-
trial Safety and Health.
– Observe the national regulations for the
country in which the truck is being used.

Rights, obligations and codes of con-

duct
DANGER
Risk of accident due to consuming intoxicants!
The use of drugs, alcohol or medication that affects
an individual's reactions will impair their ability to
drive the truck!
Individuals under the influence of the aforementioned
substances are not permitted to perform work of any
kind on or with the truck.

The driver must be trained in his rights and

duties. This assumes that they have read and
understood the company directive of the oper-
ating company.
Drivers must:
● Have read and understood the operating in-

structions
● Have familiarised themselves with safe op-

eration of the truck

● Adhere to the rules of behaviour in areas at

risk of explosions
Using the company directive as a basis, the
driver must be instructed about the possible
dangers arising during use of the truck and the
course of action to avoid these dangers before
starting work and then at appropriate intervals.

Clothing
The driver must wear protective equipment
(protection suit, safety shoes, safety helmet,
protection goggles and gloves) that are appro-
priate for the conditions, the job and the load

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 51
2 Safety
Definition of responsible persons

to be lifted. Sturdy footwear must be worn to

ensure safe driving and braking.
The driver must wear antistatic clothing and
footwear while working in potentially explosive
areas.
The requirements for antistatic clothing are
defined in the following standards:
● Shoes

"EN ISO 20344 Personal protective equip-

ment - Test procedure for shoes" in the cur-
rent version
● Protection suit including gloves

"EN 1149-5 protection suit - Electrostatic

properties - Part 5: Material performance
and design requirements"

Prohibition of use by unauthorised per-

sons
The driver is responsible for the truck during
working hours. They must not allow unauthor-
ised persons to operate the truck.
When leaving the truck, the driver must secure
it against unauthorised use, e.g. by removing
the key.

52 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Basic principles for safe operation

Basic principles for safe operation

Insurance cover on company
premises
In many cases, company premises are restric-
ted public traffic areas.

NOTE

The business liability insurance should be re-

viewed to ensure that, in the event of any
damage caused in restricted public traffic
areas, there is insurance cover for the truck
in respect of third parties.

Modifying and retrofitting

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Decommissioning or modification of ex-
plosion-protection components is forbid-
den.

If the truck will be used for work that is not

listed in the directives or in these instructions,
the truck must be converted or retrofitted by
the authorised service centre as required. Any
structural modification can impair the handling
and stability of the truck, and can result in
accidents.
The following modifications to components
and properties are permitted only with the writ-
ten approval of the manufacturer (examples):
● Any modifications that adversely affect the

stability or load capacity of the truck or the

circumferential view from the truck
● Braking

● Steering

● Operating devices

● Safety systems

● Equipment variants

● Attachments

If necessary, obtain approval from the relevant

authorities. Observe the national regulations
for the country in which the truck is being used

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 53
2 Safety
Basic principles for safe operation

We warn against installing and using restraint

systems that have not been approved by the
manufacturer.
– Contact the authorised service centre be-
fore converting or retrofitting restraint sys-
tems.

DANGER
Risk of explosion from additional bores
in the battery hood!
Explosive gases can escape and can
lead to potentially fatal injuries if they
explode. Sealing bores with plugs is not
sufficient to prevent gas from escaping.
– Do not drill any holes in the battery
hood.

DANGER
Risk of accident from additional bores in the battery
hood!
The rigidity of the battery hood is impaired and the
battery hood can break. The driver's seat may col-
lapse into the battery hood, which could cause the
driver to perform uncontrolled steering and driving
manoeuvres.
– Do not drill any holes in the battery hood.

NOTE
Welding operations are forbidden.
The operating company is only permitted to
make modifications to the truck independently
if the manufacturer goes into liquidation and
the company is not taken over by another le-
gal person.
The operating company must also fulfil the fol-
lowing prerequisites:
● Design documents, test documents and

assembly instructions associated with the

modification must be permanently archived
and remain accessible at all times.
● Check that the following points are adhered

to with regard to modifications. Change if

necessary.
○ Capacity rating plate
○ Information signs
○ Hazard warnings

54 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Basic principles for safe operation

○ Operating instructions
● Modifications must be designed, checked
and implemented by a design office that
specialises in industrial trucks. The design
office must comply with the standards and
directives valid at the time that modifica-
tions are made.
Decal information with the following data must
be permanently affixed to the truck so that it is
clearly visible:
● Type of modification

● Date of modification

● Name and address of the company per-

forming the modifications

Changes to the overhead guard

and roof loads
DANGER
In the event of the overhead guard failing due to
a falling load or the truck tipping over, there are
potentially fatal consequences for the driver. There
is a risk to life!
Welding and drilling on the overhead guard changes
the material characteristics and the structural design
of the overhead guard. Excessive forces caused by
falling loads or the truck tipping over may result in
buckling of the modified overhead guard and no pro-
tection for the driver.
– Do not perform welding on the overhead guard.
– Do not perform drilling on the overhead guard.

CAUTION
Heavy roof loads damage the overhead guard!
To ensure the stability of the overhead guard at all
times, a roof load may only be mounted on the over-
head guard if the structural design has been tested
and the manufacturer has given approval.
– Seek advice from the authorised service centre for
the mounting of roof loads.

Warning regarding non-original

parts
Original parts, attachments and accessories
are specially designed for this truck. We spe-
cifically draw your attention to the fact that

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 55
2 Safety
Basic principles for safe operation

parts, attachments and accessories supplied

by other companies have not been tested and
approved by STILL.

CAUTION
Installation and/or use of such products may there-
fore have a negative impact on the design features
of the truck and thus impair active and/or passive
driving safety.
We recommend that you obtain approval from the
manufacturer and, if necessary, from the relevant
regulatory authorities before installing such parts.
The manufacturer accepts no liability for any damage
caused by the use of non-original parts and accesso-
ries without approval.

Damage, defects and misuse of

safety systems
Damage or other defects on the truck or at-
tachment must be reported to the supervisor
or responsible fleet manager immediately so
that they can have the defect rectified.
Trucks and attachments that are not functional
or safe to drive may not be used until they
have been properly repaired.
Do not remove or deactivate safety systems
and switches.
Fixed set values may only be changed with
the approval of the manufacturer.
Work on the electrical system (e.g. connecting
a radio, additional headlights etc.) is only per-
mitted with the manufacturer's written appro-
val. All electrical system interventions must be
documented.
Even if they are removable, roof panels may
not be removed, as they are designed to pro-
tect against small falling objects.

56 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Basic principles for safe operation

Tyres 

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
In potentially explosive areas, wheels
and tyres that do not meet explosion-
protection regulations may lead to explo-
sions in the surrounding atmosphere.
– Only use approved, electrically con-
ductive tyre types.
– Ensure that they are correctly labelled
(1).

If "non-marking" tyres (non-marking, light-col-

oured) are used, antistatic belts must be at-
1
tached beneath the truck. These antistatic 5063_901-033

belts have an electrically conductive connec-

tion to the chassis and the other end drags
along the floor. In addition, a corona electrode
with leak resistance must be fitted.
Non-marking tyres are identified by the safety
information.
– Observe the explosion-protection regula-
tions.
– Ensure that permissible tyres are used.
– Check the presence and condition of the
antistatic belts/corona electrode.
– If in doubt, speak to the safety officer.

NOTE
Electrically conductive tyres are required on
both axles!

DANGER
Risk to stability!
Failure to observe the following information and in-
structions can lead to a loss of stability. The truck
may tip over. Risk of accident!

The following factors can lead to a loss of

stability:
● Different tyres on the same axle, e.g. pneu-

matic tyres and superelastic tyres

● Tyres not approved by the manufacturer

● Excessive tyre wear

● Tyres of inferior quality

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 57
2 Safety
Basic principles for safe operation

● Changing rim wheel parts

● Combining rim wheel parts from different
manufacturers
Therefore, the above-mentioned factors are
prohibited.
The following rules must be observed to en-
sure stability:
– Only use tyres with equal and permitted lev-
els of wear on the same axle.
– Only use wheels and tyres of the same type
on the same axle, e.g. only superelastic
tyres.
– Only use wheels and tyres approved by the
manufacturer.
– Only use high-quality products.
Wheels and tyres approved by the manufac-
turer can be found on the spare parts list.
If other wheels or tyres are to be used, au-
thorisation from the manufacturer must be ob-
tained beforehand.

NOTE
Check with the authorised service centre be-
fore changing over to a different tyre size.
When changing wheels or tyres, ensure that
the truck is not tilting. Always change wheels
on the right and left (e.g.) at the same time.
Changes must only be made following consul-
tation with the manufacturer.
If the type of tyre used on an axle is
changed, for example from superelastic tyres
to pneumatic tyres, the load diagram must be
changed accordingly.
– Contact the authorised service centre re-
garding this matter.

Medical equipment
WARNING
Electromagnetic interference may occur on medical
devices!
Only use equipment that is sufficiently protected
against electromagnetic interference.

58 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Basic principles for safe operation

Medical equipment, such as pacemakers or

hearing aids, may not work properly when the
truck is in operation.
– Ask your doctor or the manufacturer of
the medical equipment to confirm that the
medical equipment is sufficiently protected
against electromagnetic interference.

Exercise caution when handling

gas springs and accumulators
WARNING
Gas springs are under high pressure. Improper re-
moval results in an elevated risk of injury.
For ease of operation, various functions on the truck
can be supported by gas springs. Gas springs are
complex components that are subject to high inter-
nal pressures (up to 300 bar). They may under no
circumstances be opened unless instructed to do
so, and may be installed only when not under pres-
sure. If required, the authorised service centre will
depressurise the gas spring in accordance with the
regulations before removal. Gas springs must be
depressurised before recycling.
– Avoid damage, lateral forces, buckling, tempera-
tures over 80°C and heavy contamination.
– Damaged or defective gas springs must be
changed immediately.
– Contact the authorised service centre.

WARNING
Accumulators are under high pressure. Improper in-
stallation of an accumulator results in an elevated
risk of injury.
Before starting work on the accumulator it must be
depressurised.
– Contact the authorised service centre.

Length of the fork arms

DANGER
Risk of accident due to the incorrect selection of
fork arms!
– The fork arms must match the depth of the load.

If the fork arms are too short, the load may

fall off the arms after it has been picked up.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 59
2 Safety
Basic principles for safe operation

In addition, be aware that the load centre

of gravity may shift as a result of dynamic
forces, such as braking. A load that is other-
wise resting safely on the fork arms may move
forwards and fall.
If the fork arms are too long, they can catch
on loading units behind the load that is to be
picked up. These other loading units then fall
over when the load is raised.
– For help with selecting the correct fork
arms, contact the authorised service centre.

60 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Residual risk

Residual risk
Residual dangers, residual risks
DANGER
Risk of explosion in the event of fire or
smouldering!
In the worst case scenario, polluted,
damaged or defective components can
result in fire or smouldering.
If you smell fire:
– Immediately remove the truck from
the potentially explosive area and
park it safely.
– Initiate fire-fighting procedures.
– Inform the safety officer.

Despite careful working and compliance with

standards and regulations, the possibility of
other risks occurring when using the truck
cannot be entirely excluded.
The truck and all other system components
comply with current safety requirements. Nev-
ertheless, there remains a degree of residual
risk, even when the truck is used for its inten-
ded purpose and all instructions are followed.
A residual risk cannot be excluded even be-
yond the narrow danger area that the truck
itself represents. Persons in this area around
the truck must exercise a heightened degree
of awareness, so that they can react immedi-
ately in the event of any malfunction, incident
or breakdown etc.

WARNING
Ignorance of the potential danger presented by a
truck can lead to serious accidents!
All personnel working in the vicinity of the truck
must be instructed regarding the hazards that arise
through use of the truck.
In addition, please pay particular attention to the
safety regulations given in these operating instruc-
tions.
– Inform personnel working in the vicinity of the
truck of possible hazards.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 61
2 Safety
Residual risk

Risks can include:

● Escape of consumables due to leakages,

rupture of lines and containers etc.

● Risk of accident when driving over difficult

ground such as gradients, very smooth or

uneven surfaces, or areas with poor visibili-
ty etc.
● Falling, tripping etc. when moving on the

truck, especially in wet weather, with leak-

ing consumables or on icy surfaces
● Fire and risk of explosion caused by batter-

ies, electrical voltages and static discharges

through clothing
● Spark formation caused by truck parts (lift

mast, chassis, rear weight) striking against

part of the building (gates, racking etc.)
● Human error resulting from failure to ob-

serve the safety regulations

● Use of unapproved lighting devices in po-

tentially explosive areas

● Unrepaired damage or faulty and worn

components
● Insufficient maintenance and testing

● Use of incorrect consumables

● Exceeding test intervals

The manufacturer shall not be liable for acci-

dents involving the truck if these are due to
failure of the operating company to comply
with these regulations either intentionally or
due to negligence.

Stability
The stability of the truck has been tested to
the latest technological standards and is guar-
anteed if the truck is used properly and ac-
cording to its intended use. These standards
only take into account the dynamic and stat-
ic tipping forces that can arise when used in
accordance with the specified operating rules
and intended use. However, the danger of ex-
ceeding the moment of tilt due to improper use
or incorrect operation and losing stability can
never be excluded.
The loss of stability can be avoided or mini-
mised by the following actions:
– Always secure the load against slipping,
e.g. by lashing.

62 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Residual risk

– Always transport unstable loads in suitable

containers.
– Always drive slowly when cornering.
– Drive with the load lowered.
– Even with sideshifts, align the load as cen-
trally as possible with the truck and trans-
port in this position.
– Avoid turning and driving diagonally across
slopes or gradients.
– Never have the load facing downhill when
travelling on slopes or gradients.
– Do not transport swinging loads.
– Always take great care when transporting
suspended loads.
– Do not drive over ramp edges or steps.

Special risks associated with us-

ing the truck and attachments
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working within potentially explosive
areas with attachments that do not com-
ply with explosion-protection regulations
can lead to explosions in the surround-
ing atmosphere!
– Only operate attachments that com-
ply with the explosion-protection regu-
lations.
– Check the area of application by com-
paring with nameplate information on
the attachments.
– If the area of application is not clear,
ask a safety officer.

Approval from the manufacturer and attach-

ment manufacturer must be obtained each
time the truck is used in a manner that falls
outside the scope of normal use, and in cases
where the driver is not certain that he can
use the truck correctly and without the risk of
accidents.
It is essential that the safety officer gives ap-
proval before each use.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 63
2 Safety
Residual risk

Overview of hazards and countermeasures

NOTE
This table is intended to help evaluate the
hazards in your facility and applies to all drive
types. It does not claim to be complete.
– Observe the national regulations for the
country in which the truck is being used.

Hazard Course of action Check note Notes

√ done
- Not applicable
Truck equipment does Testing O If in doubt, consult the
not comply with local responsible factory in-
regulations spectorate or employ-
ers' liability insurance
association
Driver's lack of skills or Driver training (sit-on O DGUV principle
qualifications and stand-on) 308-001
VDI 3313 driver's li-
cence
Usage by unauthorised Access with key only O
persons for authorised persons
Truck not safe for op- Periodic inspection O German Ordinance on
eration and rectification of de- Industrial Safety and
fects Health (BetrSichV)
Risk of falling when us- Compliance with na- O German Ordinance on
ing working platforms tional regulations Industrial Safety and
(different national Health (BetrSichV) and
laws) employer's liability in-
surance associations
Impaired visibility due Application planning O German Ordinance on
to load Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV)
Contamination of Assessment of diesel O Technical Regulations
breathable air exhaust gases for Hazardous Sub-
stances (TRGS) 554
and the German Or-
dinance on Industri-
al Safety and Health
(BetrSichV)
Assessment of LPG O German threshold lim-
exhaust gases it values list (MAK-
Liste) and the German
Ordinance on Industri-
al Safety and Health
(BetrSichV)

64 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Residual risk

Hazard Course of action Check note Notes

√ done
- Not applicable
Impermissible usage Provide operating in- O German Ordinance on
(improper usage) structions Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV) and
German Health and
labour protection law
(ArbSchG)
Written notice of in- O German Ordinance on
struction to driver Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV) and
German Health and
labour protection law
(ArbSchG)
German Ordinance on O
Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV), ob-
serve the operating in-
structions
When fuelling
a) Diesel German Ordinance on O
Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV), ob-
serve the operating in-
structions
b) LPG DGUV regulation 79, O
observe the operating
instructions
When charging the German Ordinance on O VDE 0510-47
drive battery Industrial Safety and (= DIN EN 62485-3): In
Health (BetrSichV), ob- particular
serve the operating in- - Ensure adequate
structions ventilation
- Insulation value with-
in the permissible
range
When using battery German Ordinance on O German Ordinance on
chargers Industrial Safety and Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV), Health (BetrSichV) and
DGUV rule 113-001 DGUV rule 113-001
and observe the oper-
ating instructions
When parking LPG German Ordinance on O German Ordinance on
trucks Industrial Safety and Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV), Health (BetrSichV) and
DGUV rule 113-001

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 65
2 Safety
Residual risk

Hazard Course of action Check note Notes

√ done
- Not applicable
DGUV rule 113-001
and observe the oper-
ating instructions
When operating driverless transport systems
Roadway quality inad- Clean/clear roadways O German Ordinance on
equate Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV)
Loading equipment in- Reposition load on pal- O German Ordinance on
correct/slipped let Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV)
Unpredictable driving Employee training O German Ordinance on
behaviour Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV)
Routes blocked Mark routes O German Ordinance on
Keep roadways clear Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV)
Routes intersect Announce right-of-way O German Ordinance on
rule Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV)
No person detection Employee training O German Ordinance on
when placing goods in- Industrial Safety and
to stock and removing Health (BetrSichV)
goods from stock

Danger to employees
According to the German Ordinance on In-
dustrial Safety and Health (BetrSichV) and
labour protection law (ArbSchG), the operat-
ing company must determine and assess haz-
ards during operation, and establish the labour
protection measures required for employees
(BetrSichVO). The operating company must
therefore draw up appropriate operating in-
structions (§ 6 ArbSchG) and nominate a per-
son who is responsible for these operating
instructions. Drivers must be informed of the
operating instructions that apply to them.

NOTE
Please note the definition of the following re-
sponsible persons: "operating company" and
"driver".

66 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Residual risk

The design and equipment of the truck comply

with the standards and directives required for
CE conformity. The design and equipment al-
so comply with the standards and directives
necessary for the UKCA compliance that is
required in the United Kingdom. The design
and equipment are therefore not part of the
required scope of the hazard assessment. The
same applies to attachments with their own
CE labelling and UKCA labelling. The operat-
ing company must, however, select the type
and equipment of the trucks so as to comply
with the local provisions for deployment.
The result of the hazard assessment must
be documented (§ 6 ArbSchG). In the case
of truck applications involving similar hazard
situations, the results may be summarised.
Refer to the chapter entitled "Overview of haz-
ards and countermeasures", which provides
advice on complying with this regulation. The
overview specifies the primary hazards that,
in the event of non-compliance, are the most
frequent causes of accidents. If other major
hazards are present as a result of the specific
operating conditions, these hazards must also
be taken into consideration.
The conditions of use for trucks are broadly
similar in many plants, so the hazards can be
summarised in one overview. Observe the in-
formation provided by the relevant employers'
liability insurance association on this subject.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 67
2 Safety
Safety tests

Safety tests
Carrying out regular inspections 
on the truck
The operating company must ensure that the
truck is checked by a specialist at least once a
year or after particular incidents.
As part of this inspection, the technical condi-
tion of the truck must be completely tested
with regard to accident safety. In addition, the
truck must be thoroughly checked for damage
that may have been caused by improper use.
A test log must be created. The results of the
inspection must be retained at least until a
further two inspections have been carried out.
The inspection date is indicated by an adhe-
sive label on the truck.
– Arrange for the authorised service centre to
perform regular testing on the truck.
– Observe the guidelines for tests carried out
on the truck in accordance with FEM 4.004.
The operating company is responsible for en-
suring that any defects are remedied without
delay.
– Notify your authorised service centre.

NOTE
In addition, observe the national regulations
for the country of use.

68 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Safety tests

Explosion-protection checks 

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
The operating company (refer to the
"Definition of responsible persons - Op-
-Prüfung
erating company") is responsible for its
working equipment in accordance with wurde durchgeführt
the German Ordinance on Industrial letzte Prüfung
Safety and Health (BetrSichV). It is the
operating company's responsibility to en-
sure that tests and repairs are carried
out properly.

Each truck for use in potentially explosive

areas must be checked regularly in accord-
ance with FEM 4.004; see the chapter entitled
"Regular safety inspection of the truck".
Regular testing for trucks used in potentially
explosive areas must be carried out in accord-
ance with the German Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health once every three years by
a competent person; see also "Definition of re-
sponsible persons - Competent person". How-
ever, as a manufacturer, STILL recommends Nächste Prüfung
that this test is carried out annually. If the truck
is subject to harsh application conditions, the
interval between tests must be shortened.
Create a test log. The results of the inspection 6036_003-056

must be retained at least until a further two

inspections have been carried out.
The inspection date is indicated by an adhe-
sive label on the truck.
– Have regular explosion-protection checks
carried out on the truck.
– Observe the guidelines for carrying out
checks on the truck in accordance with
FEM 4.004.
The operating company is responsible for en-
suring that any defects are remedied without
delay.
– Notify the authorised service centre.
– Observe the national regulations for the
country in which the truck is being used.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 69
2 Safety
Safety tests

Testing the electrical system

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Trucks to be used in potentially explo-
sive areas are designed for certain ex-
plosion groups, categories and temper-
ature ranges. In potentially explosive
areas, trucks that do not meet explosion-
protection regulations may lead to explo-
sions in the surrounding atmosphere.
– Only use trucks with an electrical sys-
tem that complies with the valid ex-
plosion protection directives.
– The proper condition of the electrical
system of trucks used in potentially
explosive areas must be monitored
continuously by a competent person.
– Observe the explosion-protection reg-
ulations.

The scope of the checks is described in the

"workshop manual".
A test log book is to be kept if requested by
the responsible authority.
– Only a competent person may perform sys-
tem testing.
– Observe the national regulations for the
country in which the truck is being used.

Insulation testing
The insulation of the truck must have sufficient
insulation resistance. For this reason, insula-
tion testing in accordance with DIN EN 1175
and DIN 43539, VDE 0117 and VDE 0510
must be conducted at least once yearly as
part of the FEM testing.
The insulation testing results must be at least
the test values given in the following two ta-
bles.
– For insulation testing, contact the author-
ised service centre.
The exact procedure for this insulation testing
is described in the workshop manual for this
truck.

70 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Safety tests

NOTE
The truck's electrical system and drive batter-
ies must be checked separately.

Test values for the drive battery

Recommended Nominal volt-
Component Measurements Test values
test voltage age UBatt
50 VDC 24 volts > 1200 Ω
Batt+
Battery 100 VDC Battery tray 48 volts > 2400 Ω
Batt-
100 VDC 80 volts > 4000 Ω

Test values for the entire truck

Nominal volt- Minimum values over the
Test voltage Test values for new trucks
age duration of the service life
24 volts 50 VDC Min. 50 kΩ > 24 kΩ
48 volts 100 VDC Min. 100 kΩ > 48 kΩ
80 volts 100 VDC Min. 200 kΩ > 80 kΩ

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 71
2 Safety
Safety regulations for handling consumables

Safety regulations for handling consumables

Permissible consumables
WARNING
Consumables can be dangerous!
– Observe general information and safety informa-
tion regarding the use of consumables.

– Refer to the chapter entitled "Safety regula-

tions for handling consumables".
– Note the safety datasheets provided by the
manufacturer of the consumables in ques-
tion.
– Only use consumables that are approved
for use with this truck. The permissible con-
sumables can be found in the maintenance
data table.

Oils
DANGER
Oils are flammable!
– Follow the statutory regulations.
– Do not allow oils to come into contact
with hot engine parts.
– No smoking, fires or naked flames!

DANGER
Oils are toxic!
– Avoid contact and consumption.
– If vapour or fumes are inhaled, move
to fresh air immediately.
– In the event of contact with the eyes,
rinse thoroughly (for at least 10 mi-
nutes) with water and then consult an
eye specialist.
– If swallowed, do not induce vomiting.
Seek immediate medical attention.

72 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Safety regulations for handling consumables

WARNING
Prolonged intensive contact with the skin
can result in dryness and irritate the
skin!
– Avoid contact and consumption.
– Wear protective gloves.
– After any contact, wash the skin with
soap and water, and then apply a skin
care product.
– Immediately change soaked clothing
and shoes.

WARNING
There is a risk of slipping on spilled oil, particularly
when combined with water!
– Spilt oil should be removed immediately with oil-
binding agents and disposed of according to the
regulations.

ENVIRONMENT NOTE

Oil is a water-polluting substance!

● Always store oil in containers that comply

with the applicable regulations.

● Avoid spilling oils.

● Spilt oil should be removed immediately

with oil-binding agents and disposed of ac-

cording to the regulations.
● Dispose of old oils according to the regula-

tions.

Hydraulic fluid
WARNING
These fluids are pressurised during op-
eration of the truck and are hazardous to
your health.
– Do not spill the fluids.
– Follow the statutory regulations.
– Do not allow the fluids to come into
contact with hot engine parts.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 73
2 Safety
Safety regulations for handling consumables

WARNING
These fluids are pressurised during op-
eration of the truck and are hazardous to
your health.
– Do not allow the fluids to come into
contact with the skin.
– Avoid inhaling spray.
– Penetration of pressurised fluids into
the skin is particularly dangerous if
these fluids escape at high pressure
due to leaks in the hydraulic system.
In case of such injury, immediate
medical assistance is required.
– To avoid injury, use appropriate per-
sonal protective equipment (e.g. pro-
tective gloves, industrial goggles, skin
protection and skin care products).

ENVIRONMENT NOTE

Hydraulic fluid is a water-polluting substance.

● Always store hydraulic fluid in containers

that comply with regulations

● Avoid spills

● Spilt hydraulic fluid should be removed im-

mediately with oil-binding agents and dis-

posed of according to the regulations
● Dispose of old hydraulic fluid according to

the regulations

Battery acid
WARNING
Battery acid contains dissolved sulphuric
acid. This is toxic.
– Avoid touching or swallowing the bat-
tery acid at all costs.
– In case of injury, seek medical advice
immediately.

74 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Safety regulations for handling consumables

WARNING
Battery acid contains dissolved sulphuric
acid. This is corrosive.
– When working with battery acid,
use appropriate PSA (rubber gloves,
apron, protection goggles).
– When working with battery acid, nev-
er wear a watch or jewellery.
– Do not allow any acid to get onto
clothing or skin or into the eyes. If this
does happen, rinse immediately with
plenty of clean water.
– In case of injury, seek medical advice
immediately.
– Immediately rinse away spilt battery
acid with plenty of water.
– Follow the statutory regulations.

ENVIRONMENT NOTE

– Dispose of used battery acid in line with the

applicable regulations.

Disposal of consumables
ENVIRONMENT NOTE

Materials that accumulate during repair, main-

tenance and cleaning must be collected prop-
erly and disposed of in accordance with the
national regulations for the country in which
the truck is being used. Work must only be
carried out in areas designated for the pur-
pose. Care must be taken to minimise any
environmental pollution.
– Soak up any spilt fluids such as hydraulic
oil, brake fluid or gearbox oil using an oil-
binding agent.
– Neutralise any spilt battery acid immediate-
ly.
– Always observe national regulations con-
cerning the disposal of used oil.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 75
2 Safety
Emissions

Emissions
The values specified apply to a standard truck
(compare the specifications in the "Technical
data" chapter). Different tyres, lift masts, addi-
tional units etc. may produce different values.

Noise emissions
The values were determined based on meas-
uring procedures from the standard EN 12053
"Safety of industrial trucks - Test methods
for measuring noise emissions", based on
EN 12001, EN ISO 3744 and the requirements
of EN ISO 4871.
This machine emits the following sound pres-
sure level:

Continuous sound pressure level in the driv-

er's compartment
Measurement uncer-
LpAZ
tainty KpA
67 4 dB(A)

The values were determined in the test cycle

on an identical machine from the weighted val-
ues for operating statuses and idling.
Time proportions:
● Lifting 18%

● Idling 58%

● Driving 24%

However, the indicated noise levels at the

truck cannot be used to determine the noise
emissions at workplaces according to the
most recent version of Directive 2003/10/EC
(daily personal noise pollution). If necessary,
these noise emissions must be determined
by the operating company directly at the work-
places under the actual conditions there (addi-
tional noise sources, special application condi-
tions, sound reflections).
Observe the applicable national regulations in
non-EU countries.

NOTE
Please note the definition of the following re-
sponsible person: "operating company".

76 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Safety 2
Emissions

Vibrations
The vibrations of the machine have been de-
termined on an identical machine in accord-
ance with the standards DIN EN 13059 "Safe-
ty of industrial trucks - Test methods for meas-
uring vibration" and DIN EN 12096 "Mechani-
cal vibration - Declaration and verification of
vibration emission values".

Frequency-weighted effective value of accel-

eration on the seat
Uncertainty of meas-
MSG 65 driver's seat
urement
< 0.5 m/s2 0.17

Tests have indicated that the amplitude of the

hand and arm vibrations on the steering wheel
or on the operating devices in the truck is less
than 2.5 m/s2. There are therefore no meas-
urement guidelines for these measurements.
The personal vibration load on the driver over
a working day must be determined by the op-
erating company at the actual place of use in
accordance with Directive 2002/44/EC, in or-
der to consider all additional influences, such
as driving route, intensity of use etc.
Observe the applicable national regulations in
non-EU countries.

NOTE
Please note the definition of the following re-
sponsible person: "operating company".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 77
2 Safety
Emissions

Battery
DANGER
Risk of explosion due to flammable
gases!
During charging, the lead-acid battery
releases a mixture of oxygen and hydro-
gen (oxyhydrogen gas). This gas mixture
is explosive and must not be ignited.
– Make sure that there is always suffi-
cient ventilation in working areas that
are entirely or partially enclosed.
– Keep away from open flames and fly-
ing sparks.
– Do not smoke.
– Observe the safety regulations for
handling the battery.

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
When handling or charging batteries in
potentially explosive areas, spark forma-
tion or overheating can lead to explo-
sions in the surrounding atmosphere.
No work may be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas.
– Charge batteries only outside of po-
tentially explosive areas.

Radiation
In accordance with the guide-
lines DIN EN 62471:2009-03
(VDE 0837-471:2009-03), the STILL Safety-
Light and the warning zone light (variant) are
assigned to risk group 2 (medium risk) due to
their photobiological hazard potential.

78 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
 3

Overviews
3 Overviews
Overview

Overview

6301_003-020

80 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Overviews 3
Overview

1 Lift mast 8 Fork carriage

2 Overhead guard 9 Lift cylinder
3 Driver's compartment 10 Rear lighting
4 Battery (in the battery compartment) 11 Battery door
5 Drive axle with traction motors 12 Steering axle
6 Front lighting 13 Towing device
7 Fork arms 14 Counterweight

NOTE
In the category 2 version, a flame proof en-
closure is located on the counterweight (14).

NOTE
The truck equipment may differ from the
equipment shown.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 81
3 Overviews
Driver's compartment

Driver's compartment

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

19
18
9
17

16
15
14

13
10
12

11

6301_901-003_V2

82 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Overviews 3
Driver's compartment

1 Handle Battery isolating switch

2 Parking brake 11 The battery isolating switch can also be
3 Steering wheel used as a turn version.
4 Emergency off switch 12 Driver's seat
5 Key switch or pushbutton 13 Accelerator pedal
6 Compartment 14 Brake pedal
7 Screen wash pump button (category-2 15 Bottom plate
version) Pneumatic signal horn
8 Display-operating unit "STILL Easy Control" 16 The pneumatic horn is only available on cat-
9 Operating devices for hydraulic and drive egory-2 trucks.
functions 17 Steering column adjustment lever
10 Compartment for storing the operating in- 18 Reset button
structions and the hexagon socket wrench 19 Explosion-protection warning lights
for emergency lowering

In explosion-protected trucks, the plastic parts

are coated with a special antistatic paint
that prevents the build-up of an electrostatic
charge. The protected areas are identified with
the decal information "ELECTRICALLY CON-
DUCTIVE".

NOTE
The truck equipment may differ from the
equipment shown.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 83
3 Overviews
Shelves

Shelves

6219_901-015_V3

WARNING
Risk of accident caused by blocked pedals!
Objects may fall into the footwell during travel as a
result of steering or braking. They can slip between
and under the pedals (3, 4). They then block the
pedals. It may then not be possible to brake the truck
when necessary.
– Only store objects that fit on the shelves(1, 2).
– Make sure that objects cannot fall from the
shelves (1, 2) when the truck sets off, is steered
or braked.

84 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Overviews 3
Shelves

The truck is equipped with a compartment

(2) for the operating instructions and the hex-
agon socket wrench for emergency lowering.
The safety officer must decide whether the
operating instructions and the hexagon socket
wrench may be carried in potentially explosive
areas.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 85
3 Overviews
Operating devices and display elements

Operating devices and display elements

Display-operating unit "STILL Easy Control"

432 h 08:20
1,6 t
7°
2,71 m

12 km/h

6219_003-003_V5

1 Softkeys 9 Lift height restriction

2 Left-hand favourites bar 10 Automatic mast vertical positioning
3 Selected drive programme with driving dy- 11 Menu button
namics display 12 Scrolling buttons
4 Blue-Q symbol 13 "Right" turn indicator display
5 Load information (variants): 14 Back button
Load measurement 15 Main display button
Lift-mast tilt angle 16 Driving speed or parking brake
Lift height 17 "Left" turn indicator display
Bar display 18 "Reverse" drive direction indicator
6 Status bar: battery charge, operating hours, 19 "Forward" drive direction indicator
time 20 Display for direction of movement of the
7 Selected load programme with load dynam- truck
ics display 21 Brightness sensor
8 Right-hand favourites bar

"STILL Easy Control" is a third-generation dis-

play-operating unit for industrial trucks.
It is used as an operating device for the usu-
al functions of the truck, such as controlling
lighting and windscreen wiper functions and
adjusting the driving dynamics.

86 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Overviews 3
Operating devices and display elements

It also shows information about the status of

the truck, such as the battery charge level,
display messages and operating hours.
The displays shown in this figure are exam-
ples. The display-operating unit provides fur-
ther display options that can be configured by
the driver or fleet manager.
– For information about the other display op-
tions, see the original operating instructions
entitled "STILL Easy Control display-operat-
ing unit".
The display-operating unit is attached to the
armrest, except in trucks equipped with mul-
ti-lever operation. If the truck is equipped
with multi-lever operation, the display-operat-
ing unit is swivel-mounted on the right A-pillar.
– For information on swivelling the display-op-
erating unit, see the section entitled "Adjust-
ing the swivelling display-operating unit" in
the chapter entitled "Checks and tasks be-
fore daily use".

NOTE
Do not put a label over the brightness sen-
sor (21) or cover it with anything. This sensor
allows the display to adapt to the current light
conditions.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 87
3 Overviews
Operating devices and display elements

Explosion-protection warning 
lights 1

DANGER
Risk of explosion! 2
During operation, the surface tempera-
tures and insulation values of various
components are monitored by sensors.
– Do not operate the truck when a
warning light is illuminated. 3

The explosion-protection warning lights are lo-

cated on the left-hand post, in the driver's field
of view. The warning lights indicate when limit 4
values are reached. 6219_901-017

1 Temperature of the right-hand trac-

tion motor
2 Temperature of the left-hand traction
motor
3 Pump motor temperature
4 Insulation warning light

NOTE
The explosion-protection light insulation
warning is not present in category 3 trucks.
– See the section on "Behaviour when the ex-
plosion-protection warning lights are illumi-
nated" in the "Display messages" chapter.

Battery isolating switch

The battery isolating switch (1) is located on
the right next to the storage compartment.
It disconnects the electrical system from the
power supply.
Use this switch to shut down the truck safely.
The battery isolating switch must be labelled
in the language of the country in which it is
being used. Only the authorised service centre
may change the labelling.
There are two versions of the battery isolating
switch, depending on the version of the truck.

88 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Overviews 3
Operating devices and display elements

Push-and-turn version 

6219_901-018_

Turn version 

NOTE
This battery isolating switch can be secured
in the "OFF" position by using a lead seal or 1
a padlock to prevent the switch from being
actuated without authorisation.

6219_901-006_V2

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 89
3 Overviews
Operating devices and display elements

Emergency off switch 

The emergency off switch (1) is situated on

the right-hand side of the steering column. It
disconnects the drives from the power supply.
Do not use this switch to park the truck safely.

Reset button 
1
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Only the safety officer is authorised to
order the reset button to be pressed.
They must use a suitable measuring de-
vice to determine that there is not a po-
tentially explosive mixture of air in the
area around the truck. Only then may
the truck be driven out of the potentially
explosive area.

The Reset button (1) is located to the left of

the steering column. If the truck has switch-
ed off automatically, this key allows the truck 6219_901-007

to be manoeuvred out of the danger zone.

Only the safety officer may decide whether
the truck can be removed from the potentially
explosive area. See also the "Automatic emer-
gency shutdown" section in the chapter enti-
tled "Procedure in emergencies".
The Reset button must be labelled in the
language of the country in which it is being
used. Only the authorised service centre may
change the labelling.

90 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Overviews 3
Operating devices and display elements

Multi-lever operation

1 6
4
3

6219_003-004_V3

1 Drive direction switch 6 Operating lever for attachments (variant)

2 "Lift/lower" operating lever 7 Function key for the "5th or 6th function"
3 "Tilt" operating lever (variants)
4 Operating lever for attachments (variant) 8 Signal horn button
5 Function key for the "5th function" (variant)

NOTE
In the dual-pedal version (variant), the drive
direction switch (1) is used exclusively to acti-
vate the cruise control function (variant). The
drive direction is selected exclusively via the
pedals in the dual-pedal version.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 91
3 Overviews
Operating devices and display elements

Double mini-lever

1 Drive direction switch 5 "F1" function key

2 Cross lever "Attachments" 6 "Lift mast" 360° lever
3 Function key for the "5th function" 7 Display field for the hydraulic functions
4 Signal horn button

92 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Overviews 3
Operating devices and display elements

NOTE
● In the dual-pedal version (variant), the drive
direction switch (1) is used exclusively to
activate the cruise control function (variant).
The drive direction is selected exclusively
via the pedals in the dual-pedal version.
● The authorised service centre can assign
different functions to the "F1" function
key (5).

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 93
3 Overviews
Operating devices and display elements

Triple mini-lever

1 Drive direction switch 5 Signal horn button

2 "Auxiliary hydraulics 1" operating lever 6 "F1" function key
3 "Auxiliary hydraulics 2" operating lever 7 "Lift mast" 360° lever
4 Function key for the "5th function" 8 Display field for the hydraulic functions

94 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Overviews 3
Operating devices and display elements

NOTE
● In the dual-pedal version (variant), the drive
direction switch (1) is used exclusively to
activate the cruise control function (variant).
The drive direction is selected exclusively
via the pedals in the dual-pedal version.
● The authorised service centre can assign
different functions to the "F1" function
key (6).

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 95
3 Overviews
Operating devices and display elements

Quadruple mini-lever

1 Drive direction switch 6 Signal horn button

2 "Tilt" operating lever 7 "F1" function key
3 "Auxiliary hydraulics 1" operating lever 8 "Lift/lower" operating lever
4 "Auxiliary hydraulics 2" operating lever 9 Display field for the hydraulic functions
5 Function key for the "5th function"

96 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Overviews 3
Operating devices and display elements

NOTE
● In the dual-pedal version (variant), the drive
direction switch (1) is used exclusively to
activate the cruise control function (variant).
The drive direction is selected exclusively
via the pedals in the dual-pedal version.
● The authorised service centre can assign
different functions to the "F1" function
key (7).

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 97
3 Overviews
Operating devices and display elements

Fingertip

11 1
10 2
3
4
9

8 5

7 6

1 Signal horn button 7 Drive direction switch

2 LED for the "5th function" 8 "Lift/lower" operating lever
3 Function key for the "5th function" 9 "Tilt" operating lever
4 LED for the "Clamp release" 10 "F1" function key
5 Operating lever for "Auxiliary hydraulics 1" 11 LED for "F1"
6 Operating lever for "Auxiliary hydraulics 2"

NOTE
● In the dual-pedal version (variant), the drive
direction switch (7) is used exclusively to
activate the cruise control function (variant).
The drive direction is selected exclusively
via the pedals in the dual-pedal version.
● The authorised service centre can assign
different functions to the "F1" function
key (10).

98 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Overviews 3
Operating devices and display elements

Joystick 4Plus

9
1

6
2

+ F
3
5

4 6219_003-210_V2

1 Horizontal rocker button for the "3rd and 5 LED for the "clamp release" (variant)
4th hydraulic function": tilting the lift mast 6 Slider for the "4th hydraulic function"
2 Pictograms for the hydraulic functions: lift- 7 Vertical rocker button for the "drive direction"
ing, lowering and sideshift 8 Shift key "F"
3 Pictograms for the 5th hydraulic function and 9 Signal horn button
for the clamp locking mechanism (variant)
4 Pictograms for the 3rd and 4th hydraulic
function

NOTE
● In the dual-pedal version (variant), the ver-
tical "drive direction" rocker button (7) is
used exclusively to activate the cruise con-
trol function (variant). The drive direction is
selected exclusively via the pedals in the
dual-pedal version.
● The authorised service centre can assign
different functions to the shift key "F" (8),
e.g. switchover of the control axles for ac-
tuation of the 5th hydraulic function.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 99
3 Overviews
Operating devices and display elements

Travel direction selector and in- 

dicator module (variant)
The travel direction selector and indicator
module is located on the steering column be-
low the steering wheel.

NOTE
If the drive direction switch on the operating
device is defective and the truck stops in a
danger area, the drive direction selection lever
on the travel direction selector and indicator
module can be used for emergency driving.
Refer to the section entitled "Emergency driv-
ing via the drive direction switch/drive direction
selection lever" in the chapter entitled "Proce-
dure in emergencies". 1 Drive direction selection lever
2 Turn indicator switch

100 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

 4

Operation
4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use

Checks and tasks before daily use

Visual inspections and function checking
WARNING
Risk of injury from falling off the truck!
When climbing onto the truck, there is
a risk of getting stuck or slipping and
falling. Use suitable equipment to reach
higher points on the truck.
– Use only the steps provided for this
purpose to climb onto the truck.
– Use equipment such as stepladders
or platforms to reach inaccessible
areas.

Damage to the truck or the attachment (var- 

iant), non-functional switches or safety sys-
tems and modification of predefined set val-
ues can lead to unpredictable and dangerous
situations. To ensure that the truck is operat-
ed safely, the visual inspections and function
checking must be carried out before daily use.
The components that must be checked and
their check points are listed in the following
table. If damage or other defects are identified
on the truck or the attachment (variant) during
the following inspections, the truck must not
be used until it has been properly repaired.
Damage or other defects must be reported to
the supervisor or the responsible fleet manag-
er immediately so that repairs by the author-
ised service centre can be arranged.
Fork arms and roller tracks

Ensure that the truck is safe for operation each day before it is used:
Component Course of action
Perform a visual inspection to check for deformation
and wear (e.g. to check if they are bent, broken or
feature significant wear).
Check the condition and function of the safety devi-
ces (1) to prevent lifting and shifting.
Fork arms, general lifting accessories Check that fork arms and, where applicable, fork
extensions with a special cladding specifically for
explosion protection are fitted.
The minimum thickness of the cladding must be at
least 1 mm at every point.
See the section entitled "Checking the fork arms".
Roller tracks (2) Make sure that there is a film of grease.

102 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Checks and tasks before daily use

Component Course of action

Perform a visual inspection to ensure that the
Load chains chains are intact and have adequate and even ten-
sion.
Ensure that the attachments are mounted correctly
in accordance with the operating instructions from
the manufacturer.
Attachments (variant) Perform a visual inspection to ensure that the at-
tachments are intact and are leak-tight.
Perform checks to ensure that the attachments are
working correctly.
Perform a visual inspection for damage and leak-
Lift cylinders, tilt cylinders, tank, valve ages.
block, hoses, pipes, connections Have damaged components replaced by the author-
ised service centre.
Check the area under the truck for leaking consum-
Underside
ables.
Perform a visual inspection for wear and damage.
Make sure that only rims of the same type from the
same manufacturer are fitted.
Wheels, tyres
In the event of uneven tyre wear, replace both tyres.
Observe the safety regulations in the section enti-
tled "Tyres".
Make sure that no consumables are escaping from
the axle.
Check that the temperature sensors and wiring
on the traction motor/pump motor are in good condi-
tion and are securely attached.
Axle
The electric cables and line inlets must be free
from damage.
The total damage to the antistatic paintwork
and seat covering must amount to no more than
100 cm2.
Check that the truck is working correctly.
Brake system See the section "Checking the brake system for cor-
rect function".
Perform a visual inspection for integrity.
Overhead guard, guard grille (variant)
Check for secure mounting.
Make sure that they are clean (free of ice, not slip-
Steps
pery).
Perform a visual inspection for integrity.
Panes of glass (variant)
Make sure that they are clean (also free of ice).
Handholds Check for secure mounting.
Maintenance lids Check the close function and close the lid.
Make sure that there are no unused bores in the
Battery hood
battery hood.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 103

4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use

Component Course of action

Perform a visual inspection for integrity and defor-
mation.
Check that the interlock is in good condition and is
Battery door
working correctly.
Check the close function.
Close.
Check that the interlock is in good condition and is
working correctly.
Battery Lock the battery.
Ensure that the battery is approved for use in
potentially explosive areas.
Inspect the battery male connector and the plug
connection for moisture or any foreign objects that
may have become lodged and remove as necessa-
ry, e.g. using compressed air.
Battery male connector and plug connec-
Perform a visual inspection for integrity and de-
tion
formation.
Check the contacts.
Have damaged battery male connectors replaced
by the authorised service centre.
Make sure that only a coupling pin that is ap-
proved for use in potentially explosive areas is
used.
Perform a visual inspection for deformation and
wear (for example: bent, torn, broken).
Check the securing bush in the counterweight for
Coupling pin, tow coupling (variant) integrity and to ensure that it is working correctly.
Check that the linchpin is present and working cor-
rectly (chain, rope, split pin).
If coupling and decoupling operations are carried
out more frequently than two to three times per shift,
relubricate the automatic tow coupling (variant) at
the lubricating nipple.
Check that labels are present and intact/legible.
Labelling, adhesive labels Replace damaged or missing adhesive labels in ac-
cordance with the section entitled "Labelling points".
Driver's seat, seat belt Check the integrity and function.
Check the function of the "assistance systems" lis-
Display-operating unit: assistance systems ted in the menu. Refer to the section entitled "Func-
tion checking of assistance systems".
Check the integrity and function.
Lighting, warning units
Check the setting of the warning zone light.

104 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Checks and tasks before daily use

Component Course of action

To activate all available hydraulic functions once,
actuate all hydraulic operating devices once.
As a general rule:
If hydraulic valves have not been operated for a
long time, their function may be impaired. This
applies regardless of the type and design of the
hydraulic valves.
This is especially true for hydraulic functions for at-
Working hydraulics tachments that are not used frequently. Even if the
attachment is not currently mounted, operate these
hydraulic functions as well.
With swivelling display-operating unit and Joy-
stick 4Plus:
Make sure that the safety system to enable the hy-
draulic functions is working properly. See also the
section "Adjusting the swivelling display-operating
unit (variant)" in this chapter.
Perform a visual inspection for integrity.
Ensure cleanliness.
Make sure that the antistatic belt(3) is still long
Antistatic belt (3), corona electrode (4)
enough to touch the ground in all situations.
(See the following illustration.)
The discharge wires of the corona electrode (4)
must not touch the ground. The wires discharge the
energy to the air.

Depending on the tyres used, the truck 

is fitted with one or more antistatic belts (3)
and/or with a corona electrode (4). These
components ensure that the truck cannot
charge statically.
– Do not use the truck if there is any damage
or defects.
– In this case, contact your authorised service 3
centre.
Any other necessary tasks are summarised
under their own headings, e.g. adjusting the
driver's seat.
4
DANGER
Insufficient explosion protection carries
a risk of explosion! Antistatic belt and corona electrode
If the explosion-protection com-
ponents/explosive-material protective
measures are defective or no longer
present, do not operate the truck in po-
tentially explosive areas.
– Notify the authorised service centre.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 105

4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use

Climbing into and out of the

truck
WARNING
Risk of injury when climbing into and out of the truck
due to slipping, striking parts of the truck or becom-
ing stuck!
If the footwell cover is very dirty or smeared with
oil, there is a risk of slipping. There is also a risk of
hitting your head on the post of the overhead guard
or of your clothes becoming stuck when climbing out
of the truck.
– Ensure that the footwell cover is not slippery.
– Do not jump into or out of the truck.
– Ensure that you have a secure grip on the truck.

WARNING
Risk of injury when jumping out of the truck!
If your clothing or jewellery (e.g. watch, ring etc.) be-
comes stuck on a component while you are jumping
into or out of the truck, this can lead to serious inju-
ries (from falling, loss of fingers etc.). It is forbidden
to jump out of the truck.
– Do not jump out of the truck.
– Do not wear jewellery at work.
– Do not wear loose-fitting workwear.

CAUTION
Components may become damaged through incor-
rect use!
Truck components, such as the driver's seat, steer-
ing wheel etc., are not designed to be used for climb-
ing in and out of the truck and may be damaged due
to misuse.
– Only use the fittings specifically designed for the
purpose of climbing into and out of the truck.

106 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Checks and tasks before daily use

To assist with climbing into and out of the 

truck, use the step (1), use the footwell (2)
as a step and use the handle (4) for support.
The post of the overhead guard (3) can also
be used for support.
Always climb into the truck facing forwards:
– Grip the handle (4) with your left hand and
do not let go.
– Place your left foot on the step (1).
– Climb into the truck with your right foot and
sit down on the driver's seat (5).
– Next, place your left foot into the foot-
well (2).
Always climb out of the truck backwards:
6301_003-005_V2

– Grip the handle (4) with your left hand and

do not let go.
– Stand up from the driver's seat (5) and
place your left foot on the step (1).
– Climb out of the truck right foot first.

Climbing in and out of trucks

when the driver's compartment
is raised (variant)
WARNING
Risk of injury when climbing into and out of the truck
due to slipping, striking parts of the truck or becom-
ing stuck!
If the footwell cover is very dirty or smeared with
oil, there is a risk of slipping. There is also a risk of
hitting your head on the post of the overhead guard
or of your clothes becoming stuck when climbing out
of the truck.
– Ensure that the footwell cover is not slippery.
– Do not jump into or out of the truck.
– Ensure that you have a secure grip on the truck.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 107

4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use

WARNING
Risk of injury when jumping out of the truck!
If your clothing or jewellery (e.g. watch, ring etc.) be-
comes stuck on a component while you are jumping
into or out of the truck, this can lead to serious inju-
ries (from falling, loss of fingers etc.). It is forbidden
to jump out of the truck.
– Do not jump out of the truck.
– Do not wear jewellery at work.
– Do not wear loose-fitting workwear.

CAUTION
Components may become damaged through incor-
rect use!
Truck components, such as the driver's seat, steer-
ing wheel etc., are not designed to be used for climb-
ing in and out of the truck and may be damaged due
to misuse.
– Only use the fittings specifically designed for the
purpose of climbing into and out of the truck.

NOTE
The foot that the driver starts with when climb-
ing into and out of the truck is crucial in ensur-
ing that this action is executed safely. This will
depend on the number of steps.
For assistance when climbing into and out of 
the truck, use the handles (2) and (4) for sup-
port. The overhead guard post (1) can also be
used for support.
Always climb into the truck facing forward:
– If the truck has a driver's cab, open the driv-
er's door.
– Grip the handle (2) with your left hand and
do not let go.
– Grip the handle (4) with your right hand and
do not let go.
– Place your right foot on the bottom step (5).
– Place your left foot on the top step (6).
– Place your right foot in the footwell (7).
– Enter the truck and sit down on the driver's
seat (3).
– Close the driver's door where relevant.

108 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Checks and tasks before daily use

Always climb out of the truck backwards:

– If the truck has a driver's cab, open the driv-
er's door.
– Grip the handle (2) with your left hand and
do not let go.
– Stand up from the driver's seat and place
your left foot on the top step (6).
– Grip the handle (4) with your right hand and
do not let go.
– Place your right foot on the bottom step (5).
– Place your left foot on the ground and climb
down from the truck.

Safety information regarding

electrostatic charge
DANGER
Risk of explosion due to static charge!
– Always wear an antistatic protection
suit when working in a potentially ex-
plosive area.
This seat is covered in electrically con-
ductive material. This material is electri-
cally bonded to the truck earth.
– Do not put any additional covers, e.g.
blankets or furs, on the seat.

Adjusting the driver's seat and

armrest
Adjusting the driver's seat and armrest is one
of the checks and tasks that must be per-
formed before daily use. The truck can only
be operated safely when the seat position is
correct.
– Refer to the following chapter entitled "Driv-
er's seat".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 109

4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use

Adjusting the steering column 

– Pull up and hold the lever (2) for steering

column adjustment.
– Position the steering column (1), then push
the lever down again and allow the steering
column to engage. 1
DANGER
Risk of accident!
– Ensure that the steering column is positioned se-
curely.
The steering column must click into place.
Never adjust the steering column while driving.
2
6219_003-012_V2

Switching on the battery isolat-

ing switch
Push-and-turn version 
– Turn the battery isolating switch (1) clock-
wise until it unlocks.

6219_901-018_

110 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Checks and tasks before daily use

Turn version 
– Turn the battery isolating switch (1) in a
clockwise direction to the "ON" position.

6219_901-006_V2

Adjusting the swivelling display-

operating unit (variant)
Depending on the equipment, the swivelling
display-operating unit can be located in the
following positions:
● On the right-hand A-pillar

● On a cross beam in the centre at the front

of the driver's cab

The display-operating unit can be swivelled
from the neutral position to 15° to the left,
right, up and down. The unit cannot rotate
around its own axis.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 111

4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use

To change the resistance for adjusting the dis- 

play-operating unit, there are two socket head
screws (2) on the support for the display-op- 1
erating unit. The hexagon socket wrench for
emergency lowering can be used to loosen or 2
tighten the socket head screws (2).
– Loosen the socket head screws (2) as re-
quired.
– Hold the display-operating unit (1) in place.
– Adjust the display-operating unit (1) so that
it can be read without glare.
– Tighten the socket head screws (2) as re- 2
quired.
6219_003-235

NOTE
If the angle of the display-operating unit
changes during driving, tighten the socket
head screws. This makes the display-operat-
ing unit more secure in the support mounting.

Special instructions if the truck is equip-

ped with the Joystick 4Plus
If the display-operating unit is set in posi-
tion, the Joystick 4Plus can be accidentally
touched.
In order to prevent unwanted movements of
the lift mast, the Joystick 4Plus must be re-
leased before each actuation of the hydraulic
functions.
– To release the Joystick 4Plus, press and
release the shift key "F" once.

CAUTION
Compliance will be lost if this safety system is over-
ridden.
If this safety system is overridden, the safe operation
of the truck is no longer ensured. The declaration of
conformity becomes invalid. In this case, the truck
may no longer be operated.
– Make sure that no one overrides this safety sys-
tem.
– Check that this safety system is working before
daily use.

112 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Checks and tasks before daily use

Function checking of the assis-

tance systems
Checking the assistance systems is one of
the checks and tasks that must be performed
before daily use. It is important to know which
assistance systems are fitted to the truck. The
assistance systems are listed in the display-
operating unit.
To display the assistance systems, perform
the following steps:
– Apply the parking brake.
– Press the button.
– Press the Softkey.
– Press the Truck information
softkey.
– Press the Assistance systems soft-
key.
– Check the function of the assistance sys-
tems stated in the list before daily use.
– See the respective sections.

NOTE
The fleet manager can configure some assis-
tance systems.
– Check whether the assistance systems are
correctly configured for daily use.
– If they are not, have the configuration cor-
rected by the fleet manager.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 113

4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use

Unlock the emergency off switch 

– Turn the emergency off switch (1) clockwise

until it pops out.

Checking the emergency off 

function

WARNING
No electric braking assistance is available when the
emergency off switch is actuated!
Actuating the emergency off switch disconnects the
drives from the power supply.
– To brake, actuate the service brake.

– Drive the truck forwards slowly.

– Push the emergency off switch (1).
The truck will coast to a stop.
The message Emergency off ac-
tive appears on the display/operating
unit.
– Stop the truck by actuating the brake pedal.

NOTE
In trucks with an electric parking brake, the
electric parking brake will be applied as soon
as the truck comes to a stop.
– Turn the emergency off switch (1) clockwise
until it pops out.
The truck performs internal self testing. It is
then ready for operation again.

114 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Checks and tasks before daily use

Operating the signal horn 

The signal horn is used to warn people

against imminent danger or to announce your
intention to overtake.
– Press the signal horn button (1).
The signal horn sounds.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 115

4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use

Operating the pneumatic signal 

horn
The signal horn is used to warn people
against imminent danger or to announce your
intention to overtake.
1
Depending on the application and configura-
tion, the truck is equipped with a pneumatic
signal horn.
To ensure that the signal horn sounds, the
air must be pressed out of a bellows on the
bottom plate and into the signal horn.
– Press the bellows (1) using your left foot.
The signal horn sounds. 5063_003-006

Using the driver's cab

DANGER
Risk of explosion due to static charge!
Depending on the version, non-conduc-
tive parts (plastic parts) on the truck
must be painted using a special antistat-
ic paint. This paint prevents the parts
from building up an electrostatic charge.
Otherwise, static discharge may occur,
resulting in explosions in the surround-
ing atmosphere in potentially explosive
areas.
The non-conductive parts of the cab
(variant) must also be covered with anti-
static materials or coated with antistatic
paint.
– Only drive into potentially explosive
areas if the cab or fabric-covered cab
complies with explosion protection di-
rectives.

NOTE
If the plastic parts on the truck are not
equipped with special antistatic paint, decal
information is attached to the non-conductive
parts: "Non-conductive parts - risk of electro-
static charge - only clean using a damp cloth"

116 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Checks and tasks before daily use

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury in the event of falling from the
truck if it tips over!
In order to prevent the driver from sliding underneath
the truck and being crushed if the truck tips over, a
restraint system must be in place and must be used.
The restraint system prevents the driver from being
thrown from the truck if it tips over. The cab door
must be sturdy and be closed in order for the driver's
cab to function as a driver restraint system. Fabric-
covered cabs (variant) with doors made of plastic
or canvas do not constitute a driver restraint system
and offer no protection from the consequences of the
truck tipping over!
– Close the cab door before use.
– If the door is open or has been removed, use a
comparably secure restraint system.
– We recommend that you always use the seat belt.

Checking the brake oil level

A brake oil reservoir is located under the cov-
er of the emergency actuation mechanism for
the electric parking brake. This brake oil res-
ervoir supplies the oil for the service brake.
The service brake is a wet-running multi-disc
brake. It needs this oil.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 117

4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use

– Lift the cover (1) and fold it up. 

The brake oil level must be within the area (2)
of the taper up to the neck. Do not top up the
1
brake oil.
– If the brake oil level is lower than it should
be or has visibly dropped, contact the au-
thorised service centre.
– In this case, do not use the truck.
– The authorised service centre must rectify
the cause of the reduced brake oil.

2
6331_003-004

118 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Checks and tasks before daily use

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 119

4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use

Checking the brake system for

correct function
DANGER
Risk of accident in the event of failure of the brake
system!
If the brake system fails, the truck will be insufficient-
ly braked.
– Do not operate the truck if the brake system is
faulty.

Checking the electric brake 

DANGER
Risk of accident if the braking effect of the electric
brake is inadequate!
The braking effect of the electric brake may be insuf-
ficient for emergency braking.
– Always actuate the brake pedal (1) for emergency
braking.

1
DANGER
Risk of accident due to excessive speed!
Depending on the charge state of the battery, re- 2
generative braking may be insufficient when driving
downhill, meaning that the maximum permissible
speed of the truck is exceeded.
– Press the brake pedal (1).

If the driving speed is restricted or if the op-

posite drive direction is selected, the truck is
braked using the electric brake.
– To actuate this, release the accelerator
pedal (2).
The truck must decelerate and remain station-
ary.
– If the truck does not slow down, press the
brake pedal (1).

Checking the service brake

– Release the parking brake.
– Press the brake pedal (1).
There must be a slight pedal clearance and
then a noticeable brake pressure point.

120 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Checks and tasks before daily use

– Accelerate the unladen truck in a clear

area.
– Press the brake pedal (1) firmly.
The truck must decelerate noticeably.

Checking the parking brake on a gradi-

ent or a lorry ramp
DANGER
Risk to life if the truck rolls away!
If the parking brake is not applied, the
truck could run people over.
– Do not leave the truck until the park-
ing brake has been applied.

– Stop the truck on a steep gradient (e.g. a

HGV ramp) and actuate the parking brake.
The parking brake must hold the truck on the
incline.
– If the truck rolls away despite the parking
brake being applied, stop the truck using
the service brake.
– In an emergency, secure the truck with
wedges on the downhill-facing side to pre-
vent it from rolling away.
– Have the parking brake checked and re-
paired by the authorised service centre.

Checking the parking brake on a level

surface
WARNING
Risk of accident from abrupt deceleration!
The truck will decelerate abruptly if the parking brake
is applied.
– Fasten the seat belt.
– Use the available restraint systems.

– Find a sufficiently large and open area in

which nobody will be endangered or ob-
structed.
– Accelerate the truck to walking speed.
– Press the emergency off switch.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 121

4 Operation
Checks and tasks before daily use

NOTE
When the emergency off switch is actuated,
note the following:
● The electric brake is disabled. The truck no

longer responds to the command issued by

the accelerator pedal.
● The power steering is no longer available.

Steering forces are increased due to the

remaining emergency steering function.
– Release the accelerator pedal.
– Apply the parking brake.
The electric parking brake slows the truck with
a low level of deceleration.
– To increase the level of deceleration, either
press and hold the actuating button for lon-
ger or press it several times.
The truck must decelerate and remain station-
ary.

NOTE
To release the parking brake, unlock the
emergency off switch.
– If the truck only coasts and does not decel-
erate or decelerates only slightly, stop the
truck using the service brake.
– Secure the truck with chocks so that the
truck does not roll away.
– Have the parking brake checked and re-
paired by the authorised service centre.

Warming up the hydraulic oil at

cold ambient temperatures
If the truck has been exposed to low ambient
temperatures for an extended period, because
it has been parked outside during winter, for
example, the hydraulic oil has a low tempera-
ture. In order to ensure smooth and safe oper-
ation of the hydraulic functions, the hydraulic
oil must be at operating temperature.
– Drive the truck for approximately 5 minutes
and actuate the brake several times.

122 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Checks and tasks before daily use

– Actuate all hydraulic lifting functions several

times.
Limiting the load dynamics to load program 1 
during the warm-up phase

NOTE
During the warm-up phase, the load dynamics
are limited to load program 1. The adjacent
symbol appears on the display until the warm-
up phase is complete.

6219_003-312

Checking the steering system for 

correct function
1
DANGER
If the hydraulics fail, there is a risk of accident as
the steering characteristics have changed.
– Do not operate the truck if it has a defective steer-
ing system.

– Operate the steering wheel (1). The steer-

ing play while stationary must not be more
than two finger widths.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 123

4 Operation
Driver's seat

Driver's seat
Adjusting the MSG 65/MSG 75
driver's seat
WARNING
Risk of accident from sudden adjustment of the seat
or of the seat backrest!
The inadvertent adjustment of the seat or of the
seat backrest can lead to uncontrolled movements
by the driver. The steering or the operating devices
can then be actuated unintentionally. This may cause
uncontrolled movements of the truck or of the load.
– Do not adjust the seat or the seat backrest while
the truck is in motion.
– Adjust the seat and the seat backrest so that all
operating devices can be actuated safely.
– Ensure that the seat and the seat backrest are
securely engaged.

WARNING
On some equipment variants, the
amount of head clearance on the truck
may be restricted.
On these specific equipment variants,
the distance between the driver's head
and the lower edge of the roofing sheet
must be at least 40 mm.

NOTE
Observe any separate operating instructions
for the seat.

WARNING
To obtain optimum seat cushioning, you must adjust
the seat suspension to your own body weight. This
course of action is better for your back and protects
your health.
– To avoid injuries, keep the swivel area of the seat
clear of objects.

124 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driver's seat

Moving the driver's seat 

– Raise the lever (1) and hold it in position.
– Push the driver's seat into the required po-
sition.
– Release the lever.
– Ensure that the driver's seat is securely en-
gaged.

1 7094_003-006

Adjusting the seat backrest 

Do not apply pressure to the seat backrest
when adjusting the seat backrest.
– Raise the lever (2) and hold it in position.
– Push the seat backrest into the required po-
sition.
– Release the lever.
– Ensure that the seat backrest is securely
engaged.
2

NOTE
The backwards tilt angle of the seat backrest
can be restricted by the structure of the truck. 7094_003-008

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 125

4 Operation
Driver's seat

Adjusting the MSG 65/MSG 75 seat 

suspension

NOTE
The MSG 65/MSG 75 driver's seat is de- 4
signed for people weighing between 45 kg and
170 kg. The driver's seat can be adjusted to
suit the weight of the individual driver. To ob-
tain optimal settings for the seat suspension,
the driver must perform the adjustment whilst
sitting on the seat.

NOTE
The MSG 75 seat is equipped with electric air 3
suspension that is activated using an electric
6321_003-038

switch instead of the lever (3).

– Fold out the weight-adjusting lever (3).
– Pump the lever up or down to set the driv-
er's weight.
– Return the weight-adjusting lever to the ini-
tial central position each time before raising
it again (a click can be heard when this
position is reached).
– Retract the weight-adjusting lever once the
adjustment is complete.

NOTE
The correct driver's weight has been selected
when the arrow (4) is in the centre position in
the inspection window. Once the minimum or
maximum weight setting is reached, the seat
will not move any further even when you pump
the weight-adjusting lever.

126 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driver's seat

Adjusting the lumbar support (variant) 

6
NOTE
The lumbar support can be adjusted to suit
the contours of the individual driver's spine.
Adjusting the lumbar support moves a convex
support cushion into the upper or lower part of
the backrest.
– Turn the turning knob (6) up or down until
the lumbar support is in the required posi-
tion.

6321_003-039_V3

Adjusting the backrest extension (var- 

iant) 7
– Adjust the backrest extension (7) by pulling
it out and pushing it into the desired posi-
tion.
To remove the backrest extension, move it
past the end stop by firmly pushing it upwards.

6321_003-040_V3

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 127

4 Operation
Driver's seat

Switching the seat heater (variant) on 

and off

NOTE
The seat heater only works when the driver is
sitting on the driver's seat.
– Switch the seat heater (8) on or off using 8
the switch.

6321_003-041_V3

Adjusting the MSG 95 driver's

seat
WARNING
Risk of accident from sudden adjustment of the seat
or of the seat backrest!
The inadvertent adjustment of the seat or of the
seat backrest can lead to uncontrolled movements
by the driver. The steering or the operating devices
can then be actuated unintentionally. This may cause
uncontrolled movements of the truck or of the load.
– Do not adjust the seat or the seat backrest while
the truck is in motion.
– Adjust the seat and the seat backrest so that all
operating devices can be actuated safely.
– Ensure that the seat and the seat backrest are
securely engaged.

WARNING
On some equipment variants, the
amount of head clearance on the truck
may be restricted.
On these specific equipment variants,
the distance between the driver's head
and the lower edge of the roofing sheet
must be at least 40 mm.

NOTE
Observe any separate operating instructions
for the seat.
128 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Operation 4
Driver's seat

WARNING
To obtain optimum seat cushioning, you must adjust
the seat suspension to your own body weight. This
course of action is better for your back and protects
your health.
– To avoid injuries, keep the swivel area of the seat
clear of objects.

Moving the driver's seat 

– Raise the lever (1) and hold it in position.
– Push the driver's seat into the required po-
sition.
– Release the lever.
– Ensure that the driver's seat is securely en-
gaged.
1

6301_003-150

Adjusting the seat backrest 

Do not apply pressure to the seat backrest
when adjusting the seat backrest.
– Raise the lever (2) and hold it in position.
– Push the seat backrest into the required po-
sition. 2
– Release the lever.
– Ensure that the seat backrest is securely
engaged.

NOTE
The backwards tilt angle of the seat backrest
can be restricted by the structure of the truck. 6301_003-151

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 129

4 Operation
Driver's seat

Adjusting the damping of the seat sus- 

pension
The suspension comfort can be adjusted as
desired by the driver.
– Turn the adjusting lever (3) until the desired
setting is reached.

6301_003-152

Adjusting to the driver's weight and ad- 

justing the seat height

NOTE
The individual driver's weight must be set
when the truck is stationary and the driver's
seat is occupied. Remain seated during this
process. 4
– To adjust to the driver's weight, move the
pushed in lever (4) up or down until the
desired setting is reached.
– To adjust the seat height, pull the lever (4)
out and move it up or down until the desired
setting is reached.

6301_003-153

130 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driver's seat

Adjusting the longitudinal horizontal 

suspension
If the driver's seat is equipped with the "longi-
tudinal horizontal suspension" variant, impacts
in the drive direction are damped by additional
seat suspension. The locking lever (5) on the
left-hand side of the driver's seat activates and
locks the longitudinal horizontal suspension.
– To activate the longitudinal horizontal sus-
pension, move the locking lever (5) back- 5
wards.
– To lock the longitudinal horizontal suspen-
sion, move the locking lever (5) forwards.

6301_003-154

NOTE
If the longitudinal horizontal suspension is
blocked, the suspension comfort is significant-
ly lower. Impacts are much more noticeable.

Adjusting the lumbar support (variant) 

The lumbar support can be adjusted to suit
the contours of the individual driver's spine. 6
Adjusting the lumbar support moves a convex
support cushion into the upper or lower part
of the backrest. This increases the comfort in
the sitting position and maintains the driver's
performance.
– Turn the turning knob (6) until the lumbar
support is in the required position.

6301_003-155

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 131

4 Operation
Driver's seat

Adjusting the backrest extension 

– Adjust the backrest extension (7) by pulling
7
it out and pushing it into the desired posi-
tion.
The engagement can be felt.
To remove the backrest extension, move it
past the end stop by firmly pushing it upwards.

6301_003-156

Switching the seat heater (variant) on 

and off 8

NOTE
The seat heater only works when the driver is
sitting on the driver's seat.
– Switch the seat heater (8) on or off using
the switch.

6301_003-157

132 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driver's seat

Adjusting the seat angle 

The longitudinal tilt of the seat base can be
adjusted individually.
– To adjust the seat angle, pull the handle (9)
upwards.
By simultaneously applying pressure to or re-
moving pressure from the front or rear seat
base, it tilts into the desired position.
9

6301_003-158

Adjusting the seat depth 

The seat depth of the seat base can be adjus-
ted individually.
10
– To adjust the seat depth, pull the handle
(10) upwards.
To achieve the desired position, simultaneous-
ly slide the seat base forwards or backwards.

6301_003-159

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 133

4 Operation
Driver's seat

Seat belt
DANGER
Risk of injury if the truck tips over!
Even if an approved restraint system is
in use, there is still a residual risk that
the driver could be injured if the truck
tips over.
This risk of injury can be reduced
through the combined use of the re-
straint system and the seat belt.
In addition, the seat belt protects against
the consequences of rear-end collisions
and falling off a lorry ramp.
– Recommendation: When operating
the truck on a lorry ramp, fasten the
seat belt in addition to using the driv-
er's cab, the bracket door or the re-
straining bracket.

DANGER
Only bracket doors, restraining brackets and the
driver's cab (variants) with closed, fixed doors
constitute driver restraint systems. Plastic doors
(weather protection) do not constitute a restraint
system!
If the doors are open or have been removed, you
must use an alternative suitable restraint system
(e.g. a seat belt)!

Fastening the seat belt 

DANGER
Mortal danger when driving without wearing a seat
belt!
If the seat belt is not fastened and the truck tips over
3
or crashes into an obstacle, the driver can be thrown 2
out of the truck. The driver could slide under the
truck or collide with an obstacle.
– Fasten the seat belt before every trip.
– Do not twist the seat belt when fastening it. 1
– Only use the seat belt to secure one person!
– Have any malfunctions repaired by the authorised
service centre.

7311_003-048

134 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driver's seat

NOTE
The buckle has a buckle switch. When the belt
was not fastened, the following occurred:
● The message Close seat belt

appears on the display-operating unit.

● The truck will not drive at speeds faster

than 4 km/h.
● The hydraulic functions are blocked.

NOTE
One variant prevents the truck from being driv-
en at all if the seatbelt is not fastened. The
message Close seat belt appears
on the display.
– Pull the seat belt (3) smoothly out of the belt
retractor and place over the thighs close to
the body.

NOTE
Sit back as far as possible so that your back
is resting on the seat backrest. The automat-
ic blocking mechanism permits sufficient free-
dom of movement on the seat.
– Click the belt tongue (2) into the buckle (1).
– Check the tension of the seat belt. The belt
must fit closely around your body.

Special feature for trucks with a cab

(variant)
If the truck is equipped with a cab (variant), it
will have a cab door sensor. If the seat belt is
not fastened and the cab door is not closed,
the driving speed is limited to 4 km/h. The
message Close cab door or seat
belt appears on the display.

NOTE
One variant that prevents the truck from being
driven at all if the cab door is open. The mes-
sage Close cab door appears in the
display.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 135

4 Operation
Driver's seat

Special feature for trucks with HSR re-

straint systems (variant)
If the bracket is not closed, the message
Close restraint system appears
in the display.

Fastening on a steep slope 

The automatic blocking mechanism prevents
the belt from being extended whenever the
truck is on a steep gradient. It is no longer
possible to pull the seat belt out of the belt
retractor.
– Move away carefully from the slope.
– Fasten the seat belt.

Releasing the seat belt

– Push the red button (4) on the buckle (1). 
– Slowly guide the belt tongue back to the
retractor by hand.

NOTE
Slowly allow the seat belt to retract. The auto-
matic blocking mechanism may be triggered if
the belt tongue strikes the housing. It will then
no longer be possible to pull the seat belt out
with the usual force. 4
– Using increased force, pull the seat belt
around 10 to 15 mm out of the retractor to
disengage the blocking mechanism.
– Slowly allow the seat belt to retract again. 1 7090_342-005

– Protect the seat belt from dirt, for example,

by covering it.

136 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driver's seat

Malfunction due to cold

– If the buckle or belt retractor are frozen,
thaw the buckle or the belt retractor and dry
the parts.
This prevents the parts from refreezing.

CAUTION
The seat belt may be damaged by heat!
Do not subject the buckle or belt retractor to exces-
sive heat when thawing.
– Do not use air warmer than 60°C when thawing.

Adjusting the armrest

DANGER
There is a risk of accident if the armrest lowers
suddenly, causing the driver to move in an uncon-
trolled manner.
This may result in unintentional actuation of the
steering or operating devices and thus cause the
truck or load to move in an uncontrolled fashion.
– Do not adjust the armrest while driving.
– Adjust the armrest so that all operating devices
can be actuated safely.
– Ensure that the armrest is securely tightened.

Adjusting the length of the armrest 

– Release the star-grip handle (1) by turning
to the left.
– Shift the armrest (2) into the desired posi-
tion.
– Tighten the star-grip handle by turning to
the right.
– Check that the armrest is firmly attached.

Adjusting the height of the armrest

– Release the hand wheel (3) by turning to
the left.
– Shift the armrest (2) into the desired posi-
tion.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 137

4 Operation
Driver's seat

– Tighten the hand wheel by turning to the

right.
– Check that the armrest is firmly attached.

138 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Switching on

Switching on
Switching on using the key
switch
WARNING
All checks and tasks required before daily use must
have been performed without any defects being iden-
tified before switching on the truck.
– Perform the "visual inspections and functional
checks".
– Do not operate the truck if defects have been
detected; contact the authorised service centre.

– Insert the switch key (1) into the key switch 

and turn it to the "I" position.

NOTE
If the truck is equipped with the "Access au-
thorisation with PIN code" variant, the display
initially changes to the input menu for access
authorisation.
Once the truck is ready for operation, the main
screen is shown on the display.

Main screen 
1 Selected drive programme with driving
dynamics display 432 h 08:20
2 Load information (variants) 1,6 t
3 Status bar: battery charge, operating
hours, time 7°
4 Selected load dynamics programme with 2,71 m
dynamics bar
5 "Right" turn indicator display
6 Driving speed or parking brake
7 "Left" turn indicator display
8 "Reverse" drive direction indicator
9 "Forward" drive direction indicator
10 Steering angle display
Additional information may appear on the dis-
play.
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 139
4 Operation
Switching on

– Refer to the chapter entitled "Display mes-

sages".

NOTE
After connecting the battery, the correct
charge state may not be displayed until the
battery is placed under load by driving or lifting
operations.

Switching on via push button

(variant)
WARNING
All checks and tasks required before daily use must
have been performed without any defects being iden-
tified before switching on the truck.
– Perform the "visual inspections and functional
checks".
– Do not operate the truck if defects have been
detected; contact the authorised service centre.

The "Switch on via push button" variant is 

available only in conjunction with the "Fleet-
Manager" or "Access authorisation with PIN
code" variants. In place of the key switch, the
truck has a push button (1) that is used to
switch the truck on and off.
– To switch on the truck, press the push but-
ton (1) or sit on the driver's seat. A mes-
sage on the display/operating unit asks the
operator to place the FleetManager card in
position or to enter the PIN code.
Authorisation via the "FleetManager" card or
the PIN code must take place within a speci-
fied period of time:
● Within 30 seconds if the driver's seat is not

occupied
● Within 60 seconds if the driver's seat is oc-

cupied
If this does not happen, the truck switches off
again.
– To switch on the truck, press the push but-
ton (1) or sit in the driver's seat.
If authorisation was successful, the truck is
ready for operation. The main view is shown
on the display.

140 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Switching on

– To switch off the truck, press the push but-

ton (1) and hold for 1 second.

NOTE
For the variant with
● "Access authorisation with PIN code", see

the relevant section.

● "FleetManager", see the "original operating

instructions for FleetManager".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 141

4 Operation
Display-operating unit

Display-operating unit
Operating the display-operating unit

1 2 3

432 h 08:20
1,6 t
7°
2,71 m
10 4

12 km/h

9 8 7 6 5 6219_003-310

The display-operating unit is operated using

the control and enter keys (5...8) and the soft-
keys (4, 10). The display (2) shows informa-
tion about the current driving programme, load
programme and the configuration of the fa-
vourites bars (1, 3). The brightness sensor (9)
automatically adjusts the brightness of the dis-
play based on the truck's surroundings.

142 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Display-operating unit

Functions of the control and enter keys

Designation Position Functions
The softkeys correspond to the adjacent functions or input
options.
If functions have been stored in the favourites bars (1, 3),
these functions can be switched on and off by pressing the
Softkeys 4, 10
adjacent softkey.
In addition to switching functions on and off, the soft keys
on the right (3) navigate through the menu structure. These
soft keys are also used to select actions.
The menu button opens the first level of the menu.
If a deeper navigation level is currently selected, this button
Menu button 5 takes you back to the first menu level.
When using the settings menus, the menu button saves
input.
The scrolling buttons allow you to scroll up and
down menu items within a menu level.
Scrolling buttons 6 This button clears input entered in the settings menus.
This button switches between upper case and lower
case for alphanumeric entries.
When the back button is pressed, the display switches
Back button 7 to the next menu level up.
This button cancels input entered in the settings menus.
Pressing the main display button at any menu level
Main display button 8
takes you directly back to the main display.

Alternative position of the dis-

play-operating unit (variant)
With this variant, the display-operating unit is
positioned on a cross beam approximately in
the centre of the truck. This creates space
for mounting additional devices or monitors on
the right-hand A-pillar of the driver's cab.
When mounting such additional devices, note
that a specific field of vision is required for
the driver. This is important for ensuring that
the driver can operate the truck in a way that
is safe for the driver and for others. Depend-
ing on the truck equipment, this field of vision
could be restricted. The field of vision will de-
pend, for example, on the width of the lift mast
used or the extent to which additional devices
enter the driver's field of vision. The operating
company must ensure that the additional devi-
ces are mounted in such a way that the driver
has an adequate field of vision.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 143

4 Operation
Display-operating unit

Required field of vision

The illustrations below provide an overview of
the requirements for the dimensions and the
position of the additional devices or monitors
in order to ensure an adequate field of vision.
1 Maximum height of devices or monitors.
2 Minimum distance between the under-
sides of the devices or monitors.
3 Maximum depth of the devices or moni-
tors.
Maximum height (1) and minimum distance (2) 

Maximum depth (3) 

144 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Display-operating unit

Access authorisation with PIN

code (variant)
Trucks equipped with the "Access authorisa-
tion with PIN code" variant are protected
against unauthorised use by a PIN code. So
that the same truck can be used by different
drivers, individual PIN codes can be specified.
An initial PIN code of "11111" is preset at the
factory for the first use.

NOTE
We recommend that the fleet manager
changes this PIN code using their access au-
thorisation. See also the section entitled "Ac-
cess authorisation for the fleet manager (var-
iant)".
When the key switch is switched on, the 
Access authorisation input menu ap-
pears.
All hydraulic functions and drive functions of
the truck are blocked. In the StVZO (German
Road Traffic Licensing Regulations) variant,
the function of the hazard warning system
(variant) is guaranteed.
– To activate the blocked functions, use the
softkeys to enter the PIN code.
– To confirm, push the button.
If the input was correct, the display changes to
the main display. The truck is ready for use.
– If the input was incorrect, enter the PIN 6219_003-196_V4_en

code again.

NOTE
The authorised service centre can configure
access authorisation so that the PIN code
has to be re-entered each time after someone
leaves the truck.
When the driver's seat is occupied again, the
message Log in appears. The display
then changes to the "Access authorisation" in-
put menu.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 145

4 Operation
Display-operating unit

Changing the PIN codes

The fleet manager can change the PIN codes.
See also the following section entitled "Access
authorisation for the fleet manager (variant)".
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the Service softkey. 

– Press the scroll keys until the 

Change PIN codes menu appears.
– Press the Change PIN codes softkey.
Calibration
– Follow the instructions on the display.

Relieve hydraulics

Shock sensor

Change password (access auth.)

Change PIN codes

Fleet manager

6219_003-276_en

Access authorisation for the fleet

manager (variant)
Trucks equipped with the "Access authorisa-
tion for the fleet manager" variant can be con-
figured by the users themselves. Access to

146 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Display-operating unit

these settings is protected by a fleet manager

password.
Three options are available for the "Access
authorisation for the fleet manager" variant:
1 No fleet manager password
Access to the configuration menus is not
enabled. If access is required at a later
date, the authorised service centre must
set up a fleet manager password.
2 Standard fleet manager password
The standard fleet manager password is
"1111".
For safety reasons, this standard fleet
manager password must be changed af-
ter the first use. See also the section en-
titled "Changing the fleet manager pass-
word".
3 Individual fleet manager password
The individual fleet manager password is
noted on the order confirmation and on
the truck invoice.

NOTE
Access to the settings menu is only availa-
ble if the truck is at a standstill and the park-
ing brake is applied. If the parking brake is
released prematurely, the settings menu will
close.
– Stop the truck.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
The first menu level appears.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 147

4 Operation
Display-operating unit

– Press the Access authorisa- 

tion softkey .

Display settings

Configure favourites

Truck settings

Service

Access authorisation
Fleet manager

6219_003-267_V2_en

The display changes to the Access au- 

thorisation menu.
– Enter the fleet manager password using the
softkeys.
– To confirm, press the button.

Enter password

6219_003-208_V3_en

148 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Display-operating unit

The message Fleet manager access 

authorisation granted appears.
– To confirm, press the softkey.
The display returns to the settings menu.
If the password entered was incorrect, the Fleet manager
message Password incorrect is dis- access authorisation
played. granted
– If this happens, enter the password again.

NOTE
While the "Access authorisation for the fleet
manager" is activated, Fleet manager is
displayed in an orange bar at the bottom of
the screen. When the users switches to the 6219_003-208

main display, the access authorisation expires

again.

Changing the fleet manager password

– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the Service softkey. 

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 149

4 Operation
Display-operating unit

– Press the scroll buttons until 

the Change password (access
auth.) menu appears.
– Press the Change password (ac- Version list
cess auth.) softkey.
– Follow the instructions on the display. Calibration

Relieve hydraulics

Shock sensor

Change password (access auth.)

Fleet manager

6219_003-275_en

150 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Pre-Shift Check

Pre-Shift Check
Description of the Pre-Shift
Check (variant)
The Pre-Shift Check is a guided dialogue in
the display-operating unit. It also helps the
driver conduct the necessary "visual inspec-
tions and function checking" before everyday
use. After the truck has been switched on, the
driver must answer questions about the condi-
tion of the forklift truck with Yes or No.
While the driver is doing this, the truck func-
tions are available with restrictions. The driv-
ing speed and hydraulic functions are restric-
ted.
To commission the truck, the authorised serv-
ice centre can compile the Pre-Shift Check
from a question catalogue in consultation with
the fleet manager. If a question catalogue has
not been compiled, the only question stored
by default is Truck ready for opera-
tion?
If the question is answered with "No", an entry
is made in the history. No restrictions in truck
function for this scenario are stored by default.
The authorised service centre can replace this
question with a question from the question
catalogue.
In addition, the fleet manager has the follow-
ing options:
● The fleet manager can view the results of

all checks via the History.

● The fleet manager can define the shift

start for three different shifts. The Pre-Shift

Check must be performed when these shifts
start.
If the truck is equipped with "FleetManag-
er", the shifts are defined on the FleetMan-
ager interface. See the relevant operating
instructions.
● If, due to a negative test result, truck func-

tions are restricted, the fleet manager can

reset these restrictions.
● The fleet manager can specify the question

sequence.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 151

4 Operation
Pre-Shift Check

Process
– Switch the truck on.
The question Truck ready for oper-
ation? appears by default. This question
is not associated with any restrictions on the
truck functions. The authorised service centre
can replace this question with a question from
the question catalogue.
The next question appears.
Some of the questions require a functional 
test, such as the functional test of the lighting.

NOTE Pre-Shift Check 4/6

The main display symbol appears only Does the truck lighting work?
when it is required for the test.
– To access the main display, press the main
display button or the softkey .
The main display contains the message Yes
To complete Pre-Shift Check,
press .
No
This means that the Pre-Shift Check is still
active and the truck functions are restricted.
– To acknowledge the message, press the
6219_003-265_en

softkey.
– Switch on and check the function to be tes-
ted, e.g. lighting.
– Press the back button to go back to the 
Pre-Shift Check.
– Answer the question based on the result of Pre-S
the function check. 2,8 t
The next question appears. 6,89 m
To complete
0,0° Pre-Shift Check,
NOTE press

If no questions regarding the Pre-Shift Check

have been compiled, the question Truck
ready for operation? is displayed..
If the truck has to be moved for a test, e.g.
for a brake test, the parking brake can easily
be released. The message To complete
Pre-Shift Check, press is dis- 6219_003-266_V3_en

played. The truck can be moved at reduced

152 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Pre-Shift Check

speed. When the parking brake is applied

again, the view returns to Pre-Shift Check.
At the end of the check, truck functions are
restricted if they have been adjusted as a re-
action to a negative test result. The message
Pre-Shift Check truck restric-
tions active shows that truck functions
are restricted. As long as the truck functions
are restricted, no further Pre-Shift Check is re-
quested at the start of a new shift. The check
is only requested again after the fleet manager
has reset the restrictions.

All questions
NOTE
This question catalogue contains questions
about different types of industrial trucks. It
may therefore also contain questions that are
not applicable to your industrial truck.
The authorised service centre can use this question catalogue to put together the Pre-Shift Check
during commissioning:
Are the fork arms damaged (e.g. bent or cracked)?
Are the fork arms securely mounted and the locking devices un-
damaged?
Are the roller tracks on the lift mast and lift chassis suffi-
ciently greased?
Are the load chains damaged?
Are the load chains sufficiently tensioned and loaded equally.?
Are all attachments securely mounted and undamaged? Are they in
working order?
Are operating fluids (e.g. oil, water, fuel) visibly leaking?
Are the wheels damaged? Are they worn beyond permissible limits?
Is the tyre pressure correct?
Is the overhead guard visibly damaged?
Is the entry area or footwell dirty or slippery?
Are the windows clean, free of ice and undamaged?
Are the maintenance lids securely closed?
Is the battery door/hood undamaged and securely closed?
Is the battery lock present, undamaged and closed?
Is the battery connection assembly dirty or damaged (e.g. hous-
ing deformed, contacts corroded)?
Is the towing device damaged?

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 153

4 Operation
Pre-Shift Check

Is the capacity rating plate present, undamaged, and legible?

Is the driver restraint system damaged?
Does the horn work?
Does the truck lighting work?
Do the warning lights work?
Is the antistatic belt present and does it have sufficient con-
tact with the floor?
Is the corona electrode present and clean?
Does the parking brake work properly?
Does the service brake work properly?
Does the steering work properly?
Does the emergency off work?
Is the battery dirty or obviously damaged?
Are all decal information and adhesive labels present and legi-
ble?
Is the load backrest undamaged?
Does the accelerator pedal work properly?
Is the engine compartment dirty or does it contain foreign ob-
jects?
Are the lift mast or the fork carriage obviously damaged?
Do the working hydraulics work properly according to the label-
ling?
Are the mirrors dirty or damaged?
Is the gas tank or its mounting obviously damaged?
Can unusual noises be heard when the industrial truck is used?
Is there any other obvious damage to the truck?
Does the washer system work?
Is the bonnet undamaged and securely closed?

If no Pre-Shift Check questions have been

compiled, the initial configuration as at the
time of delivery appears.

Defining the question sequence

The questions for the Pre-Shift Check can be
defined in a random sequence or in a fixed
sequence.
The random sequence is advisable, because
the questions are then read more consciously
by the driver. This means that there is no rou-
tine aspect.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".

154 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Pre-Shift Check

– Press the Service softkey. 

– Press the scroll keys until the Pre- 

Shift Check menu appears.
– Press the Pre-Shift Check softkey.
Message list

Maintenance interval

Version list

Pre-Shift Check

Calibration
Fleet manager

6219_003-268_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 155

4 Operation
Pre-Shift Check

The Pre-Shift Check menu appears. 

– Press the Question sequence softkey.

History

Reset restriction

Shift start

Question sequence

Fleet manager

6219_003-269_en

Pressing the softkey allows fixed or random 

question sequences to be selected.
The orange activation bar displays the current
selection. Fixed sequence
– To access the main display, press the main
display button . Random sequence

Fleet manager

6219_003-273_en

Displaying the history

The fleet manager can display a Pre-Shift
Check history.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".

156 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Pre-Shift Check

– Press the Service softkey. 

– Press the scroll keys until the Pre- 

Shift Check menu appears.
– Press the Pre-Shift Check softkey.
Message list

Maintenance interval

Version list

Pre-Shift Check

Calibration
Fleet manager

6219_003-268_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 157

4 Operation
Pre-Shift Check

The Pre-Shift Check menu appears. 

– Press the History softkey.

History

Reset restriction

Shift start

Question sequence

Fleet manager

6219_003-269_en

The Pre-Shift Check results display opens. 

This display shows all checks and questions
that have been answered with the date and Pre-Shift Check results
time.
27.09.19 15:11 nicht ok

To see more results, press the scroll but-

Funktioniert die Feststellbremse einwandfrei?

tons . 27.09.19 15:06 nicht ok

Sind die Gabeln beschädigt (z. B. verbogen

– To go back to the previous menu, press

oder gerissen)?

the softkey. 27.09.19 14:57 nicht ok

Geht es dir gut?

– To access the main display, press the main 27.09.19 14:46 ok

display button . 27.09.19 14:45 abgebrochen

13.05.19 15:09 nicht ok

Fleet manager

6219_003-270_en

Defining the shift start

As a standard setting after commissioning, the
Pre-Shift Check is always requested 24 hours
after the last check was performed. The fleet
manager can define up to three shifts and
their start times. The Pre-Shift Check is then
always requested at this time.

158 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Pre-Shift Check

NOTE
If the truck is equipped with the "FleetManag-
er" variant, the shifts are defined on the Fleet-
Manager interface. See the relevant operating
instructions.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the Service softkey. 

– Press the scroll keys until the Pre- 

Shift Check menu appears.
– Press the Pre-Shift Check softkey.
Message list

Maintenance interval

Version list

Pre-Shift Check

Calibration
Fleet manager

6219_003-268_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 159

4 Operation
Pre-Shift Check

The Pre-Shift Check menu appears. 

– Press the Shift start softkey.

History

Reset restriction

Shift start

Question sequence

Fleet manager

6219_003-269_en

In this menu, you can call up the shift to be 

defined and its start time.
The orange activation bar indicates which
shifts are activated. Shift start 1
– To edit a shift, press the corresponding soft-
key. Shift start 2

Shift start 3

Fleet manager

6219_003-271_en

160 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Pre-Shift Check

In this menu you can define the shift start. 

– Enter the time using softkeys 0 to 9.
– To save, press the button. Shift start 1
The shift start is now defined. The Pre-Shift
Check is always requested from this shift start
time.
The display reverts to the previous menu. Enter shift start
06 : 00

= Clear = Deactivate

= Save = Cancel
Fleet manager

6219_003-272_en

– To deactivate a certain shift start, select the 

relevant shift.

Shift start 1

Shift start 2

Shift start 3

Fleet manager

6219_003-271_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 161

4 Operation
Pre-Shift Check

– Press the scroll button to deactivate the 

shift.
– To confirm, press the button.
Shift start 1
The time is shown in grey.
The shift is deactivated. The display reverts to
the previous menu. There is no activation bar
next to this shift. Enter shift start
– To cancel, press the back button . 06 : 00
– To access the main display, press the main
display button . = Clear = Deactivate

= Save = Cancel
Fleet manager

6219_003-272_en

Resetting the truck restrictions

If truck functions are restricted due to checks
with a bad result, the fleet manager can reset
these restrictions. The fleet manager can also
do this if a previously detected problem has
been rectified.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the Service softkey. 

162 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Pre-Shift Check

– Press the scroll keys until the Pre- 

Shift Check menu appears.
– Press the Pre-Shift Check softkey.
Message list

Maintenance interval

Version list

Pre-Shift Check

Calibration
Fleet manager

6219_003-268_en

The Pre-Shift Check menu appears. 

– Press the Reset restriction softkey.

History

Reset restriction

Shift start

Question sequence

Fleet manager

6219_003-269_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 163

4 Operation
Pre-Shift Check

A question pops up asking if you want to reset 

the truck restrictions.
– To confirm, press the softkey.
The full scope of the truck functions is now
available. The display reverts to the previous Reset the truck restrictions?
The entry remains in the history
menu.
– To cancel, press the softkey.
The truck functions remain restricted. The dis-
play reverts to the previous menu.
– To access the main display, press the main
display button .
Fleet manager

6219_003-274_en

164 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driver profiles

Driver profiles
Driver profiles (variant) 

This variant allows up to ten individual driver

profiles to be created. The driver is greeted
with the selected name after logging in. Once 0,0 t
the softkey is pressed, the main display 0,0 m
appears. Hello,
0,0° Horst
If the truck is equipped with the "Access au-
thorisation with PIN code" or "FleetManager"
variants, these driver profiles can be linked to
the relevant variant.
The driver profile allows the following settings
to be saved:
● Language

● Favourites
6219_003-291_en
● Configuration of the status line

● Configuration of drive programmes A and B

In addition, the operating statuses saved for

the last selected driver profile are called up
again the next time a user logs in with this
driver profile:
● Selected drive programme 1 to 3

● Load dynamics

● Efficiency and drive modes

(Blue-Q/sprint mode)
If a driver without an existing driver profile
logs in using the "Access authorisation with
PIN code" or "FleetManager" variants, a driver
profile is generated. This driver profile corre-
sponds to the settings when the truck was
delivered.
If the truck is not equipped with these variants,
drivers must select their profiles manually.
Any changes that drivers make to the settings
while they are logged in are saved. These will
then be available the next time that the driver
logs in.

Selecting driver profiles

If the truck is equipped with the "Access au-
thorisation with PIN code" or "FleetManager"
variants, the corresponding driver profile is ac-
tive after logging in. If the truck is not equip-

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 165

4 Operation
Driver profiles

ped with these variants, drivers must select

their profiles manually.

NOTE
Access to the settings menu is only availa-
ble if the truck is at a standstill and the park-
ing brake is applied. If the parking brake is
released prematurely, the settings menu will
close.
– Stop the truck.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
– Press the Driver profiles soft- 
key .

Driver profiles

Truck information

Display settings

Configure favourites

Truck settings

6219_003-293_en

166 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driver profiles

The orange activation bar displays the current 

selection.
– Press the softkey for the required driver
profile. Guido
The driver profile is active. The driver is gree-
ted with the selected name the next time that Horst
the truck is switched on.
Lisa

Driver 4

Available storage position 5

6219_003-294_en

Creating driver profiles

Both the fleet manager and the driver can cre-
ate up to ten driver profiles.

NOTE
If the truck is equipped with the "Access au-
thorisation with PIN code" or "FleetManager"
variants, the driver profile is generated auto-
matically when logging in for the first time.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 167

4 Operation
Driver profiles

– Press the Driver profiles soft- 

key .

Driver profiles

Truck information

Display settings

Configure favourites

Truck settings

6219_003-293_en

This menu provides storage space for saving 

ten driver profiles.
– Press the softkey for the required storage
location. Guido

NOTE Horst

Unoccupied storage locations that do not con- Lisa

tain a driver profile are indicated by Availa-
ble storage position.
Driver 4

Available storage position 5

6219_003-294_en

168 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driver profiles

The Driver name menu is displayed. 

– Use the softkeys to enter the desired name.
– To confirm, press the button. Driver name
The driver profile is active. The driver is gree-
ted with the selected name after the next log-
in.
Any changes that drivers make to the settings Enter driver name
while they are logged in are saved. These will
Horst
then be available the next time that the driver
logs in. = Clear = abc -> ABC

= Save = Cancel 0

6219_003-295_en

Renaming driver profiles

Driver profiles can be renamed. Drivers can
only rename their own driver profile. The fleet
manager has access authorisation to rename
all driver profiles.

Renaming by the driver

– Apply the parking brake.
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
– Press the Truck settings softkey.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 169

4 Operation
Driver profiles

– Press the Rename driver profiles 

softkey.

Driving programme

Rename driver profiles

6219_003-298_en

The Driver name menu is displayed. 

– Use the softkeys to enter the desired name.
– To confirm, press the button. Driver name

Renaming by the fleet manager

– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager". Enter driver name
– Press the Truck settings softkey. Horst

= Clear = abc -> ABC

= Save = Cancel 0

6219_003-295_en

170 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driver profiles

– Press the Manage driver pro- 

files softkey.

Lift height preselection

Auxiliary hydraulics

Change PIN codes

Manage driver profiles

On-board charger
Fleet manager

6219_003-296_en

– Press the Rename driver pro- 

files softkey.

Rename driver profiles

Delete driver profiles

Fleet manager

6219_003-297_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 171

4 Operation
Driver profiles

The Driver name menu is displayed. 

– Use the softkeys to enter the desired name.
– To confirm, press the button. Driver name

Enter driver name

Horst

= Clear = abc -> ABC

= Save = Cancel 0

6219_003-295_en

Deleting driver profiles

The fleet manager has access authorisation to
delete driver profiles.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the Truck settings softkey .
– Press the Manage driver profiles 
softkey.

Lift height preselection

Auxiliary hydraulics

Change PIN codes

Manage driver profiles

On-board charger
Fleet manager

6219_003-296_en

172 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driver profiles

– Press the Delete driver profiles 

softkey.

Rename driver profiles

Delete driver profiles

Fleet manager

6219_003-297_en

– Press the softkey for the driver profile to be 

deleted.
The driver profile is deleted.
Guido

Horst

Lisa

Driver 4

Available storage position 5

6219_003-294_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 173

4 Operation
Lighting

Lighting
Retrofitting lighting equipment
NOTE
All of the lighting equipment described below
can be retrofitted by the authorised service
centre.
– Contact the authorised service centre with
regard to this matter.

Meaning of the symbols 

Individual lighting devices are switched on and

off using the "Lighting" sub-menu.
– To access this sub-menu, push the but-
ton .

Symbols for the lighting and their meanings

Parking light
Headlights
Hazard warning system1
Rotating beacon
STILL SafetyLight
Warning zone light
Front working spotlights
Rear working spotlights
Roof working spotlights

Only the symbols of the lighting devices that

are installed in the truck can be selected.
When one of the lighting devices is switched
on, the activation bar next to the relevant sym-
bol lights up orange.

NOTE
If the truck is equipped with the "StVZO" (Ger-
man Road Traffic Licensing Regulations) var-
iant, the hazard warning system works even
when the truck is switched off.

1 This function is not available if the truck is equipped with the "StVZO" (German Road Traffic
Licensing Regulations) variant. In this case, the hazard warning system is switched on and
off via the hazard warning button on the steering column. For more information, refer to the
section entitled "Hazard warning system".
174 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Operation 4
Lighting

Driving lights 

– To switch on the parking light (1), push the

associated Softkey on the display-operating
unit.
The front side lights and the tail lights light up.
– To switch on the driving light (2), press the
associated Softkey on the display-operating
unit.
The headlights and tail lights light up. If the
truck has StVZO (German Road Traffic Li-
censing Regulations) equipment (variant) and
a licence plate lamp, then this also lights up.
– To switch off the driving light (2), press the
Softkey again. 6219_003-063_V2

1 Parking light
The driving light and licence plate lamp go out. 2 Driving light
– To switch off the parking light (1), push the
Softkey again.
The front side lights and the tail lights go out.
If the truck does not have StVZO (German
Road Traffic Licensing Regulations) equip-
ment (variant), then the parking light and driv-
ing light can be switched on and off independ-
ently of each other.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 175

4 Operation
Lighting

Working spotlights
Front and rear working spotlights 
– To switch on the front working spot-
lights (3), push the associated Softkey on
the display-operating unit.
The front working spotlights light up.
– To switch off the front working spot-
lights (3), push the Softkey again.
The front working spotlights go out.
– To switch on the rear working spotlights (4),
push the associated Softkey on the display-
operating unit.
The rear working spotlights light up.
– To switch off the rear working spotlights (4),
push the Softkey again.
The rear working spotlights go out.

NOTE
For the StVZO (German Road Traffic Licens-
ing Regulations) variant, the parking light is
also switched on when the working spotlights
are switched on. The licence plate lamp (if
present) is also switched on when the forward-
facing working spotlights are switched on. 3 Front working spotlights
4 Rear working spotlights
5 Roof spotlights
Working spotlights on the roof and the
side of the lift mast
The roof spotlights light up the working area
when the fork carriage is raised.
– To switch on the roof spotlights (5), push
the associated Softkey on the display-oper-
ating unit.
The roof spotlights (5) light up.
– To switch off the roof spotlights (5), push
the Softkey again.
The roof spotlights (5) go out.

NOTE
Depending on the configuration, the roof spot-
lights automatically switch on when the fork
carriage is raised.

176 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lighting

Working spotlight for reverse

travel (variant)
In this equipment variant, a working spotlight
for reverse travel is fitted on the rear of the
overhead guard and provides optimum illumi-
nation of the roadway during reverse travel.
– Press the softkey.
The activation bar next to the symbol lights up.
The working spotlight does not yet light up.
– Set the drive direction to "Reverse".
The working spotlight for reverse travel lights
up.
If the drive direction is set to "Forward", the
working spotlight goes out.

Turn indicators 

The turn indicators are switched on and off

via the travel direction selector and indicator
module.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 177

4 Operation
Lighting

– To switch on the left or right turn indicator, 

move the lever (1) to the desired direction.

6219_003-098

The turn indicators and the turn indicator dis- 

play (2) or (3) on the display-operating unit
flash. 432 h 08:20
– To switch off the turn indicators, push the 1,6 t
lever (1) back to the centre position.
7°
All turn indicators and the turn indicator dis- 2,71 m
plays on the display/operating unit stop flash-
ing.

2 3
6219_003-301

178 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lighting

Hazard warning system 

Switching the hazard warning system on and

off is different for trucks with and without the
StVZO (German Road Traffic Licensing Regu-
lations) variant.
– To switch on the hazard warning system,
push the associated Softkey on the display-
operating unit.
All direction indicators and the turn indicator
displays on the display-operating unit flash.
– To switch off the hazard warning system,
push the Softkey again.
All direction indicators and the turn indicator
displays on the display-operating unit stop
flashing.
Specific features of the StVZO (German 
Road Traffic Licensing Regulations) variant
For the StVZO (German Road Traffic Licens-
ing Regulations) variant, the hazard warning
system cannot be switched on and off via the
display/operating unit. It is switched on and off
using the hazard warning button on the steer-
ing column. The hazard warning system in this
variant works even when the truck is switched
off.
– To switch on the hazard warning system,
push the hazard warning button (1). When
the truck is switched off, press and hold
the hazard warning button for approx. one
second.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 179

4 Operation
Lighting

The turn indicators and the turn indicator dis- 

plays (2, 3) on the display-operating unit flash.
– To switch off the hazard warning system, 432 h 08:20
push the hazard warning button (1) again. 1,6 t
All direction indicators and the turn indicator 7°
displays on the display-operating unit stop 2,71 m
flashing.

2 3
6219_003-301

StVZO equipment 

If the truck is fitted with StVZO (German

Road Traffic Licensing Regulations) equip-
ment, the softkey is stored in the favourites
bar. This softkey is used to switch off all light-
ing devices that are not permitted on roads
subject to German traffic regulations (StVO).
This relates to the following variants of lighting
equipment:
● STILL SafetyLight and STILL Safety-

Light 4Plus
● Warning zone light and warning zone light

plus
● Working spotlight

● Rotating beacon

– To switch this lighting equipment off, press

the softkey.
The orange activation bar lights up next to the
softkey.
– To switch this lighting equipment on, press
the softkey again.
The orange activation bar goes out.

180 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lighting

NOTE
This function is configured for German traffic
regulations (StVO) ex works.
● Outside of Germany, observe the national

regulations for the country of use.

● The authorised service centre can amend

the function so that fewer lighting devices or

more lighting devices are switched off.
The softkey is also located in the Driving
menu .

Rotating beacon 

– To switch on the rotating beacon, push the

associated Softkey on the display-operating
unit.
The rotating beacon is switched on.
– To switch off the rotating beacon, push the
Softkey again.
The rotating beacon goes out.

STILL SafetyLight® and 

STILL SafetyLight 4Plus® (var-
iants)

WARNING
Danger of damage to eyes from look-
ing into the STILL SafetyLight® and
STILL SafetyLight 4Plus®.
Do not look into the STILL SafetyLight®
or STILL SafetyLight 4Plus®.

STILL SafetyLight® and

STILL SafetyLight 4Plus® are visual warning
units designed to enable early detection of
trucks in driving areas with low visibility (such
as drive lanes, high racks), as well as at
blind junctions. The STILL SafetyLight® or
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 181
4 Operation
Lighting

STILL SafetyLight 4Plus® is mounted on a

support on the overhead guard such that it is
not affected by jolts and vibrations.
Depending on the version, the STILL Safety-
Light® projects one or more light-blue light
spots in front of or behind the truck and thus
warns others about the approaching truck.
With the STILL SafetyLight 4Plus®, several
light blue light spots are projected as a chase
light. The chase light indicates the location of
the truck with its direction of travel.
Depending on the configuration of the truck,
the STILL SafetyLight® or STILL Safety-
Light 4Plus® automatically switches itself
on when the truck is moving. This means
that, during reverse travel (variant), for exam-
ple, it can be used as an additional light
for the working spotlight for reverse travel.
The STILL SafetyLight® or the STILL Safety-
Light 4Plus® can also be switched on and off
on the display-operating unit.
– To do so, press the softkey.

NOTE
If the truck is to be operated on public roads,
the STILL SafetyLight® and the STILL Safety-
Light 4Plus® must be switched off.

Warning zone light and warning

zone light plus (variants)
WARNING
Danger of damage to eyes from looking
into the warning zone light.
Do not look into the warning zone light
(plus).
Adjust the warning zone light (plus) so
as not to dazzle bystanders or the driver
when climbing in and out of the truck.

The warning zone light and the warning zone

light plus are mounted on supports on the
overhead guard such that it is not affected by
jolts and vibrations.

182 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lighting

The warning zone light projects a light bar 

next to the truck on both the left-hand side and
right-hand side of the truck or even behind
the truck. This light bar indicates the danger
areas to the sides or rear of the truck while
in operation. See the section entitled "Danger
area" in the chapter entitled "Handling loads".

6219_003-231

The warning zone light plus projects a semi- 

circle around the truck. This light bar indicates
the danger areas to the sides and rear of
the truck while in operation. See the section
entitled "Danger area" in the chapter entitled
"Handling loads".
The warning zone light (plus) switches on and
off again together with the truck.
If the truck has StVZO (German Road Traffic
Licensing Regulations) equipment, the warn-
ing zone light (plus) can be switched on and
off via the display-operating unit.
– To do so, press the softkey.

NOTE
5510_003-047

If the truck is to be operated on public roads,

the warning zone light must be switched off.
– Before using the truck, make sure that the
warning zone light is working and has been
adjusted correctly.
The distance from the light bar to the truck
must be between 70...75 cm.
– To adjust the warning zone light, see the
section entitled "Adjusting the warning zone
light" in the chapter entitled "Preserving op-
erational readiness".
When ordering the truck, you can choose be-
tween a blue or red warning zone light (plus).

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 183

4 Operation
Efficiency and drive modes

Efficiency and drive modes

Blue-Q (variant) 

Functional description
The Blue-Q efficiency mode affects both the
drive unit and the activation of the addition-
al consumers and reduces the truck's energy
consumption. Blue-Q can be switched on and
off via a softkey.
If efficiency mode is switched on, the acceler-
ation behaviour of the truck changes to make
acceleration more moderate.
When travelling at low speeds, normally when
manoeuvring, no reduction is noticeable even
if Blue-Q is switched on. For moderate speeds
from approx. 7 km/h, acceleration is gentler.
Therefore, on distances of up to approx. 40 m,
lower speeds are reached than would be the
case if the efficiency mode was not activated.
As in "STILL Classic" mode, the maximum
speed is 20 km/h.
Blue-Q has no influence on:
● Maximum speed

● Climbing capability

● Pulling force

● Braking characteristics

Effects on additional consumers

The following table shows conditions that cause certain additional consumers to shut down when
Blue-Q is activated. The additional consumers available depend on the truck equipment.
Shut-off Seat switch Truck is stationary Drive direction
Front working spot-
X X Reverse > 3 km/h
light*
Rear working spotlight* X X Forwards
Roof spotlight* X X > 3 km/h
Headlight* X X -
Front wiper X X Reverse > 3 km/h
Rear wiper X X Forwards
Roof wiper X X -
Seat heater X - -
Cab heating X - -

184 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Efficiency and drive modes

Shut-off Seat switch Truck is stationary Drive direction

Screen heating X - -

*No shut-off for StVZO (German Road Traffic Licensing Regulations) equipment (variant)

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 185

4 Operation
Efficiency and drive modes

Switching Blue-Q on and off

– To switch on Blue-Q efficiency mode, push
the softkey .
The Blue-Q symbol appears on the
display/operating unit and Blue-Q efficiency
mode is switched on.
– To switch off Blue-Q efficiency mode, push
the associated softkey again.
The Blue-Q symbol disappears and Blue-Q ef-
ficiency mode is switched off.

NOTE
The fleet manager can also use his access
authorisation to activate Blue-Q efficiency
mode permanently. See the next section.

186 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Efficiency and drive modes

Configuring Blue-Q
Fleet manager access authorisation allows the
fleet manager to activate Blue-Q efficiency
mode permanently or to enable it to be switch-
ed on and off via softkey.
– Enable Access authorisation .
– Press the Truck settings softkey .
The menu that opens provides the following
selection:
● Permanent
The driver cannot switch Blue-Q on and off.
Blue-Q is permanently active. The Blue-Q
symbol appears permanently on the dis-
play-operating unit.
● By pressing a button
The driver can switch Blue-Q on and off via
the softkey.
– Push the required softkey.
The orange activation bar appears next to the
pushed softkey.
The main display button takes you to the
main display.

STILL Classic and sprint mode 

The drive modes affect the handling of the

truck.
Two different drive modes are available:
1 STILL Classic
This mode is active after the truck
has been switched on. This mode is
the default setting and provides a bal-
ance between hydraulic functions and
driving functions. The maximum speed
is 18 km/h. No symbol is shown on the
display.
2 Sprint mode
In sprint mode, the truck accelerates
more quickly to a maximum speed of
20 km/h. This mode also increases the
lifting speed. Sprint mode is for driving on
clear and spacious terrain.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 187

4 Operation
Efficiency and drive modes

NOTE
If sprint mode is used, the truck's energy con-
sumption is higher. The battery is therefore
discharged more quickly. The drive units heat
up more quickly.

Switching sprint mode on and off

– To switch on sprint mode, push the associ-
ated softkey.
The "sprint mode" symbol (2) appears on
the display of the display-operating unit. Sprint
mode is switched on.
– To switch off the mode, push the softkey
again.
The symbol disappears and the mode is
switched off. The truck is then back in
STILL Classic mode.

Automatic switch off for sprint mode

If the truck is operated in sprint mode at the
maximum performance level, the truck will
consume more energy. As a result, the battery
is discharged faster and the traction drives
and energy supply may become too hot.
The battery voltage and the temperature of the
traction drives and energy supply are moni-
tored continuously. If the voltage becomes too
low or if the temperature becomes too high,
sprint mode is deactivated automatically.
If the truck is automatically switched off due to
under voltage, sprint mode can then only be
switched on again if the following conditions
are met:
● The battery is fully recharged.

● The truck has been restarted.

If the truck is automatically switched off due

to overtemperature, sprint mode can then only
be switched on again when the drive units
have cooled down.

188 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

Driving
Safety regulations when driving
Driving conduct
The driver must follow the public rules of the
road when driving in company traffic.
The speed must be appropriate to the local
conditions.
For example, the driver must drive slowly
around corners, in tight passageways, when
driving through swing-doors, at blind spots, or
on uneven surfaces.
The driver must always maintain a safe brak-
ing distance from vehicles and persons in
front, and must always have the truck under
control. Stopping suddenly, turning quickly
and overtaking at dangerous or blind spots
must be avoided.
– Initial driving practice must be carried out in
an empty space or on a clear roadway.
The following are forbidden during driving:
● Allowing arms and legs to hang outside the

truck
● Leaning the body over the outer contour of

the truck
● Climbing out of the truck

● Moving the driver's seat

● Adjusting the steering column

● Releasing the seat belt

● Disabling the restraint system

● Raising the load higher than 300 mm above

the ground (with the exception of manoeu-

vring processes during the placement into
stock/removal from stock of loads)
● Using electronic devices, for example ra-

dios, mobile phones etc.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 189

4 Operation
Driving

WARNING
The use of multimedia and communication equip-
ment as well as playing these devices at an exces-
sive volume during travel or when handling loads
can affect the operator's attention. There is a risk of
accident!
– Do not use devices during travel or when handling
loads.
– Set the volume so that warning signals can still be
heard.

WARNING
In areas where use of mobile phones is prohibited,
use of a mobile phone or radio telephone is not per-
mitted.
– Switch off the devices.

Visibility when driving

The driver must look in the drive direction and
have a sufficient view of the driving lane.
Particularly for reverse travel, the driver must
be sure that the driving lane is clear.
When transporting goods that impair visibility,
the driver must drive the truck in reverse.
If this is not possible, a second person acting
as a guide must walk in front of the truck.
In this case the driver must only move at walk-
ing pace and with extra care. The truck must
be stopped immediately if eye contact with the
guide is lost.
Rear-view mirrors are only to be used for ob-
serving the road area behind the truck and not
for reverse travel. If visual aids (mirror, mon-
itor) are necessary to achieve sufficient visi-
bility, it is necessary to practise using them.
For reverse travel using visual aids, extra care
should be taken.
When using attachments, special conditions
apply; see the chapter entitled "Fitting attach-
ments".
Any glass (variant, e.g. windscreen) and mir-
rors must always be clean and free of ice.

190 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

Roadways
Dimensions of roadways and aisle
widths
The following dimensions and aisle width re-
quirements apply under the specified condi-
tions to ensure safe manoeuvring. In each
case, it must be checked whether a larger
aisle width is necessary, e.g. in the case of
different load dimensions.
Within the EU, Directive 89/654/EEC regard-
ing the minimum safety and health require-
ments for the workplace must be observed.
The respective national guidelines apply for
areas outside the EU.
The required aisle widths depend on the di-
mensions of the load.

Required aisle widths with pallet

Aisle width [mm]
Model Type With pallet With pallet
1000x1200 800x1200
crosswise* lengthwise
RX60-35/600 6331 4265 4465
RX60-40 6332 4265 4465
RX60-40/600 6333 4265 4465
RX60-45 6334 4265 4465
RX60-45/600 6335 4275 4475
RX60-50 6336 4275 4370
RX60-50/600 6337 4475 4570
* Without taking protruding fork arms into account

The truck must be used only on roadways that

do not have excessively sharp curves, exces-
sively steep gradients or excessively narrow
or low entrances.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 191

4 Operation
Driving

Driving on ascending and descending

gradients
WARNING
Risk of accident due to the drive unit switching off!
Driving up and down long gradients can cause the
drive unit to overheat and switch off. The truck will
then no longer decelerate when the accelerator ped-
al is released and will coast.
Driving up and down long gradients that are steeper
than 15% is not permitted due to the minimum speci-
fied braking values.
– Consult the authorised service centre before driv-
ing on long ascending and descending gradients
that are steeper than 15%.

The top and bottom of the gradient must fea-

ture smooth and gradual transitions to prevent
the load from falling to the ground or the truck
being damaged.
– Drive on slopes at reduced speed. Adjust
the speed to the gradient.

Warning in the event that components

protrude beyond the truck contour
Trucks are often required to drive through very
narrow or very low spaces such as aisles or
containers. The dimensions of the trucks are
designed for this purpose. However, movable
components may protrude beyond the truck
contour and be damaged or torn off. Examples
of these components are:
● An open roof panel in the driver's cab

● Open cab doors

Condition of the roadways

Roadways must be sufficiently firm, level and
free from contamination and fallen objects.
Drainage channels, level crossings and similar
obstacles must be evened out and, if necessa-
ry, ramps must be provided so that trucks can
drive over these obstacles with as few bumps
as possible.
Note the load capacity of manhole covers,
drain covers etc.
There must be sufficient distance between the
highest points of the truck or the load and the
fixed elements of the surrounding area. The

192 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

height is based on the overall height of the lift

mast and the dimensions of the load.

Rules for roadways and the working

area
It is only permitted to drive on routes author-
ised for traffic by the operating company or
its representatives. Traffic routes must be free
from obstacles. The load must only be set
down and stored in the designated locations.
The operating company and its representa-
tives must ensure that unauthorised third par-
ties do not enter the working area.

NOTE
Please observe the definition of the following
responsible person: "operating company".

Hazardous areas
Hazardous areas on roadways must be indica-
ted by standard traffic signs or, if necessary,
by additional warning signs.

Selecting drive programmes 1 to 

3
The truck has three drive programmes with
different preset driving and braking character-
istics. The basic principle is that the higher the
number of the drive programme selected, the
greater the driving dynamics.
The drive programme is selected using the
display-operating unit under the Drive
menu item.
– Press the ... softkey to select the desired
drive programme.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 193

4 Operation
Driving

– If the drive programmes are saved as a fa- 

vourite on a softkey, press the softkey
until the number of the desired drive pro-
gramme is shown on the display.
The number of dynamic bar segments indi-
cates the driving dynamics of the selected
drive programme.

Selecting drive programme A or 

B
The truck has two driving programmes for
personalised handling and braking character-
istics.
Unlike the fixed drive programmes "1 to 3", the
programs "A" and "B" can be configured. The
procedure for this is described in the following
section.
The drive programme is selected using the
display-operating unit under the Drive
menu item.
– Press the or softkey to select the
desired drive programme.
– If the drive programmes are saved as a
favourite on a softkey, press the soft-
key until the letter of the desired drive pro-
gramme is shown on the display.

Configuring drive programmes A

and B
The drive programmes can be configured by
the driver.

194 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

NOTE
Access to the settings menu is only availa-
ble if the truck is at a standstill and the park-
ing brake is applied. If the parking brake is
released prematurely, the settings menu will
close.
– Stop the truck.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Press the button.
The first menu level appears.
– Press the softkey.
– Press the Truck settings softkey.
– Press the Drive programmes softkey.
The drive programme menu appears.
– Press the associated softkey for drive
programme A or drive programme
B.
Configuration of the drive programmes using
drive programme A is explained here.
The Setdrive programme A menu ap- 
pears.
The following parameters can be set:
● Max. speed
Determines the maximum speed (varies de-
pending on the truck model).
● Agility
Determines the acceleration behaviour and 3
the reversing behaviour using five levels.
1 indicates the lowest agility and 5 indi- Deceleration 2
cates the greatest agility
● Braking
Determines the electrical brake retardation
when the accelerator pedal is released in
five stages.
6219_003-187_V5_en
1 indicates the lowest delay and 5 indicates
the greatest delay
– To select a higher stage, press the soft-
key.
– To select a lower stage, press the soft-
key.
– To save the setting, press the softkey.
The settings are saved.
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 195
4 Operation
Driving

– To cancel the setting, press the softkey.

The settings return to the most recently saved
value.
Press the button once to return to the pre-
vious menu level without saving the changes.

Selecting the drive direction 

The drive direction of the truck must be selec-

ted using the drive direction switch/drive direc- 1
tion selection lever before attempting to drive.
The method of actuating the drive direction
switch/drive direction selection lever depends
on the operating devices that are fitted in the
truck.
The drive direction switch is located on the
operating devices for the hydraulic functions.
The drive direction selection lever is located
on the travel direction selector and indicator 2
module (variant).

NOTE
The drive direction can also be changed dur-
ing travel. Your foot can remain on the accel-
erator pedal while you do so. The truck is then
decelerated and accelerated again in the op-
posite direction (reversing).
The indicator for the selected drive direction
("forwards" (1) or "backwards" (2)) lights up on
the display-operating unit.

Neutral position
If leaving the truck for a prolonged period, the
neutral position must be selected in order to
avoid the truck suddenly moving off due to an
inadvertent actuation of the accelerator pedal.
– Briefly select the drive direction switch/drive
direction selection lever for the direction op-
posite to the current drive direction.
The drive direction indicator on the display-op-
erating unit goes out.

196 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

NOTE
When the seat is vacated, the selected drive
direction is set to the "neutral position". To
drive, the drive direction switch/drive direction
selection lever must be actuated again.

Actuating the drive direction 

switch with the multiple-lever
version
– For the "forwards" drive direction, push the
drive direction switch (1) downwards.
– For the "backwards" drive direction, push
the drive direction switch (1) upwards.

NOTE
If the drive direction switch (1) is defective and
the truck stops in a danger area, the drive
direction selection lever on the travel direction
selector and indicator module (variant) can be
used for emergency driving. Refer to the sec-
tion entitled "Emergency driving via the drive
direction switch/drive direction selection lever"
in the chapter entitled "Procedure in emergen-
cies".

Actuating the drive direction 

switch with the mini-lever ver-
sion
– For the "forwards" drive direction, push the
drive direction switch (1) forwards. 1
– For the "backwards" drive direction, pull the
drive direction switch (1) backwards.

NOTE
If the drive direction switch (1) is defective and
the truck stops in a danger area, the drive
direction selection lever on the travel direction
selector and indicator module (variant) can be
used for emergency driving. Refer to the sec-
6219_003-005

tion entitled "Emergency driving via the drive

direction switch/drive direction selection lever"
in the chapter entitled "Procedure in emergen-
cies".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 197

4 Operation
Driving

Actuating the drive direction 

switch with the Fingertip version
– For the "forwards" drive direction, push the
drive direction switch (1) forwards.
– For the "backwards" drive direction, pull the
drive direction switch (1) backwards.

1
NOTE
If the drive direction switch (1) is defective and
the truck stops in a danger area, the drive
direction selection lever on the travel direction
selector and indicator module (variant) can be
used for emergency driving. Refer to the sec-
tion entitled "Emergency driving via the drive
direction switch/drive direction selection lever"
in the chapter entitled "Procedure in emergen-
cies".

Actuating the vertical rocker but- 

ton for the "drive direction" with
the Joystick 4Plus version
– For the "forwards" drive direction, push the
vertical rocker button for the "drive direc- 1
tion" (1) upwards.
– For the "backwards" drive direction, push
the vertical rocker button for the "drive di-
rection" (1) downwards.
+ F

NOTE
If the drive direction switch (1) is defective and
the truck stops in a danger area, the drive
direction selection lever on the travel direction 6219_003-303

selector and indicator module (variant) can be

used for emergency driving. Refer to the sec-
tion entitled "Emergency driving via the drive
direction switch/drive direction selection lever"
in the chapter entitled "Procedure in emergen-
cies".

198 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

Actuating the drive direction se- 

lection lever with the travel direc-
tion selector and indicator mod-
ule version
– For the "forwards" drive direction, push the
drive direction selection lever (1) forwards.
– For the "backwards" drive direction, push
the drive direction selection lever (1) back-
wards.
Alternatively, the drive direction can also be
selected using the drive direction switches on
the operating devices for the hydraulic func-
tions.

NOTE
If the drive direction selection lever (1) is de-
fective and the truck stops in a danger area,
the drive direction switch on the operating de-
vice for the hydraulic functions can be used for
emergency driving. Refer to the section enti-
tled "Emergency driving via the drive direction
switch/drive direction selection lever" in the
chapter entitled "Procedure in emergencies".

Starting drive mode

DANGER
Being trapped under a rolling or tipping truck could
cause fatal injuries!
– Sit on the driver's seat.
– Fasten the seat belt.
– Activate the available restraint systems.

– Observe the information in the chapter enti-

tled "Safety regulations when driving".
The driver's seat is equipped with a seat
switch. This seat switch checks whether the
driver's seat is occupied. If the driver's seat
is not occupied or if the seat switch is malfunc-
tioning, the truck cannot be moved. All lifting
functions are disabled. In these situations, the
message Sit on driver's seat is
shown on the display of the display-operating
unit.
– Sit on the driver's seat. Fasten the seat belt.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 199

4 Operation
Driving

– Lift the fork carriage until the necessary

ground clearance is achieved.
– Tilt the lift mast backwards.
– Release the parking brake.
– Select the desired drive direction.
The indicator for the selected drive direction 
("forwards" (1) or "reverse" (2)) lights up on
the display-operating unit.
1
NOTE
Depending on the equipment, the following
variants of warning units for reverse travel
may be present:
● An acoustic signal will be heard.

● The STILL SafetyLight lights up.

● The hazard warning system flashes.

2

– Press the accelerator pedal (3). 

The truck travels in the selected drive direc-
tion. The speed is controlled by the accelera-
tor pedal position. The truck brakes when the
accelerator pedal is released.

NOTE
The truck is also held in place on ascending
or descending gradients even if the electric
parking brake is not engaged.
3
DANGER
Risk of accident due to brake failure!
The regenerative brake only functions if the truck is
switched on, the emergency off switch has not been
5060_003-084

actuated and the parking brake is released.

– Use the brake pedal if the regenerative brake mal-
functions.
– Engage the parking brake before leaving the
truck.

Changing the drive direction

– Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

200 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

– Select the desired drive direction.

– Press the accelerator pedal.
The truck will travel in the selected drive direc-
tion.

NOTE
The drive direction can also be changed dur-
ing travel. Your foot can remain on the accel-
erator pedal while you do so. The truck is then
decelerated and accelerated again in the op-
posite direction (reversing).

NOTE
If an electrical fault occurs in the accelerator,
the drive unit is switched off. In this situation,
the truck is not electrically braked. Once the
electrical fault has been corrected, it will be
possible to drive the truck again by releasing
the accelerator pedal and then actuating the
accelerator pedal again. If the truck still cannot
be operated, park the truck securely and con-
tact the authorised service centre.

Starting drive mode, dual pedal

version (variant)
DANGER
Being trapped under a rolling or tipping truck could
cause fatal injuries!
– Sit on the driver's seat.
– Fasten the seat belt.
– Activate the available restraint systems.

– Observe the information in the chapter enti-

tled "Safety regulations when driving".
The driver's seat is equipped with a seat
switch. This seat switch checks whether the
driver's seat is occupied. If the driver's seat
is not occupied or if the seat switch is malfunc-
tioning, the truck cannot be moved. All lifting
functions are disabled. In these situations, the
message Sit on driver's seat is
shown on the display of the display-operating
unit.
– Sit on the driver's seat. Fasten the seat belt.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 201

4 Operation
Driving

– Lift the fork carriage until the necessary

ground clearance is achieved.
– Tilt the lift mast backwards.
– Release the parking brake.
– Press the right accelerator pedal (1) for the 
"forwards" drive direction and press the left
accelerator pedal (2) for the "backwards"
drive direction.

NOTE
In the dual pedal version, the drive direction
switches on the operating devices do not func-
tion.

2 1

5060_003-085

The indicator for the selected drive direction 

("forwards" (1) or "reverse" (2)) lights up on
the display-operating unit.
1
NOTE
Depending on the equipment, the following
variants of warning units for reverse travel
may be present:
● An acoustic signal will be heard.

● The STILL SafetyLight lights up.

● The hazard warning system flashes.

2
The truck travels in the selected drive direc-
tion. The speed is controlled by the accelera-
tor pedal position. The truck brakes when the
accelerator pedal is released.

NOTE
The truck is also held in place on ascending
or descending gradients even if the electric
parking brake is not engaged.

202 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

DANGER
Risk of accident due to brake failure!
The regenerative brake only functions if the truck is
switched on, the emergency off switch has not been
actuated and the parking brake is released.
– Use the brake pedal if the regenerative brake mal-
functions.
– Engage the parking brake before leaving the
truck.

Changing the drive direction

– Remove your foot from the actuated accel-
erator pedal.
– Press down the accelerator pedal for the
opposite direction.
The truck travels in the selected drive direc-
tion.

NOTE
If an electrical fault occurs in the accelerator,
the drive unit is switched off. In this situation,
the truck is not electrically braked. Once the
electrical fault has been corrected, it will be
possible to drive the truck again by releasing
the accelerator pedal and then actuating the
accelerator pedal again. If the truck still cannot
be operated, park the truck securely and con-
tact the authorised service centre.

Operating the service brake 

The regenerative brake converts the accelera- 1

tion energy of the truck into electrical energy.
When the accelerator pedal is released, the
truck decelerates.
– To do this, release the accelerator ped-
al (1).
– If the braking effect is inadequate, use the
brake pedal (2) in addition to the service
brake. 2
In the first section of the brake pedal's travel,
only the regenerative braking takes effect. As
the pedal is depressed further, the mechanical
brake is also activated and acts on the drive 5060_003-006

wheels.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 203

4 Operation
Driving

Electrical braking recovers energy for the bat-

tery. This results in a longer operating time be-
tween the charging processes and less wear
to the brakes.
The truck can also be braked with the service
brake by actuating the brake pedal (2). In the
first section of the brake pedal's travel, only
the regenerative braking takes effect. As the
pedal is depressed further, the mechanically
actuated service brake is also activated and
acts on the drive wheels.

DANGER
There is a risk of accident if the service brake fails!
If the regenerative braking effect noticeably deterio-
rates, a component failure may have occurred. It will
no longer be possible to sufficiently brake the truck.
– When braking with the service brake, it may be
necessary to use the parking brake to assist the
braking process.
– Notify the authorised service centre.
– Do not operate the truck again until the service
brake has been repaired.

DANGER
At speeds that are too high, there is a danger that
the truck could slip or overturn!
The braking distance of the truck depends on the
weather conditions and the level of contamination on
the roadway. Note that the basic braking distance
increases with the square of the speed.
– Adapt the driving and braking style to suit the
weather conditions and the level of contamination
on the roadway.
– Always choose a driving speed that will provide a
sufficient stopping distance.

NOTE
If the parking brake is actuated while the truck
is in motion, the truck may decelerate with a
jerk.

204 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

Actuating the electric parking 

brake

DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury from being
run over if the truck rolls away.
– Do not park the truck on a gradient.
– Do not leave the truck until the park-
ing brake has been applied.
– In an emergency, secure the truck
with wedges on the downhill-facing
side to prevent it from rolling away.

This truck is equipped with an electric parking

brake. The parking brake must not be applied 6219_003-006_V2

manually when the driver leaves the truck.

The parking brake is applied automatically.
Despite these automatic aids, the driver is al-
ways responsible for parking the truck safely.
The safety information about parking the truck
safely applies.

NOTE
The electric parking brake can be actuated
or released only if the battery male connector
has been connected and the truck is switched
on.
If the parking brake is applied, this is indica-
ted by a symbol in the display-operating unit
instead of the driving speed.

Symbols for the parking brake in the display-operating unit

Symbol Description
The parking brake was applied automatically.
Actuating the accelerator pedal automatically releases the parking brake.
The parking brake was applied by pressing the push button.
Pressing the push button is the only way to release the parking brake.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 205

4 Operation
Driving

Releasing the electric parking brake af-

ter the truck has been switched on
– Press the push button (1) to release the 
parking brake.
The truck is held in place by the traction mo-
tor.

Manually actuating the electric parking

brake when the truck is stationary
Applying the parking brake manually
– Press the push button (1).
The electric parking brake will make a noise
when it is applied and the LED (2) lights up
continuously. The symbol appears in the
display.
Releasing the parking brake manually
6219_003-006_V2

– Sit on the driver's seat.

– Press the push button (1).
The electric parking brake will make a noise
when it releases and the LED (2) goes out.
The driving speed display is replaced by
the symbol .

Automatic actuation of the electric park-

ing brake when the truck is stationary
The electric parking brake is applied automati-
cally when the truck is stationary in the follow-
ing situations:

Automatically triggered actuation when the truck is stationary

Cause Effect
The electric parking brake will make a noise
The driver's seat is vacated. when it is applied.
The LED (2) lights up with a steady light.
After a specified delay, the electric parking
brake is applied with an audible sound.
The accelerator pedal is released (brake pedal The LED (2) lights up with a steady light.
not actuated). On a gradient, the truck is held by the traction
motor for 3 seconds. Then the electric parking
brake is applied.

206 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

Cause Effect
The electric parking brake is immediately ap-
plied with an audible sound.
The truck is switched off.
The LED (2) will light up briefly with a steady
light until the control units switch off.
The electric parking brake is immediately ap-
The emergency off switch is actuated. plied with an audible sound.
The LED (2) lights up with a steady light.

If the electric parking brake has applied auto-

matically, the symbol appears in the dis-
play-operating unit. The LED (2) lights up.
– To release the electric parking brake, the
driver must sit down on the driver's seat
again.
– Press the accelerator pedal.
The electric parking brake will make a noise
when it is released. The LED (2) goes out.

NOTE
If the symbol appears in the display, the
truck cannot be driven until the electric parking
brake has been released by pressing the push
button (1). This is the case if the parking brake
has been applied manually.

Actuation of the electric parking brake 

when the truck is in motion
Manual actuation when the truck is in motion
– Press the push button (1).
The truck is braked with the drive unit in ac-
cordance with the selected drive programme.
Once the truck has come to a standstill, the
electric parking brake is applied with an audi-
ble sound. The LED (2) lights up with a steady
light. The symbol appears in the display-
operating unit.
– If the braking effect is insufficient, also use
the service brake.
6219_003-006_V2

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 207

4 Operation
Driving

NOTE
If the drive unit fails, the truck can be braked
by pressing the push button (1). The truck
brakes more strongly if the push button (1)
is pressed and held or pressed several times.
The electric parking brake cannot be released
by actuating the accelerator pedal.

WARNING
Risk of accident!
The truck may decelerate abruptly.
– Fasten the seat belt.

Automatically triggered actuation when the truck is in motion

Cause Effect
The truck is braked in accordance with the se-
lected drive programme.
Once the truck has come to a standstill, the
The driver's seat is vacated. electric parking brake is applied with an audible
sound.
The LED (2) lights up with a steady light. The
symbol appears in the display.
The truck will coast to a stop.
Once the truck has come to a standstill, the
electric parking brake is applied with an audible
The key switch is switched off. sound.
The LED (2) lights up with a steady light. The
symbol appears in the display until the con-
trol units switch off.
The truck will coast to a stop.
Once the truck has come to a standstill, the
electric parking brake is applied with an audible
The emergency off switch is actuated.
sound.
The LED (2) lights up with a steady light.
The symbol appears in the display.
The electric parking brake is immediately ap-
The truck accelerates sharply, even though the plied with an audible sound.
driver's seat has been vacated. The LED (2) lights up with a steady light. The
symbol appears in the display.
The parking brake is immediately applied with
The truck accelerates sharply, even though the an audible sound.
accelerator pedal has not been actuated. The LED (2) lights up with a steady light. The
symbol appears in the display.

208 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

Malfunctions in the electric park-

ing brake
DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury from being
run over if the truck rolls away.
– Do not park the truck on a gradient.
– Do not leave the truck until the park-
ing brake has been applied.
– In an emergency, secure the truck
with wedges on the downhill-facing
side to prevent it from rolling away.

– Before leaving the truck, make sure that the

parking brake is properly applied.

Message:
Apply parking brake via button.
If the truck control unit detects a malfunction in 
the parking brake, the truck cannot be switch-
ed off.
● The Apply parking brake via
button message appears on the display-
operating unit.
● The LED (1) on the push button (2) flashes.
● A warning signal sounds.

NOTE
If it becomes necessary to switch off a truck
with a faulty parking brake, always secure the
truck to prevent it from rolling.
A possible cause of the malfunction is that
the parking brake cannot determine whether 6219_003-006_V2

the truck is stationary or still in motion. The

following section describes how to actuate the
parking brake when it is faulty:
Actuating a faulty parking brake when the
truck is stationary
There are two ways to apply the parking
brake:
– Press and hold the push button (1) for at
least five seconds and then release the
push button.
or

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 209

4 Operation
Driving

– Press the push button (1) several times in

succession so that the push button is actu-
ated for a total of five seconds.
The parking brake is applied with an audi-
ble sound. After the push button is released,
the parking brake should not make any fur-
ther sounds; if a sound is heard, this means
the push button was pressed for less than
five seconds. In this case, press the push but-
ton again to apply the parking brake again.
Repeat this process as necessary until the
parking brake applies and the symbol ap-
pears.
Actuating a parking brake with a malfunction
when the truck is in motion
– Press the push button (1).
The parking brake is applied.

NOTE
The truck brakes more strongly if the push
button (1) is pressed and held down for longer
or pressed several times.

"Safe parking" function

This function monitors the braking effect after
the truck is parked. If a sensor is fitted on the
lift mast (variant), it also checks whether the
fork carriage is lowered.
This function alerts the driver with an audible
warning signal if:
● The driver leaves the driver's seat and it

has not been possible to apply the parking

brake
● The driver leaves the driver's seat without

lowering the fork carriage (variant)

● The driver attempts to switch off the truck

and it has not been possible to apply the

parking brake
● The truck starts moving within the next 20

seconds after the parking brake is applied

210 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

Activation and intervention by the "Safe parking" function

Cause Effect
The following message appears in the display:
Parking brake cannot be applied.
The driver's seat is vacated. The electric park-
- To confirm, press the softkey.
ing brake cannot be applied or previously could
A warning signal sounds when the driver's seat
not be applied.
is vacated. Sitting in the driver's seat silences
the warning signal again.
The truck cannot be switched off. A warning
signal sounds.
The following messages appear in the display:
Parking brake cannot be ap-
plied.
- To confirm, press the softkey.
The truck must be switched off. The electric
Switch off truck anyway?
parking brake cannot be applied or previously
- To confirm, press the softkey.
could not be applied.
Secure truck against rolling
away.
- Secure the truck with wedges so that the truck
does not roll away.
- To confirm, press the softkey.
It is now possible to switch off the truck.

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from being run over if the truck
rolls away!
Park the truck securely if the parking brake is faulty.
Secure the industrial truck to prevent it from rolling
away.
– To do this, strictly adhere to the following instruc-
tions:

– If the parking brake cannot be applied auto-

matically or via the push button, perform an
emergency actuation of the parking brake.
Refer to the section entitled "Emergency ac-
tuation of the parking brake" in the chapter
"Procedure in emergencies".
– If the parking brake cannot be applied via
the emergency actuation mechanism, se-
cure the truck with wedges to prevent it
from rolling.
– Have the parking brake repaired by an au-
thorised service centre.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 211

4 Operation
Driving

Message:
Parking brake cannot be applied
If the truck control unit detects a malfunction in 
the parking brake, the truck cannot be switch-
ed off.
● The message Parking brake can-
not be applied appears on the
display-operating unit.
● The LED (2) on the push button (1) flashes.
● A warning signal sounds.

NOTE
If it is necessary to switch off a truck with
a faulty parking brake, the section entitled
"Switching off the truck when the electric park-
ing brake is faulty" must be observed. It is
essential to secure the truck to prevent it from
rolling away. 6219_003-006_V2

NOTE
If the parking brake is released via the emer-
gency actuation mechanism, it is possible to
drive the truck at a low speed.
● The truck can be moved out of the hazard-

ous situation or to the repair location.

● Driving with a faulty parking brake requires

the driver to be especially vigilant.

– If the parking brake cannot be applied au-
tomatically or via the push button, apply
the parking brake via the emergency actua-
tion process. Refer to the section entitled
"Emergency actuation of the parking brake"
in the chapter "Procedure in emergencies".
– If the parking brake cannot be applied via
the emergency actuation process, secure
the truck with wedges so that the truck can-
not roll away.
– Have the parking brake repaired by an au-
thorised service centre.

212 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

Steering 
L R
DANGER
Risk of accident! 2
If the hydraulics fail, there is a risk of accident as the
steering characteristics will have changed.
– Do not operate the truck if it has a defective steer- 1
ing system.

– Steer the truck by turning the steering

wheel (1) accordingly.
Turning the steering wheel to the left (L)
steers the truck to the left (L). L R
Turning the steering wheel to the right (R)
steers the truck to the right (R).
The arrow (2) displays the direction in which
the truck is moving.
For information on the turning radius, see the
"Technical data".

L R
6219_003-109

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 213

4 Operation
Driving

Reducing speed when turning 

(Curve Speed Control)
This function reduces the speed of the truck
as the steering angle increases, regardless
of the amount to which the accelerator has
been actuated. If the steering angle is reduced
again upon exiting the curve, the truck accel-
erates in line with how far the accelerator is
depressed.
However, the function does not release the
driver from the duty to approach a curve at a
speed according to the following factors:
● The carried load

● The roadway conditions

● The radius of the curve

6327_003-006

DANGER
The Curve Speed Control function cannot override
the physical limits of stability. Despite this function,
there still is a risk of tipping!
– Before using this function, familiarise yourself with
the change to the driving and steering characteris-
tics of the truck.

DANGER
Increased risk of tipping if the Curve Speed Control
function is disabled! If the controller fails while the
truck is in motion or if the controller is disabled,
the truck will no longer automatically brake when
steering.
– Do not turn off the key switch while driving.
– Actuate the emergency stop switch only in emer-
gencies.
– Always adapt your driving style to the conditions.

Despite the Curve Speed Control function, the

truck may overturn in extreme cases within the
following situations:
● Cornering too fast on uneven or inclined

roadways.
● Turning the steering wheel sharply while

driving.
● Cornering with an inadequately secured

load.
● Cornering too fast on a smooth or wet road-

way.

214 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

Speed reduction when the cab

door is open
WARNING
Risk of accident from sudden deceleration of the
truck
If the cab door is opened while the truck is in motion,
the truck brakes automatically.
– Keep the cab door closed when driving.

With the "cab" equipment variant, the truck

has a cab door monitoring function via a sen-
sor. The signal from this sensor is linked with
the signal from the buckle switch in the control
electronics of the truck.
If the cab door is not closed and the seat belt
is not fastened, the driving speed is limited to
4 km/h. The message Close cab door
or seat belt appears in the display.
If the cab door is opened while the truck is
in motion, the truck brakes automatically to a
speed of 4 km/h. The message Close cab
door appears in the display.
If the seat belt is released with the cab door
closed, no message appears in the display.

NOTE
There is a variant that prevents the truck from
being driven when the cab door is open. The
message Close cab door appears in
the display.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 215

4 Operation
Driving

Speed restriction (variant) 

The speed restriction (variant) is a function

that can be configured by the fleet manager.
It sets a maximum speed that can either be
permanent or be called up by the driver. This
function helps the driver to comply with speed
restrictions, e.g. in storage areas or other spe-
cific areas.

Switching the speed restriction on and

off
– Press the button.
The first menu level appears.
– Press the Drive softkey .
The Drive menu appears.
– Press the Speed restriction soft-
key .
The activation bar appears next to the symbol.
The speed restriction is switched on.
– To switch off the speed restriction, press
the softkey again.

Configuring the speed restriction

NOTE
Access to the settings menu is available on-
ly if the truck is at a standstill and the park-
ing brake is applied. If the parking brake is
released prematurely, the settings menu will
close. Access is only granted when the pass-
word is entered by the fleet manager.
– Stop the truck.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
The first menu level appears.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the Truck settings softkey .
– Press the Speed restriction softkey.

216 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

The menu that opens offers the following func-

tions:
● Permanent
Enabling this function limits the speed until
the fleet manager disables this function.
● By pressing a button
If this function is activated, the driver may
switch the speed restriction on and off by
pressing the softkey.
● Entering the maximum speed
This menu can be used to set the maximum
truck speed when speed restriction is ac-
tive.
– To adjust the maximum speed, press the
Enter max. speed softkey.
The Speed restriction menu opens. 
– Using the softkeys, set a maximum speed
between 2 km/h and 20 km/h. Speed restriction
The maximum speed is dependent on the
truck equipment and may be restricted by a
factory setting.
Enter maximum
– To save, press the button.
speed (2...20km / h)
The maximum speed is entered. 10 km / h
– To clear, press the scroll button.
The entry is deleted.
– To cancel, press the back button .
The display reverts to the previous menu.
6219_003-193_en

The main display button takes you to the

main display.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 217

4 Operation
Driving

Cruise control (variant) 

The "cruise control" assistance function allows

the driver to maintain a constant truck speed
over a reasonable distance. In addition, the
cruise control function can be used to comply
with any speed restriction that is in force on
the company's premises. The cruise control
function operates when driving forwards at a
speed of 6 km/h or faster. The function is put
on standby via the display-operating unit and
can be activated and deactivated using the
drive direction switch on the operating device
for the hydraulic functions.
When the cruise control function is activated,
the driver can save the speed when driving 6219_003-305

forwards at a speed of at least 6.0 km/h by

pressing a button and can continue driving
without actuating the accelerator pedal.
The pictogram (3) for operating the cruise
control function is located on the operating de-
vice for the hydraulic functions.

Putting the cruise control function on

standby
In order for the cruise control function to be
activated via the drive direction switch, the
function must first be put on standby using the
display-operating unit.
– Press the button.
The first menu level appears.
– Press the Drive softkey .
The Drive menu appears.

218 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

– Press the softkey. 

The orange-coloured activation bar next to the
softkey lights up. The cruise control func- 08:20
tion is ready.
The greyed-out symbol (1) appears on the
display.

Taking the cruise control function off

standby
Pressing the softkey again takes the func-
tion off standby.
A single beep sounds. The symbol (1) is
no longer displayed. 1
6219_003-307

Activating the cruise control function

WARNING
Risk of accident from failing to adjust speed!
Driving at excessive speeds can cause accidents,
e.g. the truck could tip over when cornering.
– Adjust speed along the entire distance being trav-
elled
– Pay particular attention to cornering speed
– Observe safety regulations when driving
– Observe the special behaviour of the cruise con-
trol function and the dangers associated with it

– Accelerate the truck to the required speed

(at least 6.0 km/h)

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 219

4 Operation
Driving

– Actuate the drive direction switch (2) for for- 

wards travel.
2
3
NOTE
In the dual-pedal version (variant), the drive
direction switch (2) is used exclusively to acti-
vate and deactivate the cruise control function
(variant).

+ F 3

3
2

220 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Driving

The cruise control function is active. The cur- 

rent speed is saved.
Two beeps signal that the cruise control func- 08:20
tion is active. The symbol (4) appears in
black in the display.
– Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The truck continues to drive at the selected
speed until the cruise control function is deac-
tivated.
– To save a different speed, deactivate the
cruise control function and activate the 6 km/h
function at the newly selected speed.

Deactivating cruise control

4
6219_003-308

Deactivating the cruise control function means

that the speed is again controlled by the ac-
celerator pedal. The cruise control function
remains on standby. The function can be acti-
vated at any time when the accelerator pedal
is depressed by pressing the drive direction
switch for forwards travel again.
When the cruise control function is deactiva-
ted, the symbol (1) is greyed out.

NOTE
The easiest way to deactivate the cruise con-
trol function is to touch the accelerator pedal.
The following actions deactivate the cruise
control function:
● Actuating the foot brake

● Actuating the parking brake

● Actuating the accelerator pedal

Depressing the accelerator pedal beyond

the set speed accelerates the truck.
● Changing the travel direction

● Press the drive direction switch for forwards

travel again without actuating the accelera-

tor pedal
● Pressing the softkey

Pressing the softkey switches off the

cruise control function.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 221

4 Operation
Driving

Other conditions that will cause the truck con-

trol unit to deactivate the cruise control func-
tion are:
● Vacating the driver's seat

● Truck speed less than 2.5 km/h.

● Speed restriction set to less than 4.5 km/h.

● The truck control unit detects abnormalities,

e.g. battery door open, battery carrier not

retracted.
If the accelerator pedal is actuated in these
circumstances, the truck is initially braked via
the drive unit. The following message appear
on the display:
Release the accelerator pedal
The truck will continue to drive only when the
accelerator pedal is released and then actu-
ated again.
If these conditions have changed again, the
speed that was initially saved is set again.

NOTE
If the truck is configured with automatic func-
tions to reduce the driving speed and the driv-
ing speed is reduced to 6 km/h or less, the
cruise control function is automatically deacti-
vated.

222 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Parking

Parking
Parking the truck securely and
switching it off
DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury from being
run over if the truck rolls away.
– Do not park the truck on a gradient.
– In emergencies, secure the truck us-
ing wedges on the side facing down-
hill.
– Only leave the truck when the parking
brake has been applied.

DANGER
There is a risk to life caused by a falling load or if
truck components are being lowered.
– Lower the load fully before leaving the truck.

CAUTION
Batteries may freeze!
If the truck is parked in an ambient temperature of
below -10°C for an extended period, the batteries
will cool down. For lead-acid batteries, the electrolyte
can freeze and damage the batteries. The truck is
then not ready for operation.
– At ambient temperatures of below -10°C, only
park the truck for short periods of time.

– Drive the truck out of the potentially explo-

sive area to a space assigned by the safety
officer.
– Actuate the parking brake.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 223

4 Operation
Parking

– Lower the fork carriage to the ground. 

– Tilt the lift mast forwards until the tips of the
fork arms rest on the ground.
– If attachments (variant) are fitted, retract the
working cylinders; see the chapter entitled
"General instructions for controlling attach-
ments".

– Turn the switch key to position "0" and re- 

move the key.

224 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Parking

– In the "push button ignition" variant, press 

the button. (1)
Depending on the truck version:

– Push the battery isolating switch (1). 

OR

6219_901-018_

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 225

4 Operation
Parking

– Turn the battery isolation switch (1) anti- 

clockwise up to the stop and into the "OFF"
position.

NOTE 1
Switch keys, FleetManager cards (variant),
FleetManager transponder chips (variant) and
the PIN code for access authorisation (variant)
must not be handed over to other persons
unless explicit instructions to this effect have
been given by the responsible fleet manager.

6219_901-006_V2

Wheel chock (variant) 

The wheel chock (variant) is used to prevent 1

the truck from rolling away on a slope. It is lo-
cated on the rear post of the overhead guard.
– Pull the support bracket (1) away from
2
wheel chock and hold the support bracket
in position.
– Grasp the wheel chock (2) and pull it up-
wards and out of the support mounting (3). 3
– Push the wheel chock under a front axle
wheel on the side facing the descending
gradient.
– After use, insert the wheel chock back into
the support mounting so that the support
6301_003-032

bracket locks the wheel chock into position.

226 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

Lifting
Lifting system variants
The movement of the fork carriage and the lift
mast heavily depends on the following equip-
ment:
● The lift mast with which the truck is equip-

ped, see ⇒ Chapter "Lift mast versions",

Page 227
● The operating device with which the

hydraulic functions are controlled, see

⇒ Chapter "Operating devices for the lifting
system", Page 228
Regardless of the equipment variants of the
truck, the basic specifications and procedures
must be complied with, see ⇒ Chapter "Safety
regulations for handling loads", Page 255 .

Lift mast versions

DANGER
Risk of accident if the lift mast or the load collides
with low ceilings or entrances.
– Note that the inner lift mast or load may be higher
than the fork carriage.
– Observe the heights of ceilings and entrances.

One of the following lift masts may be attach-

ed to the truck:

Telescopic lift mast 

When lifting, the lift mast rises above the out-
er lift cylinders. The lift mast takes the fork
1
carriage with it via the chains. In this scenario,
the fork carriage rises at twice the speed of
the inner lift mast. The top edge (1) of the
inner lift mast can therefore be higher than the
fork carriage.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 227

4 Operation
Lifting

Triple mast (variant) 

During lifting, the inner lift cylinder moves up 2
to free lift (3) and then the outer lift cylinders
raise the inner lift mast up to the maximum
height (2).

Operating devices for the lifting

system
The method of operating the lifting system de-
pends on the operating devices included in the
truck's equipment.
Possible equipment variants include:
● Multi-lever

● Double mini-lever

● Triple mini-lever

● Quadruple mini-lever

● Fingertip

● Joystick 4Plus

For clarity, the movements of the lifting system 

are referred to by the letters (A, B, C, D) in this
subchapter. C D
A Lower the fork carriage
B Lift the fork carriage
C Tilting the lift mast forwards
D Tilting the lift mast backwards
– See the relevant sections in this subchap-
ter. B

228 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

WARNING
Risk of injury due to delayed response from the
truck!
If the lifting movements are configured to use low
dynamics, the lifting system responds after a delay
when the operating device is released, even in an
emergency. The fork carriage does not stop immedi-
ately upon release. It only stops after approximately
one second. This behaviour may also occur when
specific settings are configured for the Dynamic Load
Control 1 & 2 assistance systems.
– Work with particular attention and care.

NOTE
If several hydraulic functions are used at the
same time, these functions can influence each
other. For example, if the fork carriage is
raised and an attachment is operated at the
same time, this may change the lifting speed
or the operating speed of the attachment.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 229

4 Operation
Lifting

Controlling the lifting system us- 

ing multi-lever operation

DANGER
Reaching into or climbing between moving parts
of the truck (e.g. lift mast, sideshifts, working equip-
ment, load carrying devices etc.) can lead to seri-
ous injury or death and is therefore prohibited.
– Observe the safety regulations for handling loads.
– Operate the lifting system from the driver's seat
only.

WARNING
Risk of accident as a result of an operating error!
These operating instructions describe how to operate
the lifting system in the factory configuration.
C D
If the authorised service centre has configured a dif-
ferent configuration, the newly applied pictograms
must be observed to ensure safe operation. The
operating company must make all drivers aware of
the fact that a different configuration has been con-
figured.
– Observe the pictograms on the operating levers.
– Before use, check that the hydraulic functions are
working correctly. B

The lifting and lowering movements of the lift A

mast are controlled using the "lift-lower" oper- 6219_003-111_V2

ating lever (1). The adhesive label with the

corresponding pictogram (4) is located on the
operating lever.
The tilting movement of the lift mast is con-
trolled using the "tilting" operating lever (2).
The adhesive label with the corresponding pic-
togram (3) is located on the operating lever.
The pictograms are arranged according to the
directions of movement of the operating lev-
er (1) or (2).

Lifting/lowering the fork carriage

To lift the fork carriage:
– Move the "lifting/lowering" operating lev-
er (1) in the direction of the arrow (B).
To lower the fork carriage:
– Move the "lifting/lowering" operating lev-
er (1) in the direction of the arrow (A).

230 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

Tilting the lift mast

To tilt the lift mast forwards:
– Move the "tilting" operating lever (2) in the
direction of the arrow (C).
To tilt the lift mast backwards:
– Move the "tilting" operating lever (2) in the
direction of the arrow (D).

Movements of the lifting system and

meanings of the pictograms
A Lowering
B Lifting
C Tilting forwards
D Tilting backwards

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 231

4 Operation
Lifting

Controlling the lifting system us- 

ing a double mini-lever

DANGER
Reaching into or climbing between moving parts
of the truck (e.g. lift mast, sideshifts, working equip-
ment, load carrying devices etc.) can lead to seri-
ous injury or death and is therefore prohibited.
– Observe the safety regulations for handling loads.
– Operate the lifting system from the driver's seat
only.

WARNING
Risk of accident as a result of an operating error! C
These operating instructions describe how to operate
the lifting system in the factory configuration. A B
If the authorised service centre has configured a dif-
ferent configuration, the newly applied pictograms D
must be observed to ensure safe operation. The
operating company must make all drivers aware of
the fact that a different configuration has been con-
figured.
– Observe the pictograms on the operating levers.
– Before use, check that the hydraulic functions are
working correctly.

The lifting, lowering and tilting movements

of the lift mast are controlled using the "lift
mast" 360° lever (3). The adhesive label C D
bearing the pictograms for the hydraulic func-
tions (1) or (2) is affixed at the designated
point (4).
The pictograms are arranged according to the
direction of movement of the "lift mast" 360°
lever (3).
B
NOTE
A
● The truck is configured at the factory in ac-
cordance with the adhesive label (1). The
6219_003-044_V3

following steps for moving the fork carriage

and lift mast are based on this configura-
tion.
● The configuration according to the adhesive
label (2) with reversed functional axes can
be ordered as a variant.

232 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

Lifting/lowering the fork carriage

To lift the fork carriage:
– Move the "lift mast" 360° lever (3) in the
direction of the arrow (B).
To lower the fork carriage:
– Move the "lift mast" 360° lever (3) in the
direction of the arrow (A).

Tilting the lift mast

To tilt the lift mast forwards:
– Move the "lift mast" 360° lever (4) in the
direction of the arrow (C).
To tilt the lift mast backwards:
– Move the "lift mast" 360° lever (4) in the
direction of the arrow (D).

Movements of the lifting system and

meanings of the pictograms
A Lowering
B Lifting
C Tilting forwards
D Tilting backwards

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 233

4 Operation
Lifting

Controlling the lifting system us- 

ing a triple mini-lever

DANGER
Reaching into or climbing between moving parts
of the truck (e.g. lift mast, sideshifts, working equip-
ment, load carrying devices etc.) can lead to seri-
ous injury or death and is therefore prohibited.
– Observe the safety regulations for handling loads.
– Operate the lifting system from the driver's seat
only.

WARNING
Risk of accident as a result of an operating error!
C
These operating instructions describe how to operate
the lifting system in the factory configuration. A B
If the authorised service centre has configured a dif-
ferent configuration, the newly applied pictograms D
must be observed to ensure safe operation. The
operating company must make all drivers aware of
the fact that a different configuration has been con-
figured.
– Observe the pictograms on the operating levers.
– Before use, check that the hydraulic functions are
working correctly.

The lifting, lowering and tilting movements of

the lift mast are controlled using the "lift mast"
C D
360° lever (3). The adhesive label bearing the
pictograms for the hydraulic functions (1) or
(2) is affixed at the designated point (4).
The pictograms are arranged according to the
direction of movement of the "lift mast" 360°
lever (3).
B
NOTE
The truck is configured at the factory in ac-
A
cordance with the adhesive label (1). The fol-
lowing steps for moving the fork carriage and
lift mast are based on this configuration.

Lifting/lowering the fork carriage

To lift the fork carriage:
– Move the "lift mast" 360° lever (3) in the
direction of the arrow (B).
To lower the fork carriage:

234 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

– Move the "lift mast" 360° lever (3) in the

direction of the arrow (A).

Tilting the lift mast

To tilt the lift mast forwards:
– Move the "lift mast" 360° lever (4) in the
direction of the arrow (C).
To tilt the lift mast backwards:
– Move the "lift mast" 360° lever (4) in the
direction of the arrow (D).

Movements of the lifting system and

meanings of the pictograms
A Lowering
B Lifting
C Tilting forwards
D Tilting backwards

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 235

4 Operation
Lifting

Controlling the lifting system us- 

ing a quadruple mini-lever

DANGER
Reaching into or climbing between moving parts
of the truck (e.g. lift mast, sideshifts, working equip-
ment, load carrying devices etc.) can lead to seri-
ous injury or death and is therefore prohibited.
– Observe the safety regulations for handling loads.
– Operate the lifting system from the driver's seat
only.

WARNING
Risk of accident as a result of an operating error!
These operating instructions describe how to operate
the lifting system in the factory configuration.
If the authorised service centre has configured a dif-
ferent configuration, the newly applied pictograms
must be observed to ensure safe operation. The
operating company must make all drivers aware of
the fact that a different configuration has been con-
figured.
– Observe the pictograms on the operating levers.
– Before use, check that the hydraulic functions are C D
working correctly.

The lifting and lowering movements of the lift

mast are controlled using the "lift-lower" oper-
ating lever (3). The adhesive label bearing the
corresponding pictograms (1) is affixed at the
designated point (6).
B
The tilting movement of the lift mast is con-
trolled using the "tilting" operating lever (4).
A
The adhesive label bearing the corresponding
pictograms (2) is affixed at the designated
point (5).
The pictograms are arranged according to the
directions of movement of the operating lev-
er (3) or (4).

Lifting/lowering the fork carriage

To lift the fork carriage:
– Move the "lifting/lowering" operating lev-
er (3) in the direction of the arrow (B).
To lower the fork carriage:

236 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

– Move the "lifting/lowering" operating lev-

er (3) in the direction of the arrow (A).

Tilting the lift mast

To tilt the lift mast forwards:
– Move the "lift mast" operating lever (4) in
the direction of the arrow (C).
To tilt the lift mast backwards:
– Move the "lift mast" operating lever (4) in
the direction of the arrow (D).

Movements of the lifting system and

meanings of the pictograms
A Lowering
B Lifting
C Tilting forwards
D Tilting backwards

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 237

4 Operation
Lifting

Controlling the lifting system us-  1 2

ing the Fingertip

DANGER C
A
Reaching into or climbing between moving parts
of the truck (e.g. lift mast, sideshifts, working equip- 4
ment, load carrying devices etc.) can lead to seri-
ous injury or death and is therefore prohibited.
– Observe the safety regulations for handling loads.
– Operate the lifting system from the driver's seat 3
only. D
B

WARNING
Risk of accident as a result of an operating error!
These operating instructions describe how to operate
the lifting system in the factory configuration.
If the authorised service centre has configured a dif- C D
ferent configuration, the newly applied pictograms
must be observed to ensure safe operation. The
operating company must make all drivers aware of
the fact that a different configuration has been con-
figured.
– Observe the pictograms on the operating levers.
– Before use, check that the hydraulic functions are
working correctly.
B
The lifting and lowering movements of the lift
A
mast are controlled using the "lift-lower" oper-
ating lever (4). The adhesive label with the 6219_003-200_V2

corresponding pictogram (3) is located on the

operating lever.
The tilting movement of the lift mast is con-
trolled using the "tilting" operating lever (1).
The adhesive label with the corresponding pic-
togram (2) is located on the operating lever.
The pictograms are arranged according to the
directions of movement of the operating lev-
er (4) or (1).

Lifting/lowering the fork carriage

To lift the fork carriage:
– Move the "lifting/lowering" operating lev-
er (4) in the direction of the arrow (B).
To lower the fork carriage:
– Move the "lifting/lowering" operating lev-
er (4) in the direction of the arrow (A).

238 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

Tilting the lift mast

To tilt the lift mast forwards:
– Move the "tilting" operating lever (1) in the
direction of the arrow (C).
To tilt the lift mast backwards:
– Move the "tilting" operating lever (1) in the
direction of the arrow (D).

Movements of the lifting system and

meanings of the pictograms
A Lowering
B Lifting
C Tilting forwards
D Tilting backwards

Controlling the lifting system us-

ing the Joystick 4Plus
DANGER
Reaching into or climbing between moving parts
of the truck (e.g. lift mast, sideshifts, working equip-
ment, load carrying devices etc.) can lead to seri-
ous injury or death and is therefore prohibited.
– Observe the safety regulations for handling loads.
– Operate the lifting system from the driver's seat
only.

WARNING
Risk of accident as a result of an operating error!
These operating instructions describe how to operate
the lifting system in the factory configuration.
If the authorised service centre has configured a dif-
ferent configuration, the newly applied pictograms
must be observed to ensure safe operation. The
operating company must make all drivers aware of
the fact that a different configuration has been con-
figured.
– Observe the pictograms on the operating levers.
– Before use, check that the hydraulic functions are
working correctly.

The lifting, lowering and tilting movements

of the lift mast are controlled using the Joy-
stick 4Plus (1). The adhesive labels bearing
the pictograms for the hydraulic functions are
located in positions (2) and (4).

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 239

4 Operation
Lifting

The pictograms are arranged according to

the directions of movement of the Joy-
stick 4Plus (1) and the horizontal rocker but-
ton (3).

Lifting/lowering the fork carriage 

To lift the fork carriage:
– Pull the Joystick 4Plus (1) backwards (B).
To lower the fork carriage:
A
– Push the Joystick 4Plus (1) forwards (A).

+ F B

1
6219_003-167_V3

Tilting the lift mast 

To tilt the lift mast forwards: 3
– Tilt the horizontal rocker button (3) to the
left (C). C D
To tilt the lift mast backwards:
– Tilt the horizontal rocker button (3) to the
right (D). 4

+ F

6219_003-165_V3

240 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

Fork-carriage sideshift 
To move the fork carriage to the left.
– Push the Joystick 4Plus (1) to the left (E).
To move the fork carriage to the right: 1
F
– Push the Joystick 4Plus (1) to the right (F).

Movements of the lifting system and 2

E
meanings of the pictograms
A Lowering + F

B Lifting
C Tilting forward
D Tilting backwards
E Side shift left 6219_003-166_V2

F Side shift right

Special instructions if the truck is equip-

ped with the swivelling display-operat-
ing unit (variant)
If the display-operating unit is set in posi-
tion, the Joystick 4Plus can be accidentally
touched.
In order to prevent unwanted movements of
the lift mast, the Joystick 4Plus must be re-
leased before each actuation of the hydraulic
functions.
– To release the Joystick 4Plus, press and
release the shift key "F" once.

CAUTION
Compliance will be lost if this safety system is over-
ridden.
If this safety system is overridden, the safe operation
of the truck is no longer ensured. The declaration of
conformity becomes invalid. In this case, the truck
may no longer be operated.
– Make sure that no one overrides this safety sys-
tem.
– Check that this safety system is working before
daily use.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 241

4 Operation
Lifting

Dynamics of the hydraulic move-

ments
WARNING
Risk of injury due to delayed response from the
truck!
If the lifting movements are configured to use low
dynamics, the lifting system responds after a delay
when the operating device is released, even in an
emergency. The fork carriage does not stop immedi-
ately upon release. It only stops after approximately
one second. This behaviour may also occur when
specific settings are configured for the Dynamic Load
Control 1 & 2 assistance systems.
– Work with particular attention and care.

The authorised service centre can reduce the

dynamics of the hydraulic movements to adapt
the hydraulic movements to the application re-
quirements. The hydraulic system movement
will then respond more slowly to the actuation
of the operating device.
Maximum dynamics are suitable for applica-
tions that require the load pick up system to
respond quickly and directly. Minimum dynam-
ics are suitable for applications that involve,
for example, the movement of fragile goods
during which impacts must be avoided.
Maximum dynamics (standard setting)
● The hydraulic movement immediately fol-

lows the actuation of the operating device.

● When the operating device is released, the

hydraulic movement decelerates very quick-

ly.
The fork carriage quickly comes to a stand-
still.
Minimum dynamics
● The hydraulic movement accelerates very

slowly when actuating the operating device.

● The hydraulic movement follows the actua-

tion of the operating device very slowly.

● When the operating device is released, the

hydraulic movement only decelerates slow-

ly.
The fork carriage therefore continues to run
for some time before the movement comes
to a standstill.

242 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

Selecting load programs 1 to 3 

The truck has three load programs for the dif-

ferent lifting behaviours of the fork carriage
and the lift mast. The higher the number of the
load program selected, the greater the load
dynamics.
Differences between the load programs
● Load program 1:
66% lifting speed
● Load program 2:
85% lifting speed
● Load program 3:
100% lifting speed
The lifting behaviour of the truck is selec-
ted via the display-operating unit under the
menu item.
– Press the ... softkey to select the desired
load program. .
– If the load programs are saved as a favour- 
ite on a softkey, press the softkey until
the number of the desired load program is
shown on the display.
The number of dynamic bar segments shows
the load dynamics of the selected load pro-
gram.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 243

4 Operation
Lifting

Limiting the load dynamics to load program 1 

during the warm-up phase

NOTE
During the warm-up phase, the load dynamics
are limited to load program 1. The adjacent
symbol appears on the display until the warm-
up phase is complete.
– Refer to the section entitled "Warming up
the hydraulic oil at cold ambient tempera-
tures" in the chapter entitled "Operation —
Checks and tasks before daily use."

6219_003-312

Fork wear protection (variant)

The "fork wear protection" variant ensures that
the fork arms do not touch the ground. The
fork arms are protected against wear and the
building floor is protected against damage.
There are two types of fork wear protection:
● Fork wear protection (mechanical)

This variant is described here.

● Electrical fork wear protection

The fleet manager can configure this var-

iant. See the section "Electrical fork wear
protection (variant)" in the chapter entitled
"Lift height-dependent assistance systems".
The lift cylinders have in-built fixed stops to
prevent the fork arms from hitting the ground.
The lower stop makes inserting the forks into
a pallet more comfortable.
The driver cannot adjust the fork wear protec-
tion manually. However, the fork wear protec-
tion must be continually adjusted as the wear
on the front tyres increases.
– Contact the authorised service centre on
this matter.

244 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

Changing the fork arms

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
No work must be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas!
– Do not perform any work on trucks in
potentially explosive areas.
– Change fork arms only outside of po-
tentially explosive areas.

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
In potentially explosive areas, only fork
arms that comply with explosion-protec-
tion regulations may be used.
These fork arms are specially coated to
prevent sparks forming when coming in-
to contact with the load or floor. The
coating does not extend to the area in-
side the fork bends so that it is possible
to check for cracks.
– Fit only fork arms that correspond to
explosion protection regulations.
– Check that the coating is complete.
– Do not use fork arms with a worn
coating.

DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury from being run over if
the truck rolls away.
– Do not park the truck on a gradient.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Change the fork extension in a cordoned-off, safe
location on a level surface.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 245

4 Operation
Lifting

WARNING
If the fork arms fall on your legs, feet or knees during
replacement, there is a risk of injury due to their
weight. The space to the left and right of the fork is a
danger area.
– Wear protective gloves and safety shoes when
changing the fork arms.
– Ensure that no one stands in the danger area!
– Do not pull on the fork arms.
– The fork arms must always be carried by two peo-
ple; if necessary, use a hoist.

NOTE
It is advisable to use a transport pallet to sup-
port the fork arms when they are being instal-
led or removed. The pallet size depends on
the size of fork arms in use. It should be large
enough that the fork arms do not protrude af-
ter being placed on the pallet.
● This means the fork arms can be safely

placed down and transported.

● Both fork arms can be pushed over onto

one side.

246 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

Removal 
1
– Select the pallet according to the size of the
fork arms.
– Position the pallet to the left or right of the
fork carriage.
– Raise the fork carriage until the lower edges
of the fork arms are approx. 3 cm higher
than the height of the pallet.
– Actuate the parking brake and make sure it
is applied securely.
– Turn the switch key to the left and pull it out.
– Undo the locking screw (2) on the right or
left.
– Pull the locking lever (1) upwards and push
the fork arms outwards onto the pallet.

Installation
– Position the fork arms on a pallet to the left
or right of the fork carriage.
– Push the fork arms onto the fork carriage 2
from the outside towards the centre.
– Pull the locking lever (1) upwards and push 6219_003-113
the fork arms into the required position. En-
sure that the locking lever snaps into place.
– Fit and tighten the locking screw (2).

DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury from a falling load or
fork!
It is not permitted to drive or to transport loads with-
out the locking screw in place.
– Tighten the locking screw (2) each time a fork is
changed.

NOTE
If the truck is equipped with the "load meas-
urement" assistance system (variant), the
"tare" function must always be run after the
fork arms have been changed. Otherwise, cor-
rect load measurement cannot be guaranteed.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 247

4 Operation
Lifting

Fork extension (variant)

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
No work must be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas!
– Do not perform any work on trucks in
potentially explosive areas.
– Change fork arms only outside of po-
tentially explosive areas.

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
In potentially explosive areas, only fork
arms that comply with explosion-protec-
tion regulations may be used.
These fork arms are specially coated to
prevent sparks forming when coming in-
to contact with the load or floor. The
coating does not extend to the area in-
side the fork bends so that it is possible
to check for cracks.
– Fit only fork arms that correspond to
explosion protection regulations.
– Check that the coating is complete.
– Do not use fork arms with a worn
coating.

DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury from being run over if
the truck rolls away.
– Do not park the truck on a gradient.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Change the fork extension in a cordoned-off, safe
location on a level surface.

WARNING
There is a risk of crushing!
The weight of the fork extension can cause crushing
and cuts can be caused by sharp edges or burrs.
– Wear protective gloves and safety shoes.

248 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

WARNING
There is a risk of tipping!
The weight and dimensions of the fork extension af-
fect the stability of the truck. The permissible weights
stated on the capacity rating plate must be reduced
in proportion to the actual load distance.
If the truck is equipped with a fork extension ex
works, then the capacity rating plate will already
have been adjusted accordingly.
– Observe the load capacity; see the section enti-
tled "Capacity rating plate" in the chapter entitled
"Handling loads".

NOTE
If the truck is equipped with the "load meas-
urement" assistance system (variant), the
"tare" function must always be run after the
fork arms have been changed. Otherwise, cor-
rect load measurement cannot be guaranteed.

Attaching 
1
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from falling load!
At least 60% of the length of the fork extension must
lie on the fork arm. No more than 40% of the length
of the fork extension may overhang the end of the
fork arms. In addition, the fork extension must be
secured against slipping from the fork arm.
If the fork extension (1) is not secured with a secur-
ing bolt (2) and linch pin (3), the load may fall, along 3
with the fork extension.
– Push the fork extension all the way to the back of
the fork.
– Make sure that 60% of the length of the fork ex-
tension is on the fork arm.
2 7071_003-104_V2
– Always secure the fork extension with the secur-
ing bolt.
– Always secure the securing bolt with the linch pin.

– Remove the linch pin (3) from the securing

bolt (2).
– Remove the securing bolt from the fork ex-
tension (1).
– Push the fork extension onto the fork arms
until the fork extension is flush with the fork
back.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 249

4 Operation
Lifting

– Insert the securing bolt located behind the

fork back fully into the fork extension.
– Insert the linch pin into the securing bolt
and secure.

Detaching
– Remove the linch pin (3) from the securing
bolt (2).
– Remove the securing bolt from the fork ex-
tension (1).
– Pull the fork extension off the fork arms.
– Insert the securing bolt fully into the fork
extension.
– Insert the linch pin into the securing bolt
and secure.

Operation with reversible fork 

arms (variant)

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
No work must be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas!
– Do not perform any work on trucks in
potentially explosive areas.
– Change fork arms only outside of po-
tentially explosive areas.

250 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Only reversible fork arms that com-
ply with explosion-protection regulations
may be used in potentially explosive
areas.
These fork arms are specially coated to
prevent sparks forming when coming in-
to contact with the load or floor.
– Fit only fork arms that comply with
explosion protection regulations.
– Check that the cladding is intact.
– Do not use fork arms with worn clad-
ding.

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from falling load!
Standard fork arms are not suitable for inverted oper-
ation due to their design. If standard fork arms are
used inverted, they may break.
– Use only special reversible fork arms (1) if the fork
arms are used inverted for a higher lift height!

WARNING
Risk of accident from slipping load!
Loads may slip on the reversible fork arms if there is
no load support. A fork extension (variant) cannot be
secured against slipping.
– Do not use a fork extension (variant) with reversi-
ble fork arms.

WARNING
Risk of accident from the truck tipping over.
When the truck is travelling, the centre of gravity of
the load (2) must not be more than 600 mm above
the ground. The truck may tip forwards during driving
or braking.
– Drive only with a load centre of gravity up to a
max. of 600 mm above the ground.

NOTE
If the truck has the "load measurement" assis-
tance system (variant), carry out a "tare" af-
ter switching to the reversible fork arms. Oth-
erwise, correct load measurement cannot be
guaranteed.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 251

4 Operation
Lifting

Reversible fork arms (1) can be used to reach 

an additional lift height. The reversible fork
arms are attached to the fork carriage in the
same manner as standard fork arms. Loads
may be lifted on and beneath the reversible
fork arms. The mast is lifted and tilted in the
same manner.
– If fork arms are used inverted for a higher
lift height, use only reversible fork arms.
– Do not use a fork extension (variant).
– If the "load measurement" assistance sys-
tem (variant) is fitted, run the "tare" function.
– To drive, raise the load centre of gravity (2)
to a max. of 600 mm above the ground.
– If a load is transported suspended under
the reversible fork arms, also observe the
section entitled "Transporting suspended
loads".

Malfunctions during lifting mode

Incorrect extension sequence
DANGER
Risk of accidents!
With triple masts (variant), an incorrect extension se-
quence may occur, i.e. the inner lift mast may extend
before the free lift has finished. As a result, the over-
all height is exceeded and damage may occur in
passageways or from low ceilings.

An incorrect extension sequence may, for in-

stance, result from:
● The hydraulic oil temperature being too low.

● The fork carriage becoming blocked in the

inner lift mast.

● Blocking of the free lift cylinder.

● The chain roller becoming blocked at the

free lift cylinder.

– If the hydraulic oil temperature is too low,
slowly actuate the lift mast functions several
times in order to raise the oil temperature.
In the event that the fork carriage is blocked
in the inner lift mast, or the free lift cylinder
or chain roller are blocked, the cause of the
blockage must be eliminated before resuming
work.

252 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lifting

– Notify your service centre

Load chains not under tension

DANGER
Danger caused by a falling load!
– Make sure that the chain(s) does (do) not become
slack when lowering the load.

Slack chains can, for instance, result from:

● Resting the fork carriage or the load on the

racking.
● Fork carriage rollers becoming blocked in

the lift mast due to contamination.

– If the fork carriage or the load comes to an
unexpected stop, lift the fork carriage until
the chains are under tension again and low-
er the load at another suitable location.
– If the fork carriage rollers in the lift mast
become blocked due to contamination, lift
the fork carriage until the chains are under
tension again. Remove the contamination
before resuming work.

WARNING
Risk of injury!
– Observe the safety regulations for working on lift
masts; see ⇒ Chapter "Working at the front of the
truck", Page 526 .

Hydraulic blocking function

The hydraulic blocking function ensures that
all the functions of the working hydraulics are
disabled whenever the seat switch in the driv-
er's seat is unloaded.
If the driver's seat is vacated, the blocking
function prevents hydraulic operation for the
following functions:
● Lift the load

● Lower the load

● Tilt the lift mast

● Auxiliary hydraulic functions

● Steering

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 253

4 Operation
Lifting

NOTE
Only the emergency steering function remains
available.

254 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

Handling loads
Safety regulations for handling 
loads

DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury from falling loads or
from truck components being lowered.
– Never walk or stand underneath suspended loads
or raised fork arms.
– Never exceed the maximum load values specified
on the capacity rating plate. Otherwise stability
cannot be guaranteed!

DANGER
Risk of accident from falling or crushing!
6210_003-030
– Do not enter or reach into the danger area of the
reach carriage.
– Never grab or climb on moving parts of the truck.
– Do not step onto the fork arms.
– Do not lift people.

DANGER
Risk of accident from falling loads!
– To prevent the load from falling onto the driver,
install a load backrest (variant) when transporting
small parts.
– Use a closed roof covering (variant) in addition.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 255

4 Operation
Handling loads

Special instructions when using the

truck in hazardous areas or when han-
dling explosives
DANGER
Risk of explosion due to collision with
metallic containers!
Metal storage containers and the risk of
shock from lifting accessories can create
hazardous sources of ignition.
These sources of ignition within poten-
tially explosive areas can lead to explo-
sions in the surrounding atmosphere.
The operator must ensure compliance
with explosion-protection regulations for
the use in question.
The operator must adapt their operating
instructions accordingly.
– Only use fork arms that comply with
the explosion-protection regulations.
– Make sure the cladding is intact and
not worn.

Capacity rating plate

The load capacity indicated for the truck on
the capacity rating plate must not be excee-
ded. The load capacity is influenced by the
load centre of gravity, the lift height, the at-
tachment or fork arms used and the tyres.
– The position of the capacity rating plate can
be taken from the "labelling points".

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from the truck losing stability!
Never exceed the load capacity indicated on the
capacity rating plate. This applies to compact and
homogeneous loads. If these values are exceeded,
the stability and rigidity of the fork arms and lift mast
cannot be guaranteed.
Improper or incorrect operation or the placement of
persons to increase load capacity is prohibited.
The attachment of additional weights to increase the
load capacity is prohibited.

256 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

DANGER
Risk of death due to misinterpretation of the capaci-
ty rating plate!
Only the capacity rating plates on the truck are valid.
The figures show examples.
– Only observe the capacity rating plate on the
truck.

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from the truck losing stability!
If the permissible loading of the attachments (variant)
and the reduced load capacity of the truck and at-
tachment combination is exceeded, there is a risk of
loss of stability.
– The permissible loading of the attachments (var-
iant) and the reduced load capacity of the combi-
nation of truck and attachment must not be excee-
ded.
– Observe the information given on the special ca-
pacity rating plates on the truck and attachment.

Basic capacity rating plate

7 1 2

5 4 3

Basic capacity rating plate 3 Distance "c" to load centre of gravity from
1 Designation of the lifting accessories (fork fork back [mm]
arms or attachment) 4 Sideshift "s" [mm]
2 Lift height "h" [mm] 5 Side view of load and lifting accessories
6 Load capacity [kg]

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 257

4 Operation
Handling loads

7 Top view of load and lifting accessories

There is always at least one capacity rating

plate on the truck: the basic capacity rating
plate. It shows the load capacity only for fork
arms without the attachment. If an attachment
is attached, a second capacity rating plate is
fitted: the residual load capacity rating plate.
This plate shows the load capacity taking the
attachment into account. In the case of inte-
grated attachments, only a basic capacity rat-
ing plate is created as the integrated devices
cannot be easily removed from the truck.

Typical application of a capacity rating plate

6219_003-356

The example values used here are marked in

black.
– To determine the actual load capacity, ob-
serve the basic capacity rating plate on the
truck.

258 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

Illustration of the typical application on the 

truck
2
The position numbers in the adjacent graphic 3
correspond to the position numbers on the ba-
sic capacity rating plate. 5880 mm
1 Distance between the load centre of
gravity and the fork back: 600 mm 1000 kg
2 Permissible lift height: 5880 mm
3 Weight of load to be lifted: 1000 kg
The distance between the load centre of grav-
ity and the fork back is 600 mm (1). The lift
height should be 5880 mm (2).
This means that the load must not exceed
1000 kg (3) (load capacity).
By implication, this means that, in this exam-
ple with the distance between the load centre
of gravity and the fork back being 600 mm,
a 1000-kg load must not be lifted higher than
5880 mm.
The load capacity specified for certain nominal
lifts applies up to this nominal lift. If the lift
value of the first line is exceeded, the load
capacity from the second line applies up to the
lift of the second line.

Residual load capacity rating plate for

built-in devices and attachments

NOTE 600 mm 1
The residual load capacity rating plate for at-
tachments is read according to the same dia-
gram as in the example for the basic capacity
rating plate.
Some attachments have a standard sideshift
or a large sideshift. As a rule, the standard
sideshift is ±100 mm and the large sideshift is
230 mm.
In contrast to the large sideshift, the standard
sideshift offers a higher load capacity, but on-
ly within the scope of the specified standard
sideshift.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 259

4 Operation
Handling loads

A large sideshift enables a strongly off-centre 

load position. If the load is severely off-centre,
the load capacity of the truck will be greatly
reduced.
Since non-integrated attachments can be re- XZP150 + 100x40x1200 h(mm)
placed, multiple residual load capacity rating 220 260 290 6580
plates for attachments on one truck are pos- 430 510 560 5870
sible. The residual load capacity rating plate

Q (kg)
500 590 650 5230
then applies to the attachment fitted. In the

S=230mm
570 670 740 4750
case of integrated attachments, only the appli-
cable capacity rating plate is fitted to the truck. 780 920 1000 4100
800 600 500 c(mm)
– If there is a built-in device or attachment
with a large sideshift on the truck, take into
account the maximum possible sideshift on
the capacity rating plate.
6219_003-339

Residual load capacity rating plate for large

sideshift, S = 230 mm

A second residual load capacity rating plate 

for the same attachment but with standard
sideshift (usually ±100 mm) may also be fit-
ted on the truck. This residual load capacity
rating plate offers a higher load capacity, but XZP150 + 100x40x1200 h(mm)
only within the scope of the specified standard 430 510 560 6580
sideshift. If the standard sideshift is exceeded,
the residual load capacity rating plate applies 570 670 740 6130
Q (kg)

to the maximum possible sideshift. The driver 640 750 820 5880
is responsible for complying with the
S=100mm

710 840 880 5230

load capacity and sideshift information on the 850 1000 1090 4800
residual load capacity rating plate. If in doubt, 800 600 500 c(mm)
use the load capacity for the maximum possi-
ble sideshift.

Special capacity rating plate for off-cen- 6219_003-338

tre loads Residual load capacity rating plate for stand-

ard sideshift, S = 100 mm
If unbalanced loads are regularly transported,
a special capacity rating plate for off-centre
loads is required. If this plate is required at a
later date, contact the authorised service cen-
tre. This requires information on the type and
appearance of the load.

Picking up loads
To make sure that the load is securely suppor-
ted, it must be ensured that the fork arms are

260 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

sufficiently far apart and are positioned as far

as possible under the load.
If possible, the load should rest on the back of
the fork.
The load must not protrude too far over the
fork tips, nor should the fork tips protrude too
far out from the load.
Loads are to be picked up and transported as
close to the middle as possible.

DANGER
Risk of accident from a falling load!
When transporting small items, attach a load safety
guard (variant) to prevent the load from falling on the
driver.
A closed roof covering (variant) should also be used.
Removable roof panels may not be removed.

Adjusting the fork 

1
– Lift the locking lever (1) and move the fork
arms to the desired position.
– Allow the locking lever to snap back into
place.
The load centre of gravity must be midway
between the fork arms.
– Only actuate the fork prong positioner (var-
iant) when the fork is not carrying a load.

6210_842-001

Danger area
The danger area is the area in which people
are at risk due to the movements of the truck,
its working equipment, its load-carrying equip-
ment (e.g. attachments) or the load. Also in-
cluded are the areas where loads could fall or
working equipment could fall or be lowered.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 261

4 Operation
Handling loads

DANGER
Risk of injury!
– Do not step on the fork.

DANGER
Risk of injury!
– Do not step under the raised forks.

DANGER
People may be injured in the danger area of the
truck!
The danger area of the truck must be completely
clear of all personnel, except the driver in his normal
operating position. If persons fail to leave the danger
area despite warnings:
– Cease work with the truck immediately.
– Secure the truck against use by unauthorised par-
ties.

DANGER
Danger of death from falling loads!
– Never walk or stand underneath sus-
pended loads.

Transporting pallets 

As a rule, loads (e.g. pallets) must be trans-

ported individually. Transporting multiple loads
at the same time is only permitted:
● when instructed by the supervisor and

● when the technical requirements have been

met.
The driver must ensure proper condition of
the load. Only safely and carefully positioned
loads may be transported.

6327_003-009

262 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

Transporting suspended loads 

Before transporting suspended loads, consult

the national regulatory authorities (in Germa-
ny, the employer's liability insurance associa-
tions).
National regulations may place restrictions on
these operations, e.g. in Italy.
– Contact the relevant authorities.
– Follow the national regulations for the coun-
try in which the truck is being used.
If there are no country-specific regulations for
suspended loads in the country of use, ob-
serve the following instructions for safe han-
dling.

DANGER
Risk of accident due to transporting suspended
loads!
Suspended loads can begin to swing. Suspended
loads that begin to swing can result in the following
risks.
– Follow the "Instructions for transporting suspen-
ded loads".

Risks due to suspended loads

● Impaired braking characteristics and steer-

ing movement
● Tipping over the front axle

● Tipping the truck at right angles to the drive

direction
● Risk of crushing of accompanying persons

● Reduced visibility

DANGER
Loss of stability!
Slipping or swinging suspended loads can lead to a
loss of stability and cause the truck to tip over.
– Follow the "Instructions for transporting suspen-
ded loads".

Instructions for transporting suspended loads

● Swinging loads must be prevented by using

the proper driving speed and driving style

(careful steering, braking).
● Hanging loads must be hooked on to the

truck in such a way that the harness cannot

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 263

4 Operation
Handling loads

shift or release unintentionally and cannot

be damaged.
● When transporting suspended loads, suita-
ble aids (e.g. guy wires or supporting poles)
must be available so that accompanying
persons can guide suspended loads and
prevent the loads from swinging.
● Take particular care to ensure that there is
no one in the drive direction in the driving
lane.
● If, despite this, the load begins to swing,
ensure that no person is placed at risk.

DANGER
Risk of accident due to transporting suspended
loads!
– When transporting suspended loads, never per-
form or end driving and load movements abruptly.
– Never drive on slopes with a suspended load.
– Transporting containers holding fluids as hanging
loads is not permitted.

Transporting swinging loads

DANGER
Risk of explosion from spark discharge!
Suspended loads can swing uncontrolla-
bly.
The load can strike against components
or scrape along the ground.
This can cause sparks to be discharged,
which in potentially explosive areas may
lead to explosions in the surrounding at-
mosphere.
Transportation of swinging loads is not
permitted.
– Do not transport swinging loads.

264 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

Picking up a load
DANGER
There is a risk to life from a falling load or from
truck components being lowered.
– Never walk or stand underneath suspended loads
or raised fork arms.
– Never exceed the maximum load values specified
on the capacity rating plate. Otherwise, stability
cannot be guaranteed.

– Only store pallets that do not exceed the

specified maximum size. Damaged loading
equipment and incorrectly formed loads
must not be stored.
– Attach or secure the load to the lifting ac-
cessory so that the load cannot move or
fall.
– Store the load so that the specified aisle
width is not reduced by protruding parts.
– Approach the rack carefully, brake gently 
and stop just in front of the rack.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 265

4 Operation
Handling loads

– Position the forks. 

– Set the lift mast to vertical.
– Lift the fork carriage to the stacking height.

CAUTION
Risk of component damage!
When the fork is inserted into the rack, take care not
to damage the rack or the load.

– Insert the fork as far under the load as pos- 

sible. Stop the truck as soon as the fork
back is resting on the load. The load centre
of gravity must be midway between the fork
arms.

266 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

– Lift the fork carriage until the load is resting 

entirely on the fork.

DANGER
Risk of accident!
– Beware of any people in the danger area.
– Ensure that the roadway behind you is clear.

DANGER
Due to the risk of tipping, never tilt the lift mast with
a raised load!
– Lower the load before tilting the lift mast.

– Reverse carefully and slowly until the load

is clear of the rack. Brake gently.

– Lower the load while maintaining ground 

clearance.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 267

4 Operation
Handling loads

– Tilt the lift mast backwards. 

The load can be transported.

Determining visibility conditions when driving with a load

A C

D D
6301_003-167

A Area that is not visible (max. 1085 mm) Y Load

C Load height (in driving position) Z Driver's eye level
D 4000 mm (distance to the front from the rear
corner of the load when it is positioned on
the fork carriage in the driving position)

The driver's field of vision can be severely

limited when driving with a larger load (Y) or
with attachments fitted. In this case, safe oper-
ation is no longer guaranteed.
Visibility conditions can be evaluated by de-
termining the size of the area that is not visi-
ble (A).

268 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

If the area that is not visible exceeds 1085 mm

(EN16842-2/A3), the visibility conditions are
inadequate.
Procedure:
– Sit down on the driver's seat and adopt the
seat position.
– Determine the area that is not visible (A)
using the load height (C) and the length of
the route (D) = 4000 mm.
This area that is not visible (A) must not ex-
ceed 1085 mm.
– If the area that is not visible (A) exceeds
1085 mm, take one of the following meas-
ures:
● Drive backwards.
● Divide the loads so that the load height (C)
is reduced and the area that is not visi-
ble (A) becomes smaller than 1085 mm.

Transporting loads 

NOTE
Observe the information in the chapter entitled
"Safety regulations when driving".

DANGER
The higher a load is lifted, the less stable it be-
comes. The truck can tip over. The load can fall.
There is an increased risk of accidents.
Driving with a raised load and the lift mast tilted for-
ward is not permitted.
– Only drive with the load lowered.
– Lower the load until ground clearance is reached
(not over 300 mm).
– Only drive with the lift mast tilted backwards.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 269

4 Operation
Handling loads

– Drive slowly and carefully around corners. 

NOTE
Observe the information in the chapter entitled
"Steering".
– Always accelerate and brake gently.

NOTE
Observe the information in the chapter entitled
"Operating the service brake".

– Never drive with a load protruding to the 

side (e.g. with the sideshift)!

Shake function (variant)

NOTE
The shake function is intended only for short-
term use, as it reduces the service life of the
load chains due to the increased loading on
them.

Description
The shake function of the hydraulics makes
it easier for the driver to perform tasks such
as emptying containers of bulk material. The

270 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

shake function moves the fork carriage quickly

up and down via the "Lifting" function.
This function may only be used for a limited
load and must not be used with a full nominal
load.
Maximum permissible load for the shake
function:
● Maximum 30% of the nominal load. If an

attachment is being used, its weight must

be subtracted from this value.

NOTE
The weight of an attachment can be seen on
its nameplate.

Operation
To activate the shake function:
– Move the corresponding operating device
for the "Lifting" function over the zero posi-
tion four times in quick succession.
The fork carriage moves as normal. The
shake function is active after the fourth time
the operating device is moved.
– Continue to move the operating device back
and forth.
The fork carriage moves up and down more
quickly and more jerkily.
The intensity of the shaking is controlled via
the vigour with which the operating device is
moved. The more vigorously and frequently
the operating device is moved, the more in-
tense the shaking is.

NOTE
Once the function has been activated, the
driver has two seconds to start the shaking. If
two seconds elapse without the shake function
being used, the shake function is deactivated
again.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 271

4 Operation
Handling loads

WARNING
The shake function remains active for two seconds
following activation.
If the driver simply wants to lift or lower the load
during this time, note that the fork carriage may
move significantly more jerkily with the load than in
normal operation. If the two seconds elapse without
the shake function being used, the fork carriage can
be moved normally again with the load.

WARNING
Risk of accident due to unintentional switch-off of the
intermediate lift cut-out.
If the truck is also equipped with the "intermediate lift
cut-out" variant and the shake function is performed
close to an intermediate lift cut-out lift limit, this may
inadvertently cancel the lift limit.
This can happen if the operating device has to be
moved twice in order to cancel the lift limit. If the op-
erating device for the shake function is then repeat-
edly actuated, this can cancel the lift limit. The fork
carriage then moves beyond the lift limit during the
shaking process. This can cause the fork carriage to
collide with higher objects.
– Do not perform the shake function close to the lift
height of a lift limit.
– Cancel the lift limit by pressing the "F button". See
the note below.

NOTE
The lift limit can be cancelled by pressing the
"F button". See also the section entitled "Inter-
mediate lift cut-out (variant)". For this option,
contact the authorised service centre.
The following section shows how the shake
function is activated via the standard assign-
ment for "lifting/lowering" using the different
variants of the operating devices. If the "lift-
ing/lowering" function is assigned differently
on the operating device, the shake function is
activated via this other assignment.

272 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

Joystick 4Plus: 
– Move the Joystick 4Plus (1) back and forth
between positions (A) and (B) four times.
Then continue to move the component in
the same way. A

6210_003-089

Double mini-lever: 
– Move the 360° lever (2) back and forth
between positions (A) and (B) four times.
Then continue to move the component in
the same way.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 273

4 Operation
Handling loads

Triple mini-lever: 
– Move the 360° lever (3) back and forth
between positions (A) and (B) four times.
Then continue to move the component in
the same way.

Quadruple mini-lever: 
– Move the operating lever (4) back and forth
between positions (A) and (B) four times.
Then continue to move the component in
the same way.

Fingertip: 
– Move the operating lever (5) back and forth
four times. Then continue to move the com-
ponent in the same way.

274 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

Setting down a load

DANGER
Risk of accident due to changed moment of tilt!
The load centre of gravity and the moment of tilt
move due to tilting the lift mast forwards with a raised
load or due to the load slipping. The truck may tip
forwards.

– Only tilt the lift mast forwards with a raised lifting

accessory when it is directly above the stack.
– When the lift mast is tilted forwards, take partic-
ular care to ensure that the truck does not tip
forwards and that the load does not slip.

WARNING
Risk of accident from falling load!
If the fork or the load remains suspended during low-
ering, the load may fall.
– When removing from stock, move the truck far
enough back so that the load and the fork can be
lowered freely.

– Drive up to the stack with the load lowered 

in accordance with regulations.
– Set the lift mast to vertical.
– Lift the load to the stacking height.
– Drive the truck towards the rack carefully.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 275

4 Operation
Handling loads

– Lower the load until it rests securely on the 

rack.

DANGER
Risk of accident!
– Beware of any people in the danger area.
– Ensure that the roadway behind you is clear.

– Move the truck back until the fork arms can

be lowered without touching the stack.
– Lower the fork while maintaining ground
clearance.
– Tilt the lift mast backwards and drive away.

Driving on ascending and de- 

scending gradients

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury!
Driving on ascending and descending gradients car-
ries special dangers!
– Always follow the instructions below.

– On ascending and descending gradients,

the load must be carried facing uphill.
– It is only permitted to drive on ascending
and descending gradients that are marked
as traffic routes and that can be used safe-
ly.
– Ensure that the ground to be traversed is
clean and provides a good grip.
– Do not turn on ascending and descending
gradients.
– Do not drive onto or along ascending and
descending gradients at an angle.
– Do not park the truck on ascending or de-
scending gradients.
– In case of emergency, secure the truck with
wedges so that the truck does not roll away.

276 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

– Reduce the driving speed on descending

gradients.
– Do not drive downhill faster than the truck
can drive uphill on the same incline.
– Determine the maximum permissible speed
with a test drive uphill, if necessary.
It is not permitted to drive on long ascending
and descending gradients greater than 15%
due to the specified minimum braking and sta-
bility values.
– Before driving on ascending and descend-
ing gradients greater than 15%, consult the
authorised service centre.
The process of placing loads into stock and
removing loads from stock while on an as-
cending or descending gradient is not permit-
ted!
– Always place loads into stock and remove
loads from stock on a horizontal plane.

Driving onto lifts 

The driver may only use this truck on lifts with

a sufficient load capacity and for which the
operating company has granted authorisation.
See the chapter entitled "Definition of respon-
sible persons".

DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury from being crushed or
run over by the truck.
– There must not be any persons already in the lift
when the truck is driven into the lift.
– Persons are only permitted to enter the lift once
the truck is secure, and must exit the lift before
the truck is driven out.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 277

4 Operation
Handling loads

Determining the total actual weight 

– Park the truck securely and switch it off.
– Determine the unit weights by reading
the truck nameplate and, if necessary,
the nameplate on the attachment (variant)
1
and/or by weighing the load to be lifted. 2
– Add together the determined unit weights to
obtain the total actual weight of the truck:
3
Net weight (1)
+ Max. permissible battery weight (2)
+ Ballast weight (variant) (3)

+ Net weight of attachment (variant)

+ Weight of the load to be lifted
+ 100 kg allowance for driver
= Total actual weight

– Drive the truck into the lift with the forks

facing forwards. Make sure not to touch the
shaft walls.
– Park the truck securely in the lift and switch
it off to prevent uncontrolled movements of
the load or the truck.

Driving on loading bridges 

DANGER
Risk of accident from the truck falling!
Steering movements can cause the rear of the truck
to veer off the loading bridge towards the edge. This
may cause the truck to crash.
The lorry driver and the forklift truck driver must
agree on the departure time of the lorry.
– Establish the departure time of the lorry.
– Determine the total actual weight of the truck.
– Before driving over a loading bridge, observe the
operating instructions for the loading bridge.
– Make sure that the loading bridge is properly at-
tached and secured and has a sufficient load ca-
pacity (e.g. lorry, bridge).
– Ensure that the lorry onto which you will be driving
is secured to prevent it from shifting and that it
can support the load of the truck.

278 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling loads

Determining the total actual weight 

– Park the truck securely.
– Determine the unit weights by reading
the truck nameplate and, if necessary,
the nameplate on the attachment (variant)
and/or by weighing the load to be lifted.
– Add together the determined unit weights to
obtain the total actual weight of the truck:

Net weight (1)

+ Max. permissible battery weight (2)
+ Ballast weight (variant) (3)

+ Net weight of attachment (variant)

+ Weight of the load to be lifted
+ 100 kg allowance for driver
= Total actual weight

– Drive slowly and carefully on the loading

bridge.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 279

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

Lift height-dependent assistance systems

Optical lift height measuring sys-
tem (variant)
Design and function 
This truck can be fitted with an optical lift
height measuring system as a variant. This
system is a prerequisite for the assistance
systems described in this chapter. As soon as
the truck is switched on, the system is ready
for use immediately. This system consists of
an LED lift height sensor (2) on the side at the
bottom of the lift mast and a reflector (1) on
the fork carriage.

NOTE
The LED/sensor unit and reflector are adjus-
ted at the factory. Follow-up adjustments are
carried out by the authorised service centre.
The LED lift height sensor constantly emits a
light signal that is reflected by the reflector.
The truck control unit calculates the current
lift height based on the travel time of the light
signal.

NOTE
Although the infrared light of the LED lift
height sensor is not dangerous for the human
eye, you should avoid looking directly into the
light source.

280 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

Cleaning 
It is recommended that the LED sensor
glass (2) and the reflector (1) are checked
before starting work and, if required, cleaned.
The cleaning frequency depends on the appli-
cation conditions of the truck. The quality of
the light signal may also be reduced as a re-
sult of heavy rain or fogging up of the sensor.
If the light signal is too weak, the LED sen-
sor glass (2) and the reflector (1) must be
cleaned. Three dashes are shown on the dis-
play-operating unit instead of the lift height
display.

The message Clean lift height 

sensor appears in the display.
– Clean the sensor glass (2) and the reflec- 75 %
tor (1) using a soft cloth and water. 0,0 t
– Also clean the dust protection cover (3), if --- m
necessary. 1,9°
A small amount of cleaning agent can be add-
ed to the water.

CAUTION
Component damage caused by incorrect cleaning.
The sensor glass and the reflector can be damaged
as a result of incorrect cleaning procedures.
– The components must not be cleaned using dry 6219_003-233_en
materials.
– Do not use agents containing hydrocarbons.

Agents containing hydrocarbons include:

● Acetone

● Methanol

● Ethanol

● Propanol

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 281

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

CAUTION
Risk of damage to the LED lift height sensor through
high-pressure cleaning!
A high-pressure cleaner can damage the LED lift
height sensor due to the penetration of water. This
can result in incorrect measurements.
– Do not direct the spray from a high-pressure
cleaner at the LED lift height sensor.

Eliminating malfunctions

NOTE
A misaligned LED lift height sensor or bent
reflector must be adjusted only by the author-
ised service centre.
– If the malfunction in the system persists,
please contact the authorised service cen-
tre.
If a malfunction occurs, the message Check
lift height sensor and reflec-
tor appears in the display-operating unit. If
the malfunction no longer exists or has been
rectified, the system is automatically available
again.
Truck functions that are dependent on the lift
height are restricted in the event of a malfunc-
tion in the height measurement system. Mal-
functions must therefore be rectified immedi-
ately.
Contamination
The driver can resolve a temporary interrup-
tion of the light signal due to contamination
or foreign objects in the signal path. See the
section entitled "Cleaning".
Condensation/icing
If the truck switches between a very cold en-
vironment, e.g. in a cold store, and normal
surroundings, ice or condensation may form
on the sensor. The signal may then briefly fail
until the condensation or icing has subsided.

282 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

Emergency operation in the event of

malfunctions
In the event of a malfunction in the height
measurement system, the truck switches to
emergency operation.
In emergency operation, the assistance sys-
tems listed below that are dependent on the
lift height are not available:
● Lift height display

● Fork wear protection

● Lift mast transition damping

Due to the lack of a measured value, the as-

sistance systems that are dependent on the
lift height will instead use calculated values for
the lift height.
For safety reasons, the calculated value is al-
ways below the actual lift height value.
The following assistance systems can contin-
ue to be operated, but with the restrictions of
emergency operation:
● Intermediate lift cut-out

– Release the lifting operating device so that

it can return to the zero position.
The fork carriage can then continue lifting at a
reduced speed.
● Lift mast end-stop damping
– Release the lifting operating device so that
it can return to the zero position.

WARNING
Risk of collision with the hall ceiling.
The fork carriage can now be lifted to the maximum
lift height without limitation.
– Take note of the height of the ceiling.

● Speed reduction when the fork carriage is

raised
The speed reduction activates at a lower lift
height than in normal operation.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 283

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

Lift height display (variant) 

If the truck is equipped with the optical

lift height measuring system, the current lift
height (1) appears permanently in the display-
operating unit. 1,6 t
The lift height displayed corresponds to the
height of the bottom edge of the fork arms. If 7,0°
desired, the authorised service centre can set
a different value. If a different attachment is
installed, the authorised service centre must
2,71 m
adjust this value.
The system works across the entire lift range,
from ground level up to the maximum lift
height.

When properly configured, the measurement

inaccuracy is as follows:
Repeatability ±5 mm
Maximum measure-
±45 mm
ment inaccuracy

NOTE
If the prerequisites on the truck have changed,
e.g. the tyres are worn, the value displayed
for the lift height may differ more from reality.
In this case, the lift height display must be
zeroed.
– See the section entitled "Zeroing the assis-
tance systems".

Easy Target (variant)

"Easy Target" is an additional assistance func-
tion for the lift height measurement.
With this assistance function, the fleet manag-
er can use their authorisation to define and
save regularly approached lift heights. Up to
ten different lift heights can be set for ten dif-
ferent areas of the warehouse.
"Easy Target" works across the entire fork lift
range, from ground level up to the maximum
lift height of the truck.

284 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

For the various operating devices for the hy-

draulic functions, the approached lift heights
are stored as follows.
● Multi-lever, mini-lever and Fingertip opera-

tion:
Function key
● Joystick 4Plus operation:

Shift key "F"

For harmonisation, the function key and the
shift key "F" are referred to as the "F button" in
the next sections.

Configuring Easy Target

To use the function, the desired lift heights
must be configured. The desired lift heights
can be entered directly in the display-operat-
ing unit. In addition, the "Automatic mast verti-
cal positioning" variant must be set up.

NOTE
See the sections "Automatic mast vertical
positioning" in the subchapter "Tilt angle-de-
pendent assistance systems".
– Stop the truck.
– Actuate the parking brake.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".

Defining the lift heights by entering

them in the display-operating unit
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
– Press the Truck settings softkey.
– Press the easy Target softkey.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 285

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

A selection with the available areas of the 

warehouse opens.
– Press the appropriate softkey for the de- A
sired area of the warehouse to define a lift
height.
B

6219_003-341_de

A selection with the lift heights that can be 

defined for this area of the warehouse opens.

C.1
NOTE --,-- m

This example shows the available, definable C.2

lift heights for area "C" of the warehouse. This --,-- m
areas of the warehouse can be name individu-
C.3
ally by the authorised service centre. --,-- m

– Press the appropriate softkey for the de-

C.4
sired lift height. --,-- m

C.5
--,-- m

6219_003-342_de

286 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

In this menu, you can define the desired lift 

height.
– Enter the lift height using softkeys 0 to 9.
– To save, press the button. C.2

The menu closes. The selection with the lift

heights that can be defined for this area of the
warehouse opens.
Enter desired height

0,000 m
NOTE
The defined areas of the warehouse can also = Clear = Deactivate

be displayed as a favourite. For information = Save = Cancel

on how to do this, see the original operating Service

instructions for the display-operating unit.

6219_003-343_en

Defining the lift heights by approaching

the lift height
– As described in the previous section, select
the desired area of the warehouse to define
a lift height.
– Release the parking brake and drive to the
single pallet position for which the lift height
is to be defined.
– Lift the fork carriage to the desired lift 
height.
– When the desired lift height is reached, stop
the lifting operation. 0,8 t C
C.2
– To confirm, press the softkey. 1,04 C.2
Approach
The lift height is stored. 2,8° desired
height

6219_003-344_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 287

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

The stored lift height is displayed on the previ- 

ously selected storage space.
In this example, the lift height is 1.04 m. C.1
--,-- m
0,8 t C
1,04 m C.2
1,04 m
2,8°
C.3
--,-- m

C.4
--,-- m

C.5
0 --,-- m

6219_003-345_de

Operating Easy Target 

To use Easy Target, at least one lift height

must be stored. The procedure for saving a lift
height is described in the section "Easy Target 0,8 t B.2 B.2
Configuration". 0,66 m B.2 1,00 m
Using the "load measurement" function, the 2,8° B.2
-0,34 m
truck automatically detects whether there is a
load on the fork.
The assistant for placing a load in stock or re-
moving a load from stock detects if the driver
wants to store or remove something. In this
example, the stock removal assistant (1) is ac-
tive. The orange activation bar next to the
symbol indicates this. To switch to the stock 1
placement assistant, push the softkey next to 6219_003-346_de

the symbol.

NOTE
If the load is less than 150 kg, the load may
not be detected. A stock placement operation
is then started.
– In this case, push the softkey to switch
to the stock removal assistant.

288 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

Select the desired area of the warehouse ei- 

ther in the function menu "Load ► Easy Tar-
get" or via the favourites. The adjacent exam-
9,0 h 12:19
ple shows the selection via a favourite (2).
0,8 t
– Approach the selected lift height of the area
of the warehouse with the fork carriage. 1,04 m
2,8°
The next steps required for this are shown on
the display. The symbols described below are
used for operation.

Symbols used and their meanings

Place in stock
Remove from stock
Lift the fork carriage
Lower the fork carriage
2 6219_003-313
6219_003-347

Retract fork
Extend fork

Placing the load in stock 

The adjacent example shows the direction
of movement of lifting (4) to the next stored
lift height (3). The distance until the next lift 0,8 t
height (5) is reached is displayed after the lift
1,20 m
height has been selected.
2,8° 1,20 m
– Move the operating device for the hydraulic
function in the desired direction.
– Press the "F button" and hold it down.

A.6

6219_003-348
5 4 3
3 Next stored lift height
4 Current direction of movement of the fork
carriage
5 Next height in the direction of movement

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 289

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

– When the fork carriage approaches the de- 

sired lift height, release the "F button". 6 7
The display shows the height of this lift height
1.00 m (6) and the distance of the fork car- 0,8 t B.2 B.2
riage to this lift height 0.00 m (7).
1,15 m B.2 1,00 m
When the lift height is reached, the fork car- 2,8° 0,00 m
riage stops automatically.
The orange activation bar next to the "Place in
stock" symbol (9) indicates that the stock
placement assistant is active.
The stock placement assistant gives the in-
struction:
– Move the load into the rack (8).
8 9
After the load has been placed in stock, the
6219_003-349

symbol indicates that the load must next

be lowered.
– Lower the fork carriage. 
The fork carriage is automatically lowered only
until the load has been set down. The fork
carriage also stops if the operating device is 0,8 t B.2 B.2
still actuated.
1,15 m B.2 1,00 m
The orange activation bar next to the "Place in 2,8° -0,16 m
stock" symbol (11) indicates that the stock
placement assistant is active.
The stock placement assistant gives the in-
struction:
– Move the load out of the rack (10).
0

10 11 6219_003-350

290 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

Removing the load from stock

Select the desired area of the warehouse ei- 
ther in the function menu "Load ► Easy Tar-
get" or via the favourites. The adjacent exam-
9,0 h 12:19
ple shows the selection via a favourite (12).
0,8 t
– Approach the selected area of the ware-
house. 1,04 m
2,8°
– Move the operating device for the hydraulic
function in the desired direction.
After pressing the "F button", the display
shows which stored lift height is reached next
in the current lift direction.
– When the operating device is moved, press
and hold the "F button".
– When the fork carriage approaches the de- 12 6219_003-352

sired lift height, release the "F button".

When the lift height is reached, the fork car-
riage stops automatically. It is also taken into
account that the load is on a pallet.
– Move the fork into the rack. 
The symbol (13) indicates that the load
must be raised next.
– Raise the fork carriage. 0,8 t A.2 A.2
The fork carriage is automatically raised only
1,53 m A.2 2,00 m
until the load can be removed from the rack. 2,8° -0,62 m
The fork carriage also stops if the operating
device is still actuated.
The orange activation bar next to the "Re-
move from stock" symbol indicates that the
stock removal assistant is active.
The display indicates that you need to re-
verse.
13
As soon as the "backwards" drive direction
6219_003-351

has been selected, the process is complete.

The fork carriage reacts to the movements
of the lifting and lowering operating devices
again.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 291

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

Intermediate lift cut-out (variant) 

This function interrupts the lifting process at

a set lift height. The intermediate lift cut-out
function is useful if the fork carriage is fre-
quently lifted to a particular lift height.
There are two options when buying the truck:
1 When buying the truck, the lift heights at
which the intermediate lift cut-out takes
effect are defined.
These lift heights are then set and activa-
ted on delivery.
2 No lift heights are defined when the truck
is bought.
The lift heights themselves are config-
ured and defined with the "Access au-
thorisation for the fleet manager". See
"Configuration by the fleet manager" in
this section.

NOTE
Check the lift heights set here before use
via the Intermediate lift cut-out
menu.

NOTE
The fleet manager can use his access author-
isation to set the lift heights at which the in-
termediate lift cut-out takes effect. If no fleet
manager access is enabled, the authorised
service centre must set the desired lift heights.
The intermediate lift cut-out is always active
when the truck is switched on. If the function is
switched off, it is active again the next time the
truck is switched on.
During the lifting operation, the active inter-
mediate lift cut-out is indicated by the grey
symbol . This means that the fork is located
below the intervention height.
If the symbol appears in black, the fork is
just below the intervention height.

292 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

NOTE
The display always displays the next lift limit
that is in the path of the current lifting move-
ment. The next lift limit at which the function
will intervene is highlighted in grey in the
display. As soon as the fork carriage nears
the lift limit and the function intervenes, the
display turns black.

Lifting beyond the current lift limit

To lift beyond the current lift limits, proceed as
follows:
– When the fork carriage reaches the set lift
limit and stops automatically, move the op-
erating device to the zero position.
– Then push the operating device back into
the "lifting" direction.
– You now have one second to bring the op-
erating device back to the zero position and
then move the operating device in the "lift-
ing" direction again.
The fork carriage is raised higher.
If the symbol disappears, the fork is at or
above the intervention height.
If the fork carriage is lowered to below the
configured lift height for the intermediate lift
cut-out, the intermediate lift cut-out function is
switched on again.

WARNING
Risk of accident due to unintentional switch-off of the
intermediate lift cut-out.
If the truck is also equipped with the "intermediate lift
cut-out" variant and the shake function is performed
close to an intermediate lift cut-out lift limit, this may
inadvertently cancel the lift limit.
This can happen if the operating device has to be
moved twice in order to cancel the lift limit. If the op-
erating device for the shake function is then repeat-
edly actuated, this can cancel the lift limit. The fork
carriage then moves beyond the lift limit during the
shaking process. This can cause the fork carriage to
collide with higher objects.
– Do not perform the shake function close to the lift
height of a lift limit.
– Cancel the lift limit by pressing the "F button". See
the following section.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 293

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

Option: Lifting beyond the intermediate

lift cut-out using the "F button"
Optionally, the authorised service centre can
configure the function so that the intermedi-
ate lift cut-out is suspended by pressing the
"F" button on the operating devices for the
hydraulic functions.
– Lift the fork carriage until it stops at the con-
figured lift height.
– Release the "lifting" operating device and
push the "F" button.
The black symbol disappears. The function is
suspended for a short period.
– Continue lifting within one second, as other-
wise the function will intervene again. If the
function intervenes again, the black symbol
will reappear.

Switching off the intermediate lift cut-out

– Press the button.
The first menu level appears.
– Press the softkey.
– Press the softkey.
The orange-coloured activation bar next to the
softkey goes out.
The symbol disappears from the main dis-
play.
The function is switched off until the next time
the truck is restarted.

Configuration by the fleet manager

– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.

294 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

– Press the Truck settings softkey. 

– Press the Lift cut-out softkey. 

Lift cut-out

Run-on time

Overload detection

Fork wear protection

Speed reduction when the fork

carriage is raised
Fleet manager

6219_003-314_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 295

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

This menu offers three storage locations. 

– To configure storage location 1, press
the Intermediate lift cut-out
1 softkey. Intermediate lift cut-out 1

Intermediate lift cut-out 2

Intermediate lift cut-out 3

End lift cut-out

Fleet manager

6219_003-315_en

In this menu, you can define the desired lift 

height.
– Enter the lift height using softkeys 0 to 9. Intermediate
– To save, press the button. lift cut-out 1
– To activate, press the scroll button .
The menu closes. The storage locations are
displayed. An orange activation bar indicates Enter desired height
that the intermediate lift cut-out 6,892 m
1 is activated.
= Clear = Activate

= Save = Cancel
Fleet manager

6219_003-316_en

296 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

– To deactivate the intermediate lift 

cut-out 1, press the Intermediate
lift cut-out 1 softkey.
Intermediate
– Press the scroll button . lift cut-out 1
The intermediate lift cut-out 1
is deactivated. The orange activation bar goes
out.
Enter desired height
6,892 m

= Clear = Deactivate

= Save = Cancel
Fleet manager

6219_003-317_en

Lift transition damping

This assistance system, in conjunction with
the optical lift height measuring system, en-
sures that the lifting speed and lowering speed
are adjusted at the lift mast transition points.
As a result, the inner lift masts move in and
out of the outer lift mast smoothly and with-
out jolting. The lifting and lowering procedures
are damped on telescopic lift masts and triple
masts. This protects the load against jerking
movements.

Lift mast end-stop damping (var-

iant)
This assistance system, in conjunction with
the optical height measuring system, ensures
that the fork carriage reaches the lifting stops
gently. This prevents the lifting movement
from stopping abruptly.
If the truck is equipped with the "automatic
mast vertical positioning" variant, the tilt stops
will also be approached gently. This is done
by the "tilt end stop damping" assistance sys-
tem. This increases the comfort for the driver.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 297

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

End lift cut-out (variant) 

This assistance system limits the lift height of

the fork carriage.
This assistance system does not release the
driver from the obligation to observe the
"Safety regulations for handling loads".
The end lift cut-out is active by default when
the truck is switched on. The symbol ap-
pears in the display. It can be switched off if
required. When the truck is switched on again,
it is active again.

NOTE
Check the lift heights set here before use via
the End lift cut-out menu.

Switching off the end lift cut-out

– Stop the truck.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Press the button.
The first menu level appears.
– Press the softkey.
– Press the softkey.
The symbol goes out. The end lift cut-out
is switched off.
– To switch the end lift cut-out on again,
press the softkey again.

NOTE
The maximum lift height cannot be modified
by the driver. It can be changed either by the
authorised service centre or with the "Access
authorisation for the fleet manager" via the
display-operating unit.

Configuration by the fleet manager

– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.

298 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

– Press the Truck settings softkey. 

– Press the Lift cut-out softkey. 

Lift cut-out

Run-on time

Overload detection

Fork wear protection

Speed reduction when the fork

carriage is raised
Fleet manager

6219_003-314_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 299

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

– Press the End lift cut-out softkey. 

Intermediate lift cut-out 1

Intermediate lift cut-out 2

Intermediate lift cut-out 3

End lift cut-out

Fleet manager

6219_003-315_en

In this menu, you can define the desired lift 

height.
– Enter the lift height using softkeys 0 to 9. Intermediate
– To save, press the button. lift cut-out 1
– To activate, press the scroll button .
The menu closes. An orange activation bar
indicates that the End lift cut-out is Enter desired height
activated. 6,892 m

= Clear = Activate

= Save = Cancel
Fleet manager

6219_003-316_en

300 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

– To deactivate the End lift cut-out, 

press the End lift cut-out softkey.
– Press the scroll button . Intermediate
The End lift cut-out is deactivated. lift cut-out 1
The orange activation bar goes out.

Enter desired height

6,892 m

= Clear = Deactivate

= Save = Cancel
Fleet manager

6219_003-317_en

Speed reduction when the fork

carriage is raised (variant)
If the fork carriage is lifted to a height above
500 mm, this assistance system automatically
reduces the speed of the truck.

NOTE
This lift height can be changed up to 500 mm
either by the authorised service centre or with
the "Access authorisation for the fleet manag-
er" via the display-operating unit.

Configuration by the fleet manager

Entering the lift height
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 301

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

– Press the Truck settings softkey. 

– Press the Speed restriction for 

lift softkey.

Lift cut-out

Run-on time

Overload detection

Fork wear protection

Speed reduction when the fork

carriage is raised
Fleet manager

6219_003-314_en

302 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

– Press the Lift height softkey. 

Lift height

Speed restriction

Fleet manager

6219_003-321_en

In this menu you can define the desired 

height.

Speed reduction when

NOTE the fork carriage is raised »
Lift height
The assistance system intervenes automati-
cally from 500 mm. Thus, the height can only
be freely selected up to 500 mm. Enter desired height
– Enter the height using softkeys 0 to 9.
– To save, press the button.
The menu closes. = Clear

Entering the speed restriction = Save = Cancel

Fleet manager

The maximum speed can be defined, just like

the lift height. 6219_003-322_en_V2

– Activate the "Access authorisation for the

fleet manager".
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 303

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

– Press the Truck settings softkey. 

– Press the Speed restriction for 

lift softkey.

Lift cut-out

Run-on time

Overload detection

Fork wear protection

Speed reduction when the fork

carriage is raised
Fleet manager

6219_003-314_en

304 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

– Press the Speed restriction softkey. 

Lift height

Speed restriction

Fleet manager

6219_003-321_en

In this menu you can define the maximum 

speed.
– Enter the speed using softkeys 0 to 9. Speed restriction
– To save, press the button.
The menu closes.
Enter maximum
speed (2...20km / h)
10 km / h

6219_003-193_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 305

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

Electrical fork wear protection 

(variant)
This assistance system, in conjunction with
the optical height measuring system, ensures
that the fork arms do not touch the ground.
The correct height for inserting the forks in a
pallet can also be configured. Since the fork
must always be lowered completely when the
truck is safely parked, the fork wear protec-
tion can also be temporarily suspended. See
the following section "Lowering the forks com-
pletely".

NOTE
6219_003-232

The desired height of the fork wear protection

can be changed either by the authorised serv-
ice centre or with the "Access authorisation for
the fleet manager" via the display-operating
unit.
The fork wear protection function is always
active when the truck is switched on. The
"fork wear protection" symbol appears in
the display. Only the authorised service centre
may deactivate the function.
● If the symbol is grey, the assistance
system is switched on.
● If the symbol is black, the assistance
system is taking effect.
The fork carriage does not lower to a level
that is higher than the set level.

Lowering to the ground

NOTE
The fork wear protection cannot be switched
off permanently. The fork wear protection can
be temporarily deactivated to lower the fork
arms to the ground and securely park the
truck.
– Lower the fork carriage until the fork wear
protection function intervenes.
– Release the "lower" operating device.
The fork wear protection is switched off.
– To lower the fork to the ground fully, acti-
vate the "lower" operating device again.

306 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

NOTE
Alternatively, the authorised service centre
can parametrise the "F" button to cancel the
fork wear protection for the complete lowering
of the fork.

NOTE
When you change fork arms, the fork wear
protection must be zeroed.
– See the section entitled "Zeroing the assis-
tance systems".

Configuration by the fleet manager

The height of the fork wear protection can be
configured, for example, for retraction into pal-
lets with a different height or uneven ground.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
– Press the Truck settings softkey. 

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 307

4 Operation
Lift height-dependent assistance systems

– Press the Fork wear protection 

softkey.

Lift cut-out

Run-on time

Overload detection

Fork wear protection

Speed reduction when the fork

carriage is raised
Fleet manager

6219_003-314_en

In this menu you can define the desired 

height.
– Enter the height using softkeys 0 to 9. Fork wear protection
– To save, press the button.
The menu closes.

Enter desired height

0,120 m

= Clear

= Save = Cancel
Fleet manager

6219_003-320_en

308 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Tilt angle-dependent assistance systems

Tilt angle-dependent assistance systems

Mast tilt angle display (variant) 

Knowing the actual tilt angle of the lift mast

makes it easier to place loads into stock and
remove loads from stock. If the truck is equip-
ped with the "mast tilt angle display" assis-
tance system, the lift mast tilt angle (1) is 1,6 t
shown on the display.
7,0°
NOTE
When replacing worn-out pairs of tyres or 2,71 m
when the front and rear tyres are worn to dif-
ferent levels, the mast tilt angle display must
be zeroed.
– See the section entitled "Zeroing the assis-
tance systems".

Tilt end stop damping (variant)

This assistance system ensures that the
movement to the end positions is smooth. This
protects the load against jerking movements.

Automatic mast vertical position- 

ing (variant)

CAUTION
Risk of damage to property due to the lift mast collid-
ing with racks or other objects!
– Before using the "automatic mast vertical position-
ing" assistance system, position the truck at a suf-
ficient distance from racks and other objects.

The "automatic mast vertical positioning" as-

sistance system can be used to set down
the goods so that the goods are exactly ver-
tical, e.g. paper rolls. This prevents damage
when setting down the load. "Automatic mast
vertical positioning" functions when tilting for-
wards. A further variant is available which al-
so functions when tilting backwards. The tilt
cylinders run into the end stops gently to pre-
vent hard vibrations and impacts. Oscillating
motions of the truck are minimised, thus in-
creasing work safety. Automatic mast vertical

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 309

4 Operation
Tilt angle-dependent assistance systems

positioning reduces wear on various compo-

nents, thereby reducing repair costs.
The "automatic mast vertical positioning" as-
sistance system consists of the following indi-
vidual functions:
● Display of the "Automatic mast vertical posi-

tioning" feature
● Automatic startup of the "Automatic mast

vertical position" feature

The truck can also be equipped with only the
"mast tilt angle display" feature.

NOTE
Check the function of automatic mast vertical
positioning whenever the truck is used.
– See the section entitled "Function checking
of the automatic mast vertical positioning
function".
– Press the softkey.
The symbol appears in the display.
– Tilt back the lift mast until it reaches the end
stop.
– Tilt the lift mast forwards.
The lift mast stops in the vertical position.

NOTE
The lift mast also stops in the vertical position
if it is tilted forwards by ≥ 3° from a backward
tilt.

NOTE
The automatic mast vertical positioning must
be calibrated in order to ensure accuracy at all
times. The "access authorisation for the fleet
manager" is required for the calibration. This
access is required:
● When placing loads into stock and remov-

ing loads from stock on HGV ramps

● In the event of tyre wear

● If the lift mast is obviously not in the vertical

position
– See the section entitled "Calibrating the au-
tomatic mast vertical positioning".

310 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Tilt angle-dependent assistance systems

Function checking of the auto-

matic mast vertical positioning
function (variant)
CAUTION
Risk of damage to property due to the lift mast collid-
ing with racks or other objects!
– Before using the "automatic mast vertical position-
ing" assistance system, position the truck at a suf-
ficient distance from racks and other objects.

– To check the function of the automatic mast

vertical positioning function, proceed as fol-
lows:
– Press the softkey.
The symbol appears in the display.
– Tilt back the lift mast until it reaches the end
stop.
– Tilt the lift mast forwards.
The lift mast must stop in the vertical position.
The automatic mast vertical positioning can be
used.
– If the lift mast does not stop in the vertical
position, do not use the assistance system.
– In this case, contact your authorised service
centre.

Calibrating the automatic mast

vertical positioning
The automatic mast vertical positioning is cali-
brated using a wizard on the display-operating
unit.

NOTE
The wizard requires access authorisation for
the fleet manager. Access to the settings
menu is only available if the truck is at a
standstill and the parking brake is applied. If
the parking brake is released prematurely, the
settings menu will close.
– Set the load down, if necessary.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 311

4 Operation
Tilt angle-dependent assistance systems

– Drive the truck into an area that is to be

used for placing loads into stock and re-
moving loads from stock.
Once the "automatic mast vertical positioning"
assistance system has been calibrated, a pal-
let can be stored horizontally in a rack when
the truck is standing on a HGV ramp, for ex-
ample.
– Lift the fork carriage slightly.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Attach a tilt angle template with a spirit level 
to the outer lift mast.
– Bring the lift mast to the vertical position
according to the spirit level.
– Press the button.
60 60

– Press the Softkey. 70 70

80 90 80

– Activate the "Access authorisation for the

fleet manager".

– Press the Service softkey. 

312 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Tilt angle-dependent assistance systems

– Press the scroll keys until the Cal- 

ibration menu appears.
– Press the Calibration softkey.
Maintenance interval

Calibration

Shock sensor

Change password (access auth.)

Relieve hydraulics
Fleet manager

6219_003-277_en

– Press the Lift mast tilting softkey. 

The wizard for calibrating the load measure-
ment is started.
Lift mast tilting
– Follow the instructions on the display.
– If the message Calibration Load measurement
failed appears, press the softkey.
– Repeat the process.
After the calibration has been completed
successfully, the message Calibration
successful appears.
– Switch the truck off and on again. Fleet manager

The calibration is now complete.

6219_003-278_en

NOTE
If the message A6701 Fault: Monitor-
ing of assistance system ap-
pears during the calibration, perform the cali-
bration again.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 313

4 Operation
Load-dependant assistance systems

Load-dependant assistance systems

Overload detection (variant)
WARNING
Risk of accident as a result of exceeding the permis-
sible load capacity!
This assistance system does not replace the driver's
duty to observe the load capacity specified on the
nameplate.
– Observe the load capacity specified on the name-
plate.

This assistance system alerts the driver as

soon as an excessive load is picked up. The
message Overload is shown on the dis-
play-operating unit.
The maximum load always refers to the sum
of the load picked up plus any attachments
present. The authorised service centre can
configure the setting for the maximum load.
However, the maximum load must not be
higher than the nominal load.
The overload detection restricts the hydraulic
functions as follows:
● If the rated capacity or the maximum load

set by the authorised service centre is ex-

ceeded, the lifting speed is reduced.
● If the rated capacity or the set maximum

load are exceeded by more than 10%, the

"Lifting" function is disabled.

NOTE
Please note the following special considera-
tions:
● If the load pressure sensor fails, the maxi-

mum load (nominal load) is assumed. The

function engages to the maximum extent.
● If the lifting stage switch fails, the truck con-

trol unit assumes the fork carriage is at the

maximum lift height.
● In the case of overload, the "lifting" function

is blocked from the factory. The authorised

service centre can remove the "lifting" func-
tion block and restrict the function instead.

314 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Load-dependant assistance systems

Configuration by the fleet manager

– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
– Press the Truck settings softkey. 

– Press the Overload detection soft- 

key.

Lift cut-out

Run-on time

Overload detection

Fork wear protection

Speed reduction when the fork

carriage is raised
Fleet manager

6219_003-314_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 315

4 Operation
Load-dependant assistance systems

In this menu you can define the desired 

weight.
– Enter the weight using softkeys 0 to 9. Overload detection

NOTE
Only a lower value than the permissible load
Enter desired weight
capacity of the truck can be entered as an
overload.
1,800 t
– To save, press the button.
The menu closes. = Clear

= Save = Cancel
Fleet manager

6219_003-331_en

Dynamic Load Control 1 (var-

iant)
WARNING
Risk of accident as a result of overloading!
Dynamic Load Control 1 is not a safety function
and does not release the driver from the duty to
observe the information specified in the load capacity
diagram!

WARNING
Risk of accident due to the slow response of the
lifting system!
If the lifting movements are configured to use low
dynamics, the lifting system responds after a delay
when the operating device is released, even in an
emergency. The fork carriage does not stop immedi-
ately; instead, it takes approx. one second.
This behaviour may also occur when specific settings
are configured for the Dynamic Load Control 1.
– Work with particular attention and care.
– Observe the "Dynamics of the hydraulic move-
ments" section in the chapter entitled "Lifting".

Dynamic Load Control 1 improves the han-

dling of the load. This function protects the
truck and the load from abrupt movements.

316 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Load-dependant assistance systems

Dynamic Load Control 1 regulates the lifting

and tilting dynamics and the driving dynamics
according to the following criteria:
● Lift height

● Load weight

Load movements which could lead to critical

conditions are slowed down if necessary.
Dynamic Load Control 1 intervenes in the fol-
lowing operating situations:
● With a telescopic lift mast:

The fork carriage is at least 2.1 m off the

ground.
● With a triple mast:

The fork carriage is in the second lifting

stage
● The load picked up exceeds 50% of the

nominal load
The driving speed is reduced to 5 km/h at a
lift height of 2.1 m and higher or in the second
lifting stage.

NOTE
When the fork carriage has been lowered be-
low the lift heights mentioned above, the driver
can deactivate the speed restriction again. Re-
lease the accelerator pedal for a short period
to do this.
If a sensor belonging to Dynamic Load Con-
trol 1 fails, the level of intervention from the
function is increased to a maximum.

Dynamic Load Control 2 (var-

iant)
WARNING
Risk of accident as a result of overloading!
"Dynamic Load Control 2" is not a safety function
and does not release the driver from the duty to
observe the information specified in the load capacity
diagram!

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 317

4 Operation
Load-dependant assistance systems

WARNING
Risk of accident due to the slow response of the
lifting system!
If the lifting movements are configured to use low
dynamics, the lifting system responds after a delay
when the operating device is released, even in an
emergency. The fork carriage does not stop immedi-
ately; instead, it takes approx. one second.
This behaviour may also occur when specific settings
are configured for the Dynamic Load Control 2.
– Work with particular attention and care.
– Observe the "Dynamics of the hydraulic move-
ments" section in the chapter entitled "Lifting".

"Dynamic Load Control 2" improves the han-

dling of the load. This function protects the
truck and the load from abrupt movements.
Dynamic Load Control 2 regulates the lifting
and tilting dynamics and the driving dynamics
according to the following criteria:
● Lift height

● Load weight

● Load centre of gravity

Dynamic Load Control 2 intervenes in the fol-

lowing operating situations:
● With a telescopic lift mast:

The fork carriage is at least 2.1 m off the

ground.
● With a triple lift mast or NiHo lift mast:

The fork carriage is in the second lifting

stage
● The truck centre of gravity has shifted to an

unfavourable position due to the position of

the load
Dynamic Load Control 2 calculates the inter-
action between these three criteria and inter-
venes in the calculated result.
Load movements which could lead to critical
conditions are slowed down if necessary.
The driving speed is reduced to 5 km/h at a
lift height of 2.1 m and higher or in the second
lifting stage.

318 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Load-dependant assistance systems

NOTE
When the fork carriage has been lowered be-
low the lift heights mentioned above, the driver
can deactivate the speed restriction again. Re-
lease the accelerator pedal for a short period
to do this.
The bar display on the display of the display- 
operating unit is part of the load information. It
is part of the Dynamic Load Control 2.
C
The number and colour of the bars indicates
to what extent the determined load weight and
load centre of gravity affect the stability of the B
truck.
The bar display is divided into three sections
and ten segments.
A Grey area A
The dynamics of the lifting movements
and tilting movements are not noticeably
reduced.
B Yellow area
If a load that is close to the nominal load
is picked up, the display moves into the
yellow area. A Grey
B Yellow
The dynamics of the lifting movements C Red
and tilting movements are noticeably re-
duced.
– Handle the load with the appropriate level of
care.
C Red area
When the combination of load weight and
load centre of gravity exceeds the speci-
fied value, the display moves into the red
area.
The dynamics of the lifting movements
and tilting movements are significantly re-
duced.
– In this case, set down the load or tilt back-
wards.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 319

4 Operation
Load-dependant assistance systems

If a sensor belonging to Dynamic Load Con- 

trol 2 fails, the level of intervention from the
function is increased to a maximum. A cross
appears instead of the bar.
– If this display appears permanently, contact
the authorised service centre.

Load measurement (variant) 

Knowing the weight of the load to be trans-

ported gives the driver greater security. If the
truck is equipped with the "load measurement"
assistance system, the weight of the lifted load
is measured and displayed in the display-op-
erating unit (1). The measuring accuracy is
5% of the rated capacity.
1,6 t
– Observe the following safety information.
7,0°
DANGER
Risk of accident from a falling load!
2,71 m
The load may fall if the load centre of gravity has
not been taken into account or the load has not been
picked up securely. 6219_003-112_V4

– Pick up the load securely; see the chapter entitled

"Picking up loads".

WARNING
Risk of accident as a result of exceeding the residual
load capacity.
If the weight determined by a load measurement ex-
ceeds the permissible residual load capacity of the
truck, the truck cannot be operated safely.
– Set down and reduce the load immediately.
– If necessary, use another truck with sufficient
load-bearing capacity.

320 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Load-dependant assistance systems

NOTE
The load measurement must be calibrated in
order to ensure accuracy at all times. The
"access authorisation for the fleet manager"
is required for the calibration. This access is
required:
● After changing the fork arms,

● After fitting or changing attachments

● If the displayed values are obviously incor-

rect
If -.-- t is displayed permanently, this
means that the function is calibrated incorrect-
ly (load < 0 kg).
– See the section entitled "Calibrating the
load measurement".

NOTE
When you change fork arms or attachments,
the load measurement must be zeroed.
– See the section entitled "Zeroing the assis-
tance systems".

Calibrating the load measure-

ment
If the truck is equipped with the "load meas-
urement" assistance system, then this assis-
tance system must be calibrated.
The load measurement is calibrated using a
wizard on the display-operating unit.

NOTE
The calibration procedure requires access au-
thorisation for the fleet manager. Access to
the settings menu is only available if the truck
is at a standstill and the parking brake is ap-
plied. If the parking brake is released prema-
turely, the settings menu will close.
– Set the load down, if necessary.
– Drive the truck onto an even surface.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Press the button.
– Press the Softkey.
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 321
4 Operation
Load-dependant assistance systems

– Activate the "Access authorisation for the

fleet manager".
– Press the Service softkey. 

– Press the scroll keys until the Cal- 

ibration menu appears.

Maintenance interval

Calibration

Shock sensor

Change password (access auth.)

Relieve hydraulics
Fleet manager

6219_003-277_en

322 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Load-dependant assistance systems

– Press the Load measurement softkey. 

The wizard for calibrating the load measure-
ment is started.
Lift mast tilting
– Follow the instructions on the display.
– If the message Calibration Load measurement
failed appears, press the softkey.
– Repeat the process.
After the calibration has been completed suc-
cessfully, the message Successful cal-
ibration appears.
– Switch the truck off and on again. Fleet manager

The calibration is now complete.

6219_003-278_en

NOTE
If the message A6701 Fault: Monitor-
ing of assistance system ap-
pears during the calibration, perform the cali-
bration again.

Precision load measurement 

(variant)
This assistance system is available only if the
truck is equipped with the "load measurement"
variant.
The "Precision load measurement" variant al-
lows the weight of the load being picked up to
be measured and displayed on the display-op-
erating unit accurate to within 3% of the rated
capacity of the truck.

NOTE
If the load is to be measured exclusive of the
load pick-up device, run the tare function. See
the next section.
– Pick up the load safely.
– Press the button.
The first menu level appears.
– Press the softkey.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 323

4 Operation
Load-dependant assistance systems

– Press the softkey (1). 

1

1,5 t
0,70 m --,-- t
0,0°

6219_003-222

The Lower fork slightly prompt is 

displayed.
– Lower the fork carriage.
1,5 t
NOTE 0,70 m Lower
Slowly lowering the fork carriage increases 0,0° fork slightly

the measurement accuracy in trucks with mul-

ti-lever operation.
The value is calculated. The Calc. ongo-
ing message appears.

6219_003-223_V3_en

324 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Load-dependant assistance systems

If the calculation was successful, the meas- 

ured weight of the load (1) is displayed. 1

NOTE
1,5 t
If the tare function was not active, the full 0,70 m
weight of the load being picked up is dis- 1,32 t
played. 0,0°
The measured weight remains displayed until:
● The load has been measured again

● The sensor system detects a change in the

weight
In this case, -.-- t is displayed as the
weight.

6219_003-224

Tare function (variant) 

The tare function is a sub-function of the pre-

cision load measurement function. If the pre-
cision load measurement function should not
factor in the weight of a load container, the
tare function must be run. It is then possible to
determine the net weight of the raised load.

NOTE
During the following process, the fork carriage
must be lowered slightly. When doing so, the
fork must not touch the ground, as otherwise
the result will be inaccurate.
– Set the lift mast to vertical.
– Pick up the empty load container, such as a
crate.
– Raise the fork to a height of between
300 mm and 800 mm.
– Press the button.
The first menu level appears.
– Press the softkey.
– Press the softkey.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 325

4 Operation
Load-dependant assistance systems

– Press the softkey (1). 

1
The activation bar next to the symbol lights
up.

1,5 t
0,70 m --,-- t
0,0°

6219_003-225

The Lower fork slightly prompt is 

displayed.
– Lower the fork carriage.
The value is calculated. The message Zero- 1,5 t
ing ongoing is displayed. 0,70 m Lower
If the tare function was run successfully, a 0,0° fork slightly
weight of 0.00 t is displayed. The activation
bar next to the symbol remains illuminated.
– If the tare function was not run successful-
ly, follow the prompts on the display and
repeat the process.
When a load is picked up, -.-- t is dis-
played.
6219_003-223_V3_en
The "Precision load measurement" can be
performed.
– To clear the tare weight, press the soft-
key again.

WARNING
Risk of accident due to incorrect load specification.
If the requirements for the precision load measure-
ment function change, the tare function must be run
again, for example if a precision load measurement
needs to be performed without a crate. Otherwise,
the new precision load measurement will continue to
deduct the weight of the crate.
– Run the tare function again without a load or a
crate.

326 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Load-dependant assistance systems

Total load (variant) 

Use the "total load" variant to calculate the

total weight of multiple loads. The "total load"
is an additional function of the "load meas-
urement". It records the individual loads and
stores up to three total loads.
This allows, for example, three different con-
tainers to be laden and their loading weight
to be determined. This function is helpful if,
for instance, a container has a limited payload
and you want to know when the permissible
load weight has been reached.
This function is useful for comparing the loads
indicated on delivery documents to the actual
loads, for example.
The procedure for adding up the total load is
as follows:
1 Pick up the load and call up the load
menu,
2 Measure the load,
3 Add/subtract the load.

WARNING
Risk to stability.
If the weight determined by a load measurement ex-
ceeds the permissible residual load capacity of the
truck, the truck cannot be operated safely.
– Do not lift the load higher than 800 mm.
– Set down and reduce the load immediately.
– If necessary, use another truck with sufficient
load-bearing capacity.

NOTE
Lift the load to a height of between 300 mm
and 800 mm, since the load must subsequent-
ly be lowered slightly for the weighing process.
If the weighing process establishes that the
load is too heavy, the load must not be lifted
higher than 800 mm. The fork arms must not
touch the ground.

Picking up the load and calling up the

load menu
– Pick up the load safely.
– Press the button.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 327

4 Operation
Load-dependant assistance systems

The first menu level appears.

– Press the softkey.
– Press the softkey.
A menu appears with three storage locations 
for the total load.
The total load is explained here using .
0,00
– Press the softkey.
0,00

0,00

The menu for storage location appears. 

This menu provides the following functions:
● Tare
● Precision load measurement
● Add load
--,-- t
● Subtract load
● Delete total load

Measure load
– Press the softkey. Measure the load.
0,00 t

328 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Load-dependant assistance systems

The message with the prompt Lower fork 

slightly appears.
– Lower the fork carriage.
The value is calculated. The Calc. ongo- 1,5 t
ing message appears. 0,70 m Lower
If the calculation was successful, the load is 0,0° fork slightly
displayed.

Adding a load
– Pick up the load to be added.
– Measure the load as described previously.
– Press the softkey.
The load is saved automatically.
6219_003-223_V3_en

Subtracting a load
– Pick up the load to be subtracted.
– Measure the load as described previously.
– To subtract the current load, press the
softkey.
The current load is subtracted from the sum.
The load is saved automatically.

NOTE
If, for instance, this load was added to the
wrong total load, it is also possible to perform
a subtraction with the previously measured
and added load.

Delete total load

– To delete the total load, press the soft-
key.
The Clear total load? message is
displayed.
– To clear, press the softkey.
– To cancel, press the softkey.
The display changes back to the menu with
the three storage locations.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 329

4 Operation
Zeroing the assistance systems

Zeroing the assistance systems

Zeroing process
The following assistance systems sometimes
require zeroing.
● Load measurement

When changing fork arms or attachments

● Lift height display

When replacing worn tyres

For increasingly worn tyres / for new tyres
● Mast tilt angle display

○ When replacing a worn pair of tyres, if

the front and rear tyres are worn to different
levels.
○ If the front and rear tyres show different
levels of wear.
● Electrical fork wear protection

When changing fork arms

NOTE
The zeroing for the "load measurement" assis-
tance system is shown here as an example.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
– Press the Truck settings softkey. 

330 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Zeroing the assistance systems

– Press the Zeroing softkey. 

Auxiliary hydraulics

Change PIN codes

Manage driver profiles

On-board charger

Zeroing
Fleet manager

6219_003-323_en

– Press the softkey for the assistance func- 

tion for which the zeroing is to be per-
formed, e.g. Load weight.
Load weight
NOTE
Lift height
The processes for zeroing the other assis-
tance systems are almost identical.
Tilt angle

Fork wear protection

Fleet manager

6219_003-324_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 331

4 Operation
Zeroing the assistance systems

The instructions are shown in the display. 

Here: Lower forks
After the instructions have been followed, Load weight
the messages Zeroing successful or
Zeroing failed are displayed.
– If zeroing failed, try again. Lower forks
– If zeroing fails repeatedly, contact your au-
thorised service centre.

Fleet manager

6219_003-325_en

332 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Depressurising the hydraulic system

Depressurising the hydraulic system

Need to depressurise the hy-
draulic system
To enable additional hydraulic functions other 
than the basic functions to be used, the truck
has plug connectors (1) on the lift mast.
Clamping and non-clamping attachments can
be connected to these plug connectors.
● Non-clamping attachments are connected

to the third hydraulic circuit via the plug

connectors (1) on the fork carriage and are
controlled via the "5th hydraulic function".
If the truck is equipped with multi-lever op-
eration, the attachments can also be con-
trolled via the "6th hydraulic function".
● Clamping attachments are not controlled via

the "5th/6th hydraulic function"

Attachments must be installed only by compe- 1
tent persons. The specifications provided by 6219_003-056

the manufacturer and supplier of the attach- Plug connectors on the lift mast
ments must be observed during installation of
the attachments.
Before changing attachments, the hydraulic
system must be depressurised. This is done
using a wizard on the display-operating unit.
If the truck has a "5th hydraulic function" or
"6th hydraulic function", the hydraulic circuits
of these functions must also be depressurised.
– Observe the following sections to depressu-
rise the hydraulic system.
● "Wizard for depressurising the hydraulic
system"
● "Depressurising the hydraulic system us-
ing ..." (see the respective operating de-
vice!)
● "Depressurising the hydraulic system us-
ing ... and the 5th function" (see the respec-
tive operating device!)
● "Special feature for clamping attachments"
● "Completing the depressurisation"

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 333

4 Operation
Depressurising the hydraulic system

Wizard for depressurising the

hydraulic system
The hydraulics are depressurised using a wiz-
ard on the display-operating unit.
If this function is required for daily operation,
contact your authorised service centre. The
authorised service centre can enable the func-
tion for the driver.

NOTE
The wizard requires access authorisation for
the fleet manager. Access to the settings
menu is only available if the truck is at a
standstill and the parking brake is applied. If
the parking brake is released prematurely, the
settings menu will close.
– Set the load down, if necessary.
– Apply the parking brake.

Starting the wizard

– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the Service softkey. 

334 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Depressurising the hydraulic system

– Press the scroll keys

until the Re- 
lieve hydraulics menu appears.
– Push the Relieve hydraulics soft-
key.

The following message appears: Caution, 

the lift mast may move!
– To confirm, press the softkey.
Press the softkey to exit the wizard.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 335

4 Operation
Depressurising the hydraulic system

The following message appears: Disen- 

gage all hydraulic axles, then
switch off the truck
– Depressurise the hydraulics, see the rele-
vant section for the respective operating de-
vices.

WARNING
The movements of the load lift system present a risk
of crushing!
During the depressurisation process, the fork car-
riage or the lift mast can move slightly.
– Do not reach into or stand below the components
of the load lift system.

NOTE
Do not move the steering wheel while de-
pressurising the hydraulics. Otherwise the hy-
draulic system will build up pressure again. As
soon as pressure has built up in the hydraulic
system again, the function for relieving the hy-
draulics becomes inactive.

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using multi-lever opera-
tion
– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-
draulic system".

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the basic functions 2
The basic functions include the first four hy- 1
draulic functions. The basic functions are con-
trolled via the first two hydraulic circuits.
The basic functions are:
● Lifting the fork carriage

● Lowering the fork carriage

● Tilting the lift mast forwards

● Tilting the lift mast backwards

– Push the operating levers (1, 2) once in the

direction of the arrow until the end position
is reached.
6219_003-251

336 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Depressurising the hydraulic system

The hydraulic circuits of the basic functions

are now depressurised.

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the additional functions 4
3
The additional features include features such
2
as the sideshift and fork adjustment. Clamping
attachments are also connected to these hy-
draulic circuits. These functions are controlled
via hydraulic circuits three and four.
1
– Actuate the operating levers (3, 4) for con-
trolling the additional functions once in the
direction of the arrow until the end positions
are reached.
The hydraulic circuits of the additional func-
tions are now depressurised.

6219_003-250

NOTE
Depending on the equipment, the operating
lever (2) can be assigned the sideshift and the
fork adjustment functions.
– In this case, press the button (1) and hold it
down.
– Push the operating lever (2) once in the
direction of the arrow until the end position
is reached.
– Release the button (1).
The hydraulic circuits of the sideshift and fork
adjustment are now depressurised. The plug
connectors on the lift mast are depressurised.

Completing the depressurisation

– To complete the depressurisation, observe
the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using multi-lever opera-
tion and the 5th and 6th function
If the truck is equipped with multi-lever opera-
tion, the attachments can also be controlled
via the "5th hydraulic function" and "6th hy-
draulic function".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 337

4 Operation
Depressurising the hydraulic system

– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-

draulic system".

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the "5th and 6th hydraulic function"
If the truck has a "5th and 6th hydraulic func-
tion", their hydraulic circuits must also be dep-
ressurised. The procedure is similar to the de-
pressurisation of the hydraulic circuits for the
basic functions and the additional functions. 2
In addition, the hydraulic circuits are depres-
surised in the same way as the attachments
1
4 3
are operated. The hydraulic circuits for the
"5th and 6th hydraulic functions" are actuated
via the corresponding buttons on the operating
devices.
– Press the button (1) and hold it down.
– Push the operating lever (4) once in the
direction of the arrow until the end position
is reached.
The hydraulic circuit of the 5th hydraulic func-
tion is depressurised. The plug connectors on
the lift mast are depressurised.
6219_003-252

– Press the button (2) and hold it down.

– Push the operating lever (3) once in the
direction of the arrow until the end position
is reached.
The hydraulic circuit of the 6th hydraulic func-
tion is depressurised. The plug connectors on
the lift mast are depressurised.

Completing the depressurisation

– To complete the depressurisation, observe
the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using a double mini-lever
– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-
draulic system".

338 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Depressurising the hydraulic system

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the basic functions
The basic functions include the first four hy- 1
draulic functions. The basic functions are con-
trolled via the first two hydraulic circuits.
The basic functions are:
● Lifting the fork carriage

● Lowering the fork carriage

● Tilting the lift mast forwards

● Tilting the lift mast backwards

– Push the cross lever (1) once in the direc-

tion of the arrow until the end position is
reached.
The hydraulic circuits of the basic functions 6219_003-239

are now depressurised.

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the additional functions
The additional features include features such 1
as the sideshift and fork adjustment. Clamping
attachments are also connected to these hy-
draulic circuits. These functions are controlled
via hydraulic circuits three and four.
– Actuate the cross lever (1) for controlling
the additional functions once in the direc-
tion of the arrow until the end position is
reached.
The hydraulic circuits of the additional func-
tions are now depressurised.

Completing the depressurisation

6219_003-240

– To complete the depressurisation, observe

the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using the double mini-
lever and the 5th function
If the truck is equipped with the double mini-
lever, the attachments can also be controlled
via the "5th hydraulic function".
– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-
draulic system".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 339

4 Operation
Depressurising the hydraulic system

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the "5th hydraulic function"
1
If the truck has a "5th hydraulic function",
the hydraulic circuit of this function must al-
so be depressurised. The procedure is simi-
lar to the depressurisation of the hydraulic cir-
cuits for the basic functions and the additional
functions. In addition, the hydraulic circuit is
depressurised in the same way as the attach-
ments are operated. The hydraulic circuit for
the "5th hydraulic function" is actuated using
the function key for the "5th function" (2).
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (2). 2
6219_003-241

The LED for the "5th function" lights up.

– Push the cross lever (1) once in the direc-
tion of the arrow until the end position is
reached.
The hydraulic circuit of the 5th hydraulic func-
tion is depressurised. The plug connectors on
the lift mast are depressurised.
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (2).
The LED for the "5th function" goes out.

Completing the depressurisation

– To complete the depressurisation, observe
the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using a triple mini-lever
– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-
draulic system".

340 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Depressurising the hydraulic system

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the basic functions
The basic functions include the first four hy- 1
draulic functions. The basic functions are con-
trolled via the first two hydraulic circuits.
The basic functions are:
● Lifting the fork carriage

● Lowering the fork carriage

● Tilting the lift mast forwards

● Tilting the lift mast backwards

– Push the cross lever (1) once in the direc-

tion of the arrow until the end position is
reached.
The hydraulic circuits of the basic functions 6219_003-242

are now depressurised.

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the additional functions
The additional features include features such 1 2
as the sideshift and fork adjustment. Clamping
attachments are also connected to these hy-
draulic circuits. These functions are controlled
via hydraulic circuits three and four.
– Actuate the operating levers (1, 2) for con-
trolling the additional functions once in the
direction of the arrow until the end positions
are reached.
The hydraulic circuits of the additional func-
tions are now depressurised.

Completing the depressurisation

6219_003-243

– To complete the depressurisation, observe

the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using the triple mini-lever
and the 5th function
If the truck is equipped with the triple mini-lev-
er, the attachments can also be controlled via
the "5th hydraulic function".
– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-
draulic system".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 341

4 Operation
Depressurising the hydraulic system

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the "5th hydraulic function"
If the truck has a "5th hydraulic function",
the hydraulic circuit of this function must al-
so be depressurised. The procedure is simi-
lar to the depressurisation of the hydraulic cir-
cuits for the basic functions and the additional
functions. In addition, the hydraulic circuit is
depressurised in the same way as the attach-
ments are operated. The hydraulic circuit for
the "5th hydraulic function" is actuated using
the function key for the "5th function" (2).
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (2).
The LED for the "5th function" lights up. 6219_003-244

– Push the operating lever (1) once in the

direction of the arrow until the end position
is reached.
The hydraulic circuit of the 5th hydraulic func-
tion is depressurised. The plug connectors on
the lift mast are depressurised.
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (2).
The LED for the "5th function" goes out.

Completing the depressurisation

– To complete the depressurisation, observe
the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using a quadruple mini-
lever
– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-
draulic system".

342 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Depressurising the hydraulic system

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the basic functions
The basic functions include the first four hy-
draulic functions. The basic functions are con-
1 2
trolled via the first two hydraulic circuits.
The basic functions are:
● Lifting the fork carriage

● Lowering the fork carriage

● Tilting the lift mast forwards

● Tilting the lift mast backwards

– Push the operating levers (1, 2) once in the

direction of the arrow until the end position
is reached.
The hydraulic circuits of the basic functions 6219_003-245

are now depressurised.

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the additional functions
The additional features include features such 1 2
as the sideshift and fork adjustment. Clamping
attachments are also connected to these hy-
draulic circuits. These functions are controlled
via hydraulic circuits three and four.
– Actuate the operating levers (1, 2) for con-
trolling the additional functions once in the
direction of the arrow until the end positions
are reached.
The hydraulic circuits of the additional func-
tions are now depressurised.

Completing the depressurisation

6219_003-246

– To complete the depressurisation, observe

the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using the quadruple
mini-lever and the 5th function
If the truck is equipped with the quadruple
mini-lever, the attachments can also be con-
trolled via the "5th hydraulic function".
– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-
draulic system".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 343

4 Operation
Depressurising the hydraulic system

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the "5th hydraulic function"
1
If the truck has a "5th hydraulic function",
the hydraulic circuit of this function must al-
so be depressurised. The procedure is simi-
lar to the depressurisation of the hydraulic cir-
cuits for the basic functions and the additional
functions. In addition, the hydraulic circuit is
depressurised in the same way as the attach-
ments are operated. The hydraulic circuit for
the "5th hydraulic function" is actuated using
the function key for the "5th function" (2).
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (2).
2
The LED for the "5th function" lights up. 6219_003-247

– Push the operating lever (1) once in the

direction of the arrow until the end position
is reached.
The hydraulic circuit of the 5th hydraulic func-
tion is depressurised. The plug connectors on
the lift mast are depressurised.
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (2).
The LED for the "5th function" goes out.

Completing the depressurisation

– To complete the depressurisation, observe
the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using the Fingertip
– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-
draulic system".

344 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Depressurising the hydraulic system

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

2
the basic functions
The basic functions include the first four hy-
draulic functions. The basic functions are con-
trolled via the first two hydraulic circuits.
The basic functions are: 1
● Lifting the fork carriage

● Lowering the fork carriage

● Tilting the lift mast forwards

● Tilting the lift mast backwards

– Push the operating levers (1, 2) once in the

direction of the arrow until the end position
is reached.
The hydraulic circuits of the basic functions 6219_003-236

are now depressurised.

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the additional functions
The additional features include features such 1
as the sideshift and fork adjustment. Clamping
attachments are also connected to these hy-
draulic circuits. These functions are controlled
via hydraulic circuits three and four.
2
– Actuate the operating levers (1, 2) for con-
trolling the additional functions once in the
direction of the arrow until the end positions
are reached.
The hydraulic circuits of the additional func-
tions are now depressurised.

Completing the depressurisation

6219_003-237

– To complete the depressurisation, observe

the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using the Fingertip and
the 5th function
If the truck is equipped with the Fingertip, the
attachments can also be controlled via the
"5th hydraulic function".
– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-
draulic system".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 345

4 Operation
Depressurising the hydraulic system

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for  1 2 3

the "5th hydraulic function"
If the truck has a "5th hydraulic function",
the hydraulic circuit of this function must al-
so be depressurised. The procedure is simi-
lar to the depressurisation of the hydraulic cir-
cuits for the basic functions and the additional
4
functions. In addition, the hydraulic circuit is
depressurised in the same way as the attach-
ments are operated. The hydraulic circuit for
the "5th hydraulic function" is actuated using
the function key for the "5th function" (2). The
operating levers (1) or (4) can be assigned the
5th function. Observe the relevant pictogram
for the 5th function.
6219_003-238
6219_003-204_V2
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (2).
The LED for the "5th function" (3) lights up.
– Push the operating levers (1) or (4) once
in the direction of the arrow until the end
position is reached.
The hydraulic circuit of the 5th hydraulic func-
tion is depressurised. The plug connectors on
the lift mast are depressurised.
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (2).
The LED for the "5th function" (3) goes
out.

Completing the depressurisation

– To complete the depressurisation, observe
the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using the Joystick 4Plus
– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-
draulic system".

346 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Depressurising the hydraulic system

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the basic functions
The basic functions include the first four hy-
draulic functions. The basic functions are con-
1
trolled via the first two hydraulic circuits.
The basic functions are:
● Lifting the fork carriage
2
● Lowering the fork carriage

● Tilting the lift mast forwards

● Tilting the lift mast backwards

– Push the Joystick 4Plus (2) once in the di-

rection of the arrow until the end position is
+ F

reached.
– Push the horizontal rocker button (1) once
in the direction of the arrow.
The hydraulic circuits of the basic functions 6219_003-253

are now depressurised.

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the additional functions
1
The additional features include features such
as the sideshift and fork adjustment. Clamping
attachments are also connected to these hy-
draulic circuits. These functions are controlled
via hydraulic circuits three and four.
Push the Joystick 4Plus (1) once in the di-
rection of the arrow until the end position is
reached. + F

The hydraulic circuits of the additional func-

tions are now depressurised.

Completing the depressurisation 6219_003-248

– To complete the depressurisation, observe

the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Depressurising the hydraulic

system using the Joystick 4Plus
and the 5th function
If the truck is equipped with the Joy-
stick 4Plus, the attachments can also be con-
trolled via the "5th hydraulic function".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 347

4 Operation
Depressurising the hydraulic system

– Start the "wizard for depressurising the hy-

draulic system".

Depressurising the hydraulic circuits for 

the "5th hydraulic function" 1 2
If the truck has a "5th hydraulic function",
the hydraulic circuit of this function must al-
so be depressurised. The procedure is simi- 3
lar to the depressurisation of the hydraulic cir-
cuits for the basic functions and the additional
functions. In addition, the hydraulic circuit is
depressurised in the same way as the attach-
ments are operated. The hydraulic circuit for
the "5th hydraulic function" is actuated using
the shift key "F" (1). The Joystick 4Plus (3)
or the horizontal rocker button (2) can be as-
signed the 5th function. Observe the relevant
pictogram for the 5th function.
6219_003-249
– Press and hold shift key "F" (1).
– Push the Joystick 4Plus (3) once in the di-
rection of the arrow until the end position is
reached.
Push the horizontal rocker button (2) once in
the direction of the arrow.
The hydraulic circuit of the 5th hydraulic func-
tion is depressurised. The plug connectors on
the lift mast are depressurised.
– Release shift key "F" (1).

Completing the depressurisation

– To complete the depressurisation, observe
the section entitled "Exiting the wizard".

Special feature for clamping at-

tachments
If a clamping attachment is fitted, please ob-
serve the following:
● Depressurising the hydraulic circuit for

clamping attachments is performed in the

same way as opening and closing the
clamp.
● Loosen the clamp locking mechanism; see

the relevant sections related to the clamp

locking mechanism.

348 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Depressurising the hydraulic system

● Push the operating device once in the

"Open" direction.
● Push the operating device once in the
"Close" direction.
– Observe the section entitled "Clamp locking
mechanism (variant)" in the chapter entitled
"Attachments".

Exiting the wizard

– After the hydraulics have been depressur-
ised, press the softkey to confirm.
The wizard for depressurising the hydraulics is
switched off. The truck is ready for operation.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 349

4 Operation
Attachments

Attachments
Fitting attachments
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
No work must be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas!
– Only assemble attachments outside
potentially explosive areas.

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working within potentially explosive
areas with attachments that do not com-
ply with explosion-protection regulations
can lead to explosions in the surround-
ing atmosphere!
– Only operate attachments that com-
ply with the explosion-protection regu-
lations.
– Check the area of application by com-
paring with the information on the
nameplate of the attachments.
– If the area of use is not clear, ask the
safety officer.

If the truck is equipped with an integrated at-

tachment (variant) at the factory, the specifica-
tions in the STILL operating instructions for
integrated attachments must be observed.
If attachments are fitted at the place of use,
the specifications in the operating instructions
from the attachment manufacturer must be ob-
served.
If an attachment is not delivered together with
the truck, the specifications from the manufac-
turer and the operating instructions from the
attachment manufacturer must be observed.
Before initial commissioning, the function of
the attachment and the visibility from the driv-
er's position with and without a load must be
checked by a competent person. If the visibili-
ty is deemed insufficient, visual aids must be
used, such as mirrors, a camera, a monitor
system etc.

350 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

– Observe the following warning notices.

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from falling load!
If attachments that hold the load by clamping it or
exerting pressure on it do not have a second method
of operating the function (lock), the load can work
loose and fall off.
– Ensure that the second method of operating the
function (lock) is available.
– When retrofitting such attachments, a second
method of operating the function (lock) must also
be retrofitted.

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from falling load!
When installing a clamp with an integrated sideshift
function, ensure that the clamp does not open when
the sideshift is actuated.
– Notify your authorised service centre before instal-
lation.
– Never grab or climb on moving parts of the truck.

WARNING
Risk of accident due to incorrect labelling!
The use of attachments can cause accidents if the
labelling is incorrect or missing.
If the truck is not fitted with an attachment-specific
residual load capacity rating plate, and the operating
devices are not marked with the relevant pictograms,
the truck must not be used.
– Use only CE-certified attachments that include op-
erating instructions and the required labels.
– Arrange for an attachment-specific residual load
capacity rating plate to be fitted to the truck.
– Arrange for the operating devices to be re-label-
led.
– Arrange for the authorised service centre to adjust
the hydraulic system to the requirements of the
attachment (e.g. adjust the pump motor speed).

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 351

4 Operation
Attachments

WARNING
Risk of accident if steering is stopped!
Some hydraulic oil may be lost each time attach-
ments are changed.
If attachments are changed frequently, the hydraulic
oil level may be too low.
When the lift mast is extended, this low hydraulic oil
level can cause the steering to cut out.
– If attachments are changed frequently, check the
hydraulic oil level regularly and if necessary fill up
with hydraulic oil.

NOTE
If the required labelling is not provided with
the attachment, contact the authorised service
centre promptly.

Alternating operation using an electrical

switch valve
If non-integrated attachments for alternating
operation are used in conjunction with an elec-
trical switch valve for the 5th and 6th hydraulic
function, the electrical switch valve must oper-
ate at 12 V.
– Contact the authorised service centre if re-
quired.

Plug connectors on the lift mast 

– Before assembling the attachment, release
the pressure from the hydraulic system.

CAUTION
Risk of damage to components!
Open connections on the plug connectors (1) can
become dirty. Dirt can enter the hydraulic system.
The plug connectors can become stiff.
– Once the attachment has been disassembled,
seal the plug connectors using the protective
caps.

Mounting attachments
1 6219_003-056
Only competent persons are permitted to
mount and connect the energy supply to the
attachment.

352 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

– Observe the information provided by the

manufacturer and supplier of the attach-
ment when doing so.
– After each installation, the function of the
attachment must be tested prior to initial
commissioning.

NOTE
Please observe the definition of the following
responsible person: "competent person".

Load capacity with attachment

The permissible load capacity of the attach-
ment and the allowable load (load capacity
and load moment) of the truck must not be ex-
ceeded by the combination of attachment and
payload. Comply with the specifications of the
manufacturer and supplier of the attachment.
– Observe the residual load capacity rating
plate, see the chapter entitled "Picking up a
load using attachments".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 353

4 Operation
Attachments

General instructions for control-

ling attachments
Attachments can be controlled via the first four
hydraulic functions but also as a variant via
the 5th or 6th function. The 5th or 6th function
is activated via a button on the operating de-
vice and by moving the operating device or
additional push buttons.
The way in which attachments (variant) are
controlled depends on the operating devices
included in the truck's equipment.
Possible equipment variants include:
● Multi-lever

● Multi-lever with a 5th or 6th function (var-

iant)
● Double mini-lever

● Double mini-lever with a 5th function (var-

iant)
● Triple mini-lever

● Triple mini-lever with a 5th function (variant)

● Quadruple mini-lever

● Quadruple mini-lever with a 5th function

(variant)
● Fingertip

● Fingertip with a 5th function (variant)

● Joystick 4Plus

● Joystick 4Plus with a 5th function (variant)

– To control attachments, see the sections re-

lating to the respective operating devices in
this chapter.

WARNING
Use of attachments can give rise to additional haz-
ards such as a change in the centre of gravity, addi-
tional danger areas etc.
Attachments must only be deployed for their inten-
ded use as described in the relevant operating in-
structions. Drivers must be taught how to operate the
attachments.
Loads may only be picked up and transported with
attachments if the loads are securely grasped and at-
tached. If necessary, the loads must also be secured
against slipping, rolling away, falling over, swinging
and tipping over. Note that any change to the loca-
tion of the load centre of gravity will affect the stabili-
ty of the truck.
– Observe the capacity rating plate for the attach-
ments being used.

354 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

NOTE
If several hydraulic functions are used at the
same time, these functions can influence each
other. For example, if the fork carriage is
raised and an attachment is operated at the
same time, this may change the lifting speed
or the operating speed of the attachment.

NOTE
Further variants and functions are available in
addition to the functions described below. The
directions of movement can be seen in the
pictograms on the operating devices. All the
attachments described fall into the category
of equipment variants. An exact description of
the respective movements or actions of the
attachment fitted can be found in the relevant
operating instructions.
With fleet manager access authorisation (var-
iant), the fleet manager can adjust the speed
of the auxiliary hydraulics for attachments.
– See also the section entitled "Adjusting the
hydraulic speed for attachments" in this
chapter.

Attachment example for the

connection of the auxiliary hy-
draulics
NOTE
The authorised service centre will tell you
which attachments can be used with this truck.
The connection of attachments to the auxiliary
hydraulics is performed as per the diagram, as
highlighted in the operating instructions for the
attachment.
– Observe the "Information on the auxiliary
hydraulics" in the "Technical data" chapter.
In the menu for the available hydraulic axles
for attachments, the designation Hydraul-
ic axle specifies the connection of the cor-
responding auxiliary hydraulics. See also the
section entitled "Adjusting the hydraulic speed
for attachments" in this chapter.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 355

4 Operation
Attachments

Attachment example for an attachment for ad- 

justment of the fork arms 1 2
1 Auxiliary hydraulics 1
2 Auxiliary hydraulics 2
3 Electrical connection for switch valve 1
(two switch valves are possible) 3
If an attachment is connected to the auxiliary
hydraulics 1 (1) and this attachment requires
another function, this is referred to as the
function of the auxiliary hydraulics 3.
There is an electrical connection (3) for the
switch valve that is required for this purpose.
The same applies to the auxiliary hydraulics 4,
which is fed from the auxiliary hydraulics 2 (2)
and is implemented by an additional connec-
tion for a switch valve that is not shown here.

NOTE
If one switch valve is used, the auxiliary hy-
draulic functions 1 & 3 and 2 & 4 that are sup-
plied by this switch valve cannot be operated
simultaneously. The switch valve supplies ei-
ther auxiliary hydraulics 1 & 3 or 2 & 4.

Adjusting the hydraulic speed for

attachments
If different attachments are mounted, the fleet
manager can adjust the hydraulic speed for
attachments and thus the flow rate of hydraul-
ic oil. Obtain the necessary values from the
operating instructions for the attachment. The
authorised service centre will help to make the
correct adjustments.
– Observe the "Information on the auxiliary
hydraulics" in the "Technical data" chapter.
The "Information on the auxiliary hydraulics"
differs depending on the truck. Take this into
consideration when selecting the attachment.

356 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

NOTE
The adjustment procedure requires access
authorisation for the fleet manager. Access
to the settings menu is only available if the
truck is at a standstill and the parking brake
is applied. If the parking brake is released pre-
maturely, the settings menu will close.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the Auxiliary hy-
draulics softkey.
This menu lists all the available hydraulic 
axles for attachments.
– Refer to the operating instructions of the at-
tachment to determine which hydraulic axle Hydraulic axle 1
is occupied by the attachment.
The authorised service centre will help you Hydraulic axle 2
determine the axles.
Hydraulic axle 3
Setting the revolution speed
Hydraulic axle 4
– Push the softkey for the hydraulic axle to be
configured.
Hydraulic axle 5
Fleet manager

6219_003-283_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 357

4 Operation
Attachments

This menu indicates the supply flow. 

The return flow is shown in a lighter colour.
● The currently set speed of the hydraulic
pump is given in rpm Auxiliary hydraulics 2
● The currently set supply flow rate is given in
L/min. Forwards 3 300 1/min

46,2 L/min
NOTE
The supply flow rate depends on the speed.
Backwards 3 300 1/min
The return flow automatically adjusts to the set
supply flow. When the orange activation bar 46,2 L/min
next to the softkey lights up, synchronisa- Fleet manager

tion takes place automatically. The return flow

is shown only dimly on the display. 6219_003-284_V2_en

To adjust the revolution speed, press the

or softkey.
– To save the setting, press the softkey.
The settings are saved.
– To cancel the setting, press the softkey.
The settings return to the most recently set
value.

Locking the flow rate

You can also lock the hydraulic oil flow rate in
full.
– To do so, press the softkey.
The hydraulic oil flow for this hydraulic axle is
locked.

Setting the return flow rate separately

Depending on the attachment, the return flow
rate may need to be set separately.
– To do so, press the softkey.

358 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

The return flow is displayed in addition to the 

supply flow at full brightness.
To adjust the revolution speed, press the
or softkey. Auxiliary hydraulics 2
– To save the setting, press the softkey.
Forwards 3 900 1/min
The settings are saved.
54,6 L/min
– To cancel the setting, press the softkey.
The settings return to the most recently set
value. Backwards 3 300 1/min

46,2 L/min

Fleet manager

6219_003-284_en

Clamp locking mechanism (var-

iant)
This truck can be fitted with a clamp lock-
ing mechanism for clamping attachments. The
clamp locking mechanism prevents the clamp
from opening unintentionally if the operating
function is inadvertently triggered.

DANGER
If the correct function of the clamp locking mecha-
nism is not guaranteed, there is a risk to life from a
falling load!
If other attachments in addition to the clamp are used
on this truck, the clamp locking mechanism must be
reassigned to the corresponding operating device ev-
ery time the clamp is reassembled.
– Make sure that the authorised service centre reas-
signs the function of the clamp locking mechanism
to the corresponding operating device.
– Make sure that the additional clamp locking mech-
anism function is available.
– Observe the section entitled "Fitting attachments".

NOTE
For technical reasons, clamping attachments
must not be controlled via the "5th function".
The sections entitled "Controlling attachments
using ..." describe how the clamp locking
mechanism is operated.
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 359
4 Operation
Attachments

– See the section concerning the relevant op-

erating device.

360 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Controlling attachments using 

multi-lever operation 1 2 3 4
In this version, the attachments (variant) are
controlled using the operating levers (1, 3).
The pictograms for the hydraulic func-
tions (2, 4) are affixed to the operating levers.
– Observe the pictograms (2) or (4).
The pictograms are arranged according to the
directions of movement of the operating lev-
er (1) or (3).
The following applies:
– Move the operating lever forwards.
The attachment moves in the direction of
movement shown in the upper part of the pic-
togram.
– Move the operating lever backwards.
The attachment moves in the direction of
movement shown in the lower part of the pic-
togram.
– Note the following attachment functions and
pictograms.

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Move the side shift frame or fork for-
wards
Move the side shift frame or fork
backwards
Move the sideshift to the left
Move sideshift to the right
Adjust fork arms: open
Adjust fork arms: close
Push off the load
Pull in the load
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right
Tip shovel over
Tip shovel back
Swivel the fork to the left
Swivel the fork to the right

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 361

4 Operation
Attachments

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary.

Clamp locking mechanism

NOTE
For technical reasons, no clamp locking mech-
anism is available for the multi-lever operating
device.

362 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Controlling attachments using 

multi-lever operation and the 5th
and 6th function
The function keys for the "5th and 6th func-
tion" (1, 2) and the operating levers (3, 4) 2
are used to control the "5th function" or the
"6th function". 1
4 3
The central and bottom parts of the picto-
grams on each operating lever show the func-
tion that is activated by that lever. The top
part of the pictogram shows that the attach-
ment is equipped with the "5th function" or the
"6th function".
The following applies:
– Move the operating lever (3, 4) forwards.
The attachment moves in the direction of
movement shown in the central part of the
pictogram. 6219_003-118_V3

– Move the operating lever (3, 4) backwards.

The attachment moves in the direction of
movement shown in the lower part of the pic-
togram.
– Press and hold the switch (1).
The additional function of the attachment
is activated and can be controlled as the
"5th function" with the operating lever (4).

NOTE
The movement/action of the "5th function" can
be found in the operating instructions of the
attachment that is fitted.
– Press and hold the switch (2).
The additional function of the attachment
is activated and can be controlled as the
"5th function" or "6th function" with the operat-
ing lever (3).

NOTE
The movement/action of the "5th function" or
"6th function" can be found in the operating
instructions of the attachment that is fitted.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 363

4 Operation
Attachments

– Note the following attachment functions and

pictograms.

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Move the side shift frame or fork for-
wards
Move the side shift frame or fork
backwards
Move the sideshift to the left
Move sideshift to the right
Adjust fork arms: open
Adjust fork arms: close
Push off the load
Pull in the load
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right
Tip shovel over
Tip shovel back
Swivel the fork to the left
Swivel the fork to the right

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary. If the
attachment is known, the relevant symbol is
stuck on the panelling in front of the corre-
sponding operating lever.

364 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Controlling attachments using a 

double mini-lever
In this version, the attachments (variant) are
controlled using the "attachments" cross lev-
er (1). The adhesive label bearing the picto-
grams for the hydraulic functions (2) is affixed
at the designated point.
– If the adhesive label becomes illegible or
is missing, please contact your authorised
service centre.
– Observe the pictograms for the attachment
functions on the adhesive label (2).
The pictograms on the "attachments" cross 2
lever (1) show the respective functions that 6219_003-047_V2

are activated by this lever.

The pictograms are arranged according to
the direction of movement of the "attach-
ments" cross lever (1).
The following applies:
– Move the "attachments" cross lever(1) in
the direction of arrow (A), (B), (C) or (D).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (A), (B), (C) or (D) as shown in the
pictogram.

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Move the side shift frame or fork for-
wards
Move the side shift frame or fork
backwards
Move the sideshift to the left
Move sideshift to the right
Adjust fork arms: open
Adjust fork arms: close
Release load retainer
Clamp load retainer
Open clamps
Close clamps
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right
Tip shovel over
Tip shovel back

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 365

4 Operation
Attachments

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary.

Clamp locking mechanism 

– To release the clamp locking mechanism,
push the operating lever (2) forwards.
The clamp locking mechanism is released.
The LED for the "clamp release" (1) lights up
and remains lit while the clamp locking mech-
anism is released.

NOTE
The hydraulic function for opening the clamp
is available for one second after the clamp
locking mechanism is released. After one sec-
ond, the clamp locking mechanism is automat-
ically reactivated.
– To open the clamp, push the operating lev-
er (2) forwards again.
It is not necessary to release the clamp lock-
ing mechanism in order to close the clamp.
– To close the clamp, pull the operating lev-
er (2) backwards.

366 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Controlling attachments using 

the double mini-lever and the
5th function

NOTE
For technical reasons, clamping attachments
must not be controlled via the "5th function".
The function key for the "5th function" (3) and
the cross lever (1) are used to control the
"5th function".
The adhesive label bearing the pictograms for
the hydraulic functions (2) is affixed at the
designated point.
– If the adhesive label becomes illegible or
is missing, please contact your authorised
service centre.
– Observe the pictograms for the attachment
functions on the adhesive label (2).
The pictograms on the "attachments" cross
lever show the respective functions that are
activated by this lever.
The following applies:
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (3).
The LED for the "5th function" lights up.
– Move the "attachments" cross lever (1) in
the direction of the arrow (A), (B), (C) or
(D).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (A), (B), (C) or (D) as shown in the
pictogram.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 367

4 Operation
Attachments

Example using the pictograms for configura- 

tion (1):
If the "attachments" cross lever (1) is moved
in the direction of the arrow (A), the fork is
extended.
If the function key for the "5th function" (3) is
actuated and the "attachments" cross lever (1)
is moved in the direction of the arrow (A), the
fork arms open.

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Auxiliary hydraulics "5th function"
Move the side shift frame or fork for-
wards
Move the side shift frame or fork
backwards
Move the sideshift to the left
Move sideshift to the right
Adjust fork arms: open
Adjust fork arms: close
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary.

368 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Controlling attachments using a 

triple mini-lever
In this version, the attachments (variant) are
controlled using the operating levers (1, 2).
The adhesive label bearing the pictograms for
the hydraulic functions (3) for the operating
lever (2) and the adhesive label (4) for the op-
erating lever (1) are affixed at the designated
points.
– If the adhesive labels become illegible or
are missing, please contact your authorised
service centre.
– Observe the pictograms for the attachment
functions on the adhesive labels (3, 4).
The pictograms on the operating levers show
the respective functions that are activated by
these levers.
The following applies:
– Move the operating lever (1) in the direction
of the arrow (A) or (B).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (A) or (B) as shown in the pictogram.
– Move the operating lever (2) in the direction
of the arrow (C) or (D).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (C) or (D) as shown in the pictogram.

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Move the side shift frame or fork for-
wards
Move the side shift frame or fork
backwards
Move the sideshift to the left
Move sideshift to the right
Adjust fork arms: open
Adjust fork arms: close
Release load retainer
Clamp load retainer
Open clamps
Close clamps
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 369

4 Operation
Attachments

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Tip shovel over
Tip shovel back

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary.

Clamp locking mechanism 

– To release the clamp locking mechanism,
push the operating lever (2) forwards.
The clamp locking mechanism is released.
The LED for the "clamp release" (1) lights up
and remains lit while the clamp locking mech-
anism is released.

NOTE
The hydraulic function for opening the clamp
is available for one second after the clamp
locking mechanism is released. After one sec-
ond, the clamp locking mechanism is automat-
ically reactivated.
– To open the clamp, push the operating lev-
er (2) forwards again.
It is not necessary to release the clamp lock-
ing mechanism in order to close the clamp.
– To close the clamp, pull the operating lev-
er (2) backwards.

370 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Controlling attachments using 

the triple mini-lever and the
5th function

NOTE
For technical reasons, clamping attachments
must not be controlled via the "5th function".
The function key for the "5th function" (2) and
the operating lever (1) are used to control the
"5th function".
The adhesive label bearing the pictograms for
the hydraulic functions (3) is affixed at the
designated point. 6219_003-050_V3

– If the adhesive label becomes illegible or

is missing, please contact your authorised
service centre.
– Observe the pictograms for the attachment
functions on the adhesive label (3).
The pictograms on the operating lever show
the respective functions that are activated by
this lever.
The following applies:
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (2).
The LED for the "5th function" lights up.
– Move the operating lever (1) in the direc-
tion (E) or (F).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (E) or (F) as shown in the pictogram.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 371

4 Operation
Attachments

Example using the pictograms for configura- 

tion (1):
If the operating lever (1) is moved in the direc-
tion of the arrow (E), the sideshift moves to
the left.
If the function key for the "5th function" (2) is
actuated and the operating lever (1) is moved
in the direction of the arrow (E), the fork arms
open.

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Auxiliary hydraulics "5th function"
Move the sideshift to the left
Move sideshift to the right
Adjust fork arms: open
Adjust fork arms: close
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary.

372 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Controlling attachments using a 

quadruple mini-lever
In this version, the attachments (variant) are
controlled using the operating levers (1, 2).
The adhesive label bearing the pictograms for
the hydraulic functions (3) for the operating
lever (2) and the adhesive label (4) for the op-
erating lever (1) are affixed at the designated
points.
– If the adhesive labels become illegible or
are missing, please contact your authorised
service centre.
– Observe the pictograms for the attachment
functions on the adhesive labels (3, 4).
The pictograms on the operating levers show
the respective functions that are activated by
these levers.
The following applies:
– Move the operating lever (1) in the direction
of the arrow (A) or (B).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (A) or (B) as shown in the pictogram.
– Move the operating lever (2) in the direction
of the arrow (C) or (D).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (C) or (D) as shown in the pictogram.

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Move the side shift frame or fork for-
wards
Move the side shift frame or fork
backwards
Move the sideshift to the left
Move sideshift to the right
Adjust fork arms: open
Adjust fork arms: close
Release load retainer
Clamp load retainer
Open clamps
Close clamps
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 373

4 Operation
Attachments

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Tip shovel over
Tip shovel back

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary.

Clamp locking mechanism 

– To release the clamp locking mechanism,
push the operating lever (2) forwards.
The clamp locking mechanism is released.
The LED for the "clamp release" (1) lights up
and remains lit while the clamp locking mech-
anism is released.

NOTE
The hydraulic function for opening the clamp
is available for one second after the clamp
locking mechanism is released. After one sec-
ond, the clamp locking mechanism is automat-
ically reactivated.
– To open the clamp, push the operating lev-
er (2) forwards again.
It is not necessary to release the clamp lock-
ing mechanism in order to close the clamp.
– To close the clamp, pull the operating lev-
er (2) backwards.

374 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Controlling attachments using 

the quadruple mini-lever and the
5th function

NOTE
For technical reasons, clamping attachments
must not be controlled via the "5th function".
The function key for the "5th function" (2) and
the operating lever (1) are used to control the
"5th function".
The adhesive label bearing the pictograms for
the hydraulic functions (3) is affixed at the
designated point. 6219_003-052_V3

– If the adhesive label becomes illegible or

is missing, please contact your authorised
service centre.
– Observe the pictograms for the attachment
functions on the adhesive label (3).
This essentially involves the following:
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (2).
The LED for the "5th function" lights up.
– Move the operating lever (1) in the direc-
tion (E) or (F).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (E) or (F) as shown in the pictogram.
Example using the pictograms for configura- 
tion (1):
If the operating lever (1) is moved in the direc-
tion of the arrow (E), the sideshift moves to
the left.
If the function key for the "5th function" (2) is
actuated and the operating lever (1) is moved
in the direction of the arrow (E), the fork arms
open.

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Auxiliary hydraulics "5th function"
Move the sideshift to the left
Move sideshift to the right
Adjust fork arms: open

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 375

4 Operation
Attachments

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Adjust fork arms: close
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary.

Controlling attachments using  1 2

the Fingertip
In this version, the attachments (variant) are A
controlled using the operating levers (1) and
(2). The adhesive label bearing the pictograms C
for the hydraulic functions (3) for the operating
lever (2) and the adhesive label (4) for the op- 3
erating lever (1) are affixed at the designated
points.
– If the adhesive labels become illegible or B
4
are missing, please contact your authorised
service centre. D
– Observe the pictograms for the attachment
functions on the adhesive labels (3, 4).
The pictograms on the operating levers show
the respective functions that are activated by
these levers.
The following applies:
– Move the operating lever (1) in the direction
of the arrow (A) or (B).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (A) or (B) as shown in the pictogram.
– Move the operating lever (2) in the direction
of the arrow (C) or (D).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (C) or (D) as shown in the pictogram.

376 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Move the side shift frame or fork for-
wards
Move the side shift frame or fork
backwards
Move the sideshift to the left
Move sideshift to the right
Adjust fork arms: open
Adjust fork arms: close
Release load retainer
Clamp load retainer
Open clamps
Close clamps
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right
Tip shovel over
Tip shovel back

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary.

Clamp locking mechanism  1

– To release the clamp locking mechanism,
push the operating lever (2) forwards.
The clamp locking mechanism is released.
The LED for the "clamp release" (1) lights up
and remains lit while the clamp locking mech-
anism is released. 2

NOTE
The hydraulic function for opening the clamp
is available for one second after the clamp
locking mechanism is released. After one sec-
ond, the clamp locking mechanism is automat-
ically reactivated.
6219_003-207

– To open the clamp, push the operating lev-

er (2) forwards again.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 377

4 Operation
Attachments

It is not necessary to release the clamp lock-

ing mechanism in order to close the clamp.
– To close the clamp, pull the operating lev-
er (2) backwards.

Controlling attachments using  1 2 3 4

the Fingertip and the 5th func-
tion
E
5
NOTE
E
For technical reasons, clamping attachments
must not be controlled via the 5th function. 6
The function key for the "5th function" (2) and
the operating levers (1, 6) are used to control F
the "5th function".
The pictograms (1, 5) behind the operating F
levers show the functions that are activated
by the respective levers. 6219_003-204_V2

– If the adhesive labels become illegible or

are missing, please contact your authorised
service centre.
The following applies:
– Actuate the function key for the "5th func-
tion" (2).
The LED for the "5th function" (3) lights up.
– Move the operating lever (4) or (6) in the
direction of the arrow (E) or (F).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (E) or (F) as shown in the pictogram.

NOTE
The place where the adhesive label bearing
the pictograms (1) or (5) is affixed shows
which operating lever is intended to operate
the "5th function". The pictograms show the
functions that are activated by switching with
the function key (2).

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Auxiliary hydraulics "5th function"
Move the sideshift to the left

378 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Move sideshift to the right
Adjust fork arms: open
Adjust fork arms: close
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 379

4 Operation
Attachments

Controlling attachments using 

the Joystick 4Plus
In this version, the attachments (variant) are
controlled via the Joystick 4Plus (1) and the 1
slider (4). The adhesive label bearing the pic- B
tograms for the hydraulic functions (2) for the
Joystick 4Plus (1) and the adhesive label (3) D
for the slider (4) are affixed at the designated
A C 2
points.
4
– If the adhesive labels become illegible or
are not present, please contact your author- 3
ised service centre.
– Observe the pictograms for the attachment
functions on the adhesive labels (2, 3). 6219_003-206

The pictograms on the adhesive labels re-

garding operation of the Joystick 4Plus show
the respective functions that are activated by
the individual operating devices of the Joy-
stick 4Plus.
The following applies:
– Move the Joystick 4Plus (1) in the direction
of the arrow (A) or (B).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (A) or (B) as shown in the pictogram.
– Move the slider (4) in the direction of the
arrow (C) or (D).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (C) or (D) as shown in the pictogram.

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Move side shift frame or fork forwards
Move side shift frame or fork back-
ward
Move side shift to the left
Move side shift to the right
Adjust fork arms: open
Adjust fork arms: close
Release load retainer
Clamp load retainer
Open clamps
Close clamps
Rotate to the left

380 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Picto-
Attachment function
gram
Rotate to the right
Tip shovel over
Tip shovel back

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary.

Clamp locking mechanism 

– To release the clamp locking mechanism,
push the slider (1) to the left.
The clamp locking mechanism is released. 1
The LED for the "clamp release" (2) lights up
and remains lit while the clamp locking mech-
anism is released.
– To open the clamp, push the slider (1) to + F

the left again.

2
NOTE
The hydraulic function for opening the clamp
is available for one second after the clamp
locking mechanism is released. After one sec-
ond, the clamp locking mechanism is automat-
ically reactivated.
It is not necessary to release the clamp lock-
ing mechanism in order to close the clamp.
– To close the clamp, push the slider (1) to
the right again.

Special instructions if the truck is equip-

ped with the swivelling display-operat-
ing unit (variant)
If the display-operating unit is set in posi-
tion, the Joystick 4Plus can be accidentally
touched.
In order to prevent unwanted movements of
the lift mast, the Joystick 4Plus must be re-

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 381

4 Operation
Attachments

leased before each actuation of the hydraulic

functions.
– To release the Joystick 4Plus, press and
release the shift key "F" once.

CAUTION
Compliance will be lost if this safety system is over-
ridden.
If this safety system is overridden, the safe operation
of the truck is no longer ensured. The declaration of
conformity becomes invalid. In this case, the truck
may no longer be operated.
– Make sure that no one overrides this safety sys-
tem.
– Check that this safety system is working before
daily use.

382 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Controlling attachments using 

the Joystick 4Plus and the
5th function 4 1
G
NOTE H F
2
For technical reasons, clamping attachments
must not be controlled via the 5th function.
E
Use shift key "F" (4) and the Joystick 4Plus (2)
and the horizontal rocker button (1) to control
the "5th function".
3
The adhesive label bearing the pictograms
for the hydraulic functions (3) for the Joy-
stick 4Plus (2) and for the horizontal rocker 6219_003-166_V2
button (1) is affixed at the designated point.
– If the adhesive label becomes illegible or is
not present, please contact your authorised
service centre.
The pictograms on the adhesive label regard-
ing operation of the Joystick 4Plus show
the respective functions that are activated by
the individual operating devices of the Joy-
stick 4Plus.

– Note the following attachment functions and 

pictograms.

Function of the at-

Operating device
tachment
Shift key "F" and Adjust fork arms:
1
Joystick 4Plus close/open
Shift key "F" and
Adjust fork: back-
2 horizontal rocker
wards/forwards
button
Shift key "F" and
Swivel lift mast or
3 horizontal rocker
fork: left/right
button
Shift key "F" and
Additional fork car-
4 horizontal rocker
riage: lift/lower
button

The following applies:

– Press and hold shift key "F" (4).
– Move the Joystick 4Plus (2) in the direc-
tion (E) or (F).

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 383

4 Operation
Attachments

The attachment moves accordingly in the di-

rections (E) or (F) as shown in the pictogram.
– Push the horizontal rocker button (1) in the
direction (G) or (H).
The attachment moves accordingly in the di-
rections (G) or (H) as shown in the pictogram.
– Release shift key "F" (4).

NOTE
The pictograms are affixed according to the
attachment fitted at the factory. If an attach-
ment with different functions is fitted, the au-
thorised service centre must check that the
pictograms bear the correct representation
and must change them if necessary.

Special instructions if the truck is equip-

ped with the swivelling display-operat-
ing unit (variant)
If the display-operating unit is set in posi-
tion, the Joystick 4Plus can be accidentally
touched.
In order to prevent unwanted movements of
the lift mast, the Joystick 4Plus must be re-
leased before each actuation of the hydraulic
functions.
– To release the Joystick 4Plus, press and
release the shift key "F" once.

CAUTION
Compliance will be lost if this safety system is over-
ridden.
If this safety system is overridden, the safe operation
of the truck is no longer ensured. The declaration of
conformity becomes invalid. In this case, the truck
may no longer be operated.
– Make sure that no one overrides this safety sys-
tem.
– Check that this safety system is working before
daily use.

384 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Attachments

Picking up a load using attach- 

ments

WARNING
Risk of accident!
Attachments must only be deployed for their inten-
ded use as described in the relevant operating in-
structions.
Drivers must be taught how to operate the attach-
ments.

WARNING
Risk of accident!
Loads may only be picked up and transported with
attachments if the loads are securely grasped and
attached. Where necessary, loads must also be se-
cured against slipping, rolling, falling over, swinging
or tipping over. Note that any change to the position
of the load centre of gravity will affect the stability of
the truck.
Check the capacity rating plates for the attachments
or combination of attachments.

– The rating plates show the permissible val-

ues for:
1 Load capacity Q (kg)
2 Load distance C (mm)
3 Lift height h (mm)
4 Permissible sideshift s (mm)

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 385

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

Auxiliary equipment
General note
Depending on which zone the truck has been
modified for, the number of pieces and the
appearance of auxiliary equipment will vary.

FleetManager (variant)
FleetManager is an equipment variant and can
be fitted to the truck in different versions. The
description and operation information can be
found in the separate operating instructions for
the corresponding FleetManager versions.

Shock recognition (variant)

The shock recognition is an equipment var-
iant of the FleetManager (variant) in which an
acceleration sensor is installed in the truck.
The acceleration sensor records data arising
from rapid accelerations or decelerations of
the truck, e.g. in the event of an accident. This
data can be electronically read out and evalu-
ated.
– If you have any questions, please contact
your authorised service centre.

Driver restraint systems (var-

iants)
Different driver restraint systems are available
as variants for this truck. The description and
operation for these systems can be found in
the separate "Driver restraint systems" operat-
ing instructions.

386 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Auxiliary equipment

Actuating the windscreen wipers

and windscreen washers (var-
iant)
NOTE
The procedure for actuating the wind-
screen washers (variant) described in this sec-
tion applies to the category-3 version. On
category-2 trucks, there is a special feature
when operating the windscreen washer. See
the section "Actuating the windscreen washer
(variant) in the category-2 version". The op-
eration of the windscreen wipers remains un-
changed. There is no windscreen washer for
the rear window and roof panel in the catego-
ry-2 version.
Pressing the softkey switches between the op-
erating stages in the sequence shown below.
Press softkey Operating stage
Off
First time On
Second time Intermittent
Third time Off
Hold (possible in all
Washer
operating stages)

Front windscreen wiper and washer 

– To activate the "On" operating stage, press
the softkey (1).
The "On" operating stage is activated. The
symbol (3) appears.
– To activate the "Intermittent mode" operat-
ing stage, press the softkey again.
The symbol (2) is shown with an orange back-
ground.
– To activate the "Washer" operating stage,
press and hold the softkey.
The "Washer" operating stage is activated.
The symbol (4) is displayed for as long as the 6219_003-069_V2
softkey is pressed.
– Once the window is clean, release the soft-
key.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 387

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

The previous operating stage is reactivated.

– To switch this operating stage off, press the
softkey repeatedly until the symbol (1) ap-
pears again on the display. The activation
bar next to the symbol goes out.

Rear window wiper and washer 

– To activate the "On" operating stage, press
the corresponding softkey (5).
The "On" operating stage is activated. The
symbol (7) appears.
– To activate the "Intermittent mode" operat-
ing stage, press the softkey again.
The symbol (6) is shown with an orange back-
ground.
– To activate the "Washer" operating stage,
press and hold the softkey.
The "Washer" operating stage is activated.
The symbol (8) is displayed for as long as the
softkey is pressed.
6219_003-070_V2

– Once the window is clean, release the soft-

key.
The previous operating stage is reactivated.
– To switch this operating stage off, press the
softkey repeatedly until the symbol (1) ap-
pears again on the display.

Roof panel wiper and washer 

9 10
– To activate the "On" operating stage, press
the corresponding softkey (9).
The "On" operating stage is activated. The
symbol (11) appears.
– To activate the "Intermittent mode" operat-
ing stage, press the softkey again.
The symbol (10) is shown with an orange 11 12
background.
– To activate the "Washer" operating stage,
press and hold the softkey.
The "Washer" operating stage is activated.
The symbol (12) is displayed for as long as
6219_003-117_V3

the softkey is pressed.

388 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Auxiliary equipment

– Once the window is clean, release the soft-

key.
The previous operating stage is reactivated.
– To switch off the operating stage, press the
softkey again.

Actuating the windscreen wash-  6337_901-001

er (variant) in the category-2 ver-

sion
In category 2-version trucks, the front wind-
screen washer cannot be switched on via
the display-operating unit. For explosion-pro-
tection purposes, the washer can only be acti-
vated via a pump button (1).
– Push the pump button (1) several times un-
til enough washer fluid comes out.
1

NOTE
The shape and mounting position of the pump
button may vary.

Filling the washer system  1

– Open the filler cap (1) of the washer sys-
tem.
– Fill the washer reservoir (2) with washer flu-
id as described in the "Maintenance data
table".

CAUTION
Damage due to the effects of frost!
When water freezes, it expands. If the washer sys-
tem is not filled with fluid that is suitable for use in
winter, ice can form in the washer system and cause
damage.
– If there is a risk of frost, use fluid that is suitable
for winter use.
2

– Close the filler cap.

– Operate the screen washer system until
washer fluid is discharged from the spray
nozzles.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 389

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

Operating the rear window heat-

ing
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Operating the rear window heating sys-
tem within potentially explosive areas
classified as zones 1 and 21 can lead
to explosions in the surrounding atmos-
phere.
Rear window heating is only permissible
and connected for category-3 versions
(for zones 2 and 22).
– Do not make any changes to the
truck!

– To switch on the rear window heating, push 

the associated softkey on the display-oper-
ating unit.
The rear window heating is switched on.
– To switch off the rear window heating, push
the softkey again.
The rear window heating is switched off.

NOTE
The rear window heating will switch off auto-
matically after approx. 10 minutes.

390 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Auxiliary equipment

Ceiling sensor (variant)

Description
The ceiling sensor (1) on the overhead guard 
is an assistance system that automatically re- 1
duces the driving speed of the truck within
halls. However, this assistance system does
not release the driver from the responsibility of
observing the speed limits on company prem-
ises.
Depending on the system setting, the ceiling
sensor can detect overhead structures above
the truck at a height of 2 m to 24 m above the
sensor.
If the truck is equipped with a ceiling sensor,
this assistance system is listed in the "Assis-
tance systems" menu in the display-operating
unit.
Deckensensor_Anbau

Operating the ceiling sensor system

The drivers must be instructed on the use
of the ceiling sensor system by the operating
company.
When the driver enters a hall for the first time
after starting work, they must be certain that
the ceiling sensor system is working correctly.
Despite the ceiling sensor system being instal-
led, the driver must also check the speed indi-
cator on the display-operating unit on a regu-
lar basis to ensure that they do not exceed
the maximum speed permitted for the environ-
ment.
● Entering a hall
The ceiling sensor system automatically de-
tects when the truck enters a hall. The sys-
tem then automatically slows the truck to
the maximum speed that is set for the hall.
The "Speed restriction" symbol appears
in the display.
● Leaving a hall
If the truck leaves the hall again, the ceiling
sensor system enables the maximum speed
set for areas outside the hall. Due to the
range of the sensor, this may not happen
until the truck is a few metres away from
the hall exit. Before the truck is able to ac-
celerate to the maximum speed permitted
for outdoor areas, the speed limitation must
still be unlocked. To do this, release the

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 391

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

accelerator briefly and then operate the ac-

celerator again.
● Switching on the truck in a hall
If the truck is switched on inside a hall, the
ceiling sensor system detects the hall ceil-
ing and reduces the driving speed to the
maximum speed that is set for halls.

Possible limitations for object recogni-

tion
● If the truck moves under larger over-
head structures outdoors, e.g. a pedestrian
bridge, the ceiling sensor system may inter-
pret this overhead structure to be a hall ceil-
ing and reduce the maximum speed.
● In rare cases, it may occur that the ceiling
sensor system does not recognize a ceiling
and does not then reduce the speed. This
can happen if the signals from the ceiling
sensor are insufficiently reflected due to the
ceiling geometry; for example, if there are
large window areas at a 45° angle.
In these cases, the sensitivity and the range
of the ceiling sensor system must be adjusted.
See the following section.

Changing the sensor settings

NOTE
The ceiling sensor system is supplied by
STILL with the following factory settings:
● Sensitivity: High

● Ceiling height: 24 m

– Park the truck securely and switch it off.

392 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Auxiliary equipment

– Turn the union nut (4) anti-clockwise to 

loosen it. Disconnect the electrical connec- 4 1 2
tion assembly by pulling out the plug.
– On the underside of the assembly base-
plate on the overhead guard, hold four nuts
(3) in place.
– Unscrew four socket head screws (2).

Deckensensor_Anbau

The key (5) is secured with a nut under the 

assembly baseplate.
– Carefully remove the ceiling sensor (1).

5
Deckensensor_Einstellschlüssel_V2

The sensor is adjusted using DIP switches (6). 

– To access the DIP switches, open the cover
on the underside of the sensor housing with
the key (5).
During this process, the two tabs of the key (5)
fit into the recesses of the cover.
– Using the DIP switches "1 to 5" (6), adjust
the range and the sensitivity of the sensor. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The DIP switches can be adjusted using a

small screwdriver.

6 DIP-Schalter_V2

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 393

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

CAUTION
The settings for DIP switches "6 to 8" are the factory
settings of the manufacturer.
Do not change the factory settings of the manufac-
turer!

Factory settings of the manufacturer

DIP switch
6 7 8
1 1 0

The possible settings for DIP switches "1 to 5"

are shown in the following tables:

DIP switch
1 2 3 Range
0 0 0 2m
0 0 1 3m
0 1 0 4m
0 1 1 6m
1 0 0 8m
1 0 1 12 m
1 1 0 16 m
1 1 1 24 m

4 5 Sensitivity
0 0 Very high
0 1 High
1 0 Medium
1 1 Low

394 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Auxiliary equipment

Representation of the beam angle depending 

on the sensitivity of the sensor that has been
set, from (1) "low" to (4) "very high".
The sensor has different beam angles de- 4 3 2 1 2 3 4
pending on the combination of range and sen-
sitivity that has been set. See the following
table:

Sensitivity Range Beam angle

2m 22.5°
4m 22.5°
Low (1) 8m 20°
16 m 15°
24 m 5°
2m 35°
4m 30°
Medium (2) 8m 25°
16 m 22.5°
24 m 10°

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 395

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

Sensitivity Range Beam angle

2m 42°
4m 33°
High (3) 8m 22.5°
16 m 20°
24 m 15°
2m 45°
4m 43°
Very high (4) 8m 30°
16 m 22.5°
24 m 18°

– After the adjustment, refit the cover.

– Refit the ceiling sensor and connect it.
– Check that it is working correctly.

Fire extinguisher (variant)

The truck can be equipped with a fire extin-
guisher.
– Refer to the fire extinguisher labelling for
operation and maintenance instructions.

Run-on time for additional devi-

ces
Certain additional devices, such as terminals,
take quite a long time to start up when the
truck is switched on. Waiting for the additional
device to start up after a short interruption of
operation is annoying. To avoid this, the run-
on time of the power supply can be adjusted
via the display-operating unit. After the truck
has been switched off, the additional device
continues to be supplied with power during the
run-on time.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.

396 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Auxiliary equipment

– Press the Truck settings softkey . 

– Press the Run-on time softkey. 

Lift cut-out

Run-on time

Overload detection

Fork wear protection

Speed reduction when the fork

carriage is raised
Fleet manager

6219_003-314_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 397

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

In this menu you can define the desired run-on 

time.
– Enter the run-on time using softkeys 0 to Run-on time
9.
– To save, press the button.

NOTE Enter run-on time

If a run-on time has been activated, the truck 45 Min.
does not switch off completely. The power
supply for terminals remains active. No infor- = Clear = Deactivate
mation appears on the display. However, the
display may glow slightly. This is normal. = Save = Cancel
Fleet manager

– Press the scroll button to deactivate the

run-on time. 6219_003-326_en

The menu closes.

SVI STILL Vehicle Interface

(variant)
Description of SVI
The "SVI STILL Vehicle Interface" is an inter-
face for connecting external fleet management
and assistance systems to the truck. On a
plug strip, it provides eight connection options
for CAN bus, digital connections and a pow-
er supply. The SVI can be used to connect
fleet management systems in accordance with
VDI 4458 and assistance systems in accord-
ance with VDI 4482. Energy and signals can
be transferred via this interface.

CAUTION
The systems that can be connected via the SVI are
fleet management systems and assistance systems;
they are not safety systems. They help the driver to
carry out their work with the truck.
The driver remains fully responsible for handling the
truck safely.
– Always monitor the working environment of the
truck and always operate the truck carefully.

398 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Auxiliary equipment

CAUTION
Risk of component damage due to ingress of mois-
ture.
– Make sure that the connector plugs of the external
assistance systems are sealed.

NOTE
The plugs of the SVI are fitted with sealing
plugs ex works. Remove the sealing plugs
when connecting systems.
The installation position of the SVI in the truck
depends on the truck type and the equipment:
● RX60: in the counterweight

● RX20: in the battery compartment next to

the battery door

● RXE 10-16: in the driver's cab, behind the

front panelling in the footwell

For trucks of the RX60 series, the interface
can be located in various positions in the in-
stallation space within the counterweight. The
installation position depends on the wheel-
base of the truck and on which additional elec-
trical components are installed in the truck,
e.g. on-board charger, charging quick access
or battery carrier.
The various possible installation positions are
described below.

Installation situation RX60 25-35 short

Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter-  1
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 399

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

Installation situation RX60 25-35 short

with charging quick access
Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter-  1 2
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

Installation situation RX60 25-35 short

with on-board charger
Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter-  1 2
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

400 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Auxiliary equipment

Installation situation RX60 25-35 short

with battery carrier
Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter- 
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

Installation situation RX60 25-35 long

Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter-  1
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 401

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

Installation situation RX60 25-35 long

with charging quick access
Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter- 
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

1
2

Installation situation RX60 25-35 long

with on-board charger
Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter-  1
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

402 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Auxiliary equipment

Installation situation RX60 25-35 long

with battery carrier
Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter- 
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

Installation situation RX60 40-50

Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter-  1 2
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 403

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

Installation situation RX60 40-50 with

charging quick access
Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter-  1
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

Installation situation RX60 40-50 with

on-board charger
Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter-  1 2
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

404 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Auxiliary equipment

Installation situation RX60 40-50 with

battery carrier
Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter-  1
face"(1) / counterweight (2)

Installation situation RX20

Position of "SVI STILL Vehicle Interface"(1)  1

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 405

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

Installation situation RXE 10-16

Position of the "SVI STILL Vehicle Inter- 
face"(1) / parking brake lever (2).

Pin assignment for the SVI

The SVI provides a total of eight connection
options:
● Four CAN bus connections

● Three digital inputs

● One 12-V power supply

● Fuse: RX20/60 rated at 10 A. RXE 10-16

rated at 7 A.

Pos. Plug designation Plug type Pin assignment

FEP plug 2-pin female,
X202: 12-V supply with 60 W model 42034000 (page on Pin 1: +12 V
(1)
(more on request) third-party system, manufac- Pin 2: GND
turer FEP)
Saab plug 4-pin (pin), model
1-965261-1 Pin 1: CAN-H
(page on third-party system, Pin 2: CAN-L
(2) X201: CAN 1 (VDI 4458)
manufacturer TE), Pin 3: +12 V (output)
pin assignment in accord- Pin 4: GND chassis
ance with VDI 4458
SAAB plug 4-pin (pin),
model 1-965261-1 (page on Pin 1: CAN H 6
third-party system, manufac- Pin 2: CAN L 6
(3) X206: CAN 6 (VDI 4482)
turer TE), Pin 3: +12 V (input)
pin assignment in accord- Pin 4: GND 6
ance with VDI 4482

406 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Auxiliary equipment

Pos. Plug designation Plug type Pin assignment

SAAB plug 4-pin (pin),
model 1-965261-1 (page on Pin 1: CAN H 3
third-party system, manufac- Pin 2: CAN L 3
(4) X203: CAN 3 (VDI 4482)
turer TE), Pin 3: +12 V (input)
pin assignment in accord- Pin 4: GND 3
ance with VDI 4482
SAAB plug 4-pin (pin),
model 1-965261-1 (page on Pin 1: CAN H 4
third-party system, manufac- Pin 2: CAN L 4
(5) X204: CAN 4 (VDI 4482)
turer TE), Pin 3: +12 V (input)
pin assignment in accord- Pin 4: GND 4
ance with VDI 4482
Pin 1: dig_input1
FEP plug 6-pin female, Pin 2: DGND
model 42121700 (page on Pin 3: dig_input2
(6) X200: 3 digital inputs
third-party system, manufac- Pin 4: DGND
turer FEP) Pin 5: dig_input3
Pin 6: DGND

SVI plug positions RX20 

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 407

4 Operation
Auxiliary equipment

SVI plug positions RX60 

1
2
3
4
5

SVI plug positions RXE 10-16 

NOTE
The plug designations are also marked on an
adhesive label next to the plugs. 2 4
NOTE
3 5
In the various RX60 versions, the SVI is in-
stalled either vertically or horizontally. This
depends on the wheelbase of the truck and
which other electronic components are instal-
led in the truck. 6 1

408 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cab

Cab
Opening and closing the cab 
door

DANGER
Risk of explosion due to static charge!
The plastic parts on category 2 trucks
are coated with a special antistatic paint.
This paint prevents the build-up of an
electrostatic charge in plastic compo-
nents. Otherwise, static discharge may
occur, resulting in explosions in the sur-
rounding atmosphere in potentially ex-
plosive areas.
The plastic parts of the cab (variant) are
also covered with antistatic materials or
coated with antistatic paint.
– Only drive into potentially explosive
areas if the cab or fabric-covered cab
complies with explosion protection di-
rectives.
– Make sure that the surfaces are not
damaged.

CAUTION
Risk of component damage.
If the cab door opens while driving, there is risk of
damage from a collision.
– The cab door must be latched securely in the en-
gaged position.

The truck has a cab door sensor that is used

to monitor the closing of the cab door.
If the seat belt is not fastened and the cab
door is not closed, the driving speed is limited
to 4 km/h. The message Close cab door
or seat belt appears in the display.
If the cab door is opened while the truck is
in motion and the seat belt is fastened, the
truck decelerates and is restricted to a driving
speed of 4 km/h. The message Close cab
door appears in the display.
If the seat belt is released with the cab door
closed, no message appears.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 409

4 Operation
Cab

Opening the cab door from the outside:

– Insert the key in the door lock (5), unlock
the door and remove the key.
– Pull the handle (4). Unlock the door lock.
– Open the cab door (3) by pulling it out-
wards.

Opening the cab door from the inside:

– Take hold of the handle (2) and the latch
(1).
– Push in the latch. Push the cab door out-
wards.

Closing the cab door from the outside:

– Take hold of the door by the door han-
dle (4). Close the cab door by pushing.

Closing the cab door from the inside:

– Take hold of the handle (2).
– Pull the cab door inwards and close it.

410 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cab

Opening and closing the 180°

cab door (variant)
DANGER
Risk of explosion due to static charge!
The plastic parts on trucks in catego-
ry 2 are coated with a special antistatic
paint. This paint prevents the buildup of
an electrostatic charge in plastic compo-
nents. Otherwise, static discharge may
occur, resulting in explosions in the sur-
rounding atmosphere in potentially ex-
plosive areas.
The plastic parts of the cab (variant) are
also covered with antistatic materials or
coated with antistatic paint.
– Only drive into potentially explosive
areas if the cab or fabric-covered cab
complies with explosion protection di-
rectives.
– Make sure that the surfaces are not
damaged.

WARNING
Risk of accident if the restraint system is not used.
If the truck has no restraint system other than the
cab door and seat belt, it is possible to fall out when
driving with the door open.
– Always fasten the seat belt before driving with the
door open.
– Only open and close the door or door sections
when the truck is stationary.

CAUTION
Risk of component damage.
If the cab door opens while driving, there is risk of
damage from a collision.
– Latch the cab door securely in the engaged posi-
tion.

NOTE
If the door or door sections are opened while
driving, the message Close cab door
appears. Depending on the setting, the truck
stops or limits the driving speed.
– To remove the restriction, stop the truck
and close the door.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 411

4 Operation
Cab

The 180° cab door can be swivelled up to 

the counterweight and locked there. It is in-
tended for driving with the door open in high
outside temperatures. The door is split into 1
two and hinged by two sets of hinges. The
front door section (6) can be opened 180° and 2
locked in place. To do this, the front door sec- 3
tion (6) must be unlocked from the rear door
section (2), which remains closed when the
door is opened 180°.
How to open and close the entire cab door is
described first.

Opening the cab door from the outside:

– Insert the key in the door lock (8), unlock 8 7 6 5 4 6301_003-161

the door and remove the key.

– Pull the door handle (7) and open the cab
door by pulling it outwards.
The cab door is held in the open position by a
gas spring.

Opening the cab door from the inside:

– Take hold of the handle (5) and the latch
(4).
– Push in the latch. Push the cab door out-
wards.

Closing the cab door from the outside:

– Take hold of the cab door by the door han-
dle (7). Close the cab door by pushing.

Closing the cab door from the inside:

– Take hold of the handle (5).
– Pull the cab door inwards and close it.

412 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cab

Opening the front door section 180°: 

1
2
3

8 7 6 5 4 6301_003-161

– Remove the square-section key (9) from the 

support mounting.
– Insert the square-section key (9) into the
opening provided (10).
– Turn the square-section key (9).
9
The front door section (6) is unlocked from the
rear door section (2).
– Remove the square-section key (9) and
store it in the support mounting provided.
– Take hold of the handle (5) and the latch
(4).
10

11

6301_003-163_V02

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 413

4 Operation
Cab

– Push in the latch. Push the front door sec- 

tion (6) outwards and swivel it 180°.
The front door section (6) locks with its secur-
ing cam (1) in the lock (3) of the rear door
section (2).

6301_003-166

Closing the front door section from the

inside:
– To release the latch, press the knob (10) in 
firmly.
– Take hold of the handle (5).
– Pull the front door section inwards and
close it.

10 6301_003-165

414 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cab

– Remove the square-section key (9) from the 

support mounting.
– Insert the square-section key (9) into the
opening provided (10). 9
– Turn the square-section key (9).
The cab door sections are locked.

6301_003-164

Opening and closing the side 

window

WARNING
There is a risk of crushing between the window
frame and side window due to the side windows slip-
ping inadvertently during travel.
– Make sure that the handle engages securely in
the corresponding stop slot.

Opening the front side window:

– Squeeze the handle (3). Slide the front side
window (1) backwards.

Opening the rear side window:

The rear side window (2) can be opened in the
same way as the front side window.

Closing the front side window:

– Slide the front side window (1) forwards us-
ing the handle (3) until it snaps into place.

Closing the rear side window:

The rear side window (2) can be closed in the
same way as the front side window.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 415

4 Operation
Cab

Turning the interior lighting on or 

off (variant)
– To turn the interior lighting on or off, press
the push button switch (1) in the middle of
the interior lighting.

Radio (variant)
The radio and the loudspeakers are an equip-
ment variant. If the truck is equipped with a
radio and loudspeakers, they are integrated
into the roof lining.
The description and operation can be found
in the separate operating instructions for the
radio.

WARNING
The driver's attention is adversely affected by operat-
ing the radio or listening to it at excessive volumes
while driving or handling loads. Risk of accident!
– Do not operate the radio when driving or when
handling loads.
– Adjust the radio volume so that you can still hear
warning signals.

416 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cab

Heating system (variant)

DANGER
There is a risk of poisoning if heavily
polluted surrounding air is aspirated in-
to the closed cab!
– Do not operate the heating system in
the vicinity of storage areas or similar
areas in which fuel vapours or fine
dust (e.g. coal, wood or grain dust)
can build up.

DANGER
Risk of explosion due to heat!
The heat can cause gases to expand
considerably or to ignite.
– Do not expose spray cans or gas car-
tridges to the flow of hot air.

DANGER
Risk of fire due to overheating!
The heating system can overheat if the
hot air cannot escape from it.
The heating system may only be switch-
ed on if the blower is running and the
heating system is not covered by objects
(such as a jacket or cover).
– Always switch the blower on first.
– Do not switch the heating system on
until the blower is switched on.
– Move any objects away from the
heating system or air distributors.

DANGER
The heating system housing can be-
come very hot during heating opera-
tion. There is a risk of burns if it is
touched!
– Do not touch the heating system
housing during operation.
– Only touch the switches provided.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 417

4 Operation
Cab

Operating devices of the heating sys- 

tem
The operating devices of the heating system
include:
1 Heating level control knob
2 Blower control knob
3 Air vent control knob 0

Switching on the blower and heating

system
– Turn the blower control knob (2) to the de-
sired blower level.
The blower runs at the speed level selected
via the blower control knob (2).
– Turn the heating level control knob (1) to
the desired heating level.
The heater warms the air to the heating level
selected via the heating level control knob (1)
– Turn the air vent control knob (3) to the
desired position.

Selecting blower levels

– To select a lower blower output, turn the
blower control knob (2) anticlockwise.
– To select a high blower output, turn the
blower control knob (2) clockwise.

Setting heating levels

– To set a lower heater power, turn the heat-
ing level control knob (1) anticlockwise.
– To set a higher heater power, turn the heat-
ing level control knob (1) clockwise.

Setting the air vent control knob

– To direct the air flow to the footwell, turn the
air vent control knob (3) in an anticlockwise
direction to the position.
– To direct the air flow to the windscreen, turn
the air vent control knob (3) in a clockwise
direction to the position.
The centre position directs the air flow to
the footwell and the windscreen.

418 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cab

Switching off the heating system and

blower
– Turn the heating level control knob (1) in an
anticlockwise direction until it reaches the
stop.
The heating system is shut down.
– Turn the blower control knob (2) in an anti-
clockwise direction until it reaches the stop.
The blower is shut down.

Adjusting the air distributors 

The air distributors for the driver are always
supplied with air. It is not necessary to adjust
the heating system using the operating devi-
ces.
– To open the air distributor, push the inden-
tation (1) on the disc.
The discs open.
– Grasp the discs to align the air flow:
The discs can be adjusted to the desired an-
gle. The air distributor can be rotated.
– Press down again to close the discs.

Changing fuses
DANGER
Risk of fire as a result of short circuits!
Using the wrong fuses can result in short
circuits.
– Use only fuses with the prescribed
nominal current.
– The fuses must be replaced only by
the authorised service centre.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 419

4 Operation
Cab

Clipboard (variant) 

The removable clipboard (1) is an equipment

variant.

Push-up roof window (variant) 

1
WARNING
Risk of crushing!
– When closing the roof window, do not reach be-
tween the roof window and the overhead guard.
– Do not reach in to touch the components as they
are being closed.

The push-up roof window (1) can be pushed

up to and locked in three positions:
● Pushed up at the front

● Pushed up at the rear

● Completely pushed up
5 4 3 2
Two handles (2, 5) and two locking bolts (3, 4) 6219_003-299

are located on the right-hand side for this pur-

pose.
– To push up and close the roof window, stop
the truck and apply the parking brake.

Pushing up and closing the roof window

at the front
– To push up the roof window, pull out the
locking bolt (4) with your right hand and
keep hold of the locking bolt.
– Use your left hand to take hold of the han-
dle (5) on the roof window (1) and push
upwards until the locking bolt (4) engages.
420 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Operation 4
Cab

The roof window (1) is held in the pushed-up

position
– To close the roof window, pull out the lock-
ing bolt (4) with your right hand and keep
hold of the locking bolt.
– Use your left hand to take hold of the han-
dle (5) on the roof window (1) and pull down
until the locking bolt (4) engages.
The roof window (1) is closed.

Pushing up and closing the roof window

at the rear
– To push up the roof window, pull out the
locking bolt (3) with your left hand and keep
hold of the locking bolt.
– Use your right hand to take hold of the han-
dle (2) on the roof window (1) and push
upwards until the locking bolt (3) engages.
The roof window (1) is held in the pushed-up
position
– To close the roof window, pull out the lock-
ing bolt (3) with your left hand and keep
hold of the locking bolt.
– Use your right hand to take hold of the han-
dle (2) on the roof window (1) and pull down
until the locking bolt (3) engages.
The roof window (1) is closed.

Pushing up and closing the roof window

completely
– Follow the same steps as previously descri-
bed to push up and close the roof window.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 421

4 Operation
Cab

Sun visor and sun blind 

The truck can be equipped with a sun vi-

sor (2), a sun blind for the roof (1) and a sun
blind for the driver's view to the front (4).
– To adjust the sun visor (2), grasp it and
move it to the desired position.
– To move the sun blind (4) up and down,
grasp the tab (3) and move the sun blind.
– If necessary, fully unroll the sun blind for
the roof (1) and attach the ends (5) in the
extended position.
– To roll up, slowly roll the blind (1) back up.

422 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Trailer operation

Trailer operation
Safety information for trailer op-
eration
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Trailers, tow couplings and coupling pins
that do not meet explosion-protection
regulations can cause explosions in the
surrounding atmosphere within potential-
ly explosive areas!
– Only use trailers, tow couplings and
coupling pins that meet explosion-
protection regulations.
– Check the area of application by
referring to the information on the
nameplates of the trailers and tow
couplings.
– If the area of application is not clear,
ask the safety officer.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 423

4 Operation
Trailer operation

Towed load 

DANGER
There is an increased risk of accident when using a
trailer.
Using a trailer changes the truck handling character-
istics. When towing, operate the truck such that the
trailer train can be safely driven and braked at all
times. The maximum permissible speed when towing
is 5 km/h.
– Do not exceed the permissible speed of 5 km/h.
– Do not couple the truck in front of rail vehicles.
– The truck must not be used to push any kind of
trolley.
– It must be possible to drive and brake at all times.

CAUTION
Risk of damage to components!
The maximum towed load for occasional towing is
the rated capacity specified on the nameplate. Over-
loading can lead to component damage on the truck.
The sum of the actual towed load and the actual
load on the fork must not exceed the rated capacity.
If the towed load present corresponds to the rated
capacity of the truck, it is not permitted to transport a
load on the fork at the same time. The load can be
distributed between the fork and the trailer.
– Check the load distribution and adjust it to corre-
spond to the rated capacity.
– Observe the permissible rigidity value of the tow
coupling.

CAUTION
Risk of damage to components!
The maximum towed load only applies when towing
unbraked trailers on a level surface (maximum devi-
ation +/- 1%) and on firm ground. The towed load
must be reduced if towing on gradients. If necessary,
notify the authorised service centre of the applica-
tion conditions. The service centre will provide the
required data.
– Inform the authorised service centre.

CAUTION
Risk of damage to components!
A support load is not permitted.
– Do not use trailers with tillers supported by the
tow coupling.

424 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Trailer operation

This truck is suitable for the occasional towing

of trailers. If the truck is equipped with a tow-
ing device, this occasional towing must not
exceed 2% of the daily operating time. The
manufacturer must be consulted if the truck is
to be used for towing on a more regular basis.

Coupling pin in the counter-

weight
Coupling the trailer
DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury if the truck rolls away
If you briefly leave the truck to couple or uncouple it,
there is a risk of fatal injury from being run over if the
truck rolls away.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Lower the fork to the ground.
– Switch off the truck. Remove the switch key or
block access to the truck.

– Take measures to prevent the trailer from 

rolling away, e.g. using wedges (1).

1 7090_900-008

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 425

4 Operation
Trailer operation

– Push the coupling pin (1) downwards, turn 

the pin by 90° and pull the pin out.
– Adjust the tiller height.

DANGER
People can become trapped between the truck and
trailer.
When coupling, ensure that there are no persons
present between the truck and the trailer.

– Slowly move the truck backwards.

– Moving the truck back allows you to insert
the tiller into the recess (2) in the counter-
weight.

DANGER
Risk of accident due to damaged or lost clutch
components!
If the coupling pin or securing bush are lost or de-
stroyed during towing, the trailer will work loose and
become uncontrollable.
– Only use original coupling pins that have been
checked.
– Ensure that the coupling pin is correctly inserted
and secured.

– Insert the coupling pin into the counter-

weight, press the pin downwards against
the spring pressure and rotate the pin by
90°.
The coupling pin is locked in this position.
– Remove any items used to prevent the trail-
er from rolling away.

Uncoupling the trailer

– Take measures to prevent the trailer from
rolling away, e.g. using wedges.

426 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Trailer operation

– Push the coupling pin (2) downwards, turn 

the pin by 90° and pull the pin out.
– Slowly move the truck forwards and guide
the tow-bar eye completely out of the re-
cess (2) in the counterweight.
– Insert the coupling pin into the counter-
weight, press the pin downwards against
the spring pressure and rotate the pin by
90°.
The coupling pin is locked in this position.

Automatic tow coupling

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from falling truck!
The tow coupling is not designed for jacking up the
truck or loading the truck by crane. It may be de-
formed or destroyed. The truck may fall over.
– Use the tow coupling only for towing.
– For jacking up and crane loading, use only the
designated lifting points.

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from detaching trailers!
The tow coupling is not designed for support loads
and could be deformed or destroyed. The supported
load or the trailers could come loose.
– The tow coupling should be subjected only to hori-
zontal loads, i.e. the tiller must be horizontal.

DANGER
Risk to life due to truck rolling away!
If you briefly leave the truck to couple or uncouple it,
there is a risk of fatal injury from being run over if the
truck rolls away.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Lower the fork to the ground.
– Switch off the truck and secure it against unau-
thorised use.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 427

4 Operation
Trailer operation

DANGER
Risk of injury when coupling!
People can become trapped between the truck and
the trailer.
– When coupling, ensure that there are no persons
present between the truck and the trailer.

WARNING
Risk of crushing when reaching into the coupling.
When the coupling pin slams shut, there is a risk of
crushing limbs in the coupling.
– Never reach into the coupling.
– To release the coupling pin, actuate the corre-
sponding lever or use a suitable device (e.g. as-
sembly lever).
– When not in use, close the automatic tow cou-
pling.

WARNING
Risk of damage due to component collision.
A truck with tow coupling needs more room for ma-
noeuvring due to its overhang. The tow coupling can
damage the racking or the tow coupling itself when
manoeuvring. If a collision with the tow coupling oc-
curs, the tow coupling must be checked for damage
such as cracks. A damaged tow coupling must not
be used again.
– Always manoeuvre carefully and with sufficient
room.
– In the case of a collision, check the tow coupling
for damage.
– Have a damaged tow coupling replaced by the
authorised service centre.

WARNING
Risk of damage to the tow bar eye or tiller!
Due to the truck's rear wheel steering, the side slew-
ing angle of the tiller may not be adequate. The cou-
pling or the tiller may be damaged! The tow bar eye
of the tiller must fit the tow coupling in terms of shape
and size.
– Ensure that the tow bar eye and tiller fit correctly.
– Avoid sharp cornering.
– Carefully reverse and manoeuvre.

428 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Trailer operation

WARNING
Risk of component damage if the tiller in the tow
coupling is tilted!
The tiller should be kept as horizontal as possible
when towing. This ensures that the rotation range
is sufficient at the top and bottom. The authorised
service centre can adjust the assembly height for the
tow coupling to the tiller height if necessary.
– Make sure that the tiller is level.
– To change the coupling height, contact the author-
ised service centre.

NOTE
When manoeuvring in restricted areas, take
into account the overhang of the coupling.

Coupling model RO*244 

NOTE
Tow coupling RO*244 is intended for a tow-
bar eye in accordance with DIN 74054 (bore
diameter 40 mm) or DIN 8454 (bore diameter
35 mm).
– Take measures to prevent the trailer from
rolling away, e.g. using wedges.
– Adjust the towing eye of the tiller so that it is
in the middle of the towing jaws.
– Push the hand lever (2) upwards until it en-
gages.
The tow coupling is opened.

CAUTION
When being coupled, the tow-bar eye must engage
in the middle of the coupling jaw. Failure to follow
these instructions could result in damage to the cou-
pling jaw or to the tow-bar eye!
– Ensure that the tow-bar eye enters the coupling
jaw centrally.

– Move the truck back slowly until the tow bar

eye is inserted centrally into the coupling
jaw of the tow coupling and the coupling pin
engages.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 429

4 Operation
Trailer operation

NOTE
The coupling pin is correctly engaged if the
control pin (3) does not protrude out of its
guide.

DANGER
Risk of accident due to open coupling pin!
If the coupling pin drops out during towing, the trailer
will work loose. It will become uncontrollable.
The control pin (3) must not protrude out of its guide.
– Ensure that the coupling pin is engaged correctly.
– Please note the following:

If the coupling pin does not engage correctly:

– Remove any items used to prevent the trail-
er from rolling away.
– Move the truck with the trailer forwards ap-
prox. 1 m and then move it back slightly.
– On the coupling pin, check again that the
control pin does not protrude out of its
guide.
– Remove any items used to prevent the trail-
er from rolling away.
– Tow the trailer.

Model RO*244 - Closing the coupling 

DANGER
Risk of injury from hand becoming trapped!
Do not reach into the coupling pin area. If, for exam-
ple, a tow rope is to be secured in the tow coupling,
only actuate the tow coupling via the closing lever
(1).

– Push the closing lever (1) downwards as far

as it will go.
The tow coupling is closed.

Model RO*244 - Uncoupling the trailer

– Take measures to prevent the trailer from
rolling away, e.g. using wedges.
– Push the hand lever (2) upwards until it en-
gages.

430 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Trailer operation

The tow coupling is opened.

– Slowly drive the truck forwards until the tow-
ing eye and towing jaws are disconnected.
– Close the tow coupling by actuating the
closing lever (1).

NOTE
To protect the lower coupling pin bush against
contamination, always keep the tow coupling
closed.

Coupling model RO*245 

7 5
NOTE
Tow coupling RO 245 is intended for a tow-
ing eye in accordance with DIN 74054 (bore
diameter 40 mm) or DIN 8454 (bore diameter
35 mm).
– Take measures to prevent the trailer from
rolling away, e.g. using wedges. 6
– Adjust the towing eye of the tiller so that it is
in the middle of the towing jaws.
– Push the hand lever (5) upwards.
– The tow coupling is opened.
7321_003-066_V2

DANGER
People can become trapped between the truck and
trailer!
When coupling, ensure that there are no persons
present between the truck and the trailer.

– Slowly move the truck backwards.

DANGER
Risk of accident due to open coupling pin!
A protruding safety handle means that the tow bar
eye has not been coupled correctly. The trailer must
not be towed in this condition.
– Make sure that the control pin does not protrude
from the control bush.
– Repeat the coupling process if necessary.

– Remove any items used to prevent the trail-

er from rolling away.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 431

4 Operation
Trailer operation

– Tow the trailer.

Uncoupling model RO*245 

– Take measures to prevent the trailer from 7 5
rolling away, e.g. using wheel chocks.
– Push the hand lever (5) upwards.
– Slowly drive the truck forwards until the tow-
ing eye and towing jaws are disconnected.
– Push down the closing lever (7) on the left-
hand side of the tow coupling as far as it will
6
go.
The tow coupling is closed.

7321_003-066_V2

Towing trailers  7090_900-011

– Drivers who are towing a trailer for the first

time must practise driving with a trailer in a
suitable area.
– When passing through narrow road areas
(entrances, gates etc.), observe the dimen-
sions of the trailer and load.
– When towing multiple trailers, ensure a suf-
ficient minimum distance to fixed installa-
tions when turning and cornering.
The permissible length of the trailer trains de-
pends on the roadways to be driven and may
need to be determined during the test drive.
It is the responsibility of the operating compa-
ny to instruct the drivers regarding the permis-
sible number of trailers and, where required,
any additional speed reductions on individual
sections of the route.

NOTE
Please observe the definition of the follow-
ing responsible persons: "operating company"
and "driver".

432 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cold store application

Cold store application 

The truck is suitable for use in cold stores.

Cold store equipment with low-temperature
hydraulic oil may be required.
The truck is equipped for two different types of
application.
The cold store symbol indicates the variant
with cold store equipment that uses low-tem-
perature hydraulic oil.
The display-operating unit is heated in this
variant.
As another variant, the truck can be equipped
with a driver's cab with a heating system.
6210_900-002

Types of application
There are two different types of cold store
application for the truck, distinguished by two
different temperature ranges.
1 Constant use in the temperature range
down to −5°C, short-term use at temper-
atures down to −10°C.
Operation possible with standard equip-
ment and standard hydraulic oil.
2 Alternating between indoor use down to
−32°C and outdoor use up to +25°C,
briefly up to +40°C.
Operation possible only with cold store
equipment and low-temperature hydraulic
oil.

NOTE
When changing to a different type of hydraulic
oil, the authorised service centre must adjust
the parameters of the truck control unit.

Operation
WARNING
Risk of injury!
If condensation water freezes in the cold store, do
not try to free parts that have become stuck with your
hands.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 433

4 Operation
Cold store application

WARNING
Risk of accident due to restricted operational readi-
ness!
At very low temperatures, the display-operating unit
requires a longer period of time to reach operational
readiness. The truck is not ready for operation during
this time.
This status is shown in the display as follows:

– Only use the drive direction switch to perform

emergency driving in an emergency. Refer to the
section entitled "Emergency driving via the drive
direction switch/drive direction selection lever" in
the chapter entitled "Procedure in emergencies".

CAUTION
Changing from a cold internal temperature to a warm
outside temperature may result in the formation of
condensation water. This water may freeze on re-en-
try to the cold store, blocking moving parts of the
truck.
It is essential that close attention is paid to the dura-
tion of deployment in the different temperature rang-
es for both types of application.
Before being used in the cold store, the truck must
be dry and warmed up.
The truck must not leave the cold store area for more
than 10 minutes. By adhering to this rule, condensa-
tion water will not have time to form.
If the truck stays outside for more than 10 minutes,
it must remain there at least until the condensation
water has drained away and the truck has dried off.
Depending on the weather, this will take at least
30 minutes.

434 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cold store application

Limiting the load dynamics to load program 1 

during the warm-up phase

NOTE
During the warm-up phase, the load dynamics
are limited to load program 1. The adjacent
symbol appears on the display until the warm-
up phase is complete.
– To ensure operational safety, drive the truck
for approximately five minutes and actuate
the brake several times.
– Actuate all hydraulic lifting functions several
times.
This warm-up phase is necessary to ensure 6219_003-312

that the oil reaches the operating temperature.

– Refer to the section entitled "Warming up
the hydraulic oil at cold ambient tempera-
tures" in the chapter entitled "Operation —
Checks and tasks before daily use."
– Always park the truck outside the cold
store.

CAUTION
Risk of component damage!
The lead-acid batteries must not be left in the cold
store overnight without power uptake or charging.

– Charge the battery outside the cold store

and operate the truck using a replacement
battery.

Using batteries in the cold store

To compensate for the reduction in capacity
at low temperatures, it is advisable to use
lead-acid batteries with the maximum nominal
capacity in the respective battery dimensions
for the truck series.
Electric trucks must not be parked in a cold
area for any longer than necessary. This al-
so applies to unused batteries. The charging
station and the parking area for trucks and
batteries must be at normal room temperature
(not below 10°C). Charging is extremely slow
at low temperatures. At temperatures below
10°C, the battery cannot be fully charged with
the usual charging parameters.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 435

4 Operation
Cold store application

– Charge the battery fully before each shift.

– During the gassing phase, always top up
with distilled water.
The distilled water will mix with the battery
acid so that it does not freeze.
Water top-up systems must not be used at
temperatures below 0°C, as this could cause
the systems and the water present in the hose
lines to freeze.
The battery voltage when discharged is thus
generally lower at low temperatures. The final
discharged voltage is reached earlier, i.e. the
capacity is lower.

436 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cold store application

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 437

4 Operation
Display messages

Display messages
Behaviour when the explosion- 
protection warning lights are illu- 1
minated

DANGER 2
Risk of explosion!
During operation, the temperatures and
insulation values of various components
are monitored by sensors. The explo-
sion-protection warning lights indicate 3
when limit values have been reached.
If dangerous limit values are detected,
the truck control unit automatically shuts
down the drive unit. This automatic 4
emergency shutdown indicates a serious
malfunction. 6219_901-017

– Do not operate the truck if the explo- 1 Surface temperature of the right-hand
sion-protection warning light is illumi- traction motor
nated. 2 Surface temperature of the left-hand
– Inform the safety officer. traction motor
3 Surface temperature of the pump motor
– Notify the authorised service centre. 4 Insulation warning

WARNING
Risk of injury from automatic emergency shutdown!
The driving functions of the truck are switched off
as soon as one of the explosion-protection warning
lights (1, 2) illuminates.
The hydraulic functions of the truck are switched off
as soon as the explosion protection warning light(3)
illuminates.
The driving functions of the truck are switched off
as soon as the explosion-protection warning light (4)
illuminates.
– Stop the truck safely.

This section describes the actions required

when an explosion-protection warning light is
flashing.
As a general rule:
Only the safety officer may decide whether
the truck can be removed from the potentially
explosive area. The cause of the automatic
emergency shutdown must be determined and
remedied by the authorised service centre.
The safety officer must order the reset button
to be pressed.

438 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Display messages

NOTE
Observe the "Actuating the reset button af-
ter automatic emergency shutdown" section
in the chapter entitled "Procedure in emergen-
cies".
Traction motor and pump motor monitoring
1 Surface temperature of the right-
hand traction motor
The maximum surface temperature of
the right-hand traction motor has been
reached.
No driving functions are available.
2 Surface temperature of the left-hand
traction motor
The maximum surface temperature of
the left-hand traction motor has been
reached.
No driving functions are available.
3 Surface temperature of the pump
motor
The maximum surface temperature of the
pump motor has been reached.
No hydraulic functions are available.
– Set down the load.
– Actuate the reset button and drive the truck
out of the potentially explosive area.
– Safely bring the truck to a standstill.
– Allow the overheated motor to cool down.
– If one of the warning lights (1-3) remains il-
luminated after the motor has cooled down,
notify the authorised service centre.

NOTE
The insulation warning (4) explosion-protec-
tion light is not present in category 3
trucks.
Insulation monitoring
4 Insulation warning
There is an insulation fault.
No driving functions are available.
– Switch off the truck immediately.
– If necessary, perform emergency lowering
of the load and set down the load.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 439

4 Operation
Display messages

– Tow the truck out of the potentially explo-

sive area.
– See the section entitled "Towing" in the
chapter entitled "Operating in special oper-
ating situations".
Actuating the reset button is prohibited in the
event of an insulation fault.
– Notify the authorised service centre.

NOTE
For further instruction relating to explosion-
protection warning lights, see the chapter enti-
tled "Operating and display elements", section
"Explosion-protection warning lights".

Messages
Certain truck conditions may cause event-rela-
ted messages to be shown on the display of
the display-operating unit.
There are messages about operation and
messages about the truck. If a message about
operation appears, the display-operating unit
will prompt you to perform an action. A mes-
sage about the truck means that the truck con-
trol unit has detected a fault.
The following types of message may appear
individually or in combination:
● A graphic symbol

● The message

● A code consisting of a letter and a four-digit

number
The message is displayed until either the
cause has been corrected or the message has
been acknowledged.
In the case of successive events, the respec-
tive messages are displayed one after another
on the display.

Messages about operation

If messages about operation appear on the
display-operating unit, an action must be car-
ried out.

440 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Display messages

Code Shown in display Cause/action

The access authorisation (variant) is preventing
Log in the use of the truck.
- Enable the access authorisation.
The charge state of the battery is too low for
truck use.
- Charge the battery.
Battery empty Special feature for STILL RXE:
The drive unit is limited to 5 km/h.
The working hydraulics are limited in perform-
ance.
The charge state of the battery is low. The truck
experiences a power reduction.
- Charge the battery.
Special feature for STILL RXE:
V6905 The drive unit is limited to 5 km/h.
V6985 Only the "Classic" drive programme can be
Battery: Emergency
V6986 called up. "Sprint mode" is blocked.
mode
V6987 Load programmes 2 and 3 are blocked.
V7038 The working hydraulics are limited in perform-
ance.
- Switch the truck off and on again.
- If the message continues to appear, please
contact the authorised service centre.
This message about the on-board charger is
triggered by different causes:
A possible fault in the electrical connection be-
tween the battery and the on-board charger.
The fuse for the on-board charger on the truck
Check battery
or the on-board charger is defective.
The battery has a fault.
The battery has exceeded its service life.
The battery is incorrectly configured.
- Contact your authorised service centre.
The battery is too cold and/or too fully charged.
The battery can only absorb limited current from
the energy recovery of the regenerative brake.
As a result, the regenerative brake only offers
limited deceleration.
The service brake is still fully operational.
Battery recovery low - Drive the truck carefully while actuating the
hydraulic functions.
Special feature for STILL RXE:
The regenerative brake is deactivated or restric-
ted.
- See also the section entitled "Operating the
service brake" in the "Driving" chapter.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 441

4 Operation
Display messages

Code Shown in display Cause/action

This message about the on-board charger is
triggered by different causes:
V6962 Check battery type The battery is defective.
The wrong battery is connected.
- Contact your authorised service centre.
The acid level of the lead-acid battery is too low.
- Do not continue to use the truck with this bat-
Check battery acid lev-
tery.
el
- Check the acid level of the battery. Correct if
necessary.
The charging process has been automatically
aborted due to the battery temperature being
too high. This message about the on-board
charger is triggered by different causes:
The truck was heavily used before charging and
the battery has become very hot.
Battery temperature The ambient temperature is too high and the
V6965
high battery cannot cool down.
The charging profile is configured incorrectly.

- Allow the battery to cool down.

- Allow the battery temperature symbol on
the display-operating unit to flash. Change the
"Start" symbol to "Pause".
The battery door sensor does not detect that the
battery door is closed.
Check battery door sen- - Make sure that the lock on the battery door is
sor engaged.
- If the message continues to appear, please
contact the authorised service centre.
The battery door is open. The truck will not
Close battery door move.
- Close the battery door.
The lithium-ion battery is too cold.
Battery too cold
- Move the truck to a warmer environment.
The desired action is only possible after releas-
Release brake pedal ing the brake pedal.
- Release the brake pedal.
If the temperature at the drive units is too high,
Acceleration restricted. this message appears. Sprint mode is no longer
Temperature available. The truck switches to Classic mode.
Acceleration is restricted.
Curve Speed Control ac- Curve Speed Control reduces the curve speed.
tive - No action is required.
If the truck is equipped with this variant, data
Data transmission re-
transmission must be carried out.
quired
- See the associated instructions.

442 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Display messages

Code Shown in display Cause/action

This message is not displayed during normal
Diagnostic mode active operation.
- Contact your authorised service centre.
If an attachment is fitted and no pump speed
has been set for its direction of movement, this
Set pump speed message will be displayed.
- Set the revolution speed with the access au-
thorisation.
The electrolyte circulation pump is not working.
The charging process is continued without elec-
Electrolyte circulation trolyte circulation. Intermediate charging can
V7059
not working cause damage to the battery.
- Cancel the charging process.
- Contact your authorised service centre.
This message is not displayed during normal
Development mode ac-
operation.
tive
- Contact your authorised service centre.
This message follows earlier messages, e.g.
overtemperature. It is not possible to drive the
truck.
Drive unit blocked - Wait until the message disappears. If necessa-
ry, switch the truck off and on again.
- If the message continues to appear, please
contact the authorised service centre.
The truck is equipped with a seat contact
switch. If the driver's seat is not occupied, the
Sit on driver's seat
drives are disabled.
- Sit on the driver's seat.
If the truck control unit detects a movement of
the truck without the accelerator pedal being
Secure truck against actuated, this message appears.
rolling away - Apply the parking brake.
- If necessary, secure the truck with wedges so
that it cannot roll away.
The load on the driver's seat is released but the
Secure truck against parking brake cannot engage due to a defect.
rolling away - Secure the truck with wedges so that the truck
does not roll away.
If the truck is switched off without having first
applied the parking brake, this message ap-
Switch off truck?
pears.
- Apply the parking brake.
If the truck is to be switched off even though
the parking brake is not applied, this message
Switch off truck any-
appears.
way?
- Secure the truck with wedges so that the truck
does not roll away.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 443

4 Operation
Display messages

Code Shown in display Cause/action

The fan in the battery compartment for charging
lead-acid batteries via the quick charge access
is defective.
Fault: Internal charger
- Do not charge lead-acid batteries via the quick
charge access.
- Contact your authorised service centre.
The access authorisation (variant) is preventing
Truck stop: Access sys- the use of the truck. This can be caused by
tem entry of an incorrect code.
- Enable the access authorisation.
The truck control unit detects an error in the
lithium-ion battery.
Fault: Battery - Switch the truck off and on again.
- If the message continues to appear, please
contact the authorised service centre.
The truck control unit detects an error in the
lithium-ion battery.
- Switch the truck off and on again.
- If the message continues to appear, please
Fault: Battery contact the authorised service centre.
Special feature for STILL RXE:
The truck will brake to a standstill.
The drive unit is blocked.
The working hydraulics are blocked.
This message about the on-board charger is
triggered by different causes:
The fuse for the power supply has been trig-
gered.
V7074 There is a defect in the power supply.
Mains voltage error
V7051 There is a power failure.
- Re-establish the power supply.
When the power supply has been re-establish-
ed, the charging process resumes automatical-
ly.
If the truck control unit detects a movement of
the truck without the accelerator pedal being
Apply parking brake
actuated, this message appears.
- Apply the parking brake.
The desired action is only possible after releas-
Release parking brake ing the parking brake.
- Release the brake pedal.
The truck control unit detects that the braking
force of the electric parking brake is reducing.
Check parking brake - Secure the truck with wedges so that the truck
does not roll away.
- Contact your authorised service centre.

444 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Display messages

Code Shown in display Cause/action

The parking brake cannot be applied due to a
technical fault.
- Apply the parking brake according to the sec-
Parking brake cannot be
tion entitled "Malfunctions in the electric parking
applied
brake".
- Secure the truck with wedges so that the truck
does not roll away.
The parking brake cannot be applied due to a
technical fault.
- Apply the parking brake according to the sec-
Parking brake cannot be
tion entitled "Malfunctions in the electric parking
applied
brake".
- Secure the truck with wedges so that the truck
does not roll away.
The electric parking brake is not applying auto-
Apply parking brake via matically.
button - Apply the parking brake by pressing the but-
ton.
The electric parking brake cannot be released
Release parking brake via automatically.
button - Release the parking brake by pressing the
button.
The truck control unit detects that the electric
parking brake needs servicing.
Parking brake: Mainte-
- Secure the truck with wedges so that the truck
nance required
does not roll away.
- Contact your authorised service centre.
This message appears e.g. for precision load
Lower forks measurement (variant).
- Lower the fork carriage.
The lift height restriction (variant) is switched
Lift height restriction
on.
active
- Observe the heights of ceilings and entrances.
If the seat belt is not fastened and the cab door
Close cab door or seat (variant) is not closed, the driving speed is limi-
belt ted to 4 km/h and this message appears.
- Close the cab door or fasten the seat belt.
If the cab door is opened while the truck is
in motion, the truck brakes automatically to a
Close cab door
speed of 4 km/h.
- Close the cab door.
This message is not displayed during normal
Configuration: Please
operation.
wait
- Contact your authorised service centre.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 445

4 Operation
Display messages

Code Shown in display Cause/action

If the truck is equipped with an integrated charg-
er (variant) and charging is complete, this mes-
Remove charging cable sage appears.
- Disconnect the charger plug from the plug
connection on the truck.
The charging button on the truck connector for
the charging cable has been held down too
A5902 Re-insert charging long.
V6954 plug - Pull the truck connector out and re-insert it
after approx. 2 seconds.
The charger starts a new charging process.
The fan in the battery compartment for charging
with the quick charge access has reported an
error.
- Check the charging fan.
Charging port fan error
- Contact the authorised service centre if re-
quired.
- If the error has been rectified, acknowledge
the error on the display-operating unit.
If the truck is equipped with this variant, data
Unsent data will be over-
transmission must be carried out.
written
- See the associated instructions.
If the truck is switched on and an operating de-
vice is actuated when the emergency off switch
is pressed, this message appears. The desired
Emergency off active
action is only possible once the emergency off
switch is unlocked.
- Unlock the emergency off switch.
If the truck experiences a power reduction, for
example due to a battery charge state that is
Emergency mode
too low, this message appears.
- Observe the previous message.
The drive direction switch on the hydraulic oper-
ating device has failed.
Emergency driving is possible; to do so:

- Move the drive direction selection lever on the

Emerg. direct. via drive
travel direction selector and indicator module to
direction lever
the desired direction of travel and hold the drive
direction selection lever in position.
- Drive the truck to a safe area and park it se-
curely.
- Contact your authorised service centre.

446 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Display messages

Code Shown in display Cause/action

The drive direction switch on the travel direction
selector and indicator module has failed.
Emergency driving is possible; to do so:
- Set the drive direction switch on the hydraulic
Emerg. direct. via drive
operating device to the desired direction of trav-
direction switch
el and hold the drive direction switch in position.
- Drive the truck to a safe area and park it se-
curely.
- Contact your authorised service centre.
There is a fault with the charging program. The
On-board charger power
V7001 charging process is performed with reduced
reduction - service re-
V7062 power.
quired
- Contact your authorised service centre.
This message is not displayed during normal
Parameter calibration operation.
- Contact your authorised service centre.
If the configured sequence for applying the re-
straint systems is not observed, this message
Seatbelt sequence
appears.
- Fasten the seat belt.
If, for example, the truck is equipped with a
bracket as a restraint system and the acceler-
Close restraint system ator pedal is actuated, this message appears.
The truck will not move.
- Close the restraint system.
If the vibrating function (variant) is overloaded
Vibrating function by an excessive load, this message appears.
blocked — overload The shake function will remain unavailable as
long as this situation persists.
If the hazard warning system (variant) is switch-
ed on when the truck is switched off, the dis-
play-operating unit remains active. Then, when
Switch on key switch
a truck function is called up, this message ap-
pears.
- Switch on the truck.
If the truck control unit detects a very strong
Shock event detected acceleration or deceleration, e.g. in the event of
an accident, this message appears.
If the maintenance interval has been reached,
Service required this message appears.
- Contact your authorised service centre.
This message is not displayed during normal
Service mode active operation.
- Contact your authorised service centre.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 447

4 Operation
Display messages

Code Shown in display Cause/action

If the seat belt is not fastened, the driving speed
Close seat belt is limited to 4 km/h and this message appears.
- Fasten the seat belt.
If the display-operating unit is expecting confir-
Are you sure? mation from the driver, this message appears.
- Continue or cancel the input prompt.
The on-board charger software is being upda-
ted. The update is complete when the charging
Software update
process ends.
Please wait
- Wait until the charging process begins auto-
matically.
If the battery is charged after blocking sprint
mode or a normal temperature is reached, this
Enable sprint mode
message appears. Sprint mode can be used
again once the truck has been restarted.
If the battery experiences under voltage or
Sprint mode blocked — too high a temperature, this message appears.
battery Sprint mode is no longer available.
- Observe the previous message.
If the temperature at the drive units is too high,
Sprint mode blocked — this message appears. Sprint mode is no longer
temperature available.
- Observe the previous message.
If the truck is equipped with a foot switch, and a
truck function is called up when the foot switch
Dead man switch
is not actuated, this message appears.
- Actuate the foot switch.
With the "overload protection" variant, this mes-
Overload sage appears if an excessive load is picked up.
- Set down the load.
The drive units are protected against overtem-
perature. If the temperature at the drive units is
Overtemp. Drive unit too high, this message appears.
Acceleration and maximum speed are reduced.
- Allow the truck to cool down.
If the truck control unit detects an excessive
Overtemp.: Battery battery temperature, this message appears.
- Allow the truck to cool down.
A sensor for monitoring the acid level of the
battery has failed.
Do not continue to use the truck with this bat-
Monitoring: Electrics
tery.
- Have any faults rectified by the authorised
service centre.

448 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Display messages

Code Shown in display Cause/action

This message is not displayed during normal
Factory mode active operation.
- Contact your authorised service centre.
Access expired
If the truck is equipped with this variant, this
Access denied
message might appear.
Access expires in - See the associated instructions.
< 1 month
Access expires in
< 1 day
Access expires in
< 1 week If the truck is equipped with this variant, this
message might appear.
Access expires in - See the associated instructions.
< 2 days
Access expires in
< 3 days

Messages about the truck

If messages with a code appear on the dis-
play-operating unit, the truck control unit has
detected a fault. The message with a code is
stored in the message list until the cause of
the message is corrected. The saved messag-
es can be called up from the "message list".
If, for example, the reflector or the lift-height
sensor is contaminated, it usually helps to
clean these components.
– Switch the truck off and on again.
– If the message still appears, please contact
the authorised service centre.

The messages are sorted in ascending order according to their code:

Code Shown on display Description/possible solution
A2305 Fault: Control unit Collective fault on the control unit
A2899 Monitoring Collective fault of the process monitoring
The seat switch does not open
A3027 Fault: Seat switch - Stand up from the driver's seat and sit down
again.
A3035 Fault: Brake fluid Brake fluid switch
Check lift height sensor
A3143 Lift-height sensor measurement error
and reflector

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 449

4 Operation
Display messages

Code Shown on display Description/possible solution

Error on the charging connector detection
Re-insert charging
A5934 - Disconnect the connection assembly and re-
plug
connect it.
Battery overtempera- Overtemperature of the lithium battery
A5961
ture - Switch off the truck and leave it to cool down.
Insufficient lithium battery temperature
A5962 Battery too cold
- Move the truck to a warmer environment.
A5986 Fault: Control unit General battery current measurement
Fault: Internal charg-
A5993 On-board charger collective fault
er
Overtemp.: Parking
A6502 Electric parking brake detects overtemperature
brake
A6510 Fault: Parking brake Electric parking brake detects fatal fault
A6511 Fault: Parking brake Brake cannot release
A6512 Fault: Parking brake Brake cannot apply
None Error General fault

450 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Procedure in emergencies

Procedure in emergencies
Emergency shutdown 

WARNING
No electrical braking assistance is available if the
emergency off switch or the battery isolating switch
has been actuated.
Actuating the emergency off switch (1) disconnects
the drives from the power supply. Actuating the bat-
tery isolating switch (2, 3) (depending on the version)
disconnects the entire truck from the power supply.
The truck will not be held on a slope by the regenera-
tive brake.
– To brake, actuate the service brake.

CAUTION
Risk of damage to the battery male connectors!
If the battery male connectors are disconnected
while the truck is switched on (under load), an arc 2
will be produced. This can lead to erosion at the
contacts, which considerably shortens the service life
of the contacts.
– Switch off the truck before the battery male con-
nectors are disconnected.
– Do not disconnect the battery male connectors
while the truck is switched on, except in an emer-
gency.

In an emergency, all hydraulic functions and

drive functions on the truck can be shut down.
– Press the emergency off switch (1), turn
the battery isolating switch (2) to "OFF" or
press the battery isolating switch (3).
In drive mode, actuating the emergency off
3
switch (1) or turning the battery isolating
switch (2, 3) (depending on the version) has
the following effects:
● No reduction in truck speed when the accel-

erator pedal is released, according to the

drive programme selected. The truck will
coast.
● The regenerative brake does not function
6219_901-014_V2

during the first part of brake pedal travel:

1 Emergency off switch
To decelerate the truck with the mechanical 2 Battery isolating switch
brake, the brake pedal has to be pressed (Push-and-turn version)
down further 3 Battery isolating switch
(Turn version)

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 451

4 Operation
Procedure in emergencies

● The truck can only be held on a slope using

the mechanical brake, not the regenerative
brake
● No power steering effect; the steering
forces are increased by the remaining
emergency steering function
● The "Curve Speed Control" system (auto-
matic reduction in truck speed when corner-
ing) does not function. Brake the truck using
the service brake.
● The hydraulic functions are not available.

The effects of actuating the emergency off switch(1) and turning the battery isolating switch (2, 3)
differ as follows:
Emergency off switch actuated Battery isolating switch actuated
The lights work. The lights do not work.
The display-operating unit works.
The message EMERGENCY OFF active The display-operating unit does not work.
appears on the display-operating unit.

Actuating the reset button after 

1
automatic emergency shutdown

DANGER
Risk of explosion due to exceeding limit values!
During operation, the current temperatures, wear val-
ues and insulation values of various components are
monitored by sensors.
If dangerous limit values are detected, the truck con-
troller automatically shuts down the drive units. This
automatic emergency shutdown indicates a serious
malfunction.
– Remove the truck from the potentially explosive
area/area where a risk is posed by explosive ma-
terials.
– The cause of the automatic emergency shutdown 6219_901-007

must be determined by the authorised service

centre and remedied.

452 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Procedure in emergencies

DANGER
Risk of explosion by actuating the reset
button in the hazardous area!
Only the safety officer is authorised to
order the reset button to be pressed.
They must use a suitable measuring de-
vice to determine that there is not a po-
tentially explosive mixture of air in the
area around the truck. Only then may
the truck be driven out of the potentially
explosive area.

WARNING
Risk of injury from automatic emergency shutdown!
If the truck controller automatically shuts down the
drive units, no drive functions are available.
– Stop the truck with the service brake.

NOTE
It is essential that the safety officer grants ap-
proval for the following operation!
In an emergency (e.g. if the truck stops on
train tracks), the truck can be immediately
moved out of a danger area despite the auto-
matic emergency shutdown having been trig-
gered.
– To do this, push and hold the reset button
(1) and simultaneously actuate the acceler-
ator.
The truck will move in the preselected drive
direction.
– Drive the truck out of the danger area.
– Notify the authorised service centre.

NOTE
Only push the reset button without consulting
the safety officer in the event of acute danger.
Drive the truck out of the danger area (non-po-
tentially explosive area)!

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 453

4 Operation
Procedure in emergencies

Procedure if truck tips over 

DANGER
If the truck tips over, the driver could fall out and
slide under the truck with potentially fatal conse-
quences. There is a risk to life.
Failure to comply with the limits specified in these
operating instructions, e.g. driving on unacceptably
steep gradients or failing to adjust speed when cor-
nering, can cause the truck to tip over. If the truck
starts to tip over, do not leave the truck under any
circumstances. This increases the danger of being
hit by the truck.
– Do not release your seat belt.
– Never jump off the truck.
– You must adhere to the rules of behaviour if the
truck tips over. 7090_001-005

Rules of behaviour if truck tips over:

– Hold onto the steering wheel with your
hands.
– Brace your feet in the footwell.
– Bend your upper body over the steering
wheel.
– Bend your body against the direction of the
fall.

Emergency hammer 

The emergency hammer is used to rescue the

driver if he is shut inside the cab in a hazard-
ous situation, for example if the truck has top- 1
pled over and the cab door cannot be opened.
Single-pane safety glass can be struck rela-
tively safely using the emergency hammer in
order for the driver to escape or be rescued
from the danger area.
Using the emergency hammer

6321_003-097_V3

454 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Procedure in emergencies

WARNING
When glass is smashed there is a risk of injury
caused by glass splinters!
When the cab glass is smashed, splinters of glass
can shoot into the face and cause damage to skin
and eyes through cuts. When a pane of glass is
smashed, the face should be turned away and cov-
ered with the crook of the free arm.
– Protect the face when smashing a pane of glass.

– Pull the emergency hammer out of its sup-

port mounting at the handle.
– Using one of the two metal tips on the head
of the emergency hammer, hit the pane of
glass with force until it breaks.

Emergency driving via the drive

direction switch/drive direction
selection lever
If the truck is equipped with two independent
operating devices for the drive direction and
one of these operating devices fails, the truck
can be emergency driven to leave a hazard-
ous area using the operating device.
As the truck can only be moved to a limited
extent, this poses a risk of accident.
These are the possible controls for the drive
direction:
● The drive direction switch on the operating

device for the hydraulic functions

● The drive direction selection lever on the

travel direction selector and indicator mod-

ule (variant)
This emergency operation is possible in the
following situations:
● The drive direction switch on the operating

device for the hydraulic functions has failed.

The message Emerg. direct. via
drive direction lever ap-
pears.
● The drive direction selection lever on the

travel direction selector and indicator mod-

ule (variant) has failed.
The message Emerg. direct. via
drive direction switch ap-
pears.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 455

4 Operation
Procedure in emergencies

● The temperature of the display-operating

unit is too low.
This status is shown in the display as fol-
lows:

● The display-operating unit has failed.

To perform emergency driving, proceed as fol-
lows:
– Sit on the driver's seat.
– Fasten the seat belt.
– Release the parking brake.
– Push the drive direction switch/drive direc-
tion selection lever in the desired drive di-
rection.
– Press the accelerator pedal.
– Drive the truck to a safe area and park the
truck safely.
– If the error occurs frequently, contact the
authorised service centre.

Emergency lowering
If the hydraulic controller fails whilst a load is
raised, emergency lowering can be performed.
An emergency lowering screw designed for
this purpose is located on the valve block.

DANGER
There is a risk to life from falling loads
or from truck components being low-
ered.
– Do not walk beneath the raised load.
– Adhere to the steps detailed below.

456 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Procedure in emergencies

– Remove the lower lid (1) on the right-hand 

side of the footwell panelling next to the
accelerator pedal.

6301_003-036

– Remove the hexagon socket wrench (2) 

from the compartment on the right next to
the driver's seat.

6219_003-260

– Using the hexagon socket wrench, turn the 

emergency lowering screw (3) a maximum
of 1.5 revolutions to loosen it.

WARNING
The load is lowered!
Unscrewing the emergency lowering screw regulates
the lowering speed.
– Observe the list of points below.

The following applies: 3

● Tightening torque:

Max. 2.5 Nm
● Unscrewing the emergency lowering screw

slightly: 6301_003-035

The load is lowered slowly

● Unscrewing the emergency lowering screw

further:
The load is lowered quickly
After lowering:

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 457

4 Operation
Procedure in emergencies

– Re-tighten the emergency lowering screw.

– Return the hexagon socket wrench to the
support mounting in the compartment.
– Refit the lid.

DANGER
If the truck is operated while the hydraulic controller
is blocked, there is an increased risk of accidents.
– After the emergency lowering procedure, have the
malfunction rectified.
– Notify the authorised service centre.

Emergency actuation of the

electric parking brake
DANGER
There is a risk of fatal injury from being
run over if the truck rolls away.
The truck can roll away when the park-
ing brake is released.
– In an emergency, secure the truck
with wedges on the downhill-facing
side to prevent it from rolling away.
– Manually release the parking brake
only when the truck is at a standstill
with the fork lowered.

The electric parking brake can be released

and applied via an emergency actuation
mechanism.
The emergency release of the electric parking
brake must be actuated under the following
conditions:
● The parking brake is not functioning proper-

ly.
● The parking brake is not being supplied with

power (e.g. defective battery).

● The truck is being transported without a bat-

tery.

458 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Procedure in emergencies

NOTE
If the parking brake is released via the emer-
gency actuation mechanism, it is possible to
drive the truck at a low speed.
● The truck can be moved out of the hazard-

ous situation or to the repair location.

● Driving with a faulty parking brake requires

the driver to be especially vigilant.

– Lift the cover (1) and fold it up. 
Release parking brake

CAUTION
Risk of damage to components.
If the emergency actuation mechanism (2) will not
move, the brake pedal has not been depressed far
enough. Pulling too hard can damage the emergency
actuation mechanism.
– Depress the brake pedal further.
– Pull the emergency actuation mechanism (2) with
a maximum of 50 N.

– To release the mechanism, fully depress

the brake pedal and hold it down.
– Remove and hold on to the emergency ac-
tuation mechanism (2).
– Release the brake pedal. Let go of the
emergency actuation mechanism (2).
Once two grooves are visible (see arrow), the
parking brake is released.
Apply parking brake
– Fully depress the brake pedal.
The emergency actuation mechanism (2) re-
turns to its initial position.
– Release the brake pedal.
Once only one groove is visible (see arrow),
the parking brake is applied.
– If the status of the parking brake cannot be
reliably determined from the position of the
emergency actuation mechanism, secure
the truck with wedges. 6301_003-002_V2

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 459

4 Operation
Procedure in emergencies

Towing 

Safety information
DANGER
Risk of explosion through spark forma-
tion!
If the truck has to be towed out of a
potentially explosive area, the towing ve-
hicle and tow bar used must comply with
explosion-protection regulations.
Unapproved tow bars can lead to spark
formation. In potentially explosive areas,
only tow bars with plastic sheathed ends
may be used. This prevents spark for-
mation at the connections.
620-aB6306
– Ensure that the towing vehicle and
the tow bar comply with the explo-
sion-protection regulations.

DANGER
The brake system on the towing vehicle may fail.
Risk of accident!
If the brake system of the towing vehicle is not ade-
quately sized, the vehicle may not brake safely or
the brakes may fail. The towing vehicle must be able
to absorb the pulling and braking forces from the un-
braked towed load (total actual weight of the truck).
– Check the pulling and braking forces of the towing
vehicle.

DANGER
When the brakes are applied, the truck can bump
into the towing vehicle. Risk of accident!
If a rigid connection has not been used for power
transmission in two directions during towing, the
truck may drive into the towing vehicle when the tow-
ing vehicle brakes. For safety reasons, only a tested
tow bar may be used.
– Use a tested tow bar.

460 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Procedure in emergencies

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury during manoeuvring!
People can be crushed between the truck and the
towing vehicle during manoeuvring.
The towing vehicle may only be manoeuvred and the
tow bar may only be attached using a second person
as a guide. This ensures that the driver of the towing
vehicle and the mechanic attaching the tow bar are
aware of possible risks.
– Only manoeuvre with a guide.

WARNING
Risk of accident if the hydraulics fail!
If the hydraulics fail, the power steering will no longer
work. The steering will be stiff.
– Select a towing speed that allows the truck and
towing vehicle to be braked and controlled effec-
tively at all times.

WARNING
Risk of accident due to unguided truck!
If the towed truck is not steered, the truck may veer
out in an uncontrolled manner.
The truck must also be steered by a driver while
being towed.
The driver of the truck being towed must sit in the
driver's seat and fasten the seat belt before towing.
– Use the available restraint systems.

CAUTION
If the truck drive between the drive motor and the
drive axle is not interrupted, the drive may be dam-
aged.
– Set the drive direction switch to the neutral posi-
tion.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 461

4 Operation
Procedure in emergencies

CAUTION
Risk of damage to the battery male connectors!
If the battery male connectors are disconnected
while the key switch is switched on (under load), an
arc will be produced. This can lead to erosion at the
contacts, which considerably shortens the service life
of the contacts.
– Switch off the key switch before the battery male
connectors are disconnected.
– Do not disconnect the battery male connectors
while the key switch is switched on, except in an
emergency.

Procedure

NOTE
As a general rule, a towing procedure out of
a potentially explosive area must be approved
by the safety officer.
– Set down the load and lower the fork arms
close to the ground.
– Set the drive direction switch to the neutral
position.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Switch off the truck.
– Disconnect the battery male connector.
– Check the pulling and braking forces of the
towing vehicle.
– With the help of a guide, move the towing
vehicle to the truck.
– Secure the tow bar to the tow coupling on
the towing vehicle and the truck.
– Sit in the driver's seat in the truck being
towed. Fasten the seat belt.
– Use the available restraint systems.
– Manually release the parking brake (refer
to the previous section entitled "Emergency
actuation of the electric parking brake".
The truck is now held in place only by the
braking force of the towing vehicle.
– Select a towing speed that allows the truck
and towing vehicle to be effectively braked
and controlled at all times.

462 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Procedure in emergencies

– Tow the truck out of the potentially explo-

sive area.

NOTE
If the service brake is actuated very sharply,
the parking brake may apply. In this case,
manually release the parking brake.
– Once the towing procedure is complete, al-
low the parking brake to apply by actuating
the brake pedal.
– Make sure that the emergency actuation
mechanism returns to the initial position or
that only one groove is visible.
– If the status of the emergency actuation
mechanism is unclear, secure the truck af-
ter towing using wedges so that the truck
cannot roll away.
– Remove the tow bar.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 463

4 Operation
Connecting and disconnecting the battery

Connecting and disconnecting the battery

Safety instructions for connect-
ing and disconnecting the bat-
tery male connectors
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
No work must be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas!
– Only connect or disconnect battery
male connectors outside of potentially
explosive areas.

CAUTION
Risk of damage to the battery male connector!
If the battery male connectors are connected or
disconnected while the truck is switched on (under
load), an arc will be produced. This arc can damage
the contacts and considerably shorten the service life
of the contacts.
– Do not connector disconnect the battery male
connectors while the truck is switched on.
– Make sure that the truck is switched off before
connecting or disconnecting the battery male con-
nectors.

CAUTION
There is a risk of short circuit if the ca-
bles are damaged.
Do not crush the battery cable when
closing the battery door.
– Ensure that the battery cable does
not come into contact with the battery
door.

464 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Connecting and disconnecting the battery

CAUTION
Risk of damaging the battery male connector when
closing the battery door!
When closing the battery door, the battery door may
collide with the battery male connector.
As a result, the battery male connector may become
damaged. If this occurs, the authorised service cen-
tre must replace the battery male connector. Until the
battery male connector is replaced, it is prohibited to
use the truck in areas at risk of explosion or where a
risk is posed by explosive materials.
– Make sure that the battery door does not collide
with the battery male connector.

NOTE
The truck is not approved for use in potentially
explosive areas if the battery male connectors
are unsecured or not fully inserted.

NOTE
If there is an potential equalisation point, the
potential equalisation must be connected be-
fore the truck is used. The potential equali-
sation point is identified by the information
sign .

Connecting the battery male

connector
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
Do not perform any work on the truck in
potentially explosive areas!

CAUTION
Risk of damage to the battery male connector!
If the battery male connector is connected while the
key switch is on (under load), a jump spark will be
produced. This jump spark can damage the contacts
and considerably shorten the service life of the con-
tacts.
– Switch off the key switch before connecting the
battery male connector.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 465

4 Operation
Connecting and disconnecting the battery

NOTE
Depending on the truck configuration, the po-
sitions of the battery male connector and the
truck connector may be swapped. The ap-
pearance of the connectors may also vary.
However, the procedure is the same.
– Open the battery door.
– Grasp the battery male connector (2) by the 
handle (1) and insert the battery male con- 1 2 3 4
nector into the truck connector (4).
– Using the special screwdriver from the ac-
cessories, tighten the locking screw (3) by
turning the screw in a clockwise direction.

WARNING
Risk of accident due to the battery male connector
not being secured! 5
The battery male connector is only protected against
being disconnected when the locking screw is tight-
ened.
Otherwise, the battery male connector may work
loose during operation. The power supply of the truck
is then interrupted. Power-assisted steering and re-
generative braking will fail.
– Always secure the battery male connector.

6219_901-023

NOTE
The truck is not approved for use in potentially
explosive areas if the battery male connectors
are unsecured.
– If necessary, connect the potential equalisa-
tion connector (5) to the battery tray.
The potential equalisation point is identified by
the decal information .

CAUTION
There is a risk of short circuit if the ca-
bles are damaged.
Do not crush the battery cables when
closing the battery door.
– Ensure that the battery cable does
not come into contact with the battery
door.

– Close the battery door

466 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Connecting and disconnecting the battery

Disconnecting the battery male

connector

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
No work must be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas!

CAUTION
Risk of damage to the battery male connector!
If the battery male connector is disconnected while
the key switch is switched on (under load), an arc
will be produced. This can lead to erosion at the
contacts, which considerably shortens the service life
of the contacts.
– Switch off the key switch before disconnecting the
battery male connector.
– Do not disconnect the battery male connector
while the key switch is switched on, except in an
emergency.

NOTE
Depending on the truck configuration, the po-
sitions of the battery male connector and the
truck connector may be swapped. The ap-
pearance of the connectors may also vary.
However, the procedure is the same.
– Park the truck securely and switch it off.
– Open the battery door.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 467

4 Operation
Connecting and disconnecting the battery

– Using the special screwdriver, loosen the 

locking screw (3) by turning the screw in an 1 2 3 4
anti-clockwise direction.

NOTE
The locking screw is secured to prevent it from
working loose and remains on the truck con-
nector.
– Grasp the battery male connector (2) by the
handle (1) and pull the battery male con- 5
nector out of the truck connector (4).
– Place the battery male connector (2) safely
on the battery.
– Before removing the battery, also discon-
nect the potential equalisation connector
(5).
The potential equalisation point is identified by
the decal information . 6219_901-023

CAUTION
Risk of damaging the battery male connector when
closing the battery door!
When closing the battery door, the battery door may
collide with the battery male connector.
As a result, the battery male connector may become
damaged. If this occurs, the authorised service cen-
tre must replace the battery male connector. Until the
battery male connector is replaced, it is prohibited
to use the truck in areas where a risk is posed by
explosive materials.
– Make sure that the battery door does not collide
with the battery male connector.

CAUTION
There is a risk of short circuit if the ca-
bles are damaged.
Do not crush the battery cables when
closing the battery door.
– Ensure that the battery cable does
not come into contact with the battery
door.

– Close the battery door.

468 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling the battery

Handling the battery

Safety regulations for handling
the battery
DANGER
There is a risk of explosion if non-ex-
plosion-protected batteries are used!
Batteries intended for use in potentially
explosive areas are designed for certain
explosion groups, categories and tem-
perature ranges. Batteries that do not
comply with explosion-protection regula-
tions can cause explosions in the sur-
rounding atmosphere in potentially ex-
plosive areas!
Only batteries that are explosion-protec-
ted in accordance with applicable guide-
lines, referred to as ATEX batteries, may
be used. The battery being used must
match the permissible area of use of the
truck.
– Only use explosion-protected batter-
ies of the same type in accordance
with the "Battery specifications" sec-
tion.
– Batteries may be checked only by a
competent person.
– Observe the explosion-protection reg-
ulations.
– Compare the permissible operating
areas of the truck and battery as lis-
ted on the respective nameplates.

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
When handling or charging batteries in
potentially explosive areas, spark forma-
tion or overheating can lead to explo-
sions in the surrounding atmosphere. No
work may be performed on the truck in
potentially explosive areas.
– Charge batteries only outside poten-
tially explosive areas.

– National statutory provisions for the country

of use must be followed when setting up
and operating battery charging stations.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 469

4 Operation
Handling the battery

CAUTION
Potential for damage to the battery
charger!
Incorrect connection or incorrect opera-
tion of the charging station or the battery
charger may result in damage to compo-
nents.
– Follow the operating instructions for
the charging station or battery charg-
er and for the battery.

– Observe the following safety regulations

when maintaining, charging and changing
the battery.

NOTE
To simplify the description of the safety regu-
lations, this section only refers to the "battery
door". The safety regulations and instructions
also apply to trucks with a battery cover. They
apply 1:1.

Parking the truck securely

– If work is being performed on the battery,
park the truck outside the potentially explo-
sive areas.
The following points must be satisfied for the
truck to be used:
● The battery male connectors must be con-

nected and secured

● The battery door must be closed.

Maintenance personnel
Batteries may only be charged, maintained or
replaced by properly trained personnel in ac-
cordance with the instructions from the manu-
facturers of the battery, battery charger and
truck.
– Follow the handling instructions for the bat-
tery and the operating instructions for the
battery charger.

470 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling the battery

WARNING
Risk of crushing and shearing!
The battery is very heavy. There is a risk
of serious injury if any parts of the body
are caught under the battery.
There is a risk of injury if any parts of the
body are wedged between the battery
door and the edge of the chassis when
the battery door is closed.
– Wear safety shoes when replacing
the battery.
– Only close the battery door if there
are no parts of the body between
the battery door and the edge of the
chassis.

The battery must only be replaced in accord-

ance with the directions in these operating in-
structions.
– When charging and maintaining the battery,
observe the manufacturer's maintenance in-
structions for the battery and the battery
charger.

Fire protection measures

DANGER
Risk of explosion due to flammable
gases!
During charging, the battery releases a
mixture of oxygen and hydrogen. This
gas mixture (oxyhydrogen) is explosive
and must not be ignited.
There must be no flammable materi-
als or spark-forming operating materials
within 2 m of either the truck when it is
parked for charging or the battery charg-
er.
– When working with batteries, take the
following safety precautions.

– Keep away from open flames and do not

smoke.
– Ensure that work areas are adequately ven-
tilated.
– Park the truck securely and switch it off.
– Disconnect the battery male connectors be-
fore charging and only when the truck and
the battery charger are switched off.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 471

4 Operation
Handling the battery

– Keep the battery door open during charg-

ing.
– Do not place any metal objects on the bat-
tery.
– Fully open any protective structures (e.g.
fabric-covered cab).
– Have fire extinguishing equipment ready.

Lifting accessories
DANGER
Risk of accident!
The battery may fall from the lifting accessory. The
lifting accessory may tip over and be damaged. If this
happens, there is a risk to life and limb.
The battery must be removed only when the truck is
on level, even ground with sufficient load capacity.
The load capacity of the lifting accessory used (see
operating instructions or nameplate) must at least
match the battery weight (see battery identification
plate).
– Check the load capacity of the lifting accessory.
– Remove the battery on suitable ground.

Battery weight and dimensions

DANGER
Risk of tipping due to change in battery weight!
The battery weight and dimensions affect the stability
of the truck. When replacing the battery, the weight
ratios must not be changed. The battery weight must
remain within the weight range specified on the
nameplate.
– Do not remove or change the position of ballast
weights.
– Note the battery weight.

Performing battery maintenance

The cell covers of the battery must be kept dry
and clean. Do not open trays that have been
sealed by the manufacturer.
Terminals and cable shoes must be clean,
lightly coated with battery grease and screwed
on tightly.
– Neutralise any spilt battery acid immediate-
ly.

472 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling the battery

– For information on handling battery acid,

see the "Battery acid" section in the chap-
ter entitled "Safety regulations for handling
consumables".

Damage to cables and battery male 

connectors

CAUTION
There is a risk of short circuit if the ca-
bles are damaged.
Do not crush the battery cables when
closing the battery door.
– Check the battery cables for damage.
– When removing and reinstalling the
battery, ensure that the battery cables
are not damaged.
– Ensure that the battery cables do not
come into contact with the battery
door.
6210_600-001

CAUTION Category-3 battery male connector

Potential for damage to the battery male connector!
If the battery male connector is disconnected or con-
nected while the truck is switched on or while the
battery charger is under load, an electrical arc or a
transition spark will be produced at the battery male
connector. This can lead to erosion at the contacts
and can considerably shorten the service life of the
contacts.
– Switch off the truck or the battery charger before
disconnecting or connecting the battery male con-
nector.
– Do not disconnect the battery male connector
while under load, except in an emergency.

Ventilation gap
The ventilation gaps between the battery door
and the chassis are used for forced-air cooling
of the battery compartment.
– Do not plug the ventilation gaps.
– If the battery door is deformed, contact the
authorised service centre.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 473

4 Operation
Handling the battery

Maintaining the battery

DANGER
Danger to life and limb!
– Observe the instructions in the chapter entitled
"Safety regulations when handling the battery".

WARNING
Battery acid is toxic and corrosive!
– Observe the safety regulations in the chapter enti-
tled "Battery acid".

NOTE
Battery maintenance is carried out in accord-
ance with the battery manufacturer's operating
instructions. The operating instructions for the
battery charger must also be observed. On-
ly the instructions that came with the battery
charger are valid. If any of these instructions
are missing, request the relevant instructions
from the dealer.
Battery maintenance consists of the following
steps:
● Checking the battery condition, acid level

and acid density

● Checking the battery charge state

● Charging the lead-acid battery

● Equalising charging to preserve the battery

capacity

474 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling the battery

Checking the battery condition,

acid level and acid density
WARNING
The electrolyte (diluted sulphuric acid) is
poisonous and corrosive!
– Observe the safety regulations for
handling battery acid; see the chapter
entitled "Battery acid".
– Wear personal protective equipment
(rubber gloves, apron and protection
goggles).
– Rinse away spilt battery acid immedi-
ately using plenty of water.

CAUTION
Improper handling of batteries can cause damage!
A competent person must check that the battery is in
proper condition.
The tray cover interlock and connection assemblies
must close properly. It must only be possible to open
them using tools. (Category-2 version)
The reverse polarity protection of the battery male
connectors must be checked.
– Observe the information in the operating instruc-
tions for the battery.
– Ensure that the battery tray is closed correctly all
the way round.
– Ensure that a tray lid is present for category-2
versions.
– Only use batteries and plug connectors that are
approved for potentially explosive areas and for
the truck.

The safety officer will allocate a safe place

where the following work can be performed.
– Remove the battery from the truck.
– Open the battery tray cover. (Category-2
version)
– Check any ventilation openings for damage.
– Check the coating of the battery tray and
the tray cover for damage.
– Check the battery for any cracks in the
housing, raised plates and acid leaks.
– Check the battery male connectors.
– Check cable inlets for damage.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 475

4 Operation
Handling the battery

– A defective battery must only be repaired by

the authorised service centre.
– Open the filler cap (1) and check the acid 
level. 1
For batteries with "caged cell plugs", the liquid
must reach the bottom of the cage.
For batteries without "caged cell plugs", the
liquid must reach a height of approx. 10 to 15
mm above the lead plates.
– If the fluid level is too low, top up the fluid
with only distilled or demineralised water.
– Clean the battery cell covers and dry if nec-
essary.
– Remove any oxidation residue on the bat-
tery terminals then coat the terminals with
acid-free grease. 2 6321_003-126

– At regular intervals, have the battery-termi-

nal clips (2) tightened by the authorised
service centre in accordance with the bat-
tery manufacturer's instructions.
– Check the acid density with an acidimeter.
After charging, the acid density must be be-
tween 1.28 and 1.30 kg/l.
For a discharged battery, the acid density
must be no lower than 1.14 kg/l.
– Close the filler cap (1) again.

476 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling the battery

Checking the battery charging

state and calibrating the battery
charge indicator
CAUTION
Deep discharges shorten the service life of the bat-
tery.
Deep discharge begins when the battery charge dis-
play is red (3) (0% of the available battery capacity,
i.e. approx. 20% of the nominal capacity).
– Deep discharge must be avoided (see the section
entitled "Equalising charge to prevent a deep dis-
charge of the battery").
– Stop working with the truck immediately.
– Charge the battery immediately.
– Do not leave batteries in a discharged or partly
discharged state.

An important function of the battery charge in-

dicator is to protect the battery from deep dis-
charge. The battery discharge indicator shows
the approximate battery charge status. The
accuracy of the display increases as the bat-
tery continues to discharge.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Switch on the truck.
– Read the charging state on the display of
the display-operating unit.
– Charge a discharged or partly discharged
battery.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 477

4 Operation
Handling the battery

Meaning of the colours in the display 

NOTE
An abrupt change in the charging state display
does not indicate a malfunction. The battery
charge indicator allows the driver to detect any
preliminary damage to the battery. If abrupt
changes in the display begin to occur more
frequently, have the battery and the charging
process checked by the authorised service
centre.
1 Green:
The battery is sufficiently charged
2 Yellow:
Charge the battery soon.
3 Red:
Stop working. Charge the battery imme-
diately. The battery is at risk of deep dis-
charge.
The battery charge indicator has a protective
function that prevents the displayed charg-
ing state from being affected. The charging
state of a heavily discharged battery (residual
charge < 30%) is not updated in the display
until the battery charge indicator detects a fully
charged battery.
– Never operate the batteries to the point of
full discharge.
As soon as the battery charge indicator de-
tects that the connected battery has been fully
charged or a new battery has been connected,
the display refreshes.
If the charging state drops to a significantly
lower value immediately after the start of use,
this indicates a battery problem or a charging
error.
– Contact the authorised service centre if re-
quired.

Calibrating the battery charge indicator

When the battery is replaced, the discharge of
the newly inserted battery may be calculated
and displayed incorrectly due to different age-
ing or discharge. This can even occur when
the same battery types are used. Therefore,
the Access authorisation for the fleet manag-
er allows the battery charge indicator to be
478 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Operation 4
Handling the battery

calibrated to the newly inserted battery. The

stored battery charge history is then deleted in
the display-operating unit.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
– Press the Truck settings softkey . 

– Press the Battery softkey. 

Driving programme

Battery

6219_003-327_en

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 479

4 Operation
Handling the battery

– Press the Calibrate discharge 

indicator softkey.
After the instruction has been executed,
the message Calibration successful Calibrate discharge indicator
or Calibration unsuccessful is dis-
played.
– If the calibration failed, try again.
– If the calibration fails repeatedly, contact
your authorised service centre.

6219_003-328_en

Charging the lead-acid battery

DANGER
Explosive gases are generated during
charging.
The oxyhydrogen gas produced during
charging is usually odourless. Older bat-
teries may have a sulphurous odour due
to contamination.
– Ensure that work areas are adequate-
ly ventilated.
– For trucks with a cab (including fabric-
covered cabs), ensure adequate ven-
tilation in the cab (variant).

DANGER
Risk of explosion if the battery is not extended!
If the truck is equipped with an electric battery carrier
(variant), the following applies:
The battery carrier reduces the space between the
battery and the battery hood. During charging, lead-
acid batteries generate explosive oxyhydrogen gas.
Sufficient quantities of this gas must be removed
from the truck. This gas can only be removed if
the battery is fully extended for the entire charging
process. Charging a lead-acid battery within the truck
is not permitted.
– Fully extend the battery when charging.

480 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling the battery

DANGER
Risk of explosion due to old batteries!
Old and inadequately maintained batteries can cause
excessive gas emissions and excessive heating dur-
ing charging.
The increased production of explosive gas can lead
to an explosion.
– If an increased build-up of heat or a sulphurous
odour is detected, stop the charging process im-
mediately.
– Provide good ventilation.
– Inform the authorised service centre so that it can
determine the condition of the battery.

DANGER
There is a risk of damage, short circuit and explo-
sion!
– Do not place any metal objects or tools on the
battery.
– Keep away from naked flames.
– Do not smoke.

WARNING
Battery acid is toxic and corrosive!
– Observe the safety regulations in the chapter enti-
tled "Battery acid".

CAUTION
Risk of damage to the battery charger.
Incorrect connection or incorrect opera-
tion of the charging station or the battery
charger may result in damage to compo-
nents.
– Follow the operating instructions for
the charging station or battery charg-
er and for the battery.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 481

4 Operation
Handling the battery

CAUTION
Potential for damage to the battery male connector.
If the battery male connector is disconnected while
the truck is switched on (under load), an arc will be
produced. This can lead to erosion at the contacts,
which considerably shortens the service life of the
contacts.
– Switch off the truck before the battery male con-
nector is disconnected.
– Do not disconnect the battery male connector
while the truck is switched on, except in an emer-
gency.

CAUTION
Risk of damage to components.
Damage and contamination of the battery male con-
nector or the plug on the battery charger can lead to
premature wear of the counterpart.
– Before each charging process, check both sides
of the connection assembly between the battery
charger and the battery for damage and contami-
nation.
– Remove contamination immediately.
– Do not continue to use a damaged connection as-
sembly. Arrange for the authorised service centre
to repair the connection assembly.

NOTE
STILL recommends that you always use com-
ponents (plug and socket) from the same
manufacturer for the connection assembly be-
tween the battery charger and the battery. The
use of components from different manufactur-
ers can cause increased wear due to the dif-
ferent tolerances in the shape and geometry
of the components.
– Park the truck securely.
– Ensure that work areas are adequately ven-
tilated.
– Make sure that the external ventilation gaps
on the truck are unobstructed and are not
blocked.
– Fully open any protective structures (e.g.
fabric-covered cab).
– Open the battery door completely.
– If the truck is equipped with an electric bat-
tery carrier (variant), fully extend the battery

482 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling the battery

out of the truck. See the section entitled

"Replacing the battery using an electric bat-
tery carrier (variant)" in this chapter.
– Disconnect the battery male connector.
– Do not place any metal objects or tools on
the battery.
– Keep away from naked flames. Do not
smoke.
– Check the battery cables for damage.
If necessary, have the battery cables re-
placed by the authorised service centre.
– Connect the battery male connector to the
plug on the battery charger.
– Adjust the settings of the battery charger to
the battery capacity of the lead-acid battery.
– Start the battery charger.

NOTE
Observe the information in the operating in-
structions for the battery and the battery
charger.

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
To ensure adequate ventilation, the bat-
tery door must be locked in the charging
position using the support bracket during
the charging process.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 483

4 Operation
Handling the battery

The battery door can be locked in the open 

position using a support bracket. 1
– Pull the support bracket (1) upwards. Re-
move the support bracket from its support
mounting (2) on the battery door.
– Swivel the support bracket (1) outwards in a
clockwise direction. 2
– Clip the support bracket (1) into the support
eyelet (3) on the truck.
The battery door will lock into a slightly open
position.

After charging
CAUTION 3
Risk of damage to components!
– Switch off the battery charger before you discon-
nect the charging cable.

– Switch off the battery charger.

– Swing the support bracket (1) back into
position and lock it into the support mount-
ing (2) on the battery door.
– Open the battery door. Lock the battery
door in the open position.
– Disconnect the battery male connector from
the plug on the battery charger.
– Connect the battery male connector to the
truck.

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Only disconnect the connection assem-
blies when the truck and battery charger
are switched off.

6301_003-012

CAUTION
There is a risk of short circuit if the ca-
bles are damaged.
Do not crush the battery cable when
closing the battery door.
– Ensure that the battery cable does
not come into contact with the battery
door.

484 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling the battery

– Close the battery door. When doing so, en- 

sure that no cables are crushed between
the chassis and the battery door.
The battery door must be locked in place.
The truck is equipped with a door contact
switch for the battery door. If the battery
door is not fully closed, the message Close
battery door appears on the display of
the display-operating unit. The truck will not
move.

Equalising charging to preserve

the battery capacity
Equalising charges ensure that unevenly
charged battery cells are evenly charged
again. This preserves the service life of the
battery and the battery capacity.
An equalising charge should be carried out
in accordance with the battery manufacturer's
instructions several times a month after the
normal charging process.

NOTE
Depending on the battery charger used, the
equalising charge may not begin until 24
hours have elapsed. A period when no shifts
are running, such as the weekend, is therefore
ideal for performing the equalising charge.
– Observe the information in the operating in-
structions of the battery charger regarding
how to perform an equalising charge.

Starting the equalising charge

– Charge the battery.
– After charging, leave the battery in the
charger.
The battery charger remains switched on.
Depending on the type of battery charger,

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 485

4 Operation
Handling the battery

the equalising charge begins between 6 and

24 hours after the end of the actual charging
process. The equalising charge takes up to
2 hours.
– Please refer to the operating instructions
from the manufacturer of the battery charg-
er.

Ending the equalising charge

The equalising charge ends automatically. If
the battery is required during this process, you
can interrupt the equalising charge by pushing
the "stop button" on the battery charger.
– Please refer to the operating instructions
from the manufacturer of the battery charg-
er.

CAUTION
Damage to the connection assembly is possible!
If you disconnect the charging cable while the battery
charger is switched on, an arc will be produced. This
can lead to erosion at the contacts, which considera-
bly shortens the service life of the contacts.
– Switch off the battery charger before you discon-
nect the charging cable.

– Switch off the battery charger.

– Disconnect the battery male connector from
the plug for the battery charger.
– Insert the battery male connector fully into
the plug connection on the truck.

Battery maintenance indicator

for lead-acid batteries (variant)
If the truck is equipped with the battery main-
tenance indicator (variant), the acid level of
the lead-acid battery is permanently monitored
via sensors.

486 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling the battery

If the acid level is too low, the message 

Checking the battery acid level
appears on the display of the display-operat-
ing unit.
0,09 m
CAUTION
3,3° Check
Risk of damage to the lead-acid battery! battery acid
level
If the acid level in one or more battery cells is too
low, the lead-acid battery will become damaged and
lose power.
– Do not continue to use the truck with this battery.

– Check the acid level and correct if necessa-

ry, see the section "Checking the condition,
acid level and acid density of the battery" in
the chapter "Handling the battery". 6219_003-353_en

If a sensor fails, the message Monitoring: 

Electrics appears.
Do not continue to use the truck with this bat-
tery. The drive and hydraulic functions are de-
activated.
– Park the truck securely. Monitoring:
Electrics
– Have any defects rectified by the authorised
service centre.

6219_003-354_en

Handling the gel battery

General
In contrast to lead-acid batteries, gel batter-
ies are largely maintenance-free. With gel bat-
teries, there is no need to refill distilled wa-
ter. The electrolyte is in gel form and, unlike
conventional lead acid batteries, is non-liquid.
For this reason, gel batteries also do not pro-
duce any oxyhydrogen gas during the charg-
ing process.
However, these benefits are at the expense of
the amount of usable energy in the battery.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 487

4 Operation
Handling the battery

While a conventional lead-acid battery can

use 80% of the energy contained in the bat-
tery, the gel battery uses only 60%. On the
other hand, a gel battery is safe from deep
discharge due to its design (according to DIN
43 539, Part 5).

Identification
Gel batteries are marked with the abbreviation
"PzV". It is located on the identification plate of
the battery.

Safety regulations for handling the bat-

tery
– If a charging station for gel batteries is set
up, follow the national regulations of the
country of use.

CAUTION
Risk of damage to the battery charger!
Components may be damaged if the battery charger
is connected or operated incorrectly.
– Follow the operating instructions for the charging
station or battery charger and for the battery.

Requirements for the charger

A gel battery requires a high-frequency charg-
er. This means that the gel battery cannot be
charged with a charger for conventional lead-
acid batteries. For this reason, the charging
socket of the gel battery has a special green
coding pin. This coding pin ensures that it is
possible only for a charger for gel batteries to
form a connection assembly.

CAUTION
Possible damage to the gel battery!
Gel batteries may be charged only with chargers that
are approved for gel batteries. A different charger
may damage or destroy the battery.
– Do not remove, replace or convert the coding pin
in the battery charging socket.
– Use only chargers that are approved for gel bat-
teries.

488 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling the battery

Maintenance personnel
Only personnel trained for this purpose may:
● Charge the battery

● Replace the battery

This work must be carried out according to the

instructions of the battery manufacturer and of
the charger manufacturer.
– Observe the manufacturer's operating in-
structions for the battery and the charger.
– Observe the following safety information
when replacing and charging the battery.

WARNING
Risk of crushing/shearing!
The battery is very heavy. There is a risk of serious
injury if any parts of the body are caught under the
battery.
There is a risk of injury if any parts of the body are
wedged between the battery door and the edge of
the chassis when the battery door is closed.
– Always wear safety shoes when replacing the bat-
tery.
– Only close the battery door if there are no parts of
the body between the battery door and the edge
of the chassis.

– The battery must only be replaced in ac-

cordance with the directions in these oper-
ating instructions.
– When charging and maintaining the bat-
tery, observe the manufacturer's operating
instructions for the battery and the battery
charger.

Battery weight and dimensions

DANGER
Risk of tipping due to change in battery weight
The battery weight and dimensions affect the stability
of the industrial truck. When replacing the battery,
the weight ratios must not be changed. The battery
weight must remain within the weight range specified
on the nameplate.
– Do not remove or change the position of ballast
weights.
– Note the battery weight.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 489

4 Operation
Handling the battery

Damage to cables and battery male

connector
CAUTION
There is a risk of short circuit if the cables are dam-
aged.
Do not crush the battery cable when closing the bat-
tery door.
– Check the battery cable for damage.
– When removing and reinstalling the battery, en-
sure that the battery cables are not damaged.
– Ensure that the battery cable does not come into
contact with the battery door.

CAUTION
Potential for damage to the battery male connector!
If the battery male connector is disconnected or con-
nected while the key switch is switched on or while
the battery charger is under load, an arc or a tran-
sition spark will be produced at the battery male
connector. This can lead to erosion at the contacts
and can considerably shorten the service life of the
contacts.
– Switch off the key switch or the battery charger
before the battery male connector is disconnected
or connected.
– Do not disconnect the battery male connector
while under load, except in an emergency.

Charging the gel battery

The charging procedure is in principle the
same as for a lead-acid battery. However, no
protective measures are required for the es-
cape of oxyhydrogen gas.
– Park the industrial truck securely.
– Open the battery door completely.
– Disconnect the battery male connector.
– Do not place any metal objects or tools on
the battery.
– Check the battery cables for damage.
If necessary, have the battery cables re-
placed by the authorised service centre.
– Connect the battery female connector to the
plug on the battery charger.
– Adjust the settings of the battery charger to
the battery capacity of the gel battery.

490 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Handling the battery

– Start the battery charger.

NOTE
Observe the information in the operating in-
structions for the battery and the battery
charger.

After charging
CAUTION
Risk of damage to components!
– Switch off the battery charger before you discon-
nect the charging cable.

– Switch off the battery charger.

– Disconnect the plug of the battery charger
from the battery female connector.
– Connect the battery female connector to the
industrial truck.

CAUTION
There is a risk of short circuit if the cables are dam-
aged!
Do not crush the battery cable when closing the bat-
tery door.
– Ensure that the battery cable does not come into
contact with the battery door.

– Close the battery door. When doing so, en-

sure that no cables are crushed between
the chassis and the battery door.
The battery door must be locked in place.
The truck has a door contact switch for the
battery door. If the battery door is not fully
closed, the message Close battery door ap-
pears on the display of the display-operating
unit. The industrial truck will not move.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 491

4 Operation
Replacing and transporting the battery

Replacing and transporting the battery

General information on replacing
the battery
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
No work must be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas!
– Only connect or disconnect battery
male connectors outside of potentially
explosive areas.
– Only change batteries outside of po-
tentially explosive areas.

CAUTION
Risk of components being damaged by the lifting
accessory and battery rolling away!
If the battery is not on a level, smooth floor with suf-
ficient load-bearing capacity, lifting accessories and
the battery can roll away in an uncontrolled manner.
– Follow the operating instructions for the lifting ac-
cessories used.
– Always remove the battery on a level, smooth
floor with sufficient load capacity.

Batteries can be removed with a truck and

with a lift truck equipped with a battery change
frame.
The load capacity of the lifting accessory used
must at least match the battery weight. See
the battery nameplate.

NOTE
Depending on the version, a potential equali-
sation connection is present between the bat-
tery tray and truck. When removing the bat-
tery, this connection must be disconnected at
the potential equalisation point. The potential
equalisation point is identified by the decal in-
formation .

492 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Replacing and transporting the battery

Changing to a different battery

type
The truck can be converted to a different bat-
tery type and capacity.
The new battery capacity and new battery
type must be set in the display-operating unit.
● If this is not done, the actual battery dis-

charge status cannot be determined. The

battery charge level is not displayed cor-
rectly.
● In the worst case scenario, deep discharge

can damage the battery.

Using his/her access authorisation, the fleet
manager can set the new battery capacity and
the new battery type in the display-operating
unit.

NOTE
When changing to TENSOR® batteries, the
authorised service centre must limit the maxi-
mum speed of the truck to 17 km/h for techni-
cal reasons.

Setting the new battery capacity and the

new battery type
– Stop the truck.
– Actuate the parking brake.
– Press the button .
– Press the "Settings" softkey .
The first menu level appears.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
The "Settings menu" opens on the display.
– Press the Truck settings softkey .
– Press the Battery softkey.
– Press the Battery type softkey.
The possible batteries for the truck are listed
in the "Battery type" menu.
– Press the corresponding softkey for the de-
sired battery type.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 493

4 Operation
Replacing and transporting the battery

The activation bar next to the selection lights

up.
– Press the Back button .
– Press the Capacity softkey.
– Press the corresponding softkey for the bat-
tery capacity according to the nameplate of
the battery.
The activation bar next to the selection lights
up.
The main display button takes you to the
main display.

Wire cross-section of the battery

cable on the "High Performance"
variant
If the truck is fitted with the "High Perform-
ance" variant, the components have a higher
current draw.

CAUTION
Risk of overheating of the battery cable.
Due to the higher current draw, the wire cross-sec-
tion of the battery cable must be at least 70 mm2.
– Ensure that all batteries in use have a battery
cable with a wire cross-section of at least 70 mm2.

NOTE
If different batteries are used in alternating
battery operation, always ensure that all bat-
teries used have a battery cable with a wire
cross-section of at least 70 mm2.

494 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Replacing and transporting the battery

Opening and closing the battery 

door

Opening the battery door

– Grasp the door handle (1) on the battery
door. Open the battery door by pulling it
backwards.
The hinge of the battery door holds the battery
door in the open position.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 495

4 Operation
Replacing and transporting the battery

Locking the battery door in a slightly 

open position 1
The battery door can be locked in the open
position using a support bracket.

– Pull the support bracket (1) upwards. Re-

move the support bracket from its support
mounting (2) on the battery door. 2
– Swivel the support bracket (1) outwards in a
clockwise direction.
– Clip the support bracket (1) into the support
eyelet (3) on the truck.
– To close the battery door, swing the sup-
port bracket (1) back into position. Lock the
support bracket (1) into the support mount- 3
ing (2) on the battery door.

Closing the battery door

WARNING
When closing the battery door, limbs
could become trapped. There is a risk
of crushing!
When closing the battery door, nothing
should come between the battery door
and the edge of the chassis.
– Carefully close the battery door.
– Only close the battery door if there
are no parts of the body in the way.

WARNING
When closing the battery door, the bat-
tery cable could become trapped. There
is risk of short circuit due to the battery
cable being crushed or sheared off!
When closing the battery door, nothing
should come between the battery door
and the edge of the chassis.
– Carefully close the battery door. 6301_003-012

– Only close the battery door if the bat-

tery cable is not in the way.

496 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Replacing and transporting the battery

WARNING
Risk of accident due to the battery door opening!
An unlocked battery door may open if the truck de-
celerates sharply. If the battery door opens while
driving, there is risk of damage from a collision.
– Ensure that the battery door is securely shut.
– Drive the truck only when the battery door is
locked.

DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from the battery sliding out!
The battery may fall out if the battery door is not
locked and the truck tips over. The battery could fall
on the driver!
– Ensure that the battery door is securely shut.
– Drive the truck only when the battery door is
locked.

NOTE
The apertures in the door are necessary for
forced ventilation and must not be blocked.
– If the battery door is fully open, grasp the
battery door by its handle and open it slight-
ly further.
This will release the latch in the hinge.
– Close the battery door by hand until it en-
gages in the lock.
The battery door must be locked in place.
The truck is equipped with a door contact
switch for the battery door. If the battery
door is not fully closed, the message Close
battery door appears on the display of
the display-operating unit. The truck will not
move.

NOTE
The authorised service centre can parameter-
ise this setting so that the truck travels at
3 km/h when the battery door is open.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 497

4 Operation
Replacing and transporting the battery

Replacing the battery using a 

truck A

Preparation
WARNING
Risk of accident!
The load capacity of the truck in use must at least
match the battery weight (see the battery name-
plate).
– Observe the nameplates of the battery and of the
change frame.

– Before picking up the battery, the fork arms

must be adjusted to match the opening
in the chassis (A). Push the fork arms to-
6219_003-123

gether, selecting the maximum possible dis-

tance.
The fork arms must not be moved under the
battery any further than the length of the chas-
sis opening (B = max. 850 mm).
It is useful to mark this measurement (B)
(measured from the fork tips) on the fork arms.

Removing the battery

– Park the truck securely and switch it off.
– Open the battery door.

CAUTION
Risk of damaging the battery male connector!
If the battery male connector is disconnected while
the key switch is switched on (under load), an arc
will be produced. This can lead to erosion at the
contacts, which considerably shortens the service life
of the contacts.
– Switch off the key switch before disconnecting the
battery male connector.

498 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Replacing and transporting the battery

– Disconnect the battery male connector. 

A Category 3 version A
B Category 2 version

WARNING
Risk of crushing and shearing!
No one must stand directly next to the
battery or between the battery and the
truck when removing and inserting the
battery.

CAUTION B
Risk of damage!
– Position the battery cable on the bat-
tery in such a way that the cable can-
not be crushed either when removing
or inserting the battery or when clos-
ing the battery door.

6301_901-007

– Open the battery locks (1). 

NOTE
If the battery locks cannot be opened by hand,
the coupling pin (2) from the counterweight
can be used as a lever extension.
– Carefully drive the truck under the battery.
– Carefully lift the battery until it maintains
a sufficient distance from the seating and
from the chassis above.
– Position the fork arms horizontally.

CAUTION
Risk of damage!
– If the battery knocks against the chassis at the
top, lower the battery immediately.

– Slowly remove the battery from the battery

compartment.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 499

4 Operation
Replacing and transporting the battery

Transporting and setting down the bat-

tery
WARNING
Risk of crushing and shearing!
Carefully transport the battery: low speed, slow
steering movement and careful braking.
– Do not use the methods described here to trans-
port the battery over long distances.

– Transport the battery to the intended stor-

age space.

CAUTION
Risk of damage!
The battery must be stored on a suitable beam sup-
port or on suitable racking.
The battery must not be stored on a wooden beam or
any similar object.

– Set down the battery.

Installing the battery 

– Pick up the battery and transport it to the
truck.
– Carefully insert the battery into the battery
compartment.
When doing so, ensure that
● Before inserting the battery, position the

battery cables on the battery in such a way

that the cables will not be trapped when the
battery is inserted
● The lifting accessory is at a right angle to

the truck
● The gaps are maintained for the entire time

that the battery is being inserted, and that

the battery is inserted to a sufficient depth

DANGER
Risk of crushing and shearing!
While inserting the battery, avoid putting
your hands between the battery and the
chassis.

500 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Replacing and transporting the battery

CAUTION
Risk of damage!
– Position the battery cables on the
battery in such a way that the ca-
bles cannot be crushed either when
removing or inserting the battery or
when closing the battery door.

Once the battery is correctly positioned in the

battery compartment:
– Carefully lower the battery.
– Carefully move the lifting accessories out
from under the battery.

CAUTION
Risk of component damage!
If the battery male connector is connected while the
key switch is switched on (under load), a jump spark
will be produced. This can cause the contacts to
erode, which considerably shortens the service life of
the contacts.
– Do not connect the battery male connector with
the key switch switched on.
– Make sure that the key switch is switched off be-
fore connecting the battery male connector.

– Make sure that the battery male connectors

and the plug connections are dry, clean and
free of foreign objects.
– Close the battery locks. 

NOTE
The battery door will close only when the bat-
tery is locked.

CAUTION
Risk of component damage!
If the battery male connector is connected while the
key switch is switched on (under load), a jump spark
will be produced. This can cause the contacts to
erode, which considerably shortens the service life of
the contacts.
– Do not connect the battery male connector with
the key switch switched on.
– Make sure that the key switch is switched off be-
fore connecting the battery male connector.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 501

4 Operation
Replacing and transporting the battery

– Make sure that the battery male connectors

and the plug connections are dry, clean and
free of foreign objects.
– Connect the battery male connectors. 
A Category 3 version A
B Category 2 version
– Close the battery door.

6301_901-006

Replacing the battery using a

change frame (variant)
WARNING
Risk of accident!
The load capacity of the truck or lift truck in use
must at least match the weight of the battery and the
weight of the change frame.
– Observe the nameplates of the battery and of the
change frame.

CAUTION
Risk of damage!
Place the battery change frame along with the bat-
tery only on a firm surface with sufficient load-bear-
ing capacity.
Do not place the battery change frame with the bat-
tery on a soft surface or in a rack.

The battery change frame (variant) features

an advantageous design that allows a truck or

502 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Replacing and transporting the battery

pallet stacker to pick up the battery quickly.

The battery remains on the change frame for
charging and storage. The change frame fits
between the battery holding fixtures in the bat-
tery compartment of the truck. Once the bat-
tery has been set down on its holding fixtures,
the change frame is moved back out of the
truck.

Removing the battery

– Park the truck securely and switch it off.
– Open the battery door.

CAUTION
Risk of damaging the battery male connector!
If the battery male connector is disconnected while
the key switch is switched on (under load), an arc
will be produced. This can lead to erosion at the
contacts, which considerably shortens the service life
of the contacts.
– Switch off the key switch before disconnecting the
battery male connector.

– Disconnect the battery male connector. 

A Category 3 version A
B Category 2 version

WARNING
Risk of crushing and shearing!
No one must stand directly next to the
battery or between the battery and the
truck when removing and inserting the
battery.

CAUTION B
Risk of damage!
– Position the battery cable on the bat-
tery in such a way that the cable can-
not be crushed either when removing
or inserting the battery or when clos-
ing the battery door.

6301_901-007

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 503

4 Operation
Replacing and transporting the battery

– Open the battery locks (1). 

NOTE
If the battery locks cannot be opened by hand,
the coupling pin (2) from the counterweight
can be used as a lever extension.
– Ensure that the maximum load capacity of
the change frame is not exceeded.
The maximum load capacity of the change
frame is specified on the identification plate.
– Before picking up the change frame, adjust
the fork arm distance.

– Position the change frame (3) under the 

battery (2) so that the centre of the bat-
tery (1) is in line with the recess (4) in the
change frame.
This alignment ensures that the battery is
positioned centrally on the change frame. The
battery must be positioned centrally on the
change frame in order for the change frame to
be moved into the truck and to reduce the risk
of the battery tipping over when being moved.
If multiple batteries are used, it is advisable to
permanently mark the centre of the battery (1)
(e.g. using a strip of adhesive tape).

CAUTION
Risk of component damage!
– Move the change frame under the battery only up
to the edge of the stop.

– Carefully move the change frame under the

battery.
– Carefully lift the battery up and out of the
truck. Pay attention to the distance to the
chassis.
– Slowly remove the battery from the battery
compartment.

504 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Replacing and transporting the battery

Transporting and setting down the bat-

tery
WARNING
Risk of crushing and shearing!
Carefully transport the battery: low speed, slow
steering movement and careful braking.
– Do not use the methods described here to trans-
port the battery over long distances.

The battery (1) can remain on the change 

frame (2). The change frame can then be
used to set down the battery.

– If a substructure (3) is used to set down 

the battery (1), ensure that the change
frame (2) does not protrude beyond the bat-
tery.
– Set down the battery on a stable base so
that it is secure and position the battery
against the stops on the base.

Installing the battery

– Remove the change frame.
– Pick up a charged battery using the change
frame and transport the battery to the truck.
– Position the battery cable on the battery so
that it will not become trapped when the
battery is inserted.
– Position the battery at a right angle to the
truck.
– Carefully insert the battery into the battery
compartment.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 505

4 Operation
Replacing and transporting the battery

– Carefully place the battery onto the battery

holding fixtures.
– Carefully remove the change frame from
under the battery.
– Close the battery locks. 

NOTE
The battery door will close only when the bat-
tery is locked.

CAUTION
Risk of component damage!
If the battery male connector is connected while the
key switch is switched on (under load), a jump spark
will be produced. This can cause the contacts to
erode, which considerably shortens the service life of
the contacts.
– Do not connect the battery male connector with
the key switch switched on.
– Make sure that the key switch is switched off be-
fore connecting the battery male connector.

– Make sure that the battery male connectors

and the plug connections are dry, clean and
free of foreign objects.
– Connect the battery male connectors. 
A Category 3 version A
B Category 2 version
– Close the battery door.

6301_901-006

506 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Replacing and transporting the battery

Transporting the lead-acid bat- 

2
tery by crane

DANGER
There is risk of fatal injury from being
struck by falling loads!
– Never walk or stand underneath sus-
pended loads. 1

The tray for the lead-acid battery (1) is equip-

ped with four lifting eyes. The battery may only
be transported by crane using a lifting gear
and bridge piece (2) that are suitable in terms
in size and load capacity.
– To avoid short circuits, cover batteries with 6210_003-012

open terminals or connectors with a rubber

mat.
– Observe the operating instructions for the
lifting gear.
– Attach the battery (1) to suitable lifting gear
(2).
– Lift the battery carefully and ensure that it
hangs straight on the lifting gear.
The lifting gear must be vertical when lifting,
so that no lateral pressure is applied to the
tray.
– Set the battery down carefully.
– Remove the lifting gear after the battery has
been set down.
– Do not place slack lifting gear on the battery
cells or allow it to fall on the battery cells.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 507

4 Operation
Cleaning the truck

Cleaning the truck

Note on flame proof enclosures
Depending on the category of the truck, it can
be equipped with one or more flame proof en-
closures. These flame proof enclosures con-
tain components of the truck control unit and
other electrical and electronic components.

DANGER
Risk of explosion due to improper han-
dling!
The pressure-tight housings have a
specified gap between the cover and
housing. Improper opening and closing
of the pressure-tight housings can cause
a detrimental change to this gap. Poten-
tially explosive substances in the atmos-
phere can penetrate the housing during
operation in at-risk areas; this can cause
an explosion, which can in turn spread to
the surrounding environment.
– Do not open pressure-tight housings.

CAUTION
If water penetrates the electrical system,
there is a risk of a short circuit occurring!
The flame proof enclosures have a nar-
row gap that could allow water to pene-
trate.
– Do not use high-pressure cleaning
equipment.

Cleaning the truck

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
No work must be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas!
– Trucks must only be cleaned outside
potentially explosive areas.

508 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cleaning the truck

DANGER
Risk of fire due to flammable cleaning
materials!
Flammable cleaning materials can be ig-
nited by hot components.
– Do not use any flammable cleaning
materials.

DANGER
Risk of fire due to flammable materials!
Deposits and solids can be ignited by
hot components, e.g. drive units.
– Remove deposits and solids.

WARNING
Risk of injury from falling off the truck!
When climbing onto the truck, there is
a risk of getting stuck or slipping and
falling. Use suitable equipment to reach
higher points on the truck.
– Use only the steps provided for this
purpose to climb onto the truck.
– Use equipment such as stepladders
or platforms to reach inaccessible
areas.

CAUTION
Risk of damage to the battery male connector!
If the battery male connector is disconnected while
the truck is switched on (under load), an arc will be
produced. This can lead to erosion at the contacts,
which considerably shortens the service life of the
contacts.
– Switch off the truck before the battery male con-
nector is disconnected.
– Do not disconnect the battery male connector
while the truck is switched on, except in an emer-
gency.

CAUTION
If water penetrates the electrical system, there is a
risk of a short circuit occurring!
– Strictly adhere to the following steps.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 509

4 Operation
Cleaning the truck

CAUTION
Excessive water pressure or water and steam that
are too hot can damage truck components.
– Strictly adhere to the following steps.

CAUTION
Possible component damage due to compressed air.
– If components are cleaned with compressed air,
the air must have a maximum pressure of 0.15
bar.
This prevents liquids or small solids from being
forced through slots or openings inside components
and causing damage.

CAUTION
Aggressive cleaning materials can damage the surfa-
ces of components!
Using aggressive cleaning materials that are unsuita-
ble for plastics can cause plastic parts to dissolve or
become brittle. The screen on the display-operating
unit could become cloudy.
– Strictly adhere to the following steps.

– Park the truck securely and switch it off.

– Disconnect the battery male connector.
– Do not spray electric motors and other elec-
trical components or their covers directly
with water.
– Do not use high-pressure cleaning equip-
ment.
– Do not aim the cleaning jet directly at adhe-
sive labels or decal information.
– Remove all deposits and accumulations of
foreign materials in the vicinity of hot com-
ponents.
– Use only non-flammable fluids for cleaning.
– Observe the manufacturer's guidelines for
working with cleaning materials.
– Clean plastics only with cleaning materials
intended for plastics.
– Observe the manufacturer's guidelines for
working with cleaning materials.
– Clean the truck exterior using water-soluble
cleaning materials and water. Cleaning with

510 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cleaning the truck

a water jet, a sponge or a cloth is recom-

mended.
– Clean all accessible areas.
– Before lubrication, clean the oil filling open-
ings and the area around the oil filling open-
ings, as well as the lubricating nipples.

Cleaning the electrical system

WARNING
Danger of electric shocks due to residual capacity!
– Never reach into the electrical system with your
bare hands.

CAUTION
Cleaning electrical system parts with wa-
ter can damage the electrical system.
Cleaning electrical system parts with wa-
ter is forbidden!
– Do not remove covers etc.
– Only use dry cleaning materials ac-
cording to the specifications in the
section "Cleaning the truck".

CAUTION
Possible component damage due to compressed air.
– If components are cleaned with compressed air,
the air must have a maximum pressure of 0.15
bar.
This prevents liquids or small solids from being
forced through slots or openings inside components
and causing damage.

The components of the electrical system are

fitted underneath the cover sheet of the coun-
terweight etc.
– Clean the electrical system parts with a
metal-free brush and blow the dust off with
low-pressure compressed air.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 511

4 Operation
Cleaning the truck

Cleaning load chains 

WARNING
Risk of accident!
Load chains are safety elements.
The use of cold/chemical cleaners or fluids that are
corrosive or contain acid or chlorine can damage the
chains and is forbidden!
– Observe the manufacturer's guidelines for working
with cleaning materials.

– Place a collection vessel under the lift mast.

– Clean with paraffin derivatives, such as
benzine.
6210_810-004
– When using a steam jet, do not use addi-
tional cleaning agents.
– Remove any water in the chain links using
compressed air immediately after cleaning.
Move the chain several times during this
procedure.
– Immediately after drying the chain, spray it
with chain spray. Move the chain several
times during this procedure.
For chain spray specifications, see the "Main-
tenance data table" chapter.

ENVIRONMENT NOTE

Dispose of any fluid that has been spilled or

collected in the collection vessel in an environ-
mentally friendly manner. Follow the statutory
regulations.

512 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Cleaning the truck

Cleaning the windows 

1
Any glass, for example cab windows (variant),
must always be kept clean and free of ice.
This is the only means of guaranteeing good
visibility.

CAUTION
Do not damage the rear window heater (inside).
– (1) Clean the rear window very carefully. Do not
use sharp objects!

– Clean the windows with a soft cloth and

commercial window cleaner.

6219_003-131

After cleaning 

CAUTION
Risk of short circuit!
Ingress of moisture or dirt into the battery male con-
nector and plug connection can lead to an electrical
short circuit.
– Use compressed air to dry the battery male con-
nector and the plug connection before connecting
them.
– Use compressed air to remove any foreign objects
that may be lodged in the battery male connector
and the plug connection.

– Carefully dry the truck, e.g. using com-

pressed air.
– Lubricate the joints and actuators.
– Lubricate the truck according to the "lubrica-
tion plan".

NOTE
The more often the truck is cleaned, the more
frequently the truck must be lubricated.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 513

4 Operation
Transporting the truck

Transporting the truck

Transport
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
No work must be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas!
– Only load and transport the truck out-
side of potentially explosive areas.

CAUTION
Risk of material damage from overloading!
If the truck is driven onto a means of transport, the
load capacity of the means of transport, the HGV
ramps and the loading bridges must be greater than
the actual total weight of the truck. Components can
be permanently deformed or damaged due to over-
loading.
– Determine the total actual weight of the truck.
– Only load the truck if the load capacity of the
means of transport, the HGV ramps and the load-
ing bridges is greater than the total actual weight
of the truck.

Determining the total actual weight 

– Park the truck securely.
– Determine the unit weights by reading the
truck nameplate and, if necessary, the at-
tachment nameplate (variant).
1
– Add together the determined unit weights to 2
obtain the total actual weight of the truck:

Tare weight (1) 3

+ Maximum permissible battery weight (2)
+ Ballast weight (variant) (3)

+ Net weight of attachment (variant)

+ 100 kg allowance for driver
= Total actual weight

514 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Transporting the truck

DANGER
Risk of accident from the truck falling!
Steering movements can cause the rear of the truck
to veer off the loading bridge towards the edge. This
may cause the truck to crash.
– Before driving across a loading bridge, ensure
that the loading bridge is properly attached and
secured.
– Ensure that the transport vehicle onto which the
truck is to be driven has been sufficiently secured
to prevent it from moving.
– Maintain a safety distance from edges, loading
bridges, HGV ramps, working platforms etc.
– Drive slowly and carefully onto the transport vehi-
cle.

Wedging the wheels 

– Park the truck securely.
– Secure the truck against rolling away by
placing a wedge (1) in front of each front
wheel and behind each back wheel.

CAUTION
Risk of damage to the battery male connector!
If the battery male connector is disconnected while
the key switch is on (under load), an arc will be
produced. This can lead to erosion at the contacts,
which considerably shortens the service life of the
contacts.
– Switch off the key switch before disconnecting the
battery male connector. 6210_001-012_V3

– Do not disconnect the battery male connector

while the key switch is switched on, except in an
emergency.

– Ensure that the key switch is switched off.

– Disconnect the battery male connector.

NOTE
If the parking brake cannot be applied by
pressing the push button, refer to the section
entitled "Emergency actuation of the parking
brake" in the chapter "Procedure in emergen-
cies".

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 515

4 Operation
Transporting the truck

Lashing down
DANGER
The load may slip if the harnesses slip!
The truck must be lashed securely so that it cannot
move during transportation.
– Use only harnesses that are adequately sized in
relation to the weight of the truck.
– Ensure that the harnesses are tightened securely
and that the pads cannot slip off.

CAUTION
Abrasive harnesses can rub against the surface of
the truck and cause damage.
– Position slip-resistant pads (e.g. rubber mats or
foam) underneath the lifting points.

Lashing at the front 

There are two ways to connect the harness to
the front of the truck.
A Looping around the fork carriage
If the fork carriage is attached, the har- B
ness must be attached to the truck here.
– To do this, loop the harness around the fork
carriage as shown.
– Lash the truck at an angle towards the rear.
B Looping around the mudguard A
If no fork carriage is fitted, the harness
can be attached to the truck at the mud-
guard.
– To do this, loop the harness around the
mudguard as shown.
– Lash the truck at an angle towards the rear.

516 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Transporting the truck

Lashing at the rear 

– Position the harness for the coupling pin
around the coupling pin as shown.
– Lash the truck at an angle towards the front.

Crane loading
Crane loading is only intended for transport-
ing the complete truck, including the lift mast,
for its initial commissioning. This may be per-
formed only by the authorised service centre
with the harnesses expressly provided and ap-
proved for this purpose.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 517

4 Operation
Decommissioning

Decommissioning
Safety information for shutting
down and restarting
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
No work may be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas.
– Only decommission or store the truck
outside potentially explosive areas.

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Damage to explosion-protected compo-
nents may occur during storage of the
truck; this damage cannot always be
predicted. Discharge sparks or overheat-
ing due to damaged components can
lead to explosions in the surrounding at-
mosphere in potentially explosive areas.
The entire explosion-protected system
must be checked before re-commission-
ing.
– Have the explosion-protection equip-
ment inspected by the authorised
service centre before re-commission-
ing.

Decommissioning and storing

the truck
CAUTION
Damage to components due to incorrect storage!
Improper storage or decommissioning for a period
of more than two months can result in corrosion
damage to the truck. If the truck is parked in an
ambient temperature of below -10°C for an extended
period, the batteries will cool down. The electrolyte
may freeze and damage the batteries.
– Store the truck in a dry, clean, frost-free and well-
ventilated environment.
– Implement the following measures before decom-
missioning.

518 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Decommissioning

Measures to be implemented before de-

commissioning
– Clean the truck thoroughly; see the chapter
entitled "Cleaning the truck".
– Lift the fork carriage to the stop several
times.
– Tilt the lift mast forwards and backwards
several times and, if fitted, move the attach-
ment repeatedly.
– To relieve the strain on the load chains,
lower the fork onto a suitable supporting
surface, e.g. a pallet.
– Check the hydraulic oil level.
– Apply a thin layer of oil or grease to all
uncoated moving parts.
– Lubricate the truck according to the "lubrica-
tion plan".
– Lubricate the joints and actuators.

CAUTION
Potential for damage to the battery male connector!
If the battery male connector is disconnected while
the truck is switched on (under load), an electric arc
will be produced. This can lead to erosion of the
contacts, which considerably shortens the service life
of the contacts.
– Switch off the truck before the battery male con-
nector is disconnected.
– Do not disconnect the battery male connector
while the truck is switched on, except in an emer-
gency.

– Disconnect the battery male connector.

– Check the battery condition, acid level and
acid density.
– Service the battery.

NOTE
Only store batteries that are fully charged.
– Spray all exposed electrical contacts with a
suitable contact spray.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 519

4 Operation
Decommissioning

CAUTION
Tyre deformation as a result of continuous loading on
one side!
Have the truck raised and jacked up by the author-
ised service centre so that all wheels are off the
ground. This prevents permanent deformation of the
tyres.
– Only have the truck raised and jacked up by the
authorised service centre.

CAUTION
Risk of corrosion damage due to condensation on
the truck!
Many plastic films and synthetic materials are wa-
tertight. Condensation water on the truck cannot es-
cape through these covers.
– Do not use plastic film as this facilitates the forma-
tion of condensation water.
– Cover with vapour-permeable material, e.g. cot-
ton.

– Cover the truck to protect it from dust.

– If the truck needs to be shut down for even
longer periods, contact the authorised serv-
ice centre to find out about additional cour-
ses of action.

Using after storage or decom-

missioning
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Damage to explosion-protection compo-
nents may occur during storage of the
truck; this damage cannot always be
predicted. Discharge sparks or overheat-
ing due to damaged components can
lead to explosions in the surrounding at-
mosphere in potentially explosive areas.
The entire explosion protection system
must be checked before re-commission-
ing.
– Have the explosion-protection equip-
ment inspected by the authorised
service centre before re-commission-
ing.

If the truck has been decommissioned for

longer than six months, it must be checked
carefully before being used again. As with the

520 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Operation 4
Decommissioning

annual safety inspection, this check must also

include all safety-related aspects of the truck.
– Clean the truck thoroughly; see the chapter
entitled "Cleaning the truck".
– Lubricate the joints and actuators.
– Check the battery condition, acid level and
acid density.
– Check the hydraulic oil for condensation
water. Change the hydraulic oil if necessa-
ry.
– Arrange for the authorised service centre
to perform the same inspections and tasks
that were carried out before initial commis-
sioning.
– The explosion-protection check must be
performed by the authorised service centre.
– Perform the activities specified under "Visu-
al inspections and function checking".
The following points in particular must be
checked:
● Drive

● Controller

● Steering

● Brakes (service brake, parking brake)

● Lifting system (lifting accessories, load

chains, mounting)

NOTE
For further information, see the workshop
manual for the truck or contact the authorised
service centre.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 521

4 Operation
Decommissioning

522 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

 5

Maintenance
5 Maintenance
Safety regulations for maintenance

Safety regulations for maintenance

General information
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere.
No work must be performed on the truck
in potentially explosive areas!
– Trucks must only be maintained and
repaired outside potentially explosive
areas.
– Ask the safety officer to allocate a
safe working area.

All necessary safety measures must be taken

to prevent accidents during maintenance and
repair work:
– Park the truck and switch it off.
– Disconnect the battery male connector.
Category-2 versions of the truck have two bat-
tery male connectors (+ and -). These are
secured against accidental disconnection with
screws. To prevent loss of the screws, screw
the screws back in place after disconnecting
the battery male connector.
– Ensure that the truck cannot move uninten-
tionally or start up inadvertently.
– If necessary, have the truck jacked up by
the authorised service centre.
Components specifically for explosion protec-
tion are attached on the underside of the
truck. If these components are damaged, the
truck is no longer approved for use in poten-
tially explosive areas.
– Have the raised fork carriage or the exten-
ded lift mast secured against accidental
lowering by the authorised service centre.
– Observe the maximum lift height of the lift
mast and compare the dimensions listed in
the chapter entitled "Technical data" with
the dimensions of the hall in which the truck
is to be driven.

524 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
Safety regulations for maintenance

– Avoid collisions with the ceiling of the hall

and the resultant damage.

Working on the hydraulic equip-

ment
The hydraulic system must be depressurised
prior to all work on the system.

Working on the electrical equip-

ment
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Work on the electrical equipment must
only be performed outside potentially ex-
plosive areas and only by a competent
person.
Any interference with the electrical
equipment of the truck is forbidden.
– For work on the electrical equipment,
contact the authorised service centre.

Safety devices
After maintenance and repair work, all safety
devices must be reinstalled and tested for op-
erational reliability.

Set values
The device-dependent set values must be
observed when making repairs and when
changing hydraulic and electrical components.
These are listed in the appropriate sections.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 525

5 Maintenance
Safety regulations for maintenance

Lifting and jacking up

DANGER
There is a risk to life if the truck tips over!
If not raised and jacked up properly, the truck may
tip over and fall off. Only the hoists specified in the
workshop manual for this truck are allowed and are
tested for the necessary safety and load capacity.
– Only have the truck raised and jacked up by the
authorised service centre.
– Only jack the truck up at the points specified in the
workshop manual.

The truck must be raised and jacked up for

various types of maintenance work. The au-
thorised service centre must be informed that
this is to take place. Safe handling of the truck
and the corresponding hoists is described in
the truck's workshop manual.

Working at the front of the truck

DANGER
Risk of accident due to an unsecured lift mast.
If the lift mast or fork carriage is raised, no work may
be performed on the lift mast or at the front of the
truck unless the appropriate safety measures are put
in place.
– When securing, only use chains with sufficient
load-bearing capacity.
– Contact the authorised service centre regarding
this matter.

CAUTION
Possibility of damage to the ceiling!
– Note the maximum lift height of the lift mast.

Securing the lift mast against tilting

backwards
DANGER
Risk of accident!
This work must only be performed by an authorised
service technician.
– To secure the lift mast against tilting back, contact
the authorised service centre.

526 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
Safety regulations for maintenance

Removing the lift mast

DANGER
Risk of accident!
This work must only be performed by an authorised
service technician.
– Commission the authorised service centre to re-
move the lift mast.

Securing the lift mast against falling off

DANGER
Risk of accident!
This work must only be performed by an authorised
service technician.
– To secure the lift mast against falling, contact the
authorised service centre.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 527

5 Maintenance
General maintenance information

General maintenance infor-

mation
Personnel qualifications
DANGER
Risk of explosion!
The operating company is responsible
for its work equipment in accordance
with the German Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health (BetrSichV). It is the
operating company's responsibility to en-
sure that testing and repairs are carried
out properly.
– Repair work must only be carried out
by a competent person.

See the "Operating company" section in the

chapter entitled "Definition of responsible per-
sons".

DANGER
Risk of explosion
Working on a truck within potentially ex-
plosive areas can lead to explosions in
the surrounding atmosphere. No work
may be performed on the truck in poten-
tially explosive areas.
– Only perform truck maintenance or
repairs outside potentially explosive
areas.

Only qualified and authorised personnel are

allowed to perform maintenance work. Regu-
lar safety checks and checks after unusual
incidents must be performed by a competent
person.
– See also the section entitled "Competent
person for explosion protection checks" in
the chapter entitled "Definition of responsi-
ble persons".
The competent person must conduct their
evaluation and assessment from a safety point
of view, unaffected by operational and eco-
nomic conditions. The competent person must
have sufficient knowledge and experience to
be able to assess the condition of a truck
and the effectiveness of the protective devices
in accordance with technical conventions and
the principles for testing trucks.

528 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
General maintenance information

Maintenance personnel for batteries

Batteries must only be charged, serviced, and
replaced by personnel who have received ap-
propriate training in accordance with the in-
structions from the manufacturers of the bat-
tery, battery charger and truck.
– Observe the handling instructions for the
battery and the operating instructions for
the battery charger.

Maintenance work by the operating

company
All of the required inspection points for 150-
hour maintenance by the operating company
are listed in this chapter in the section enti-
tled "Maintenance by the operating company:
Explosion-protection components - 150 hours/
monthly".
– If you have any questions about this, please
contact your authorised service centre.

Maintenance work without special quali-

fications
Simple maintenance work, such as checking
the hydraulic oil level, may be carried out by
untrained personnel. A qualification of the type
held by a competent person is not required
to carry out this work. The required tasks are
described in the chapter entitled "Preserving
operational readiness".

Maintenance of the explosion

protection components
The explosion protection components of the
truck are subject to regular tests. The explo-
sion protection components must be tested
during the "explosion protection test", at the
latest.
The test must be carried out according to:
● The truck's "workshop manual",

● The current state of the art,

● The standards and regulations applicable

for retrofitting.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 529

5 Maintenance
General maintenance information

The relevant aspects for the maintenance and

repair of the electrical system are listed in the
following standards:
● "DIN EN IEC 60079-17 VDE

0165-10-1:2020-06"
● "DIN EN IEC 60079-19 VDE

0165-20-1:2021-07"
According to the standard
"DIN EN 1755:2024-04" they include:
● The nature and frequency of inspections

and maintenance, including cleaning the in-

dustrial truck. This will prevent the accumu-
lation of combustible or other materials and
permanently meet explosion protection re-
quirements,
● Regular maintenance and testing of the

flame-proof enclosures of the truck control

unit and the restricted breathing housings
for damage and integrity,
● The requirements for testing and inspecting

the insulation resistance of the electrical

system and the function of the insulation
monitoring device, including the minimum
time intervals,
● Verification of a sufficient distance between

fixed and rotating parts,

● Checking that the wheels, rollers, antistatic

belts, corona electrodes, drive belts are in

good condition and checking for any loss of
conductivity caused by contamination,
● Verification of seats and non-metallic cov-

ers for potential equalisation and surface

resistance,
● Verification of the proper function of safety

monitoring and shut-down systems, includ-

ing their sensors,
● Regular replacement of safety-relevant

parts or wearing parts,

● Verification of the correct rigidity of the

screw connections and the correct maxi-

mum gap at the closure lines of flame-proof
enclosures,
● Verification of excessive wear and axial

clearance of brake pads and brakes. Includ-

ing design assurance of correct positioning
of the temperature sensor and the brake
pad wear sensor after repair (depending on
the series),
● The procedure for verifying the minimum

material thickness of 1 mm of the fork arm

cladding,

530 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
General maintenance information

● Verification of the integrity of housings that

are protected by a specific protection type,
● All warnings, warning signs and markings
necessary for proper operation.

Information for carrying out

maintenance
This section contains all the information re-
quired to determine when the truck requires
maintenance. Carry out maintenance work
within the time limits according to the hour
meter and using the maintenance check lists
below. This ensures that the truck remains
ready for operation and provides optimal per-
formance and service life. It is also a precondi-
tion for any warranty claims.

Maintenance timeframe
If maintenance is needed, the message
Service required appears on the
display.
– Arrange for the authorised service centre to
perform the maintenance work on the truck.
– The maintenance check lists indicate the
maintenance work that is due.
The intervals are defined for standard use.
Shorter maintenance intervals can be defined
in consultation with the operating company,
depending on the application conditions of the
truck.
The following factors may necessitate shorter
maintenance intervals:
● Dirty, poor-quality roadways

● Dusty or salty air

● High levels of air humidity

● Extremely high or low ambient tempera-

tures and extreme changes in temperature

● Multi-shift operation with a high duty cycle

● Specific national regulations for the truck or

individual components

Service menu
The date when the truck requires maintenance
is stored in the Service menu.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 531

5 Maintenance
General maintenance information

NOTE
Access to the settings menu is only availa-
ble if the truck is at a standstill and the park-
ing brake is applied. If the parking brake is
released prematurely, the settings menu will
close. Access is only granted when the pass-
word is entered by the fleet manager.
– Stop the truck.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Press the button.
– Press the softkey.
The first menu level appears.
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the Service softkey.
The "Service menu" opens on the display.
– Press the Maintenance interval
softkey.
This menu shows the operating hours remain-
ing until the next scheduled maintenance in-
terval or the latest date of the next scheduled
maintenance interval.
The next maintenance due date can be set
up and adjusted by the fleet manager. See
the next section "Setting up and adjusting the
due date counter for maintenance and safety
checks".

NOTE
The maintenance interval can also be config-
ured in the status line.

532 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
General maintenance information

Setting up and adjusting the due

date counter for maintenance
and safety checks
On delivery from the factory, the display-oper- 
ating unit indicates to the driver the number
of operating hours until the standard mainte-
nance intervals of 1000 h and 3000 h are 1000-h interval 880 h
due. The display also shows the latest date
for maintenance.
3000-h interval 2120 h
To do this, proceed as follows:
– Press the Service softkey. Latest date: 04.02.22
– Press the Maintenance interval
softkey.

Setup and adjustment by the fleet man-

ager
For the fleet manager, due date counters are 6219_003-332_en

also defined for the following checks:

● Regular testing of the truck for electric

trucks and IC trucks

● Battery testing for electric trucks

● Exhaust gas testing and LPG testing for IC

trucks
For these tests, the fleet manager can define
the corresponding due dates with his access
authorisation. To do this, proceed as follows:
– Activate the "Access authorisation for the
fleet manager".
– Press the Service softkey.
– Press the Maintenance interval
softkey.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 533

5 Maintenance
General maintenance information

– Press the softkey for the testing whose due 

date is to be set, e.g. Safety check.

1000-h interval 880 h

3000-h interval 2120 h

Latest date: 04.02.22

Safety check ––.––.––

Emissions check --- h

Fleet manager

6219_003-333_en

Safety check menu 

– Press the scroll button to activate the
input. Safety check
– Enter the desired date using softkeys 0 to
9.
– To save, press the button.
Enter date
Due date counter for individual mainte-
30 . 05 . 2022
nance intervals
The authorised service centre can set up addi- = Clear = Activate

tional due date counters for individual mainte- = Save = Cancel

nance intervals, e.g. for an attachment. The Fleet manager

fleet manager can use his access authorisa-

tion to configure these due date counters. The 6219_003-334_en

process is then the same as for the due date

counters created ex works.

534 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
General maintenance information

Maintenance by the operating company: Explosion-protection com-

ponents - 150 hours/monthly
At operating hours
150 300 450 600 750
900 1050 1200 1350 1500
1650 1800 1950 2100 2250
2400 2550 2700 2850 3000
3150 3300 3450 3600 3750
3900 4050 4200 4350 4500
4650 4800 4950 5100 5250
5400 5550 5700 5850 6000
6150 6300 6450 6600 6750
6900 7050 7200 7350 7500
Carried
7650 7800 7950 8100 8250 out
8400 8550 8700 8850 10000  
Electrical system
Check the mounting and condition of the electric cables of explosion-protection
components
Check the mounting and condition of the line connectors
Check that the insulation monitoring is working correctly
Check the condition of the flame proof enclosure and check that it is sealed correctly
Battery and accessories
Check the battery condition, acid level and acid density
Chassis, bodywork and fittings
Check the driver's seat
Check the antistatic paint coat
Lift mast
Check the fork arms
Check/lubricate the lift mast bearings
Check the fork arm adjustment

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 535

5 Maintenance
General maintenance information

Maintenance by the authorised service centre: Explosion-protection

components - 1000 hours/yearly
At operating hours Carried
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 out
6000 7000 9000 10000  
Note
Perform all 150 hour maintenance tasks.
Perform periodic testing (explosion-protection checks/device inspection) in accord-
ance with §16 of the German Ordinance on Industrial Safety and Health.

536 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
General maintenance information

Maintenance - 1000 hours/yearly

At operating hours Carried
1000 2000 4000 5000 7000 out
8000 10000 11000 13000 14000  
Chassis, bodywork and fittings
Check the chassis for cracks.
Check the overhead guard, plus the cab and glass panes where relevant, for dam-
age.
Check the rear overhead guard bearing and rubber bearings for wear.
Variant: Check that the cab door sensor is working correctly and check for damage.
Check the controls, switches and joints for damage, and apply grease and oil.
Check that the driver's seat is working correctly and check for damage.
Check that the driver restraint system is working correctly, check for damage and
clean.
Check the signal horn.
Variant: Check that the dual pedals are working correctly, check for damage and
lubricate. Carry out calibration.
Battery compartment
Check that the battery door and the sensor are working correctly and check for
damage.
Check the battery lock for damage.
Variant: Check the oil level of the hydraulic battery carrier and check for leak
tightness. Check all moving parts for wear and lubricate them.
Tyres and wheels
Check tyres for wear and check the air pressure if necessary.
Check the wheels for damage and check the tightening torques.
Drive axle
Check the mounting of the drive axle and check the drive axle for leak tightness.
Check that the conductor rails between the power modules and the motor connec-
tions are mounted correctly.
Check the oil level in the drive wheel units.
Change the gearbox oil in the drive wheel units (once after the first 1000 hours).
Steering systems
Check that the steering system is working correctly and check for leak tightness.
Check that the steering wheel is securely attached and check the rotary handle for
damage.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 537

5 Maintenance
General maintenance information

At operating hours Carried

1000 2000 4000 5000 7000 out
8000 10000 11000 13000 14000  
Check the mounting of the steering axle and check the steering axle for leak tight-
ness.
Grease all lubricating nipples on the steering axle
Check the steering stop.
Brake system
Check the condition of all mechanical brake parts and check that they are working
correctly.
Check the actuation distance of the brake pedal and adjust if necessary.
Check the filling level in the brake reservoir.
Check that the electrical filling level monitoring function is working correctly.
Check that the emergency actuation of the parking brake is working correctly.
Perform a brake test.
Electrical system
Check all power cable connections.
Check that the switches, transmitters and sensors are working correctly.
Check the lighting and indicator lights.
Cooling system (converter, drive axle and hydraulics)
Check that the fans and the air ducts are working correctly and check for damage.
Clean the fans and the air ducts.
Clean the cooling fins in the cooling section.
Battery and accessories
Check the lead-acid battery for damage and check the acid density; observe the
maintenance instructions provided by the manufacturer.
Variant: Replace the non-return valve on lead-acid batteries with air agitation.
Variant: Observe the maintenance instructions provided by the manufacturer for
lithium-ion batteries.
Check the appliance plug and the truck harness for damage.
Check the battery male connector and the battery harness for damage.
Hydraulics
Check the condition of the hydraulic system, check that it is working correctly and
check for leak tightness.
Check the hydraulics blocking function (ISO valve).
Check the oil level.

538 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
General maintenance information

At operating hours Carried

1000 2000 4000 5000 7000 out
8000 10000 11000 13000 14000  
Lift mast
RX60-25-35: Check the lift mast bearings for damage and check the tightening
torque.
RX60-40-50: Check the lift mast bearings for damage, lubricate the lift mast bear-
ings and check the tightening torque.
RX60-25-35: Check the front protective mat for damage and check that it is correct-
ly attached. The front protective mat must be attached to the lift mast.
Check the lift mast profiles for damage and wear. Lubricate the lift mast profiles.
Check the guide in the lower (load reversal) mast profile for damage and for wear.
Check the load chains for damage and for wear. Adjust and lubricate the load
chains.
Check the lift cylinders and connections for damage and for leak tightness.
Check the guide pulleys for damage and for wear.
Check the support rollers and chain rollers for damage and for wear.
Check the play between the fork carriage stop and the run-out stop.
Check the tilt cylinders and connections for damage and for leak tightness.
Check the fork carriage for damage and for wear.
Check the fork arm interlock for damage and check that it is working correctly.
Check the fork arms for wear and for deformation.
Check that there is a safety screw on the fork carriage or on the attachment.
Special equipment
Check the condition of the antistatic belt or antistatic electrode.
Check the filter mat in the heating system or air conditioning, and replace if neces-
sary.
Check that the heating system is working correctly; observe the manufacturer's
maintenance instructions.
Check that the air conditioning is working correctly; observe the manufacturer's
maintenance instructions.
Check the attachments for wear and for damage; observe the manufacturer's main-
tenance instructions.
Check the trailer coupling for wear and for damage; observe the manufacturer's
maintenance instructions.
General
Read out the error numbers and clear the list.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 539

5 Maintenance
General maintenance information

At operating hours Carried

1000 2000 4000 5000 7000 out
8000 10000 11000 13000 14000  
Reset the maintenance interval.
Check that the labelling is complete.
Perform a test drive.

540 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
General maintenance information

Maintenance - 3000 hours/every two years

At operating hours Carried
out
3000 6000 9000 12000 15000  
Note
Perform all 1000-hour maintenance work.
Power unit
Change the gearbox oil in the drive wheel units.
Brake
Change the actuation oil for the foot brake.
Hydraulics
Change the hydraulic oil.
Replace the return line filter and the breather filter.
Variant: Replace the high-pressure filter.
For RX60-50 LSP600 (6337) only: Replace the accumulator.

Ordering spare parts and wear- 

ing parts

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
If non-original parts are installed on the
truck, it is no longer approved for use in
potentially explosive areas!

Spare parts are provided by our spare parts

service department. The information required 1
for ordering parts can be found in the spare
parts list.
Only use spare parts as per the manufactur-
er's instructions. The use of unapproved spare
parts may result in an increased risk of acci-
dents due to insufficient quality or incorrect
assignment. Anyone using unapproved spare
parts shall assume full responsibility in the
event of damage or harm.

NOTE
For explosion-protected trucks it is necessary
to specify the Miretti job number (1).
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 541
5 Maintenance
General maintenance information

– The Miretti job number can be found on the

nameplate of the truck.

Quality and quantity of the re-

quired operating materials
Only the operating materials specified in the
maintenance data table may be used.
– The required consumables and lubricants
can be found in the maintenance data table.
Oil and grease types of a different quality
must not be mixed. This negatively affects the
lubricity. If a change between different manu-
facturers cannot be avoided, drain the old oil
thoroughly.
Before carrying out lubricating work, filter
changes or any work on the hydraulic system,
carefully clean the area around the part in-
volved.
When topping up working materials, use only
clean containers!

542 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
General maintenance information

Lubrication plan

6331_003-001
A

Code1 Lubrication point

(A) Swing axle: four lubricating nipples on each side of the steering axle on the steering arm
(B) Sliding surfaces on the lift mast
(C) Load chains
(D) One lubricating nipple on each of the two lift mast bearings
1The respective lubricant specification can be found in the "Maintenance data table" section
below, under this Code.
This lubrication plan describes the series-production truck with standard equipment. For mainte-
nance points on variant trucks, see the relevant chapter and/or instructions provided by the
manufacturer.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 543

5 Maintenance
General maintenance information

Maintenance data table

DANGER
Risk of explosion due to static charge!
If bio-hydraulic oils are used, hydraulic
systems become prone to the buildup of
static charges. This can lead to static
discharge; in potentially explosive areas,
this can subsequently lead to explosions
in the surrounding atmosphere.
– Do not use bio-hydraulic oils.

General lubrication points

Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
Lubrication High-pressure ID no. 0147873 As required
grease

Battery
Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
System filling Distilled water As required
Insulation resistance DIN 43539 For further informa-
VDE 0510 tion, refer to the
workshop manual for
the truck in question.

Brake system
Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
System filling Brake oil Shell Spirax S4 ATF Up to the neck of the
HDX brake oil tank

Electrical system
Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
Insulation resistance DIN EN 1175 For further informa-
VDE 0117 tion, refer to the
workshop manual for
the truck in question.

Actuators/joints
Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
Lubrication High-pressure ID no. 0147873 As required
grease
Oil SAE 80 As required
MIL-L2105
API-GL4
Dual-pedal opera- High-pressure ID no. 0147873 As required
tion grease

544 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
General maintenance information

NOTE
When changing to a different type of hydraulic
oil, the authorised service centre must adjust
the parameters of the truck control unit.
Hydraulic system
Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
System filling Hydraulic oil HVLP 68 42.0 to 58.0 l
DIN 51524, Part 3 depending on the
Hydraulic oil for cold HVLP 32 lift mast and overall
store application DIN 51524, Part 3 height

Tyres
Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
Superelastic tyres Wear limit To wear mark
Solid rubber tyres Wear limit To wear mark
Pneumatic tyres Minimum tread depth Air pressure: see in-
formation on truck
Min. tread depth: 1.6
mm

Steering axle
Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
(A) Axle stub bearing, Multi-purpose grease DIN 51825 KPF2 As required
spherical bearing
For further informa-
tion, refer to the
Wheel screws Torque wrench
workshop manual for
the truck in question.

Drive axle
Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
Wheel screws Torque wrench For further informa-
tion, refer to the
workshop manual for
the truck in question.
Wheel gear Gearbox oil SAE 80W-90 API- For further informa-
GL4 tion, refer to the
workshop manual for
the truck in question.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 545

5 Maintenance
General maintenance information

Lift mast
Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
(B) Lubrication High-pressure ID no. 0147873 As required
grease
Stop Play Min. 2 mm
Lift-mast bearing Grease Aralub 4320 Fill with grease until
(D) DIN 51825-KPF2N20 a small amount of
ID no. 0148659 fresh grease escapes
Screws for the lift- Torque wrench For further informa-
mast bearing tion, refer to the
workshop manual for
the truck in question.

Load chains
Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
(C) Lubrication High-load chain Fully synthetic As required
spray Temperature range:
-35°C to +250°C
ID no. 0156428

Washer system
Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
System filling Screen wash Winter, ID As required
no. 172566

Air conditioning (normal cab)

Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
System filling Refrigerant R134a Filling quantity:
1107 g
System filling Compressor oil POE RL68H 120 ml

Air conditioning (raised cab)

Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
System filling Refrigerant R134a Filling quantity:
1165 g
System filling Compressor oil POE RL68H 120 ml

Flame proof enclosure

Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount
Clearance Feeler gauge <0.05 mm
Cover screws Torque wrench M5 2.5 to 5 Nm
M6 5 to 10 Nm
M8 10 to 20 Nm
M10 20 to 40 Nm

546 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
General maintenance information

Code Unit Operating material Specifications Amount

Gap Grease Aluminium-saponi- As required
fied,
ID no. 0170761
Truck control unit Desiccant As required
(hygro bag)

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 547

5 Maintenance
Preserving operational readiness

Preserving operational readiness

Changing the light bulbs and
warning units
DANGER
There is a risk of explosion if incorrect light bulbs
and warning units are used!
The lighting and warning units of the truck are de-
signed to enable it to enter approved zones. Alter-
native light bulbs and warning units (e.g. the horn,
beeper) can cause increased surface temperatures
or spark formation. Using the truck in potentially ex-
plosive areas is prohibited if alternative light bulbs
are used.
– The light bulbs and warning unit must be changed
only by an authorised service centre.

548 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
Preserving operational readiness

Lubricating the joints and con- 

trols 1
– Oil or grease bearings and joints according
to the "maintenance data table".
● Driver's seat guide
● Cab door hinges (variant)
● Battery-door hinges or battery-cover hinges
● Actuating rod (1) for valves (with multi-lever
operation)

6210_606-030_V2

Checking the battery interlock  1

and the battery door interlock

DANGER
A malfunction of the battery interlock and the bat-
tery door interlock can cause the battery door to
open and the battery could possibly fall out when
the truck is tilted. If the battery falls out, there is a
danger of being crushed to death.
– If the interlock is deformed, damaged or difficult to
move, inform the authorised service centre imme-
diately. Do not operate the truck.
– Check that the interlocks function correctly.
– The interlocks must be greased and must move 2
easily.
– Always check the interlock after an accident. 3

NOTE
The interval for greasing is influenced signifi-
cantly by the application conditions and the
environmental conditions affecting the truck.
Visual inspections and function checking of
the interlock must be carried out as required
and after every 1000 hours. Grease all moving
parts of the interlock as necessary.
– Open the battery door (1). 4
– Check that the door lock (2) and the battery
lock (4) move easily and that they are not
deformed or damaged.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 549

5 Maintenance
Preserving operational readiness

– Check that the indexing bolt (3) on the door

lock is seated correctly and that it is not
deformed or damaged.
– Grease the mechanisms of the interlocks.
– Close the battery door again.

Maintaining the seat belt

DANGER
There is a risk to life if the seat belt fails during an
accident!
If the seat belt is faulty, it may tear or open during an
accident and no longer keep the driver in the driver's
seat. The driver may therefore be hurled against the
truck components or out of the truck.
– Ensure operational reliability by continually test-
ing.
– Do not use a truck with a defective seat belt.
– Have any defective seat belts replaced by your
authorised service centre.
– Only use genuine spare parts.
– Do not make any changes to the seat belt.

NOTE
The checks below must be carried out on a
regular basis (monthly). In the case of signifi-
cant strain, a daily check is necessary.

Checking the seat belt

– Pull out the seat belt (3) completely and 
check for fraying.
The seat belt must not be frayed or cut. The
stitching must not be loose.
– Check that the seat belt is not dirty. 3
2
– Check whether parts are worn or damaged
(including the fixing points).

6327_342-009

550 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
Preserving operational readiness

– Check that the buckle (1) locks properly. 

When the belt tongue (2) is inserted, the seat
belt must be held securely. The belt tongue
(2) must release when the red button (4) is
pressed.
– The automatic blocking mechanism must be
tested at least once a year:
– Park the truck on level ground.
– Pull out the seat belt using a jerking move- 4
ment.
The automatic blocking mechanism must
block the extension of the belt.
– Tilt the seat at least 30° (if necessary, re- 1
move the seat).
7090_342-005

– Slowly pull out the seat belt.

The automatic blocking mechanism must
block the extension of the belt.

Cleaning the seat belt

– Clean the seat belt if it is dirty but without
using chemical cleaning materials (a brush
will suffice).

Replacing after an accident

The seat belt must always be replaced by the
authorised service centre after an accident.

Checking the driver's seat 

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
In trucks with explosion protection, the
driver's seat is covered with a spe-
cial antistatic, conductive textile that pre-
vents the build-up of electrostatic charg-
es. In such cases, the seat is labelled
accordingly.
– Do not use any additional seat pad-
ding such as blankets, cushions or
furs.

6327_342-010

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 551

5 Maintenance
Preserving operational readiness

WARNING
Risk of injury!
– After an accident, check the driver's seat and its
attached restraining belt and check that the seat is
still securely fastened.
– Have the seat repaired by the authorised serv-
ice centre if you identify any damage during the
checks.

– Check the seat adjustment mechanism for

correct operation.
– Check the condition of the seat (e.g. wear
on the upholstery) and the secure fastening
to the hood.
The driver's seat of the truck has antistatic
characteristics.
● Driver's seats with antistatic characteristics

are identified on the seat backrest with dec-

al information "ANTISTATIC CHECKED".
● The surface resistance must be less than or

equal to 1 GΩ (109 Ω) at a test voltage of

500 V
● Damage to the cover must not extend over

an area greater than that specified.

Otherwise the respective section of the driv-
er's seat must be replaced.
Refer to the table below.

Maximum permissible damage to the driver's

seat
Maximum permissi-
Category of the truck
ble damaged area
IIA
100 cm2
IIB
IIB + H2
IIB + C2H2 20 cm2
IIB + H2 + C2H2

– Please contact your authorised service cen-

tre for replacement or advice if you have
any questions.

552 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
Preserving operational readiness

Checking the antistatic paint lay-

er
DANGER
Risk of explosion due to static charge!
Depending on the version, non-conduc-
tive parts (plastic parts) on the truck
must be painted using a special antistat-
ic paint. This paint prevents the parts
from building up an electrostatic charge.
Otherwise, static discharge may occur,
resulting in explosions in the surround-
ing atmosphere in potentially explosive
areas.
– Have any damage repaired by your
authorised service centre.

– Check the paint layer on the plastic parts for

damage and abrasion.
The antistatic paint is applied to the following
plastic parts:
● Panelling

● Consoles

● Steering column panelling

● Document holders

● Compartments

● The protected areas are identified with the

decal information "ELECTRICALLY CON-

DUCTIVE".
● Non-coated areas are labelled as follows:

"Non-conductive parts - risk of electrostatic

charge - only clean using a damp cloth"
● The surface resistance must be less than or

equal to 1 GΩ (109 Ω) at a test voltage of

500 V
● Any damage to the paint layer must not ex-

ceed a specified surface area.

Refer to the table below!
● For repairs, it is absolutely essential to use

antistatic paint made by the same manufac-

turer and with the same specifications.

Maximum permissible damage to the surfa-

ces
Maximum permissi-
Category of the truck
ble damaged area
IIA
100 cm2
IIB
IIB + H2 20 cm2

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 553

5 Maintenance
Preserving operational readiness

Maximum permissi-
Category of the truck
ble damaged area
IIB + C2H2
IIB + H2 + C2H2

– Please contact your authorised service cen-

tre for repair or advice if you have any
questions.

Servicing the heating system or

air conditioning
Replacing the filter mat
– Loosen the screw (1). 
– Remove the cover (2).

– Check the filter mat (1) for contamination. 

– If the filter mat is grey in colour, replace it.

NOTE
Change the filter mat at least every two
months. 1

Cleaning the fresh-air inlet

The fresh-air inlet must be cleaned if the filter
mat:
● Is damaged,

● Is incorrectly seated in the filter frame,

● Has not been replaced every two months.

– Remove the filter mat.

554 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
Preserving operational readiness

– Loosen the screws (1) on the filter 

frame (2).
– Remove the filter frame (2).

1 2

– Remove any dust and dirt from the fresh-air 

inlet (1) beneath the filter mat carrier.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 555

5 Maintenance
Preserving operational readiness

Servicing wheels and tyres

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
In potentially explosive areas, wheels
and tyres that do not meet explosion-
protection regulations may lead to explo-
sions in the surrounding atmosphere.
– Only use approved, electrically con-
ductive tyre types.
– Observe the explosion-protection reg-
ulations.

WARNING
Risk of accident due to uneven tyre wear!
The stability of the truck is reduced in the event of
unequal tyre wear. The braking distance increases.
The handling characteristics deteriorate.
– Change worn or damaged tyres without delay.
– When changing wheels or tyres, ensure that this
does not cause the truck to tilt to one side (e.g.
always replace right-hand and left-hand wheels at
the same time).

WARNING
Risk of accident due to the use of non-approved
wheels.
The quality of the tyres and of the rims affects the
stability of the truck. Changes must only be made
following consultation with the manufacturer.
Rim parts must never be changed and rim parts from
different manufacturers must not be mixed.
– If you wish to use a type of tyre or tyre manufac-
turer that has not been approved by STILL, obtain
approval from STILL prior to use.
– Do not change rim parts and do not mix rim parts
from different manufacturers.

556 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
Preserving operational readiness

Checking the condition and wear of the 

tyres 1 2
– Remove any foreign bodies embedded in
the tyres (1).

60
The level of wear exhibited by tyres on the

J
same axle must be approximately the same.
Superelastic tyres and solid rubber tyres can
be worn down to the "60J wear limit" (2).
If the truck is to be used in winter conditions in
areas where the StVZO (German Road Traf-
fic Licensing Regulations) applies, the profile
must be at least 4 mm.

60
Superelastic tyres may then only be operated

J
as far as the "60J wear limit" (2) if their profile 3 6301_901-004
is re-cut and at least 4 mm deep.

Checking wheel fastenings

– Check that the wheel-fastening screws (3)
of the drive axle and the wheel-fastening
nuts of the steering axle are securely in
place and re-tighten as necessary.
– Note the tightening torques specified in the
"workshop manual".

Servicing the steering axle

– Park the truck securely.
– Check if any of the joints of the steering
axle have been knocked out.
– Check the steering axle for bent parts.

Lubricating the steering axle

ENVIRONMENT NOTE

Dispose of old grease and contaminated de-

vices in accordance with the national regula-
tions for the country in which the truck is being
used.
The joints of the steering axle each have four
lubricating nipples per side.
– Apply grease to the lubricating nipples for
the steering axle in accordance with the

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 557

5 Maintenance
Preserving operational readiness

"maintenance data table" until old grease

begins to escape.

WARNING
Risk of crushing!
Do not actuate the steering during lubrication.

NOTE
If, after a few strokes, there is no old grease
escaping, the steering must be actuated. This
makes it easier for grease to escape from the
joints.
– Switch the truck on.
– Actuate the steering.
– Park the truck safely again.
– Repeat the lubrication procedure.

NOTE
Please note: The more often the truck is
cleaned, the more frequently it must be lubri-
cated.

Checking the battery

– For information on checking the battery, see
the chapter entitled "Checking the battery
condition, acid level and acid density".

558 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
Preserving operational readiness

Adjusting the warning zone light 

– Switch on the truck.

– Make sure that the parking brake is applied. 1
– Loosen the nuts (2) to adjust each head-
light.
– Adjust the headlight (1).
2
The distance from the light bar to the truck
must be between 70...75 cm.
– Re-tighten the nuts (2).

6219_003-230

Replacing the fuses

DANGER
Danger from electrical current!
High voltages are present in the fuse
box. There is a risk of electric shock.
– Do not open the fuse box.
– The fuses must be replaced only by
the authorised service centre.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 559

5 Maintenance
Preserving operational readiness

Checking the hydraulic system

for leak tightness
WARNING
Risk of injury from hydraulic oil under
pressure!
Hydraulic oil under pressure can escape
from leaking pipes and lines and cause
injuries.
– Before checking, release the pressure
from the hydraulic system.
– Wear suitable protective gloves, pro-
tection goggles etc.

CAUTION
Hydraulic hoses become brittle over time!
– Do not store hydraulic hoses for more than two
years.
– Do not use hydraulic hoses for more than two
years if they are subject to a high level of wear.
– Comply with the specifications of "DGUV Rule
113-020" within Germany.
– Outside of Germany, observe the national regula-
tions for the country of use.

– Check pipe and hose connection screw

joints for leaks (traces of oil).
Replace hose lines if they display the following
abnormalities:
● Outer layer has been damaged, or is brittle

or cracked
● Leakages

● Deformation (e.g. with blisters or kinks)

● A fitting has come loose

● A fitting is badly damaged or corroded

Replace pipes if they display the following ab-

normalities:
● Abrasion

● Deformation and bending

● Leakages

560 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
Preserving operational readiness

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 561

5 Maintenance
Preserving operational readiness

Checking the hydraulic oil level  6219_901-016_V2

90°
WARNING
Hydraulic oils are hazardous to your health.
– Observe the safety regulations set out in the sec-
tion entitled "Hydraulic fluid".

90°
NOTE
When changing to a different type of hydraulic
oil, the authorised service centre must adjust
the parameters of the truck control unit.
– Park the truck securely on a horizontal sur-
face.
– Tilt the lift mast backwards until it reaches
the stop.
– Lower the fork carriage; if attachments are
fitted, retract the working cylinders.

CAUTION
Risk of damage to the battery male connector!
If the battery male connector is disconnected while
the key switch is on (under load), an arc will be
produced. This can lead to erosion at the contacts,
which considerably shortens the service life of the
contacts.
– Switch off the key switch before disconnecting the
battery male connector.
– Do not disconnect the battery male connector
while the key switch is switched on, except in an
emergency.

– Disconnect the battery male connectors.

– Turn the bayonet catches on the bottom
plate 90° to the left.
– Fold up the bottom plate and hold it in
place.
– Unscrew the breather filter with the dipstick
in an anti-clockwise direction.
– Keep the breather filter and dipstick in a
horizontal position.
– Check the oil level on the dipstick.
– Unscrew the breather filter with the dipstick
in an anti-clockwise direction.

562 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
Preserving operational readiness

– Keep the breather filter and dipstick in a

horizontal position.
– Check the oil level on the dipstick.

ENVIRONMENT NOTE

Carefully collect any spilt hydraulic oil. Dis-

pose of this hydraulic oil in accordance with
environmental regulations.
The marks (1), (2) and (3) indicate the mini- 
mum filling levels for the different lift mast ver-
sions. 1 2 3 max

NOTE
The optimum hydraulic oil level is between the 6219_003-280

marks (3) and (max) for all lift mast versions.

Assignment of the lift mast version to the mark on the dipstick and the oil filling quantity
Overall height [mm]
Telescopic lift mast Triple mast
Oil filling
Marking 3.5 t quantity [l]
3.5 t LSP 600 4.5 t and 5.0 t LSP 600 and 4.5 t and 5.0 t
4.0 t
1 ≤ 3250 ≤ 2850 ≤ 2350 - 42
3050 2500
2 - ... ... ≤ 2600 50
3250 3000
2800
3 - - 3200 ... 58
3200

CAUTION
Risk of damage.
If the hydraulic oil level is too low, the steering is
restricted and the pump may be damaged.
– If the oil level is too low, do not use the truck and
contact the authorised service centre.

– Screw in the breather filter and the dipstick

in a clockwise direction.
– Close the bottom plate again.
– Connect the battery male connectors.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 563

5 Maintenance
Preserving operational readiness

NOTE
The authorised service centre performs the fill-
ing and topping-up procedures.

Lubricating the lift mast and roll- 

er track
– Remove dirt and lubricant residue from the
roller track.
– Lubricate the roller tracks (1) of the outside,
middle, and inside mast with a super-pres-
sure adhesion lubricant to reduce wear.
See ⇒ Chapter "Maintenance data table",
Page 544 .

NOTE
Spray the roller track evenly from a distance
of approx. 15-20 cm. Wait approx. 15 minutes 1
until the equipment is ready to use again. 6210_800-020

Preserving operational readi- 

ness for cold store application
– On trucks for cold store application (var-
iant), check all rollers and chains in the lift
mast for ease of movement once a week.

6210_900-002

564 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
1000-hour maintenance/annual maintenance

1000-hour maintenance/annual maintenance

Other work that must be carried
out
– Perform all tasks required to maintain full
operability; see the chapter entitled "Re-
maining ready for operation".

Checking the lift cylinders and 

connections for leaks

WARNING
Risk of injury
Observe safety regulations for working on the lift
mast, see the "Working at the front of the truck"
chapter.

– Check hydraulic connections and lift cylin-

ders for leaks (visual inspection).
– Have leaking screw joints or leaking hy-
draulic cylinders repaired by the authorised
service centre.
7094_810-004

Checking the fork arms 

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
If fork arms are used that do not corre-
spond to the explosion-protection regula-
tions, this can lead to spark formation,
resulting in explosions in the surrounding
atmosphere.
– Only use fork arms that are approved
for use in potentially explosive areas
according to the nameplate of the
truck.
– If the cladding is worn, do not oper-
ate the truck in potentially explosive
areas.

The fork arms (1) are specially coated to pre-

vent sparks forming when coming into contact
with the load or the ground. The cladding on
the fork arms has six inspection holes (2)

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 565

5 Maintenance
1000-hour maintenance/annual maintenance

on the top and the bottom. These inspection

holes allow the remaining cladding thickness
to be determined. The surface of the back of
the fork (4) is also clad with the same materi-
al. There must be no cracks or deformations
visible on the fork arms in the area around the
fork bend (3). The coating does not extend to
the area around the fork bends so that it is
possible to check for cracks.
The Miretti job number is stamped into the fork
arm heads (5). If this number does not match
the data on the nameplate of the truck, the
fork arms must not be used until clearance
has been given by the authorised service cen-
tre.
– Perform a visual inspection of the fork arms
(1).
– Check the cladding (2, 4) for wear.
It must satisfy the minimum thickness of
1 mm.
– Check the fork bends (3) for cracks.
– Compare the Miretti job number on the fork
arm heads (5) with the data on the name-
plate of the truck.
– Ensure that only fork arms that comply with
explosion-protection regulations are fitted.

Thickness and material of the cladding

Thickness in new condition
Top
2 mm
Side
Bottom 4 mm
Material depending on the category of the
truck
IIA Stainless steel to AI-
IIB SI 316L
IIB + H2
IIB + C2H2 Copper materials
IIB + H2 + C2H2

– If you have any questions about this please

contact your authorised service centre.

566 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Maintenance 5
1000-hour maintenance/annual maintenance

Checking the condition and correct op- 

3
eration of the latch
– Check the fork arms (1) for any visible de-
formation. Wear must not amount to more
than 10% of the original thickness.

CAUTION
Risk of component damage!
Always replace worn fork arms in pairs.

– Check that the fork latch (3) is functioning

correctly.
– Make sure that the locking screw (2) is 1
present and cannot fall out.

Repairing the fork arms

DANGER
Risk of explosion due to improper re- 2
pair!
Damaged or worn cladding may be on-
ly repaired by the manufacturer or by a
specialist welder.
All straightening work (hot and cold) on
deformed fork arms is forbidden.
– Contact the authorised service centre.

Checking the reversible fork 

arms

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
If reversible fork arms are used that do
not correspond to the explosion-protec-
tion regulations, this can lead to spark
formation, resulting in explosions in the
surrounding atmosphere.
– Only use reversible fork arms that
are approved for use in potentially ex-
plosive areas according to the name-
plate of the truck.
– If the cladding is worn, do not oper-
ate the truck in potentially explosive
areas.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 567

5 Maintenance
1000-hour maintenance/annual maintenance

– Check the outside of the fork bend (1) for

cracks.
– Check the cladding of the fork arms for
wear; see the section entitled "Checking the
fork arms".
– If the fork bends or the cladding show signs
of damage, notify the authorised service
centre.

Checking the double pedal 

– Remove the floorplate.

– Check that the support and springs of the
double pedal mechanism are securely posi-
tioned.
– Check that all screws are sealed with lock-
ing varnish.

6327_003-026

Checking the battery change-

over frame
– The screw joints and welded seams of the
battery changeover frame must be subjec-
ted to a visual inspection.

568 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

 6

Technical data
6 Technical data
Ergonomic dimensions

Ergonomic dimensions 
40 mm
WARNING
Danger of impact injuries to the head!
If the head of the operator is located too close to the
underside of the roof, the suspension of the driver's
seat or an accident may cause the head to strike the
overhead guard.
To avoid head injuries, a minimum distance of
40 mm must be ensured between the underside of
the roof and the head of the tallest operator.
To determine the actual head clearance, the operator
must sit in the driver's seat and the seat suspension
must be set to this driver's requirements.
Due to the individual nature of height and body
weight as well as the wide variety of types of driver's 0000_003-002

seat and overhead guard, the minimum head clear-

ance must be ensured in every truck.

The driver's compartment has been designed

taking ergonomics in the workplace into ac-
count and in accordance with EN ISO 3411.
In general, from the seat position, the operator
has sufficient space to reach the operating de-
vices safely, to operate the truck and to view
the outline of the truck. Operators whose body
size deviates from the specified dimensions
on which EN ISO 3411 is based must be indi-
vidually considered by the operating company.

570 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Technical data 6
Dimensions

Dimensions

1
h4

h3

h1
h

h6
c

h7
Q

h10
h2

m1

m2

y
s

l x
l2
b10

b11

b1
b3

6331_003-007

1 Seat is adjustable ± 90 mm 2 Fork spacing is adjustable

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 571

6 Technical data
Dimensions

NOTE
Measurements h1, h3, h4, h6 and b1 are cus-
tomised and can be taken from the order con-
firmation.

572 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Technical data 6
VDI datasheet for RX60-35 (Plus)/600

VDI datasheet for RX60-35

(Plus)/600
NOTE
This VDI datasheet specifies only the techni-
cal values for trucks with standard equipment.
Different tyres, lift masts, additional units etc.
can produce different values.

Key data

Model RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Type number 6331
Manufacturer STILL GmbH
Drive Electric
Operation Seat
Load capacity/load Q (kg) 3500
Load centre of gravity c (mm) 600
Load distance x (mm) 515
Wheelbase y (mm) 2046

Weights

Model RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Type number 6331

Net weight including battery kg 6310
Front axle load, laden kg 8747
Rear axle load, laden kg 1063
Front axle load, unladen kg 3322
Rear axle load, unladen kg 2988

Wheels, chassis frame

Model RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Type number 6331

Tyres SE
Front tyre size 250/70-15
Rear tyre size 200/75-9 (21x8-9)

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 573

6 Technical data
VDI datasheet for RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Model RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Type number 6331

Number of front wheels
2x
(x = driven)
Number of rear wheels
2
(x = driven)
Track width, front b10 (mm) 1095
Rear track width b11 (mm) 920

Basic dimensions

Model RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Type number 6331

Tilt of lift mast/fork carriage, forwards Degrees 7
Tilt of lift mast/fork carriage, backwards Degrees 7
Height with lift mast retracted h1 (mm) 2300
Free lift h2 (mm) 160
Lift1 h3 (mm) 2980
Height with lift mast extended h4 (mm) 3762
Height above overhead guard (low variant) h6 (mm) 2336 (2241)
Seat height in relation to SIP (low variant) h7 (mm) 1345
Coupling height h10 (mm) 540/415
Overall length l1 (mm) 4101
Length including fork back l2 (mm) 2901
Overall width b1 (mm) 1320
Fork arm thickness s (mm) 50
Fork arm width e (mm) 120
Fork arm length l (mm) 1200
Standard; class;
Fork carriage ISO 2328 III A
form
Fork carriage width b3 (mm) 1200
Ground clearance with load below lift mast m1 (mm) 131
Ground clearance at the middle of the wheelbase m2 (mm) 145

1 The specified nominal lift takes into account the tyre deflection and tolerances of the tyre
diameter.
574 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Technical data 6
VDI datasheet for RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Model RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Type number 6331

Aisle width for pallet 1000 x 1200 crosswise2,3 Ast (mm) 4265
Aisle width for pallet 800 x 1200 lengthwise2,3 Ast (mm) 4465
Turning radius Wa (mm) 2550
Smallest pivot point distance b13 (mm) 725

Performance data

Model RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Type number 6331

Driving speed with load km/h 20
Driving speed without load km/h 20
Lifting speed with load (Plus Performance4/Standard
m/s 0.47/0.42
Performance)
Lifting speed without load m/s 0.53
Lowering speed with load m/s 0.5
Lowering speed without load m/s 0.5
Pulling force with load kg 7280
Pulling force without load kg 7750
Max. pulling force with load (Plus4/Standard Perform-
kg 2720/19170
ance)5
Max. pulling force without load (Plus4/Standard Per-
kg 22460/19040
formance)5
Climbing capability with load % 12.4
Climbing capability without load % 20.3
Max. climbing capability with load (Plus4/Standard
% 22.1/15.9
Performance)5
Max. climbing capability without load (Plus4/Standard
% 28.5/28.5
Performance)5
Acceleration time over 15 m with load (Plus4/Stand-
s 5.7/6.8
ard Performance)

2 Without taking protruding fork arms into account, if applicable.

3 Applies to telescopic and triple lift masts.
4 High-performance variant
5 Applies to the overall truck system.
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 575
6 Technical data
VDI datasheet for RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Model RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Type number 6331

Acceleration time over 15 m without load (Plus6/
s 5.2/5.9
Standard Performance)
Service brake Hydraulically actu-
ated multi-disc brake

Gradients
The values specified in the "Performance da-
ta" table as the maximum climbing capability
can be used only to compare the performance
of forklift trucks in the same category. The
specified values in no way represent the nor-
mal daily operating conditions.

WARNING
To use the truck safely – with or without a load –
the maximum ascending or descending gradient per-
mitted for travel is 15%.
– If you have any questions, contact your authorised
service centre.

Electric motor

Model RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Type number 6331

Traction motor, power rating S2: 60 minutes kW 2x11
Lift motor, power rating S3 at 15% ED kW 25
Battery Standard; circuit DIN 43536 A
Battery voltage U (V) 80
Battery capacity K5 Ah 840 (-930)
Battery weight kg 2178
Energy consumption according to EN 16796 (Plus6/
kWh/h 9.2/9.2
Standard Performance)
Handling performance (Plus6/Standard Performance) t/h 258/236
Energy consumption for handling performance
kWh/h 9.7/8.7
(Plus6/Standard Performance)

6 High-performance variant
576 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Technical data 6
VDI datasheet for RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Other

Model RX60-35 (Plus)/600

Type number 6331

Working pressure for attachments bar 250
Oil flow for attachments l 50
Sound pressure level LpAZ (driver's compartment)7 dB (A) 66
Human vibration: acceleration according to EN 13059 m/s2 0.42
Tow coupling, type Bolt

7 Without cab. Values are different with a cab.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 577
6 Technical data
VDI datasheet for RX60-40 (Plus) and RX60-40 (Plus)/600

VDI datasheet for RX60-40

(Plus) and RX60-40
(Plus)/600
NOTE
This VDI datasheet specifies only the techni-
cal values for trucks with standard equipment.
Different tyres, lift masts, additional units etc.
can produce different values.

Key data
RX60-40
Model RX60-40 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6332 6333
Manufacturer STILL GmbH STILL GmbH
Drive Electric Electric
Operation Seat Seat
Load capacity/load Q (kg) 4000 4000
Load centre of gravity c (mm) 500 600
Load distance x (mm) 515 515
Wheelbase y (mm) 2046 2046

Weights
Model RX60-40 RX60-40/600
Type number 6332 6333
Net weight including battery kg 6310 6582
Front axle load, laden kg 9326 9512
Rear axle load, laden kg 984 1070
Front axle load, unladen kg 3322 3312
Rear axle load, unladen kg 2988 3270

Wheels, chassis frame

Model RX60-40 RX60-40/600
Type number 6332 6333
Tyres SE SE
Front tyre size 250/70-15 355/50-15
200/75-9 200/75-9
Rear tyre size
(21x8-9) (21x8-9)

578 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Technical data 6
VDI datasheet for RX60-40 (Plus) and RX60-40 (Plus)/600

Model RX60-40 RX60-40/600

Type number 6332 6333
Number of front wheels
2x 2x
(x = driven)
Number of rear wheels
2 2
(x = driven)
Track width, front b10 (mm) 1095 1104
Rear track width b11 (mm) 920 920

Basic dimensions
Model RX60-40 RX60-40/600
Type number 6332 6333
Tilt of lift mast/fork carriage, forwards Degrees 7 7
Tilt of lift mast/fork carriage, backwards Degrees 7 7
Height with lift mast retracted h1 (mm) 2300 2300
Free lift h2 (mm) 160 160
Lift8 h3 (mm) 2980 2980
Height with lift mast extended h4 (mm) 3762 3987
Height above overhead guard (low variant) h6 (mm) 2336 (2241) 2333 (2243)
Seat height in relation to SIP (low variant) h7 (mm) 1345 1343
Coupling height h10 (mm) 540/415 540/415
Overall length l1 (mm) 4101 4101
Length including fork back l2 (mm) 2901 2901
Overall width b1 (mm) 1320 1399
Fork arm thickness s (mm) 50 50
Fork arm width e (mm) 120 120
Fork arm length l (mm) 1200 1200
Standard;
Fork carriage ISO 2328 III A ISO 2328 III A
class; form
Fork carriage width b3 (mm) 1200 1200
Ground clearance with load below lift mast m1 (mm) 129 127
Ground clearance at the middle of the
m2 (mm) 145 144
wheelbase
Aisle width for pallet 1000 x 1200 cross-
Ast (mm) 4265 4265
wise9, 10

8 The specified nominal lift takes into account the tyre deflection and tolerances of the tyre
diameter.
9 Without taking protruding fork arms into account, if applicable.
10 Applies to telescopic and triple lift masts.
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 579
6 Technical data
VDI datasheet for RX60-40 (Plus) and RX60-40 (Plus)/600

Model RX60-40 RX60-40/600

Type number 6332 6333
Aisle width for pallet 800 x 1200 length-
Ast (mm) 4465 4465
wise11, 12
Turning radius Wa (mm) 2550 2550
Smallest pivot point distance b13 (mm) 725 725

Performance data
Model RX60-40 RX60-40/600
Type number 6332 6333
Driving speed with load km/h 20 20
Driving speed without load km/h 20 20
Lifting speed with load (Plus13/Standard
m/s 0.44/0.40 0.41/0.37
Performance)
Lifting speed without load m/s 0.53 0.53
Lowering speed with load m/s 0.5 0.5
Lowering speed without load m/s 0.5 0.5
Pulling force with load kg 7210 7170
Pulling force without load kg 7720 7620
Max. pulling force with load (Plus13/Stand-
kg 22700/19150 22730/19170
ard Performance)14
Max. pulling force without load (Plus13/
kg 22460/19040 22690/19230
Standard Performance)14
Climbing capability with load % 11.6 11
Climbing capability without load % 19.7 18.8
Max. climbing capability with load (Plus13/
% 21.8/15.5 21.6/15.3
Standard Performance)14
Max. climbing capability without load
% 28.5/28.5 28.4/28.4
(Plus13/Standard Performance)14
Acceleration time over 15 m with load
s 5.8/6.9 5.8/6.9
(Plus13/Standard Performance)
Acceleration time over 15 m without load
s 5.2/5.9 5.3/6
(Plus13/Standard Performance)
Service brake Hydraulically ac- Hydraulically ac-
tuated multi-disc tuated multi-disc
brake brake

11 Without taking protruding fork arms into account, if applicable.

12 Applies to telescopic and triple lift masts.
13 High-performance variant
14 Applies to the overall truck system.
580 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Technical data 6
VDI datasheet for RX60-40 (Plus) and RX60-40 (Plus)/600

Gradients
The values specified in the "Performance da-
ta" table as the maximum climbing capability
can be used only to compare the performance
of forklift trucks in the same category. The
specified values in no way represent the nor-
mal daily operating conditions.

WARNING
To use the truck safely – with or without a load –
the maximum ascending or descending gradient per-
mitted for travel is 15%.
– If you have any questions, contact your authorised
service centre.

Electric motor
Model RX60-40 RX60-40/600
Type number 6332 6333
Traction motor, power rating S2: 60 mi-
kW 2x11 2x11
nutes
Lift motor, power rating S3 at 15% ED kW 25 25
Standard; cir-
Battery DIN 43536 A DIN 43536 A
cuit
Battery voltage U (V) 80 80
Battery capacity K5 (Ah) 840 (-930) 840 (-930)
Battery weight kg 2178 2178
Energy consumption according to
kWh/h 9.8/9.8 10.1/9.9
EN 16796 (Plus15/Standard Performance)
15
Handling performance (Plus /Standard
t/h 272/248 272/248
Performance)
Energy consumption for handling perform-
kWh/h 10.2/9.1 10.3/9.2
ance (Plus15/Standard Performance)

Other
Model RX60-40 RX60-40/600
Type number 6332 6333
Working pressure for attachments bar 250 250
Oil flow for attachments l 50 50

15 High-performance variant
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 581
6 Technical data
VDI datasheet for RX60-40 (Plus) and RX60-40 (Plus)/600

Model RX60-40 RX60-40/600

Type number 6332 6333
Sound pressure level LpAZ (driver's com-
dB (A) 66 66
partment)16
Human vibration: acceleration according to
m/s2 0.42 0.42
EN 13059
Tow coupling, type Bolt Bolt

16 Without cab. Values are different with a cab.

582 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Technical data 6
VDI datasheet for RX60-45 (Plus) and RX60-45 (Plus)/600

VDI datasheet for RX60-45

(Plus) and RX60-45
(Plus)/600
NOTE
This VDI datasheet specifies only the techni-
cal values for trucks with standard equipment.
Different tyres, lift masts, additional units etc.
can produce different values.

Key data
RX60-45
Model RX60-45 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6334 6335
Manufacturer STILL GmbH STILL GmbH
Drive Electric Electric
Operation Seat Seat
Load capacity/load Q (kg) 4500 4500
Load centre of gravity c (mm) 500 600
Load distance x (mm) 515 525
Wheelbase y (mm) 2046 2046

Weights
RX60-45
Model RX60-45 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6334 6335
Net weight including battery kg 6582 7164
Front axle load, laden kg 10067 10453
Rear axle load, laden kg 1015 1211
Front axle load, unladen kg 3312 3457
Rear axle load, unladen kg 3270 3707

Wheels, chassis frame

RX60-45
Model RX60-45 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6334 6335
Tyres SE SE
Tyre size, front 355/50-15 355/50-15

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 583

6 Technical data
VDI datasheet for RX60-45 (Plus) and RX60-45 (Plus)/600

RX60-45
Model RX60-45 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6334 6335
200/75-9 200/75-9
Tyre size, rear
(21x8-9) (21x8-9)
Number of front wheels
2x 2x
(x = driven)
Number of rear wheels
2 2
(x = driven)
Track width, front b10 (mm) 1104 1104
Track width, rear b11 (mm) 920 920

Basic dimensions
RX60-45
Model RX60-45 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6334 6335
Forwards tilt of lift mast/fork carriage Degrees 7 7
Backwards tilt of lift mast/fork carriage Degrees 7 7
Height with lift mast retracted h1 (mm) 2300 2300
Free lift h2 (mm) 160 160
Lift17 h3 (mm) 2980 2980
Height with lift mast extended h4 (mm) 3987 3987
Height above overhead guard (low variant) h6 (mm) 2333 (2243) 2333 (2243)
Seat height in relation to SIP (low variant) h7 (mm) 1343 1342
Coupling height h10 (mm) 540/415 540/415
Overall length l1 (mm) 4101 4111
Length including fork back l2 (mm) 2901 2911
Overall width b1 (mm) 1399 1399
Fork arm thickness s (mm) 50 60
Fork arm width e (mm) 120 130
Fork arm length l (mm) 1200 1200
Standard;
Fork carriage ISO 2328 III A ISO 2328 III A
class; form
Fork carriage width b3 (mm) 1200 1310
Ground clearance with load below lift mast m1 (mm) 127 126
Ground clearance at the middle of the
m2 (mm) 144 144
wheelbase

17 The specified nominal lift takes into account the tyre deflection and tolerances of the tyre
diameter.
584 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Technical data 6
VDI datasheet for RX60-45 (Plus) and RX60-45 (Plus)/600

RX60-45
Model RX60-45 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6334 6335
Aisle width for pallet 1000 x 1200 cross-
AST (mm) 4265 4275
wise18, 19
Aisle width for pallet 800 x 1200 length-
AST (mm) 4465 4475
wise18, 19
Turning radius Wa (mm) 2550 2550
Smallest pivot point distance b13 (mm) 725 725

Performance data
RX60-45
Model RX60-45 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6334 6335
Driving speed with load km/h 20 20
Driving speed without load km/h 20 20
Lifting speed with load (Plus20/Standard
m/s 0.41/0.37 0.39/0.33
Performance)
Lifting speed without load m/s 0.45 0.45
Lowering speed with load m/s 0.5 0.5
Lowering speed without load m/s 0.5 0.5
Pulling force with load kg 7030 6960
Pulling force without load kg 7650 7520
Max. pulling force with load (Plus20/Stand-
kg 22720/19150 22630/19050
ard Performance)21
Max. pulling force without load (Plus20/
kg 22690/19230 22660/19190
Standard Performance)21
Climbing capability with load % 10.5 9.6
Climbing capability without load % 18.8 16.3
Max. climbing capability with load (Plus20/
% 21.3/15 21/14.6
Standard Performance)21
Max. climbing capability without load
% 28.4/28.4 28/28
(Plus20/Standard Performance)21
Acceleration time over 15 m with load
s 5.9/7 6.1/7.2
(Plus20/Standard Performance)

18 Without taking protruding fork arms into account, if applicable.

19 Applies to telescopic and triple lift masts.
20 High-performance variant
21 Applies to the overall truck system.
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 585
6 Technical data
VDI datasheet for RX60-45 (Plus) and RX60-45 (Plus)/600

RX60-45
Model RX60-45 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6334 6335
Acceleration time over 15 m without load
s 5.3/6 5.5/6.1
(Plus22/Standard Performance)
Service brake Hydraulically ac- Hydraulically ac-
tuated multi-disc tuated multi-disc
brake brake

Gradients
The values specified in the "Performance da-
ta" table as the maximum climbing capability
can be used only to compare the performance
of forklift trucks in the same category. The
specified values in no way represent the nor-
mal daily operating conditions.

WARNING
To use the truck safely – with or without a load –
the maximum ascending or descending gradient per-
mitted for travel is 15%.
– If you have any questions, contact your authorised
service centre.

Electric motor
RX60-45
Model RX60-45 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6334 6335
Traction motor, power rating S2 60 min kW 2x11 2x11
Lift motor, power rating S3 at 15% ED kW 25 25
Standard; cir-
Battery DIN 43536 A DIN 43536 A
cuit
Battery voltage U (V) 80 80
Battery capacity K5 (Ah) 840 (-930) 840 (-930)
Battery weight kg 2178 2178
Energy consumption according to
kWh/h 10.9/10.3 11.4/10.7
EN 16796 (Plus22/Standard Performance)
Handling performance (Plus22/Standard
t/h 298/282 298/282
Performance)
Energy consumption for handling perform-
kWh/h 10.5/9.6 10.9/10.3
ance (Plus22/Standard Performance)

22 High-performance variant
586 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Technical data 6
VDI datasheet for RX60-45 (Plus) and RX60-45 (Plus)/600

Other
RX60-45
Model RX60-45 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6334 6335
Working pressure for attachments bar 250 250
Oil flow for attachments l 50 50
Sound pressure level LpAZ (driver's com-
dB (A) 66 66
partment)23
Human vibration: acceleration according to
m/s2 0.42 0.42
EN 13059
Tow coupling, type Bolt Bolt

23 Without cab. Values are different with a cab.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 587
6 Technical data
VDI datasheet for RX60-50 (Plus) Li-Ion and RX60-50 (Plus)/600

VDI datasheet for RX60-50

(Plus) Li-Ion and RX60-50
(Plus)/600
NOTE
This VDI datasheet specifies only the techni-
cal values for trucks with standard equipment.
Different tyres, lift masts, additional units etc.
can produce different values.

Key data
RX60-50
Model RX60-50 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6336 6337
Manufacturer STILL GmbH STILL GmbH
Drive Electric Electric
Operation Seat Seat
Load capacity/load Q (kg) 4990 4990
Load centre of gravity c (mm) 500 600
Load distance x (mm) 525 525
Wheelbase y (mm) 2046 2120

Weights
RX60-50
Model RX60-50 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6336 6337
Net weight including battery kg 7164 7768
Front axle load, laden kg 10971 11475
Rear axle load, laden kg 1183 1283
Front axle load, unladen kg 3457 3814
Rear axle load, unladen kg 3707 3954

Wheels, chassis frame

RX60-50
Model RX60-50 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6336 6337
Tyres SE SE
Tyre size, front 355/50-15 355/50-15

588 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Technical data 6
VDI datasheet for RX60-50 (Plus) Li-Ion and RX60-50 (Plus)/600

RX60-50
Model RX60-50 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6336 6337
200/75-9 225/75-10
Tyre size, rear
(21x8-9) (23x9-10)
Number of front wheels (x = driven) 2x 2x
Number of rear wheels (x = driven) 2 2
Track width, front b10 (mm) 1104 1104
Track width, rear b11 (mm) 920 932

Basic dimensions
RX60-50
Model RX60-50 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6336 6337
Forwards tilt of lift mast/fork carriage Degrees 7 7
Backwards tilt of lift mast/fork carriage Degrees 7 5
Height with lift mast retracted h1 (mm) 2300 2399
Free lift h2 (mm) 160 160
Lift24 h3 (mm) 2980 2780
Height with lift mast extended h4 (mm) 3987 3887
Height above overhead guard (low variant) h6 (mm) 2333 (2243) 2348 (2253)
Seat height in relation to SIP (low variant) h7 (mm) 1342 1351
Coupling height h10 (mm) 540/415 560/435
Overall length l1 (mm) 4111 4220
Length including fork back l2 (mm) 2911 3020
Overall width b1 (mm) 1399 1399
Fork arm thickness s (mm) 60 60
Fork arm width e (mm) 130 130
Fork arm length l (mm) 1200 1200
Standard;
Fork carriage ISO 2328 III A ISO 2328 III A
class; form
Fork carriage width b3 (mm) 1310 1310
Ground clearance with load below lift mast m1 (mm) 126 125
Ground clearance at the middle of the
m2 (mm) 144 153
wheelbase

24 The specified nominal lift takes into account the tyre deflection and tolerances of the tyre
diameter.
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 589
6 Technical data
VDI datasheet for RX60-50 (Plus) Li-Ion and RX60-50 (Plus)/600

RX60-50
Model RX60-50 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6336 6337
Aisle width for pallet 1000 x 1200 cross-
AST (mm) 4275 4370
wise25, 26
Aisle width for pallet 800 x 1200 length-
AST (mm) 4475 4570
wise25, 26
Turning radius Wa (mm) 2550 2645
Smallest pivot point distance b13 (mm) 725 729

Performance data
RX60-50
Model RX60-50 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6336 6337
Driving speed with load km/h 20 20
Driving speed without load km/h 20 20
Lifting speed with load (Plus27/Standard
m/s 0.39/0.33 0.39/0.31
Performance)
Lifting speed without load m/s 0.45 0.45
Lowering speed with load m/s 0.5 0.5
Lowering speed without load m/s 0.5 0.5
Pulling force with load kg 6800 6750
Pulling force without load kg 7490 7430
Max. pulling force with load (Plus27/Stand-
kg 22620/19030 22590/19000
ard Performance)28
Max. pulling force without load (Plus27/
kg 22660/19190 22560/19090
Standard Performance)28
Climbing capability with load % 9.2 8.9
Climbing capability without load % 16.3 15.5
Max. climbing capability with load (Plus27/
% 20.7/14.2 20.4/13.8
Standard Performance)28
Max. climbing capability without load
% 28/28 27.5/27.5
(Plus27/Standard Performance)28
Acceleration time over 15 m with load
s 6.2/7.3 6.3/7.4
(Plus27/Standard Performance)

25 Without taking protruding fork arms into account, if applicable.

26 Applies to telescopic and triple lift masts.
27 High-performance variant
28 Applies to the overall truck system.
590 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Technical data 6
VDI datasheet for RX60-50 (Plus) Li-Ion and RX60-50 (Plus)/600

RX60-50
Model RX60-50 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6336 6337
Acceleration time over 15 m without load
s 5.5/6.1 5.7/6.2
(Plus29/Standard Performance)
Service brake Hydraulically ac- Hydraulically ac-
tuated multi-disc tuated multi-disc
brake brake

Gradients
The values specified in the "Performance da-
ta" table as the maximum climbing capability
can be used only to compare the performance
of forklift trucks in the same category. The
specified values in no way represent the nor-
mal daily operating conditions.

WARNING
To use the truck safely – with or without a load –
the maximum ascending or descending gradient per-
mitted for travel is 15%.
– If you have any questions, contact your authorised
service centre.

Electric motor
RX60-50
Model RX60-50 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6336 6337
Traction motor, power rating S2 60 min kW 2x11 2x11
Lift motor, power rating S3 at 15% ED kW 25 25
Standard; cir-
Battery DIN 43536 A DIN 43536 A
cuit
Battery voltage U (V) 80 80
Battery capacity K5 (Ah) 840 (-930) 840 (-930)
Battery weight kg 2178 2178
Energy consumption according to
kWh/h 12.0/11.2 12.5/11.7
EN 16796 (Plus29/Standard Performance)
29
Handling performance (Plus /Standard
t/h 324/315 324/315
Performance)
Energy consumption for handling perform-
kWh/h 11.3/10.8 11.8/11.3
ance (Plus29/Standard Performance)

29 High-performance variant
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 591
6 Technical data
Eco-design requirements for electric motors and variable speed drives

Other
RX60-50
Model RX60-50 (Plus)
(Plus)/600
Type number 6336 6337
Working pressure for attachments bar 250 250
Oil flow for attachments l 50 50
Sound pressure level LpAZ (driver's com-
dB (A) 66 66
partment)30
Human vibration: acceleration according to
m/s2 0.42 0.42
EN 13059
Tow coupling, type Bolt Bolt

Eco-design requirements for

electric motors and variable
speed drives
All motors in this industrial truck are exempt
from Regulation (EU) 2019/1781 because
these motors do not meet the description giv-
en in Article 2 "Scope", Item (1) (a) and be-
cause of the provisions in Article 2 (2) (h)
"Motors in cordless or battery-operated equip-
ment" and Article 2 (2) (o) "Motors designed
specifically for the traction of electric vehicles".
All variable speed drives in this industrial truck
are exempt from Regulation (EU) 2019/1781
because these variable speed drives do
not meet the description given in Article 2
"Scope", Item (1) (b).

30 Without cab. Values are different with a cab.

592 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03
Technical data 6
Battery specifications

Battery specifications
DANGER
Risk of explosion from using a battery
with the incorrect specification!
Using batteries that do not correspond
to explosion-protection regulations may
lead to explosions in the surrounding at-
mosphere in potentially explosive areas!
– Use only batteries that are approved
and tested for the place of use.

CAUTION
The battery weight and the battery dimensions affect
the stability of the truck.
When replacing the battery, the weight ratios must
not be changed. The battery weight must remain
within the weight range specified on the nameplate.
The location of ballast weights must not be changed.
The bottom of the battery tray must be closed.
– Do not change the position of ballast weights.
– Check the battery weight against the information
on the nameplate.
– Only use a battery tray that is closed at the bot-
tom.

NOTE
The batteries for this truck are designed for
the special area of use. If a battery is to be ex-
changed or replaced, use a structurally identi-
cal explosion-protected battery with the same
characteristics. If a battery is replaced with a
battery of a different type, check that the truck
is permitted to be used in the corresponding
explosion-protection zones.

NOTE
Battery specifications according to DIN 43536;
cells in accordance with DIN EN 60254-2, 80-
V circuit A
– The battery weight can be found on the
nameplate of the battery.

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 593

6 Technical data
Battery specifications

Approved only for lead-acid batteries

Battery designa- Capacity Tray Weight/ Battery compartment di- Circuit
tion [Ah] ballast mensions [mm]
weight [kg] Length Width Height
5PzS 700 700
5PzS 775 775
5PzV 600 600 235 234 1028 855 784
5PzV 700 700
5TCSM 840 840
A
6PzS 840 840
6PzS 930 930
6PzV 720 720 236 - 1028 999 784
6PzV 840 840
4TCSM 990 990

NOTE
To convert to TENSOR® batteries, contact the
authorised service centre.

Battery requirements for use in poten-

tially explosive areas
Batteries for use in potentially explosive areas
are designed and specifically tested in respect
of the zones and temperature ranges in which
they are to be used. The permitted area of
use is permanently and clearly indicated on
the nameplate of the battery.
– If you have any questions relating to the re-
quirements, contact your authorised service
centre.
– Observe the explosion-protection regula-
tions.
– Use only explosion-protected batteries and
connection assemblies.
– Use only a battery tray that is approved for
the potentially explosive area.
– If you have any questions, contact your au-
thorised service centre.

594 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Technical data 6
Information on the auxiliary hydraulics

Information on the auxiliary hydraulics

DANGER
Risk of explosion!
Only use attachments that comply with
the required explosion-protection regula-
tions.

The information on the auxiliary hydraulics dif-

fers depending on the truck. Take this into
consideration when selecting the attachment.

Multi-lever operation Proportional-valve technology

Maximum system pressure
280 bar 280 bar
"Pmax"
Maximum volume flow rate
50 l/min 45 l/min
"Qmax"
Trigger of the switch valve 12 V / 2 A 12 V / 2 A

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 595

6 Technical data
Information on the auxiliary hydraulics

596 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Index

A Information on the auxiliary hydraulics. 595

Access authorisation for the fleet manag- Load capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
er. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Changing the fleet manager password. 149 Picking up a load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Changing the PIN code for the driver. 146 Safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Access authorisation with PIN code. . . . 145 Special risks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Changing the PIN codes. . . . . . . . . . . 146 Automatic emergency shutdown. . . . . . . 452
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Automatic mast vertical positioning
Actuating the drive direction switch Calibrating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Fingertip version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Checking for correct function. . . . . . . 311
Joystick 4Plus version. . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Mini-lever version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Automatic tow coupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Multiple-lever version. . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Coupling RO*245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Travel direction selector and indicator Uncoupling RO*245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
module version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Auxiliary equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Address of manufacturer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
B
Adjusting the armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Basic information on explosion protection. 20
Adjusting the fork. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Basic principles for safe operation. . . . . . . 53
Adjusting the steering column. . . . . . . . . 110
Basic principles for use in areas where a
Assistance systems
risk is posed by explosive materials. . . . 23
Zeroing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Definition of terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Temperature classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Adjusting the hydraulic speed. . . . . . . 356
Transporting explosive materials. . . . . 24
Alternating operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Basic principles for use in potentially explo-
Assembling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
sive areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Attachment example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Division of equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Division of potentially explosive areas
Controlling using a double mini-lever. 365 for dusts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Controlling using a quadruple mini-lev- Division of potentially explosive areas
er. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 for gases, vapours and fumes. . . . . . 21
Controlling using a triple mini-lever. . 369 Division of temperature classes. . . . . . 22
Controlling using multi-lever operation. 361 Subdivision of equipment in group II. . 21
Controlling using the double mini-lever Subdivision of equipment in group II
and the 5th function. . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 (dust). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Controlling using the Joystick 4Plus. . 380 Subdivision of equipment in group II
Controlling using the quadruple mini- (Gas). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
lever and the 5th function. . . . . . . . . 375 Battery
Controlling using the triple mini-lever Battery maintenance indicator. . . . . . 486
and the 5th function. . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Changing the battery type. . . . . . . . . 493
Controlling with multi-lever operation
Charging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
and the 5th function. . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Charging to equalise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Controlling with multi-lever operation
Checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
and the 6th function. . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Checking the changeover frame. . . . . 568
Controlling with the fingertip. . . . . . . . 376
Checking the charging state. . . . . . . . 477
Controlling with the fingertip and the
5th function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Checking the condition, acid level and
acid density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
General controlling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Checking the interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . 549

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 597

 Index

Disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Clamp locking mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Requirements for potentially explosive Releasing the mechanism with a double
areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Safety regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Releasing the mechanism with a quad-
Servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 ruple mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Battery acid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Releasing the mechanism with a triple
Battery door mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Checking the interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . 549 Releasing the mechanism with the fin-
Battery isolating switch gertip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Switching on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Releasing the mechanism with the Joy-
stick 4Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Battery male connector
Connecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Cleaning the electrical system. . . . . . . . . 511
Disconnecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Cleaning the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Battery specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Flame proof enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Cleaning the windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Before picking up a load
Clean the truck
Capacity rating plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Blue-Q After cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Climbing into the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Configuring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Climbing in when the driver's compartment
Effects on additional consumers. . . . . 184
is raised. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Climbing out of the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Switching on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Climbing out when the driver's compart-
C ment is raised. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Clipboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Opening/closing the 180° door. . . . . . 411 Cold store application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Opening/closing the door. . . . . . . . . . 409 Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Opening/closing the side window. . . . 415 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Operating the rear window heating. . . 390 Types of application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Turning the interior lighting on or off. . 416 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Capacity rating plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Competent person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Ceiling sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Condition of the roadways. . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Changes to the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Conformity marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Changing the fork arms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Changing the horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Changing the warning units. . . . . . . . . . . 548 Safety information for handling battery
Checking the antistatic paint layer. . . . . . 553 acid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Safety information for handling oils. . . 72
Checking the brake oil level. . . . . . . . . . . 117
Safety information for hydraulic fluid. . 73
Checking the charging state. . . . . . . . . . 477
Checking the double pedal. . . . . . . . . . . 568 Contact details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
Copyright and trademark rights. . . . . . . . . 41
Checking the emergency off function. . . 114
Correct seat position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Checking the fork arms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Checking the lift cylinders and connections Coupling pin in the counterweight. . . . . . 425
for leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 Crane loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Checking wheel fastenings. . . . . . . . . . . 557 Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Curve Speed Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

598 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Index

D Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Clothing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Danger area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Rights, obligations and codes of con-
duct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Danger to employees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Driver's cab
Declaration of conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Operating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Decommissioning the truck. . . . . . . . . . . 518
Driver's seat
Defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Definition of directions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Definition of responsible persons. . . . . . . . 48
Descending gradients. . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Competent person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Gradients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Driving lights
Operating company. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Switching on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Description of the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Driving on loading bridges. . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Diagnostic interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Driving onto lifts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Dimensions of roadways. . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Due date counter for maintenance and
Display-operating unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
safety checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Dynamic Load Control 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Swivelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Swivelling with Joystick 4Plus. . . . . . 112 E
Display/control unit Easy Target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Main screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Disposal Defining the lift heights by entering
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 them. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Double mini-lever Placing the load in stock. . . . . . . . . . . 289
Lifting/lowering the fork carriage. 233, 234 Removing the load from stock. . . . . . 291
Tilting the lift mast. . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 235 EC declaration of conformity in accordance
Drive direction with the Machinery Directive. . . . . . . . . . . 7
Changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 eEasy Target
Neutral position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Defining the lift heights by approach-
Selecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 ing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Selecting with the dual pedal version. 203 Efficiency and drive modes. . . . . . . . . . . 184
Drive modes Electrical fork wear protection. . . . . . . . . 306
Sprint mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Electric parking brake
STILL Classic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Symbols in the display-operating unit. 205
Drive programme Electrostatic charge
Configuring A/B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Selecting 1 to 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Emergencies
Selecting A/B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Actuating the reset button. . . . . . . . . . 452
Driver profiles Emergency actuation of the parking
Creating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Deleting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Truck tipping over. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Using the emergency hammer. . . . . . 454
Renaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Emergency drive direction. . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Selecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Emergency driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Emergency hammer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Emergency lowering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 599
 Index

Emergency shutdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Hazard warning system

Automatic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Switching on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Emissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Heating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 High Performance variant. . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Noise emissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Hydraulic blocking function. . . . . . . . . . . 253
Radiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Hydraulic fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Vibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Hydraulic system
Environmental considerations. . . . . . . . . . 46 Checking for leak tightness. . . . . . . . 560
Ergonomic dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 Checking the oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Explosion-protection checks. . . . . . . . . . . 69 Depressurising using a double mini-lev-
Explosion-protection warning lights. . . . . . 88 er. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Behaviour when illuminated. . . . . . . . 438 Depressurising using a quadruple mini-
Insulation monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Motor monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Depressurising using a triple mini-lev-
Explosion protection notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 er. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Depressurising using multi-lever opera-
F tion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Filling the washer system. . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Depressurising using multi-lever opera-
Fingertip tion and the 5th and 6th function. . . 337
Lifting/lowering the fork carriage. . . . . 238 Depressurising using the double mini-
Tilting the lift mast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 lever and the 5th function. . . . . . . . . 339
Fire extinguisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Depressurising using the fingertip. . . 344
Fitting attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Depressurising using the fingertip and
the 5th function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Flame proof enclosure
Depressurising using the Joy-
Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
stick 4Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
FleetManager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Depressurising using the Joystick 4Plus
Shock recognition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
and the 5th function. . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Fork arms
Depressurising using the quadruple
Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 mini-lever and the 5th function. . . . . 343
Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Depressurising using the triple mini-lev-
Repairing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 er and the 5th function. . . . . . . . . . . 341
Fork extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Exiting the wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Fork wear protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Need to depressurise. . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Function checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Special feature for clamping attach-
Function checking of the assistance sys- ments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
tems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Wizard for depressurising. . . . . . . . . . 334
Fuses
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 I
Improper use
G Use in areas where a risk is posed by
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 explosive materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Use in potentially explosive areas. . . . 27
H
Information about the documentation. . . . 39
Handling gas springs and accumulators. . 59
Information for carrying out maintenance.
Handling loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 529, 531
Hazardous areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Maintenance timeframe. . . . . . . . . . . 531
Hazards and countermeasures. . . . . . . . . 64 Next maintenance interval. . . . . . . . . 531

600 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Index

Information on the auxiliary hydraulics. . 595 Multi-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Insulation testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Operating devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Drive battery test values. . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Lift mast
Test values for the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Lubricating the roller track. . . . . . . . . 564
Insurance cover on company premises. . . 53 Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Intended use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Securing against falling off. . . . . . . . . 527
Interior lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Securing against tilting backwards. . . 526
Lift mast versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
J Telescopic lift mast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Jacking up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Triple mast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Joystick 4Plus Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fork-carriage sideshift. . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Changing the light bulb. . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Lifting/lowering the fork carriage. . . . . 240 Meaning of the symbols. . . . . . . . . . . 174
Tilting the lift mast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Retrofitting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
With a swivelling display-operating STILL SafetyLight®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241, 381, 384
Still Safety Light® 4Plus. . . . . . . . . . . 181
L StVZO equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Labelling points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Warning zone light and warning zone
light plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Lashing down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
List of abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Lift height-dependent assistance systems
Load
Electrical fork wear protection. . . . . . 306
Determining visibility conditions when
End lift cut-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
driving with a load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Lift mast end-stop damping. . . . . . . . 297
Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Lift transition damping. . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Picking up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Speed reduction when the fork carriage
Setting down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
is raised. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Load-dependant assistance systems
Lift height-dependent functions
Load measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Intermediate lift cut-out. . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Overload detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Lift height display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Precision load measurement. . . . . . . 323
Lift height measuring system. . . . . . . . . . 280
Total load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Load-dependent assistance systems
Design and function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Dynamic Load Control 2. . . . . . . . . . . 317
Eliminating malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . 282
Tare function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Emergency operation in the event of
malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Load chains
Lift height preselection Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Easy Target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Load measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Lifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 526 Calibrating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Lifting system Load programs
Controlling using a double mini-lever. 232 Selecting 1 to 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Controlling using a quadruple mini-lev- Load weight-dependent functions
er. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Dynamic Load Control 1. . . . . . . . . . . 316
Controlling using a triple mini-lever. . 234 Lubricating the joints and controls. . . . . . 549
Controlling using the Joystick 4Plus. . 239 M
Controlling with the fingertip. . . . . . . . 238
Main display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Dynamics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 601

 Index

Maintenance Adjusting the damping of the seat sus-

General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 pension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Safety regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Adjusting the longitudinal horizontal
Maintenance data table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Actuators/joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Adjusting the lumbar support. . . . . . . 131
Air conditioning (normal cab). . . . . . . 546 Adjusting the seat angle. . . . . . . . . . . 133
Air conditioning (raised cab). . . . . . . . 546 Adjusting the seat backrest. . . . . . . . 129
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Adjusting the seat depth. . . . . . . . . . . 133
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Adjusting to the driver's weight and ad-
Drive axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 justing the seat height. . . . . . . . . . . 130
Electrical system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Flame proof enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . 546 Switching the seat heater on and off. 132
General lubrication points. . . . . . . . . . 544 Multi-lever
Hydraulic system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Lifting/lowering the fork carriage. . . . . 230
Lift mast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 Tilting the lift mast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Load chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 N
Steering axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Nameplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Nameplate of the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Washer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Nameplate of the pressure-tight housing. . 16
Maintenance personnel for batteries. . . . 529
Neutral position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Maintenance work without special qualifi-
cations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 O
Malfunctions during lifting mode. . . . . . . 252 Oils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Malfunctions in the parking brake. . . . . . 209 Opening/closing the 180° cab door. . . . . 411
Manual tow coupling Opening/closing the battery door. . . . . . . 495
Coupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Opening/closing the cab door. . . . . . . . . 409
Uncoupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Opening/closing the side window. . . . . . 415
Marking according to DGUV Rule 113-006. 13 Operating
Mast tilt angle display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Display-operating unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Medical equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Operating company. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Messages Operating devices and display elements. . 86
About operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Operating devices for hydraulic and driving
About the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 functions
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Double mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Misuse of safety systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Fingertip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
MSG 65/MSG 75 driver's seat Joystick 4Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Multi-lever operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Adjusting the backrest extension. . . . 127 Quadruple mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Adjusting the lumbar support. . . . . . . 127 Triple mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Adjusting the seat backrest. . . . . . . . 125 Operating instructions
Adjusting the seat suspension. . . . . . 126 Issue date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Operating materials
Switching the seat heater on and off. 128 Quality and quantity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
MSG 95 driver's seat Operating procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Operating the pneumatic signal horn. . . . 116
Adjusting the backrest extension. . . . 132 Operating the signal horn. . . . . . . . . . . . 115

602 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Index

Operational readiness Q
Trucks for cold store application. . . . . 564 Quadruple mini-lever
Overhead guard Lifting/lowering the fork carriage. . . . . 236
Drilling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Tilting the lift mast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Roof loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Welding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 R
Overview Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Rear window heating
Overviews Switching on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Battery isolating switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Reducing speed when turning. . . . . . . . . 214
Display-operating unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Regular inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Driver's compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Replacing the battery
Emergency off switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Explosion-protection warning lights. . . 88 High Performance variant. . . . . . . . . . 494
Shelves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Using a change frame. . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Using a truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Reset button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
P
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Packaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Residual dangers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Residual risk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Parking brake Residual risks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Actuation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Retrofitting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Actuation when the truck is in motion. 207 Retrofitting lighting equipment. . . . . . . . . 174
Actuation when the truck is stationary. 206 Reversible fork arms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Emergency actuation mechanism. . . 458 Checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Roadways. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 192, 193
Parking the vehicle safely. . . . . . . . . . 210 Aisle widths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Parking the truck securely. . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Ascending gradients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Personnel qualifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Descending gradients. . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Picking up loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Rotating beacon
Place of use Switching on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Use in areas where a risk is posed by Rules for roadways and the working area. 193
explosive materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Run-on time for additional devices. . . . . 396
Use in potentially explosive areas. . . . 30
Pre-Shift Check S
All questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Safety devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Safety inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Safety regulations for handling consuma-
Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 bles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Question sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Safety regulations for handling loads. . . . 255
Shift start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Safety regulations for handling the bat-
Truck restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 tery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Precision load measurement. . . . . . . . . . 323 Battery weight and dimensions. . . . . . 472
Procedure if truck tips over. . . . . . . . . . . 454 Damage to cables and battery male
Procedure in emergencies. . . . . . . . . . . . 451 connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Prohibition of use by unauthorised persons. 52 Fire protection measures. . . . . . . . . . 471
Push-up roof window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Lifting accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 603

 Index

Maintenance personnel. . . . . . . . . . . 470 Speed reduction when the cab door is

Parking the truck securely. . . . . . . . . 470 open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Performing battery maintenance. . . . 472 Speed restriction
Safety regulations for maintenance Configuring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Switching on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Safety devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Sprint mode
Set values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Automatic switch-off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Working on the electrical equipment. 525 Switching on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Working on the hydraulic equipment. 525 Stability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Safety regulations for working on the lift Starting drive mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
mast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Dual pedal version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Safety regulations when driving. . . . . . . . 189 Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Safety tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Steering axle
Schematic views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Lubricating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Scope of the documentation. . . . . . . . . . . 39 Servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
CO solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Steering system
Seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Checking for correct function. . . . . . . 123
Checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 Storing the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 StVZO (Road Traffic Licensing Regula-
Fastening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 tions) information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Fastening on a steep slope. . . . . . . . 136 Sun blind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Maintaining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 Sun visor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Malfunction due to cold. . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Switching off the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Replacing after an accident. . . . . . . . 551 Switching on
Unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 using the key switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 via the push button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Service brake
T
Actuating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Tare function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Servicing the heating system or air condi-
tioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Technical data
Cleaning the fresh-air inlet. . . . . . . . . 554 Battery specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Replacing the filter mat. . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Set values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Testing the electrical system. . . . . . . . . . . 70
Shake function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Tilt-angle-dependent assistance systems
Double mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Automatic mast vertical positioning. . 309
Fingertip switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Tilt angle-dependent assistance systems
Joystick 4Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Mast tilt angle display. . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Quadruple mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Tilt end stop damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Triple mini-lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Tilt end stop damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Shelves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Total load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Shock recognition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Tow coupling RO*244
Shutting down and restarting Closing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 Coupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Signal terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Uncoupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Spare parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 Towed load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Spare parts list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II
Special risks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

604 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

Index

Towing Fire extinguisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 FleetManager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Proper use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Fork extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Fork wear protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Trailer operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Heating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Interior lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Trailers Intermediate lift cut-out. . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Lift height display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Transport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Lifting systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Transporting pallets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Lift mast end-stop damping. . . . . . . . 297
Transporting suspended loads. . . . . . . . 263 Lift transition damping. . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Transporting swinging loads. . . . . . . . . . 264 Load measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Transporting the battery by crane Mast tilt angle display. . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Lead-acid battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Optical lift height measuring system. . 280
Travel direction selector and indicator Overload detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Pre-Shift Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Turn indicators Precision load measurement. . . . . . . 323
Switching on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Push-up roof window. . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Tyres Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Safety principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Reversible fork arms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Shake function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
U
Shock recognition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Unlock the emergency off switch. . . . . . . 114 Speed reduction when the fork carriage
Using after storage or decommissioning. 520 is raised. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Using the truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Speed restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Using working platforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 STILL SafetyLight® and STILL Safety-
V Light 4Plus®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Sun blind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Variant
Sun visor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Ceiling sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Switching on via the push button (var-
Variants
iant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
180° cab door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Swivelling display-operating unit. . . . 111
Access authorisation for the fleet man- Tare function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
ager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tilt end stop damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Access authorisation with PIN code. . 145
Total load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Automatic mast vertical positioning. .
Travel direction selector and indicator
309, 311
module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Battery maintenance indicator. . . . . . 486
Triple mast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Blue-Q. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Warning zone light and warning zone
Clamp locking mechanism. . . . . . . . . 359
light plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Clipboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Wheel chock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Windscreen washer in the category-2
Driver profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Dynamic Load Control 1. . . . . . . . . . . 316 Windscreen wipers and washers. . . . 387
Dynamic Load Control 2. . . . . . . . . . . 317 VDI datasheet
Easy Target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 RX60-35 (Plus)/600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Electrical fork wear protection. . . . . . 306 RX60-40 (Plus). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
End lift cut-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03 605
 Index

RX60-40 (Plus)/600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

RX60-45 (Plus). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Usage in winter weather conditions. . 557
RX60-45 (Plus)/600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Windscreen wipers and washers
RX60-50 (Plus). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 Switching on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
RX60-50 (Plus)/600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 Windscreen washer in the category-2
View of functions and operating proce- version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
dures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Winter tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
View of operating procedures. . . . . . . . . . 45 Working at the front of the truck. . . . . . . . 526
Views of the display and operating unit. . . 45 Working on the electrical equipment. . . . 525
Visibility when driving with a load. . . . . . 268 Working on the hydraulic equipment. . . . 525
Visual inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Working spotlight for reverse travel
Switching on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
W Working spotlights
Warming up the hydraulic oil. . . . . . . . . . 122 Switching on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Warning regarding non-original parts. . . . 55
Warning zone light Y
Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 Your truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Wearing parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Wedging the wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Z
Wheel chock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Zeroing the assistance systems. . . . . . . 330
Wheels and tyres
Checking the condition and wear of the
tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Checking wheel fastenings. . . . . . . . . 557

606 56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03

STILL GmbH

56388011527 EN - 06/2024 - 03